E-Book_Allplan 2012 Practical Manual

Markus Philipp

Allplan 2012 Practical Manual

Markus Philipp

Allplan 2012 Practical Manual

The Author: Markus Philipp (certified engineer) works as a freelance instructor and architect. He has been an Allplan beta tester for many years. Translated by: Steve Martin/linguists.com. Steve Martin has been specializing in IT and software trans­lations since 1992. He is also the founder of linguists.com, a network of experienced and professional translators throughout Europe.

Originally published in German under the title Praxishandbuch Allplan 2012 ISBN 978-3-446-43036-5 Copyright © 2012 Carl Hanser Verlag, München All rights reserved. Authorised translation from the original German language edition published by Carl Hanser Verlag, München English translation copyright © NEMETSCHEK Allplan GmbH, München Cover concept: Marc Müller-Bremer, www.rebranding.de, München Cover design: Stephan Rönigk

Contents

Introduction

.................................................................................................... XI

1 General information ................................................................................... 1 1.1 1.2

Allplan 2012 product family ............................................................................ 1 Installing Allplan .................................................................................................. 2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.2.6 1.2.7 1.2.8

Hardware requirements ................................................................................. 2 Operating systems ......................................................................................... 2 Installation types ........................................................................................... 3 System paths for Allplan ................................................................................ 4 First-time installation of Allplan 2012 ............................................................. 5 Installation as upgrade ................................................................................... 5 Installation of updates .................................................................................. 5 Allplan and Services program launch ............................................................. 5 1.3 Updating Allplan – Allplan Update ................................................................. 6 1.4 Working with the Allplan 2012 Practical Manual ....................................... 7 1.4.1 Structure of the following chapters ................................................................ 8 1.4.2 Data relating to the guide .............................................................................. 9

2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012 ......................................................... 13 2.1

2.2

The project-based approach ............................................................................ 13 2.1.1 Drawing files, layouts ..................................................................................... 13 2.1.2 Administration files ........................................................................................ 14 2.1.3 Resources (office or project) .......................................................................... 15 2.1.4 Special resources .......................................................................................... 15 2.1.5 Settings ......................................................................................................... 16 The document-based approach ...................................................................... 16

IV  Contents

2.3

Dialog boxes for data organization ................................................................ 17 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8 2.3.9 2.3.10

Open project ................................................................................................. 17 Open on a project-specific basis .................................................................... 19 Open on a project-specific basis: Drawing files .............................................. 20 Open on a project-specific basis: layouts ....................................................... 32 Open on a project-specific basis – select and move ...................................... 36 Open – custom NDW ..................................................................................... 37 Open – custom layout .................................................................................... 38 Select destination drawing file and related dialog boxes ................................. 38 Saving documents ......................................................................................... 39 Restoring files using *.bak files ...................................................................... 40 2.4 Copying between files ....................................................................................... 41 2.4.1 Copying within the building structure ........................................................... 41 2.4.2 Copying within the layout structure ................................................................ 42 2.4.3 Moving/copying elements between documents ............................................. 43 2.4.4 Copying using the Clipboard .......................................................................... 44 2.4.5 Copying within a drawing file/layout .............................................................. 45 2.5 Storage locations and other data types ....................................................... 45 2.5.1 Predefined storage locations .......................................................................... 45 2.5.2 General storage locations .............................................................................. 46 2.5.3 Favorites ...................................................................................................... 47 2.6 ProjectPilot – data management ................................................................... 48 2.6.1 ProjectPilot interface ..................................................................................... 48 2.6.2 Tree structure ............................................................................................... 49 2.6.3 Where to find which data type – overview table .............................................. 50 2.6.4 Using ProjectPilot .......................................................................................... 51 2.7 The Allplan Interface .......................................................................................... 51 2.7.1 Icons – cross-module similarities ................................................................... 52 2.7.2 Allplan program interface .............................................................................. 53 2.7.3 Viewports – workspace ................................................................................. 58 2.7.4 Display in the design and animation windows ................................................. 63 2.7.5 Display in layout window ................................................................................ 65 2.8 Adapting the interface to your own requirements .................................... 66 2.8.1 Toolbars and shortcut keys ............................................................................ 66 2.8.2 Positioning toolbars and palettes ................................................................... 67 2.8.3 Wizards ......................................................................................................... 68 2.9 User entries .......................................................................................................... 69 2.9.1 Making entries with the keyboard .................................................................. 69 2.9.2 Making entries using the mouse – mouse button assignments ....................... 69 2.9.3 Activating and exiting tools ............................................................................ 74 2.9.4 Undo and redo ............................................................................................. 75 2.10 Working with elements (and components) .................................................. 75 2.10.1 Properties of elements .................................................................................. 75 2.10.2 Creating elements ......................................................................................... 78

Contents V

2.10.3 Working with existing elements ...................................................................... 81 2.10.4 Selecting elements ........................................................................................ 84 2.11 Design tools .......................................................................................................... 87 2.11.1 Input fields and symbols in the dialog line ...................................................... 87 2.11.2 Shortcut menu for the Point wizard ................................................................ 89 2.11.3 Point snap ..................................................................................................... 91 2.11.4 Point snap options ......................................................................................... 91 2.11.5 Track tracing ................................................................................................. 92 2.11.6 Examples of use for point snap – initial design ............................................... 94 2.12 The Allplan plane model .................................................................................... 96 2.12.1 Plane – basic terms ....................................................................................... 97 2.12.2 The Floor Manager ......................................................................................... 98 2.12.3 Assigning planes to drawing files ................................................................... 100 2.13 Layers – the special property .......................................................................... 102 2.13.1 Definition of terms ......................................................................................... 102 2.13.2 Drawing files ↔ layers? .................................................................................. 103 2.13.3 Tools and settings .......................................................................................... 104 2.14 Display in the design and animation windows ............................................ 107 2.14.1 Displayed drawing files .................................................................................. 107 2.14.2 Visible layers ................................................................................................. 108 2.14.3 Functions for the screen display .................................................................... 109 2.14.4 Reference scale and drawing type .................................................................. 110 2.15 Display in layout window .................................................................................. 111

3 Basic settings ................................................................................................. 113 3.1 Options .................................................................................................................. 113 3.2

3.1.1 Using the Options dialog box ......................................................................... 114 3.1.2 Settings and explanations on options ............................................................. 115 Additional basic settings .................................................................................. 121 3.2.1 Building structure/fileset structure, layout structure ...................................... 121 3.2.2 Office-specific modification ........................................................................... 121 3.2.3 Share project attributes ................................................................................. 122 3.2.4 Settings for layers .......................................................................................... 123

4 Project start to site plan ......................................................................... 125 4.1

Create a project – project properties ............................................................ 125 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4

New project . . . ............................................................................................. 125 Copy project ................................................................................................. 127 Project settings ............................................................................................. 128 Example – copy project template ................................................................... 130

VI  Contents

4.2 Create project structure – create plane model .......................................... 131

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6

Structure project – fundamentals .................................................................. 131 Edit drawing files – fundamentals ................................................................... 132 Fileset structure – fundamentals .................................................................... 132 Building structure – fundamentals .................................................................. 132 Example – project structure and plane settings .............................................. 135 Example – assigning drawing file names ......................................................... 137 Insert site plan as scanned image ................................................................. 139 4.3.1 Scan – fundamentals ..................................................................................... 139 4.3.2 Scanned image – check size .......................................................................... 140 4.3.3 Example – Link site plan with scanned image ................................................. 141 Prepare site plan ................................................................................................. 142 4.4.1 Draft module – fundamentals ......................................................................... 142 4.4.2 Additional drafting tools ................................................................................. 146 4.4.3 Advanced Draft module ................................................................................. 149 4.4.4 Text module – fundamentals .......................................................................... 150 4.4.5 Additional text functions ................................................................................ 153 4.4.6 Dimension Lines module – fundamentals ....................................................... 154 4.4.7 Additional dimension line tools ....................................................................... 158 4.4.8 Example – redrawing a site plan ..................................................................... 159 Data exchange: importing/exporting ............................................................ 171 4.5.1 Import and export .......................................................................................... 171 4.5.2 XRefs and custom XRefs ................................................................................ 178 4.5.3 Importing site plans as DXF files .................................................................... 179 4.5.4 Example – extending the building structure .................................................... 180 4.5.5 Example – Importing site plan data, XRef ....................................................... 182 4.5.6 Example – importing a site plan from construction stage I .............................. 186 4.5.7 Example – Aligning a site plan ........................................................................ 187 4.5.8 Example – result of site plan .......................................................................... 190

5 Building model – unfinished structure .......................................... 191 5.1

5.2

Architectural components – fundamentals ................................................. 191 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6

Height association of components ................................................................. 191 Format properties .......................................................................................... 193 Surface elements .......................................................................................... 194 Surface (animation)– preview window ............................................................ 194 Material and further attributes ....................................................................... 194 Modifying properties of components .............................................................. 195 Walls and other linear components ............................................................... 198 5.2.1 Linear components – fundamentals ............................................................... 198 5.2.2 Editing linear components ............................................................................. 201 5.2.3 Example – lower floor walls ............................................................................ 202

Contents VII

5.3

Windows, doors and other openings ............................................................. 207

5.3.1 Openings in linear components – fundamentals ............................................. 207 5.3.2 Example – lower floor interior doors ............................................................... 212 5.3.3 Example – lower floor exterior doors .............................................................. 215 5.3.4 Example – lower floor windows ...................................................................... 217 5.3.5 Example – copy lower floor as template for basement and top floor ................ 219 5.4 Using the default planes ................................................................................... 220 5.4.1 Assign planes ................................................................................................ 221 5.4.2 Example – assigning planes ........................................................................... 223 5.4.3 Example – change component properties – basement and top floor ............... 224 5.4.4 Example – changing floor heights ................................................................... 228 5.5 Roofscape, roof plane, custom pair of planes ............................................ 229 5.5.1 Special planes ............................................................................................... 229 5.5.2 Modify special planes .................................................................................... 233 5.5.3 Roofscape ..................................................................................................... 233 5.5.4 Example – create roof plane .......................................................................... 235 5.5.5 Example – including roofscape in plane model ............................................... 237 5.6 Further architectural components ................................................................. 239 5.6.1 Slab and other area components ................................................................... 239 5.6.2 Openings in area components ....................................................................... 242 5.6.3 Column and other symbol components .......................................................... 244 5.6.4 Miscellaneous architectural components ....................................................... 245 5.6.5 Example – slab .............................................................................................. 245 5.6.6 Example – roof covering ................................................................................ 248 5.6.7 Example – floor slab ...................................................................................... 250 5.6.8 Example – strip foundations ........................................................................... 251 5.6.9 Example – columns and roof upstand ............................................................. 253 5.7 Stairs ...................................................................................................................... 254 5.7.1 Stair components – fundamentals .................................................................. 254 5.7.2 Create stair ................................................................................................... 256 5.7.3 Further stair tools .......................................................................................... 258 5.7.4 Displaying the stair across stories .................................................................. 259 5.7.5 Example – stair lower floor – upper floor ........................................................ 260 5.7.6 Example – stair basement – lower floor .......................................................... 264 5.7.7 Example – stair display in the stories ............................................................. 266 5.8 Dimension building, label components ......................................................... 268 5.8.1 Dimension walls ............................................................................................ 268 5.8.2 Label components ......................................................................................... 269 5.8.3 Example – dimension lower floor .................................................................... 270 5.8.4 Example – labeling components ..................................................................... 273 5.9 Example – building model result – unfinished structure ......................... 275

VIII  Contents

6 Building model – finish ............................................................................. 277 6.1 Quantity takeoff: rooms, surfaces, stories .................................................. 277

6.2

6.3

6.4 6.5

6.6

6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 6.1.5 6.1.6

Rooms, stories, finish specifications – fundamentals ...................................... 277 Further room and story functions ................................................................... 281 Explanation of the label styles used below ...................................................... 281 Example – create rooms with finish ................................................................ 283 Example – create story .................................................................................. 287 Example – group rooms ................................................................................. 289 Smart symbols for opening components ..................................................... 290 6.2.1 Opening smart symbols – fundamentals ......................................................... 290 6.2.2 Create and edit opening smart symbols ......................................................... 292 6.2.3 Example – change and replace smart window symbols ................................... 296 Furniture and equipment elements ............................................................... 299 6.3.1 Symbol catalogs ............................................................................................ 299 6.3.2 Example – plumbing component .................................................................... 301 6.3.3 Example – furniture ....................................................................................... 302 6.3.4 Example – add external facilities .................................................................... 304 SmartParts for furniture ................................................................................... 306 6.4.1 Comparison of symbols – smart symbols – SmartParts .................................. 307 6.4.2 Example – furniture with SmartParts .............................................................. 307 Railing and façade ............................................................................................. 309 6.5.1 Railing ........................................................................................................... 309 6.5.2 Façade .......................................................................................................... 311 6.5.3 3D modeling – basic functions ....................................................................... 313 6.5.4 Example – stair and gallery railing .................................................................. 314 6.5.5 Example – façade of the glass structure ......................................................... 316 Example – building model result – finish ..................................................... 321

7 Views, sections, and lists ....................................................................... 323 7.1 7.2

Terms and basic functions ............................................................................... 323 Derived objects – views and sections ........................................................... 324 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.6 7.2.7 7.2.8 7.2.9

Views and sections – building structure ......................................................... 324 Individual steps for views and sections ........................................................... 324 Architectural section ..................................................................................... 328 Hidden-line image settings ............................................................................. 329 Postprocessing of sections and views ............................................................ 332 Example – create views ................................................................................. 333 Example – section line ................................................................................... 335 Example – create sections ............................................................................. 337 Example – postprocess views and sections .................................................... 338

Contents IX

7.3

Derived objects – lists ....................................................................................... 341 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6 7.3.7

Lists and Reports – fundamentals .................................................................. 341 Lists – building structure ............................................................................... 342 Select list and settings (BS) ........................................................................... 343 Selection dialog boxes and settings for reports and lists ................................. 344 Layout Viewer and Layout Designer ................................................................ 347 Create stack lists ........................................................................................... 354 Example – create lists .................................................................................... 355 7.4 Views, sections, and lists – editing drawing files ...................................... 358 7.4.1 Views, sections ............................................................................................. 358 7.4.2 Lists – special functions in the modules ......................................................... 359 7.5 Changes to the model – updating the derived objects ............................. 359 7.5.1 Example – change roof inclination – replace roofscape .................................. 360 7.5.2 Example – update section/view and lists ....................................................... 361 7.6 Example – sections and views result ........................................................... 362

8 Data output ...................................................................................................... 365 8.1

8.2

8.3

8.4

Layout editor – printing layouts ...................................................................... 365 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5

Assembling layouts – fundamentals ............................................................... 365 Functions for assembling layouts ................................................................... 366 Example – assembling layouts ........................................................................ 369 Example – layout structure ............................................................................ 375 Example – output layout on paper .................................................................. 377 Data output as file .............................................................................................. 380 8.2.1 Archive layouts/data ..................................................................................... 381 8.2.2 Example – output layout as PDF file (2D) ...................................................... 381 8.2.3 Example – export model, PDF (3D) ................................................................ 383 8.2.4 Example – export model, C4D ........................................................................ 383 Layout output troubleshooting ....................................................................... 385 8.3.1 Example 1 – layout size with width up to 841 mm .......................................... 385 8.3.2 Example 2 – layout size larger than width 841 mm .......................................... 385 8.3.3 Example 3 – layout size longer than DIN A0 ................................................... 386 8.3.4 Example 4 – output of several layouts – with plot profiles ............................... 386 8.3.5 Example 5 – output of several layouts – plot profile of active layout ................ 387 8.3.6 Example 6 – output of reduced layouts .......................................................... 387 8.3.7 Test plot ........................................................................................................ 388 Example – result of assembling layouts ...................................................... 389

X  Contents

9 Services application 9.1

9.2

................................................................................. 391

Services application – fundamentals ........................................................... 391 9.1.1 Utilities .......................................................................................................... 391 9.1.2 Data backup .................................................................................................. 392 9.1.3 Configuration ................................................................................................ 392 9.1.4 Service .......................................................................................................... 393 9.1.5 Information .................................................................................................... 394 Services – data backup .................................................................................... 395 9.2.1 Create project backup ................................................................................... 395 9.2.2 Import project backup ................................................................................... 396

10 SmartParts ....................................................................................................... 397 10.1 SmartParts module – basic information ...................................................... 397 10.2 Using SmartParts ................................................................................................ 401 10.3 New SmartParts – basic information ............................................................ 401 10.3.1 Extending the toolbars ................................................................................... 401 10.3.2 System structure of a SmartPart – script structure ........................................ 403 10.3.3 SmartPart Editor interface ............................................................................. 404

Index ..................................................................................................................... 407

Introduction

With Allplan 2012, the latest update of the 3D planning software from Nemetschek that has been available since 1984, the future has arrived for intelligent and programmable objects (SmartParts) and is providing new impetus for work. Allplan 2012 is an enhancement of the previous version. The latest data versions have been added to the options for data exchange. The changes to report lists have been completed in the new version. Most of the reports themselves have new filters and functions that make it easier to check data. The biggest innovation is the introduction of the SmartParts module. A SmartPart is an intelligent object for which predefined processes are carried out, either by dragging handles or changing parameters. As a result, by enlarging a table for example, you can also change the number of chairs. The modification of graphical output, the Graphics Engine, which began in Allplan 2011, has been systematically pursued and improved. As a result, if the graphics boards recommended by the software manufacturer are used, very significant increases in speed can be achieved for display, and a live hidden-line image is possible. This guide cannot and is not intended to be a complete documentation of Allplan. Therefore, in addition to reading this guide as an introduction to Allplan 2012 (for experts and beginners), I recommend the Allplan help and documentation, and advise you to visit our websites http://www.nemetschek.de and http://www.allplan-connect.com. These contain Allplan’s supported user forum. After free-of-charge registration, you can read and write articles in the forum and access other portal content. With a service agreement, you get access to an extensive object library with content that is continuously extended and updated. In addition to the web pages and the documentation on Allplan, the website http://www. zeichenatelier.de/Allplan2012 contains information on this and other books. This guide attempts to reflect my experiences of using Allplan on a day-to-day basis for the planning of buildings and external facilities, as well as those gained in my capacity as a trainer and from my many discussions with colleagues. The title picture depicts a sample project after reworking in Cinema 4D. It is a design by 313-Architekten Landshut.

XII  Introduction

My particular thanks go to Sieglinde Schärl, Stefanie König and other colleagues at Carl Hanser Verlag for their patience and help, as well as all employees at Nemetschek AG and Martin Philipp for the background information on the new chapter 10, SmartParts. Markus Philipp http://www.zeichenatelier.de Landshut, November 2011

1

General information

What is Allplan 2012? Allplan 2012 is an object-oriented 3D planning and design software package for Building Information Modeling (BIM). It covers all commonly used design types, from simple 2D drafting all the way to virtual building modeling with integrated quantity take-off and cost calculation. Allplan 2012 supports interdisciplinary planning among architects, construction engineers, design professionals and facility managers.

■■1.1 Allplan 2012 product family Nemetschek offers separate product families for the various fields of planning and design; these are integrated and connected with each other. ƒƒ Allplan 2012 → for architects The CAD solution for architects contains all the Allplan families (depending on the license), covering the architect’s planning process from the initial draft sketches right through to the working drawings. The building model created in Allplan 2009 serves as the basis for the other design professionals. → for engineers The CAD solution for engineers contains all the Allplan families needed for creating general arrangement and reinforcement drawings etc. (depending on the license). Round-Trip Engineering also permits the optimum combination of CAD and structural analysis, because here, load-bearing components are transferred from the CAD system directly to the structural analysis software. ƒƒ Allplan 2012 Sketch enables you to create professional sketches with ease. Various pen types let you sketch your ideas and presentation drawings quickly and efficiently with a wide range of presentation options. There are infinite possibilities for combining sketches with photos, renderings and much more.

2  1 General information

ƒƒ (BCM = Building Cost Management) is an independent product for building cost management and the area of TAI for planners. Thanks to the tight integration between Allplan BCM and Allplan BIM, clear and reliable quantity takeoff operations can be carried out in the early phases of planning, right through to settlement. ƒƒ Allplan 2012 IBD is a comprehensive, sector-specific database with which you can create your building model and reliably calculate building costs. Allplan IBD ensures the ­relevant information is exchanged and provides well-founded quantity calculations for costing and bills of quantities.

■■1.2 Installing Allplan 1.2.1 Hardware requirements You can use the Systest2012 tool to check whether computers meet the system requirements for Allplan 2012. If the tool is on a DVD it can be launched from there; otherwise it can be downloaded from http://www.nemetschek.eu/info/systest2012. For current information on the recommended components, see http://www.nemetschek.de/info/grafikkarten and http://www.nemetschek.de/info/plotter. The following equipment information is from the manufacturer. Recommended setup

Minimum setup

Intel Core i5 or i7 processor or compatible

Intel Core 2 processor or compatible

8 GB RAM

2 GB RAM

5 GB free hard disk space DirectX 10-compatible graphics board Resolution: 1600 x 1200 Field of application: Performance or high-end

Resolution: 1280 x 1024

1.2.2 Operating systems The following operating systems for workstations and data servers are approved by the manufacturer: ƒƒ Windows 7, Service Pack 1 (recommendation: 64-bit version) ƒƒ Windows Vista, Service Pack 2 ƒƒ Windows XP, Service Pack 3 (Windows XP is supported for the last time in Allplan 2012 and should therefore only be used for existing systems) ƒƒ Windows Server 2008 R2, Service Pack 1 ƒƒ Windows Server 2008 Service Pack 2

1.2 Installing Allplan 3

ƒƒ At the time of printing, no definitive information was available regarding the operation of Allplan on MAC. For more information, see http://www.nemetschek.eu/info/mac2012. Windows 7, Service Pack 1 in the 64-bit version was used for the creation of this book.

1.2.3 Installation types Allplan is always installed individually on each workstation, i.e. the program is installed locally. The data paths can be stored either locally or centrally on a server. Allplan is either installed with a license (demo or final license), and offers the corresponding modules. Alternatively, Allplan can be installed as a viewer in order to provide those not involved in the design process, such as the building supervisor, with access to all project data, for example, or to equip a mobile workstation for presentations and/or meetings. On expiration of the license, Allplan can still be used as a viewer with restricted functions (changes not possible, analyses and printing possible without restrictions, all data visible). Depending on the licenses available (one, several, with/without workgroup), the following installation options are possible. The Allplan project folder is stored locally in  [system drive]:\programs\nemetschek\ (standard setting).

Comparison of installation types: Standalone

Network without Network with workgroup ­workgroup

Program directory

Local

Local

Local

Project directory

Local

Server

Server/local

Office standard

Local

Server

Server

Network required

No

Yes

Yes

Private user directory

For each workstation

For each ­workstation

Centrally stored for each Windows user

Sharing of office standards

No

Yes

Yes

Control of access to projects

–

No

Yes

Simultaneous project processing with several users

No

No

Yes

Installation on a standalone workstation With this option, Allplan is only installed on the workstation in question (regardless of whether this computer is in a network or not). All the data exists locally on this computer. A standalone installation is particularly suited for a single workstation (e.g. laptop), if there is no workgroup and/or it is the only workstation in the office. In the case of a stationary workstation and data server in the local network, a network installation is preferable.

4  1 General information

Network installation without workgroup The central file directory allows all users to access the office standard and all the projects. With this type of installation, collaboration between several employees in a project is not possible. As soon as a user opens a project, this project is locked for all the other users, ensuring that only a single user may edit a project. Other projects can be worked on by other users (one user at a time). This type of installation is preferable to standalone installation if the network contains a data server. With more than two workstations, the data should always be stored centrally in the network.

Network installation with workgroup With this option, projects and user folders can reside on the server as well as on any computer added to the Workgroup Manager, ensuring that all workstations have access to this data. You need to create and share a folder on each (standalone) workstation where projects or user folders are to be stored. In addition, this folder requires a subfolder. Then you can add the individual workstations using the Workgroup Manager.  Mobile workstations can be integrated in the system. Before exiting the workplace, the user must check out the workstation.

1.2.4 System paths for Allplan During installation of Allplan, two paths can be entered. If possible, the central file storage folder should be located on a server; the program folder is always local.

Central file storage folder For the CENTRAL FILE STORAGE FOLDER, you can select either a local path, or store the data in a server directory. You must have sufficient rights to access the shared folder. In the case of installation without workgroup, only the folders \PRJ (projects) and \STD (office standard) are created. Data for all computers are provided in the UPDATES folder, depending on the settings in Allplan Update (see also section 1.3, Updating Allplan – Allplan Update).

Program folder The Allplan project folder is created locally. In addition to the program folder, important resources that Allplan frequently accesses are stored locally. A number of folders are created in the local program directory. In the event of an update, all the available files except the USR directory are overwritten.

1.2 Installing Allplan 5

1.2.5 First-time installation of Allplan 2012 Before installing Allplan 2012, you should perform the system test on all the CAD compu­ ters in the network in which Allplan 2012 is to be installed. The link can be found either in the Start menu of the DVD, http://www.nemetschek.de or on the website for the Allplan 2012 Practical Manual at http://www.zeichenatelier.de/Allplan2012. At detailed guide on the installation process on your system can be found on the Allplan DVD, which you can request from the Nemetschek website. During installation of an additional workstation in an existing network, the existing path is to be specified as the central file directory. This is displayed e.g. in the Services application.

1.2.6 Installation as upgrade An upgrade is a version change e.g. from Allplan 2011 to Allplan 2012 and usually involves a data conversion. If older Allplan versions already exist, Allplan can be installed as an upgrade. All data paths are retained and are assigned the new content. Before the upgrade installation, you should save the content of the central file directory. If several workstations need to be installed, work is not possible on the other workstations after the installation has been started on the first computer. As soon as the installation has been completed on the first workstation and this can be run (test one or more projects quickly), the other installations can begin. Workstations on which the installation has been completed can be operated again immediately.

1.2.7 Installation of updates An update relates to an update of a main release and does not require a conversion of data. In the last version, hotfixes were provided to fix bugs and an “interim version” was made available. These updates should be imported to all workstations as soon as possible after they are made available. Interim versions are provided as a download on the internet and subsequently as a DVD and must be imported separately on each workstation.

1.2.8 Allplan and Services program launch After installing Allplan 2012, you will find two new icons on your desktop, as well as a new program group under PROGRAMS in the Start menu. You use the ALLPLAN 2012 icon to launch the CAD program and the SERVICES 2012 icon to launch a configuration program.

6  1 General information

■■1.3 Updating Allplan – Allplan Update From Version 2011, Allplan offers a way of keeping all Allplan installations up-to-date at all times easily and without effort. The automatic update works both for small changes (hotfixes) and for large service releases and updated help files.

Allplan updates can be controlled in three ways ƒƒ Download and install updates automatically. ƒƒ Download updates automatically and install them manually. ƒƒ Download and install updates manually. The settings made always apply for the computer, regardless of the user rights. Every user can change the settings (with the exception of workgroup installation).

Allplan update in the workgroup In a workgroup installation, the system administrator can make various settings, install updates on all workstations automatically or distribute the updates to all workstations at a particular point in time.

Allplan update settings The ALLPLAN UPDATE SETTINGS dialog box is used to configure how Allplan performs automatic updates. Depending on the chosen settings, you can prevent Allplan from being updated (not advisable), or have it updated semi-automatically (good in networks with system administrators) or fully automatically. The settings can be seen by all users. In workgroup installations, the administrator can control certain settings centrally and therefore deactivate them for the user. The settings can be found in the ? (Help) menu ƒƒ INSTALL UPDATES AUTOMATICALLY At the specified point in time, the system automatically searches for new updates. As soon as a new update is avail-

1.4 Working with the Allplan 2012 Practical Manual 7

able, it is automatically downloaded. The next time Allplan is launched, a downloaded update is installed without further user interaction (even if it was manually downloaded with FIND NOW). ƒƒ FIND UPDATES defines the times at which Allplan is to search for new updates. The search is only carried out if an internet connection exists at this point in time. NOTE: FIND UPDATES defines the interval at which Allplan is to search for

new updates, regardless of the installation type selected.

ƒƒ DOWNLOAD UPDATES, INSTALL MANUALLY (recommended) At the specified time, the system searches for and downloads updates. The next time Allplan is launched, the update is installed after a confirmation prompt. If this setting is chosen, you retain full control over the time at which an update is carried out, but do not have to go to the trouble of finding updates yourself. ƒƒ DO NOT FIND UPDATES AUTOMATICALLY deactivates all automated search and download functions. However, you can use FIND NOW to search for new updates manually. In this case, published updates are installed without the option of canceling. ƒƒ FIND NOW triggers an immediate search for new updates and downloads these after confirmation by the user. If INSTALL UPDATES AUTOMATICALLY is activated, the downloaded update is installed automatically the next time Allplan is launched. If DOWNLOAD UPDATES, BUT INSTALL MANUALLY is activated, the downloaded update can be installed manually the next time Allplan is launched. ƒƒ SHOW UPDATE HISTORY shows the computer’s update history. ƒƒ SYSADM SETTINGS is only available for Allplan administrators in a workgroup installation and provides administrators with settings for controlling updates in the network.

■■1.4 Working with the Allplan 2012 Practical Manual The sections that follow describe how to operate Allplan 2012 based on a sample project explained in manageable sections. To simplify work and illustrate a modern method of working, wizards were stored on your computer during installation of the project. These wizards contain all the elements and components relevant for the project. As an alternative to working with wizards, you can configure the properties yourself as required or, if available, use the favorites in the template project. Each example is preceded by a theory-based introduction. Please take the time to read these sections, because they contain information and suggestions that go beyond those in

8  1 General information

the example. The structure is roughly based on a possible project from the initial sketches in the site plan through to finished application planning with extended labeling and dimensioning. All screenshots were created on a Windows 7 computer with a workgroup installation of Allplan 2012. If different or fewer options are available on the screens for installation without workgroup, you can ignore these.

1.4.1 Structure of the following chapters An example is used to explain the basic working methods and options, from basic know­ ledge of Allplan, basic settings and basic information with the creation of a project from a template project, the creation of a building model with equipment in order to generate views, sections and lists from the model, through to data output on paper. All areas are explained step by step on the basis of a sample project. The practical examples are preceded by an explanation of the tools and functions. In almost all cases, more tools are described than are actually used in the example. It is advisable to either start from scratch with the new project, or, if you have prior knowledge, to work through the corresponding areas based on your own data.

1.4.1.1 Subsections of the example The subsections that accompany the sample project through step by step are highlighted. The top line contains the main topic/focus while the line below indicates the function or feature being described.

1.4.1.2 Typographic conventions in examples and explanations SMALL CAPS

Function calls and texts that appear on the screens

hh Individual step in explanations of the principles in the theory-based areas ZZ Individual step during processing of the sample project Italics User input during processing of the sample project New feature in ­version . . . Revised in version . . .

Functions that were significantly revised and/or extended in version 2011 and 2012, as well as new functions and options in Allplan 2011 and Allplan 2012 are marked with the icons on the right. The corresponding items are in the point New in Version 2011 and Revised in version 2011 as well as New in version 2012, Revised in version 2012 in the index. New features from Allplan 2011 are also listed to provide all readers who are reading the book in conjunction with version 2011 the information they require.

1.4 Working with the Allplan 2012 Practical Manual 9

1.4.2 Data relating to the guide 1.4.2.1 Obtaining the data You can obtain the project data relating to the guide as follows:

Option 1 Visit the website below, where you will find the project data and further information to download. ƒƒ http://www.zeichenatelier.com/Allplan2012

1.4.2.2 Installing the data When you start the setup procedure, the data relating to the book is installed automatically. You must answer YES to any confirmation prompts that appear during setup. All the required data is copied to the specified directories and project management is updated at the end of installation. In the event of a second installation, the existing projects are NOT overwritten.

1.4.2.3 Installed files and folders You can use all the installed data for your own projects. You can either further develop the book’s template project for your own purposes or copy the data (resources) from the sample projects to your office standard or your template project. The steps required to exchange resources are described either in the help or my book Allplan 2009 für die Ausbilding [Allplan 2009 for training], Carl Hanser Verlag (ISBN 978-3-446-41928-5).

Project data The project data for this book is automatically copied to project management by a setup program and entered in the administration files. After the setup program has been executed successfully, project management will contain two new projects. ƒƒ Template project Allplan 2012 Practical Manual Template: Contains all the data that is used to work through the guide but is not part of the Allplan main installation. ƒƒ Project Allplan 2012 Practical Manual: Contains the complete project for the book.

The template project in detail ƒƒ Project settings: All path settings for resources are set to . This means that you do NOT work with the main installation’s resources in the sample project. ƒƒ Building structure, fileset structure: The project does not contain a ready-made building or fileset structure. Project: Allplan 2012 Practical Manual contains an example of a fileset structure. The building structure is created in chapter 4.2.5, Example – project structure and plane settings, with the wizards contained in the Plane Manager and built on in the subsequent chapters. ƒƒ Layout structure: Since version 2009, there have also been structuring options for layouts. The template project and the finished example contain a sample structure. You can modify and reuse this if required.

10  1 General information

Layouts are assigned to the individual structural levels. The structure itself is roughly based on the HOAI project phases. See chapter 8, Data output, for a more detailed description. ƒƒ Resources – surface definitions: Where useful and necessary for the example, the standard resources have been used and a few settings added. The additional data is grouped together in the Allplan Practical Manual group. ƒƒ Resources – layers, line styles and drawing types: The layers contained are exactly the same as those in the Allplan shipment; different layer groups not used in the book have not been included in the project. Settings have been added for line styles and drawing types to enable both plan views and the sections derived from these to be created without sacrificing quality and without the need for postprocessing. The groups are clearly marked and in some cases described in the book. ƒƒ Label styles and smart symbols: The project contains all the variables, label styles for components (room labels and story labels) used in the example and a title block. The smart symbols to be generated during the example can also be found at the corresponding points in the project. ƒƒ SmartParts: The SmartParts used in the example are either available for direct transfer in the wizards or in the project directory for import. ƒƒ Surface files and textures: The components from the wizards are already created with simple surfaces (with and without textures). The corresponding definitions are contained in the project’s design folder or are based on the installed standard. ƒƒ Favorites files: At different points in the example, reference is made to favorites (components, settings in the BS, display etc.). These are also contained in the project.

Wizards Allplan 2012 Practical Manual

During installation of the book data, a folder with wizards is copied to the local ETC directory of Allplan 2012 in addition to the project data. After installation (possibly after a reboot), these wizards automatically appear in a new group and can be neither changed nor extended. The wizards contain all the components that are used and whose settings can be saved in or accessed from wizards. In addition, they contain similar components, as well as 2D elements such as lines, texts and dimension lines.

1.4 Working with the Allplan 2012 Practical Manual 11

Layers

2  D elements/ sections

Walls and columns

Windows and doors

U  pper slabs, roof, floor slab

Stair

12  1 General information

Rooms and stories

Outdoor facilities

F  acade and railing

 urnishings – SmartF Parts

The individual examples always show an extract from the wizard that contains the components. The text description also refers to the required wizards and the component to be transferred.

2

An Introduction to Allplan 2012

■■2.1 The project-based approach To optimize the way you work with Allplan 2012, Allplan provides the project as the means for managing and structuring your construction project data. Physically, each project is a folder on the hard drive containing all project-specific data.

Project elements A project consists of different data types that are subdivided into groups. The following are the most important data groups. ƒƒ Drawing files, layouts, project attributes, administration files → found in every project (max. 6000 drawing files and 3000 layouts per project) ƒƒ Resources (hatching styles, patterns, layers, etc.) → optional project elements ƒƒ Special resources (search project, drawing symbol regulations) → special, project-specific links ƒƒ Resources (bitmap files, surfaces, etc.) → available in project depending on usage

2.1.1 Drawing files, layouts Drawing files – design area In Allplan, you create your design using drawing files, much like a traditional building design drawn on transparencies. This means you draw a floor, a view, a section or a detail in a drawing file. In this way, drawing files can be used to give projects a differentiated structure. You can display and edit up to 80 drawing files at once – in other words, you can keep several files open simultaneously. For associative views, an option was created to enable experts to open up to 188 drawing files internally. Every drawing file corresponds to a file in the project folder on your hard drive and is saved using a unique ID. The drawing file name visible in Allplan is not displayed as the Windows file name on your hard drive. This allows you to use a drawing file multiple times within a project. You can create a GRID drawing file in every construction stage, for example. 

14  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Drawing files are managed and activated for editing using the function OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS (fileset structure or building structure).

Layouts – output area To output the drawings created in the drawing files, Allplan provides layouts for which there is a separate mode (Layout Editor). This has been completely revised and improved in the current 2011 version. Every layout corresponds to a file in the project folder on your hard drive. This file only stores the data created in the plot layout (layout border, layout header, drawing labels, etc.), as well as the rules for displaying the layout elements in the layout. As for the drawing files, a layout is saved with its own number. This means you can create several layouts with the same name within a project. All the documents (drawing files and NDW files) that you need for your layout are saved as layout elements in the layout. When placing the layout elements (also afterwards), you can define various settings such as scale, visibility of layers, etc. The individual elements contained in the layout element are not actually placed in the layout. Instead, a reference to the corresponding document (drawing file or NDW file) is created. As a result, all the data displayed in a layout is always completely up to date with the latest design status.

Differences between the drawing file/layout, custom NDW/custom layout You can create design drawings using drawing files (project-specific) and custom NDWs. These documents can have any required reference scale and any components. For output you can use layouts (project-specific) and custom layouts. Layouts and custom layouts are always created in scale 1:1. The drawing unit is automatically converted to mm. You can combine drawing files in the layout. Layout borders and other elements such as the layout headers and additions are created in layouts. Layout Editor

You can use the Layout Editor button to toggle between the two data types. When the button is pressed, you can edit layouts; when it is not pressed, you can edit drawing files and custom NDWs.

2.1.2 Administration files Project attributes Project attributes are used to manage general information on a construction project. You can, for example, use the attributes to save the exact name of the construction project, as well as details on the client and the other project members. This data can then be accessed throughout the project and used when labeling layouts and components. The project attributes are therefore part of the project master data and can be accessed at many points within the project. When you change an attribute (e. g. the client or the name of the construction project), for example, it is updated in all layouts where that attribute is included in the layout header.

2.1 The project-based approach 15

Administration files The administration files include all files that are used internally to display the project structure (drawing file and layout names, fileset structures and building structures, plane model, etc.). Administration files are saved both directly in the project path, as well as in project subfolders.

2.1.3 Resources (office or project) The term “resources” covers all data that defines options such as hatching styles, patterns, area styles. These are used when creating elements and components. All resources can be saved either in the project (= project-specific) or in the office standard (= office-specific). When creating a project (or later), you can decide whether you want to work with the general office standard (available for every project) or whether you want to work with project-specific resources (only available for the current project). If, when creating a project (or later), you change the assignment from office to project, the data from the office standard are copied and saved in your project. If you subsequently change the assignment from project to office, the corresponding data is deleted from your project. The following resource types are available: ƒƒ Pen and line definitions ƒƒ Fonts ƒƒ Patterns, hatching styles, area styles ƒƒ Bar and mesh cross-section catalogs ƒƒ Layer structures, line styles, drawing types ƒƒ Attribute defaults

2.1.4 Special resources A final group is special resources, which only access data. These are managed in part externally and/or for which the default must not be changed.

CAD-TAI project assignment The CAD-TAI project assignment gives you a direct link to Allplan BCM, Nemetschek’s tendering program. You can assign any TAI project to your CAD project and use items for the material names of your components.

Urban planning symbols You can use either the catalog supplied by Nemetschek or one that has been adjusted to your personal and/or country-specific requirements.

16  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

The preinstalled drawing symbol regulations catalog cannot be changed and are therefore saved in the ETC folder (standard path) in the installation’s local data path. You can use the selection screen for the drawing symbol regulations to create any number of copies that you can assign to your project and change via the CREATE DRAWING SYMBOL tool (in the module GEO → URBAN PLANNING).

2.1.5 Settings Allplan 2012 now provides the option to manage the OFFSET COORDINATES and the INPUT/OUTPUT CURRENCY centrally in the project properties. OFFSET COORDINATES should always be used if you are starting your project based on

a site plan with supra-regional country coordinates (e. g. Gauß-Krüger coordinates) and all data must remain in these coordinates. When outputting, the configured offset coordinates are always added; when inputting data (and placing point symbols), they are subtracted. You use INPUT/OUTPUT CURRENCY to define which currency is used in the lists and schedules.

■■2.2 The document-based approach With NDW files (model-oriented files) and NPL files (layouts), Allplan provides a projectindependent option for structuring your data. When you use these files, you can decide for yourself where they are saved on the hard drive and which folder structure is used. This means, however, that you must invest much more time and work into structuring the project than if you used the project-based approach. If you are exchanging data with design partners who also use Allplan 2012 (or an older version) and you only require individual layouts and/or drawing files, then it is possible to save these files as an NPL/NDW file. In many cases this is the simplest solution.

Main differences between NDW files and drawing files ƒƒ It is possible to open several NDW files simultaneously, although they cannot be viewed (saved) together in a single viewport. ƒƒ The storage location and save name are freely definable for NDW files, the same as in a standard Windows application. ƒƒ Drawing files are saved under their drawing file number. Unlike for NDW files, the displayed name does not appear on the hard drive.

2.3 Dialog boxes for data organization 17

Main differences between NPL files and project-specific layouts ƒƒ Project-specific data cannot be saved in a custom layout (NPL file). ƒƒ The storage location and save name are freely definable for NPL files, the same as in a standard Windows application. ƒƒ Project attributes and layout attributes are not available for the layout label.

■■2.3 Dialog boxes for data organization The OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS dialog boxes (one for drawing files and one for layouts) make it easy for you to manage all project-specific data. As well as the OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS dialog boxes, there are also Windows-based OPEN FILE dialog boxes for those using the document-based approach. There is another dialog box for opening the project itself.

2.3.1 Open project You use the OPEN PROJECT dialog box to define which project you want to edit (i. e. the current work folder). You do this by simply selecting the required project and confirming your selection by clicking OK.

Open Project

Tools ƒƒ NEW PROJECT starts the wizard for creating a project. When you have completed the wizard, the system automatically closes the dialog box and opens the newly created project. ƒƒ COPY TO creates a copy of the selected project. When the project copy has been created, the system automatically closes the dialog box and opens the copied project. ƒƒ SELECT  ATTRIBUTES opens the dialog box for selecting the project attributes to be available while working on the project. This only appears if you are logged on as the SYSADM (Allplan with workgroup) or if Allplan 2012 was installed without Workgroup Manager.

New Project

Copy to Select attributes

18  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

The entire process for creating a new project is described in detail for two different variants in the section 4.1, Create a project – project properties. Project filter Deactivate

ƒƒ PROJECT FILTER opens the PROJECT FILTER dialog box in which you can configure filter conditions that influence the project list. This is where you can create logical filter rules to restrict the projects displayed. By deactivating this, the filter settings are reset so that all projects are displayed. ƒƒ The FIND PROJECT NAME QUICKLY field allows you to enter parts of a project name to find the first relevant project quickly. ƒƒ The CHECK  STATUS  OF  ALL  PROJECTS  PRIOR  TO  LISTING option means that the system checks all projects for availability before opening the dialog box. This can take a relatively long time if you have a lot of different projects distributed between several computers (servers, archive servers, construction site laptops, etc.), or if you have slow networks and/or computers that are not available. Deactivating this option can speed up response times.

Column headings/table contents Clicking on the column heading sorts projects in ascending/descending order based on that column. An arrow appears next to the heading. You can use the shortcut menu to insert additional columns and/or delete the corresponding column. Icon

Meaning Project can be edited. Project is locked. Project cannot be accessed. The project folder has been deleted in Windows, or the computer on which the project is saved is currently unavailable. Project checked out. The project is on a computer in the workgroup that is ­currently checked out. You can view an information window that displays the note entered when it was checked out.

Shortcut menu for the selected line The shortcut menu for the selected project also includes the following tools in addition to those in the dialog box: ƒƒ DELETE PROJECT permanently deletes the selected project from the hard drive. This operation is irreversible! ƒƒ RENAME opens a dialog box where you can rename the selected project. If the project was created with the setting SAME FOLDER NAME AS PROJECT NAME, then the name of the project folder on the hard drive changes at the same time.

2.3 Dialog boxes for data organization 19

ƒƒ PROPERTIES opens the dialog box for setting the project properties. This is where you can access the resources and settings described in chapter 2.1, The project-based approach.

Status bar

The status bar displays the full path for the project. You can right click to open the shortcut menu here and copy the path to the clipboard before entering it elsewhere (e. g. in the address line of Windows Explorer). Pressing OK exits the OPEN PROJECT dialog box and loads the selected project as the current project. Pressing CANCEL interrupts project selection and returns you to the project that was active before you selected OPEN PROJECT.

2.3.2 Open on a project-specific basis The OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS dialog box defines which drawing files or layout are/is opened for processing. Depending on the position of the LAYOUT EDITOR button, the following applies: ƒƒ LAYOUT EDITOR button activated → OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECFIC BASIS displays the layout structure. ƒƒ LAYOUT EDITOR button deactivated → OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS is opened to the tab with the last drawing file selection; either fileset structure or building structure.

Open on a project-specific basis Layout Editor

General tools The following tools are available in both tabs of the OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS: DRAWING FILES dialog box, as well as in the OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS: SLAYOUTS dialog box. ƒƒ EXPAND SELECTED ENTRIES – COLLAPSE SELECTED ENTRIES opens or closes all filesets/structural levels. In the building structure, the tools apply to the page over which the function is positioned. ƒƒ UPDATE reimports the structures. Changes made by colleagues in the interim will now be displayed. ƒƒ OPTIONS opens a dialog box where you can define basic settings for the OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS (drawing files and layouts) dialog box. The system only displays the options pertinent to the current dialog box.

Expand selected .. Collapse selected entries Update Options

20  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.3.3 Open on a project-specific basis: Drawing files Open on a project-specific basis

The OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS: DRAWING FILES dialog box has two tabs. To edit your project, you can either create a structure in both tabs (very time-consuming and difficult to maintain) or work with one of the two options. The project example describes in detail how to work with the building structure. I do not recommend working only with the fileset structure, since many of the labor-saving tools are only available in the building structure. The example project does, however, include a simple fileset structure. However you decide to use the different structuring options in Allplan, the following points apply:

New in 2011

ƒƒ Only one drawing file can be current at any one time. ƒƒ A maximum of 80 drawing files can be loaded and displayed together. ƒƒ When using associative views, up to 188 drawing files can be loaded (in expert mode). ƒƒ The displayable data quantity of all drawing files to be loaded depends on the setting made in the Services application (see chapter 9.1.4, Service). ƒƒ Depending on which tab is active when you exit the dialog box, the drawing files selected there are displayed/activated for processing. The system only considers the drawing files for which the corresponding structural level/fileset is selected.

2.3.3.1 Tools in both tabs Floor Manager

ƒƒ FLOOR MANAGER opens the central point for managing the project height settings.

Further information on the floor manager can be found in section 2.12, The Allplan plane model and in section 4.2, Create project structure – create plane model. / Highlight ­locked drawing files/ filesets on/off

ƒƒ HIGHLIGHT LOCKED DRAWING FILES/FILESETS ON/OFF defines whether an icon is used to indicate drawing files and filesets that are already currently opened by other users. The name of the user is displayed in the PROPERTIES dialog box for the drawing file/fileset. This is only displayed for a workgroup installation. The BUILDING STRUCTURE tab only displays the lock information for drawing files.

2.3 Dialog boxes for data organization 21

2.3.3.2 Drawing file status – Drawing file IDs All drawing files are assigned different status IDs, depending on their content and/or how they are currently displayed on the screen for processing. Drawing file IDs that indicate the type of data contained by the drawing file are not displayed.

IDs for drawing files: ƒƒ IN USE (lock icon) is displayed if the HIGHLIGHT LOCKED DRAWING FILES, FILESETS ON/OFF button is set to ON. It is displayed for all drawing files that are currently opened

(and therefore locked) by other users. ƒƒ CANNOT BE READ  (exclamation mark) is displayed for unreadable drawing files. The drawing file is either too big for the current settings, write-protected or defective. The ID for unreadable and/or defective drawing files is only displayed in the building structure. ƒƒ TEMPORARILY ASSIGNED (only in the fileset structure) indicates that the drawing file is only temporarily assigned to the fileset. The assignment of drawing files temporarily assigned to the fileset is cleared when you exit the fileset. ƒƒ SOURCE DRAWING FILES DEFINED indicates that this drawing file contains data for a hidden line image and can be updated if the recalculation has not been locked. During the update, the data in the drawing file are completely overwritten. ƒƒ The drawing file contains links to associative views/sections and is therefore a reference drawing file.

There are four different drawing file status values. ƒƒ CURRENT – highlighted in red – the drawing file is loaded in virtual memory. New ele-

ments are created in the current drawing file. Only one drawing file can be current at any one time. All component actions are possible. ƒƒ EDIT – highlighted in yellow – the drawing file is loaded in virtual memory. No new elements are created in the drawing file. Copies of existing elements are left in the source drawing file. All component actions are possible. ƒƒ REFERENCE – highlighted in gray – the drawing file is loaded in virtual memory. The drawing file cannot be edited. Elements cannot be deleted or modified. The point snap tool can still be used, although it can be disabled. ƒƒ NOT SELECTED – no ID – drawing file is not loaded and therefore not displayed. Drawing file status FS/BS Not selected

Represented as

Remarks Empty drawing file Empty drawing file (named/unnamed and/or ­definitions from PLM) Drawing file in use Empty drawing file (source drawing files def.) Drawing file in use (source drawing files def.) Drawing file with reference drawing files

22  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Drawing file status FS/BS

Represented as

Current

Remarks Empty drawing file (with additional information) Drawing file in use Empty drawing file (source drawing files def.) Drawing file in use (source drawing files def.) Drawing file with reference drawing files

Edit

Empty drawing file Empty drawing file (additional information) Drawing file in use Empty drawing file (source drawing files def.) Drawing file in use (source drawing files def.) Drawing file with reference drawing files

Reference drawing file

Empty drawing file (named) Drawing file in use Empty drawing file (source drawing files def.) Drawing file in use (source drawing files def.) Drawing file with reference drawing files

You can change the drawing file status either via the shortcut menu or by clicking on the desired status field.

2.3.3.3 Fileset Structure tab Fileset structure

In the FILESET STRUCTURE tab, you define which fileset and which drawing files from the fileset are displayed for editing and how they are displayed. The selected fileset (yellow folder icon) is the active fileset. NOTE: Because the fileset structure is now far less important since Allplan

2008 and the introduction of the building structure, this document will only describe its most important functions.

Tools on the Fileset Structure tab Set/delete bookmark

ƒƒ SET/DELETE BOOKMARK for one or more bookmarks. To do this, select the drawing files/filesets for which you wish to set/delete bookmarks, and click on the icon. If you selected drawing files/filesets with and without bookmarks, the assigned bookmarks are deleted, and the remaining selected lines receive new bookmarks.

2.3 Dialog boxes for data organization 23

ƒƒ FIND. . . searches for full names or parts of names of drawing files and/or filesets. If the SET BOOKMARK option is activated, a bookmark is set automatically for the matching entry. ƒƒ CREATE FILESET opens a new dialog box for creating a new fileset. It is always possible to create a new fileset. If you need several filesets, you must perform this operation multiple times. ƒƒ DRAWING FILE FILTER opens the DRAWING FILE FILTER dialog box. You can filter the displayed drawing files by their attributes.

Find . . .

Create fileset

Drawing file filter

Fileset shortcut menu ƒƒ MATCH STRUCTURE is used to copy drawing file assignments from an existing fileset to a new fileset. ƒƒ ASSIGN DRAWING FILES  opens the dialog box for assigning drawing files to the selected structural level. You can enter individual drawing files (e. g. 15), drawing file ranges (e. g. 1 – 10) or a combination of the two (e. g. 1 – 10, 15, 21 – 30, 35). You can also define whether the drawing file assignment is fixed (ASSIGN TO CURRENT FILESET) or temporary (ASSIGN TEMPORARILY TO CURRENT FILESET). ƒƒ CLEAR ALL DRAWING FILE ASSIGNMENTS clears all drawing file assignments to the current fileset (fixed and temporary). The fileset is then completely empty. Only the drawing file assignments are deleted. The drawing files themselves (the actual files on the hard drive) are retained. ƒƒ PROPERTIES displays the fileset’s attributes, as well as the user responsible for locking the fileset. The NOTE tab displays the information that you can append using the NOTE tool in the DETAILING WINDOW module.

Drawing file shortcut menu – Fileset structure The drawing file shortcut menu in the fileset structure is largely the same as the drawing file shortcut menu in the building structure. See the next chapter for a description. ƒƒ CLEAR DRAWING FILE ASSIGNMENT removes the selected drawing files from the current fileset.

Shortcut menu fileset – fileset list ƒƒ ASSIGN TO CURRENT FILESET assigns the selected drawing files to the (current) fileset selected on the left.

Detailing window Note

24  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.3.3.4 Building structure tab Building structure

You can use the BUILDING STRUCTURE section on the left and the DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE section on the right to create the ideal structure for almost any project. In the section on the left, the model is created based on a floor plan, while the section on the right contains all sections, views, details and schedules. Regardless of the type of data you are generating – whether you still work predominantly in 2D, whether your office works with or without layers, whether you are using Allplan to create buildings, reinforcement drawings or site management plans – you can organize and structure everything using hierarchical structural levels.

When activating drawing files, up to 80 drawing files can be selected from any structural levels (including a mixture of both sides). The system takes into account all drawing files in an activated structural level (checkmark). Activating a structural level also activates all of its subordinate structural levels. If, for example, you check the SITE box (click to the left), then the structural levels BUILDING, FOUNDATION etc. are also activated. If you press and hold down the key while checking the box, then only the structural level is activated.

Tools in the building structure tab Insertion permitted Not permitted

Recycle bin

ƒƒ Inserting structural levels/drawing files You can insert structural levels/drawing files by dragging the required structural level/ drawing files from the dialog boxes described below to the position where you wish to insert them. Alternatively, you can use the tools in the shortcut menu. If it is possible to insert the structural level or drawing file, a hand is displayed. If not, a red circle with a line through it is displayed. ƒƒ Deleting structural levels/drawing files Select the elements you wish to delete and drag them out of the BUILDING STRUCTURE dialog box. Alternatively, you can use the tools in the shortcut menu. Instead of the mouse cursor, a recycle bin is displayed.

2.3 Dialog boxes for data organization 25

ƒƒ INSERT PREDEFINED STRUCTURAL LEVELS opens the selection box where you can insert a predefined structural level into the building structure area. Predefined structural levels are defined in a fixed internal sequence. It is not possible, for example, to insert a building beneath a story. You can restrict the selection if you restricted the building structure selection (e. g. by IFC). ƒƒ ANY STRUCTURAL LEVELS opens the selection box where you can insert any desired structural level into the building structure area. Structural levels selected in this way are not interdependent in any way. This means you can assign the structural levels however you want. If you have activated the restrictions for the building structure according to IFC, you cannot select a structural level here. ƒƒ INSERT NEW STRUCTURAL LEVEL opens the selection box where you can insert a new structural level in the DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE area. New structural levels for the DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE area can only be arranged in a logical manner. Thus, the structural level “View” can only be inserted within a view or in the “Views” structural level. It is only possible to assign drawing files in the VIEWS and SECTIONS structural levels. Drawing files cannot be assigned to the LIST structural level. This structural level contains the direct information for the selected list and the source drawing files. ƒƒ The ASSIGN DRAWING FILES tool is located above the building structure, as well as above the DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE area. You can use it to assign the 6000 drawing files to your structural levels. Every drawing file can arise at a point in the building structure or in the DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE area. Drawing files that have already been assigned are indicated in the first column and can no longer be selected. ƒƒ IMPORT DATA AGAIN reimports the last saved view for the building structure or the DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE area. This may be necessary if another user made changes at the same time or if you accidentally deleted a structure node. The effect of this tool is restricted to one page of the tab.

Predefined structural levels

Any structural levels

Insert new ­structural level

Assign drawing files Assigned drawing file

Import data again Import data again

26  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Save Save

ƒƒ SAVE saves the current view in the BUILDING STRUCTURE or DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE area. If you are making comprehensive changes and additions to the building structure, you should make sure that you use this tool from time to time. The effect of this tool is restricted to one page of the tab.

Column headings ƒƒ The column headings in the BUILDING STRUCTURE tab are provided merely for information purposes. You can hide and/or change the width of some of the columns according to your individual requirements.

General shortcut menu ƒƒ When no structural level is selected, you can right click to open a general shortcut menu. The sections on the left and the right (BUILDING STRUCTURE/DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE) have similar shortcut menus.

Save current ­selection as a favorite Load favorite

ƒƒ SAVE CURRENT SELECTION AS A FAVORITE and LOAD FAVORITE are used to save and reimport favorite data as an XML file. The system only saves/reads the activation status of the page called via this menu item (either BUILDING STRUCTURE or DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE). The favorites are saved either to a subfolder shared by all users or to a user-specific subfolder for the current project. ƒƒ UPDATE DRAWING FILES WITH PLANES checks and updates the plane settings for the drawing files and/or structural levels. The system processes all changes made to the settings for structural levels and/or drawing files. This tool is necessary if changes were made to your plane model and discrepancies occur when calculating views and/or sections. ƒƒ UPDATE ALL VIEWS AND SECTIONS starts a recalculation of all hidden lines. Every structural level in the DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE area has a similar command in the shortcut menu, which only affects the drawing files assigned under the

2.3 Dialog boxes for data organization 27

selected structural level. This recalculation can take some time, depending on the ­number of existing views/sections, as well as the settings for the hidden lines. It takes into account all drawing files that are assigned to source drawing files and for which an update is not locked. These drawing files are overwritten. This operation is irreversible. ƒƒ RESTRICTIONS OF BUILDING STRUCTURE opens a dialog box where you can configure project setup restrictions in order to create an IFC-compliant structure. Alternatively, you can also select your own restrictions for the current project. ƒƒ DELETE ENTIRE BUILDING STRUCTURE deletes the entire building structure including the derivations from the building structure and all plane models. This operation is irreversible. All structure files are saved as backup files in the folder . ƒƒ DISPLAY SELECTED DRAWING FILES opens an additional information box showing all selected drawing files with their status. This means that even with larger structures, you can still maintain an overview of which drawing files you have activated for editing. The information displayed is always up to date. In other words, the information displayed is changed as soon as a drawing file is selected or deselected. ƒƒ DISPLAY LOADED DRAWING FILES opens an additional information box displaying all the drawing files that were active before you opened the OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS dialog box. In this context, it is unimportant whether the selection was made in the DRAWING FILE STRUCTURE or the BUILDING STRUCTURE tab. ƒƒ DISPLAY ASSIGNED DRAWING FILES opens an additional information box displaying all the drawing files assigned to the BUILDING STRUCTURE and the DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE areas. ƒƒ CAD-TAI SEARCH FOR LISTS opens the CADTAI project assignment dialog box. You can use this additional dialog box to assign one or more TAI projects (only item assignment) or element masters (formulas) from Allplan BCM (see also chapter 2.1.4, Special resources).

28  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Shortcut menu for Project structural level – building structure As well as the tools available in the general shortcut menu, the shortcut menu for the project bar and other structural levels also contains the following tools. Insert structural level

Assign drawing files

ƒƒ INSERT STRUCTURAL LEVELS inserts an additional level below the selected structural level. You can only make the insertion at permitted points in the lower level structural levels. The points available for selection depend on the settings made in the restrictions to the building structure. ƒƒ ASSIGN DRAWING FILES  opens the dialog box for assigning drawing files to the selected structural level. You can enter individual drawing files (e. g. 15), drawing file ranges (e. g. 1 – 10) or a combination of the two (e. g. 1 – 10, 15, 21 – 30, 35). You can use the SELECTION LIST button to open the ASSIGN DRAWING FILES dialog box. ƒƒ COPY/CUT/PASTE BEHIND/PASTE UNDER are tools you can use to copy and move data within the structure (see also section 2.4, Copying between files).

Shortcut menu for structural levels – building structure The commands in the shortcut menu for the other structural levels are largely the same as those in the project level. When using the INSERT STRUCTURAL LEVELS sub-item, you can only make the insertion in the structural levels logically available at that level. ƒƒ ASSIGN PLANES opens a dialog box with the same name. This is where you can use the Floor Manager to assign standard planes and roof landscapes to structural levels and drawing files. The configured values are displayed in the columns HEIGHT (BOTTOM) and HEIGHT (TOP). The plane settings for a structural level apply to all assigned drawing files, provided these do not have their own settings (blue font). If a roof landscape is assigned to a drawing file or a structural level, then a small roof icon is displayed. NOTE: If you hover over the icon with the crosshairs, an info text appears

with the name of the roof landscape and the plane model.

2.3 Dialog boxes for data organization 29

Shortcut menu for drawing files – building structure ƒƒ LIST REFERENCE DRAWING FILES opens an additional information box listing all the reference drawing files for the drawing file (associative views/sections). ƒƒ ACTIVATE REFERENCE DRAWING FILES activates all reference drawing files (associative views/sections) belonging to the drawing file. ƒƒCURRENT, EDIT, REFERENCE, NOT SELECTED each change the status of the selected drawing file. ƒƒ CLEAR DRAWING FILE ASSIGNMENT removes the selected drawing files from the building structure. ƒƒ DELETE DRAWING FILE CONTENT deletes the entire content of the drawing file. You can use a sub-dialog box to define whether the drawing file name is also deleted, or whether only the data in the drawing file is deleted. ƒƒ PROPERTIES displays the attributes of the drawing file. As well as the file size and the storage location, you can also define who owns the drawing file and who has write access to the drawing file (e. g. the owner, everyone, nobody). Depending on your settings, not everybody can activate the drawing file.

Shortcut menu for Project structural level – derived from building structure As well as the tools available in the general shortcut menu, the shortcut menu for the project bar and other structural levels also contains the following tools: ƒƒ INSERT STRUCTURAL LEVELS inserts an additional level below the selected structural level. You can only make the insertion at permitted points in the lower level structural levels.

Shortcut menu for structural levels – derived from building structure Drawing files cannot be assigned directly under the VIEWS and SECTIONS structural levels. To do this, the corresponding lower levels (view/section) must first be inserted. For lists there is only the lower-level LIST node. It is not possible to assign drawing files to lists.

Insert structural level

30  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Shortcut menu for drawing files and list – derived from building structure The tools for views and sections are similar. The main difference is that additional settings are required for a section.

New feature in V2011

ƒƒ SOURCE DRAWING FILES FOR VIEW, SOURCE DRAWING FILES FOR SECTION and SOURCE DRAWING FILES FOR LIST open the dialog box for defining source drawing files. You set the checkmark for all drawing files with 3D geometries that you want to be displayed in the view/section, or that you want to be calculated in the list. You can use the DRAWING FILES IN USE and EMPTY DRAWING FILES checkboxes to control which drawing files are selected/to restrict the selection. ƒƒ LAYER SETTING, PLOT SET (CURRENT) opens the dialog box for setting the visible layers to be used when calculating the view, the section or the list. You can choose from all the plot sets available in the project that use the corresponding current settings or that always take all layers into account. ƒƒ SETTINGS FOR VIEW, SETTINGS FOR SECTION opens the dialog box for the hidden line settings. All settings are saved for the selected drawing file. This means that you can generate different results from a view, for example, without changing the original data. ƒƒ GENERATE VIEW opens up a sub-menu of the shortcut menu in which you can configure the default perspective for the view or the coordinates for the eye point and target point of a free perspective. You can use 3D VIEW to load projection settings created in a viewport using the SAVE, LOAD VIEW tool. ƒƒ GENERATE SECTION opens an additional dialog box that lists all section lines contained in the corresponding source drawing files. You just select one of them to start the calculation. ƒƒ UPDATE CALCULATION RESULT triggers a targeted recalculation for the selected drawing file. The drawing file is completely redetermined. This operation is irreversible. ƒƒ LOCK UPDATE is used to prevent specific views and sections from being updated. You should use this setting if you want to continue working directly on the result drawing file or you do not want to update the views/sections by accident. NOTE: The following applies when creating sections and views derived

from the building structure: This operation cannot be directly reversed. During the calculation, the drawing files are overwritten and the “old” drawing file is saved as a *.bak file (see also chapter 2.3.10, Restoring files using *.bak files).

2.3 Dialog boxes for data organization 31

ƒƒ SELECT SOURCE DRAWING FILES IN THE BUILDING STRUCTURE places all source drawing files in the building structure to EDIT status (the first has EDIT status). This tool gives you the option to check quickly whether all relevant drawing files have been set as source drawing files. The current activation of the drawing files in the building structure is overwritten. You can use SAVE CURRENT SELECTION AS A FAVORITE (on the left) to save the activation status.

Shortcut menu for Lists structural level – derived from building structure ƒƒ SETTINGS FOR BATCH LISTS regulates list output during a batch run. ƒƒ CREATE BATCH LISTS starts an automatic run for the lower-level lists. Depending on the settings, the list is displayed on the screen or all lists are saved automatically to a file.

Shortcut menu for List – derived from building structure Unlike for views and sections, the source drawing files and settings of the layers for lists are made directly in the lower-level node. Drawing files are not assigned. ƒƒ SELECT LIST AND SETTINGS opens the list settings dialog box. In the settings you can specify which list is used. ƒƒ CREATE LIST initiates calculation of the selected list of source drawing files. The list is recalculated every time. It may take some time to generate the list, depending on the number and content of the source drawing files and the complexity of the list.

Status bar When the status bar displays the text ACTIVE FILESET: BUILDING STRUCTURE”, this means that the drawing files to be loaded from the BUILDING STRUCTURE or from the DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE area are currently being selected. The number of selected drawing files is then displayed. If the text “NO CURRENT DRAWING FILE SELECTED!” is displayed, then the CLOSE button is deactivated.

You can only exit the PROJECT-SPECIFIC dialog box when the CLOSE button can be selected – in other words, when a drawing file has the status EDIT (red button).

32  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.3.3.5 Application tips for the building structure There are numerous options for organizing projects with the building structure. For large projects or projects with a long duration (and consequently numerous variants) however, it is possible for the structure to become complicated (because large) and unclear. To avoid this, you should bear in mind the following points: ƒƒ Building structure (left side) Use of higher structural levels to map variants and/or project phases. You either use ANY STRUCTURAL LEVELS for this, or use the SITE structural level and name it for the variant/project phase. ƒƒ Derivations of the building structure (right side) On the right side, a clear structure is more difficult to achieve, because views, sections and lists cannot be grouped together under a node (except for project). Consequently, a separate subdivision into variants and/or project phases appropriate for the building structure must be carried out for each of the three derivation types. ƒƒ The individual lists should be named in accordance with the selected report. The selection of source drawing files should also be as uniform as possible. ƒƒ If, for example, changes to the plan are required for which the old plan is to be retained, the drawing file should be copied and work should continue on the original, as then all derived elements, views, sections, lists) and all layouts can be or have been updated. To avoid misunderstandings, the copy should not be stored directly under the same structural level. You should either create an area for these variant drawing files that is completely independent, or add an additional structural level under the Story, where the “old” drawing files are managed.

2.3.4 Open on a project-specific basis: layouts Open on a project-specific basis

Layouts are used for output to paper. You save the drawing files individually or in drawing file batches to the layout. This does not create any new data in the layout; it just displays the drawing files. Any change to the model is thus immediately visible in the layout. Up to 3,000 layouts can be managed in every project. Only one layout can be active at any time. You can use INSERT STRUCTURAL LEVEL to set up any number of structures for your layouts. It is important to remember that every layout can be assigned only once but can be linked any number of times to other structural levels. Each layout is uniquely identified with its number.

2.3 Dialog boxes for data organization 33

NOTE: In the project bar’s shortcut menu you can specify whether the

structural level “All layouts” is displayed. Using the shortcut menu of the “All layouts” structural level you can specify what is displayed below it.

Icons in the layout structure The OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS: LAYOUTS dialog box contains the following designations for layouts and linked layouts. Icon

Comment Structural level (special tool for structural level ALL LAYOUTS) Empty, unnamed layout Named layout Layout in use Current layout (empty, named, in use) Linked layout Current linked layout

Activating layouts/linked layouts You can either click on a layout directly (layout icon in front of the number), or on the layout icon for a linked layout. It doesn’t matter which you select, because ALL links for the layout are automatically selected.

Tools ƒƒ INSERT STRUCTURAL LEVEL inserts another structural level under the selected level. The new structural level is always added and named “New Folder”. You can reorganize the structural levels of the layout structure however you wish and assign your own names as required. ƒƒ ASSIGN LAYOUTS opens an overview with all the layouts for the project. You can assign any and all of the up to 3000 layouts, as long as they have not already been assigned in the structure. ƒƒ IMPORT DATA AGAIN reimports the last saved view for the layout structure. This may be necessary, for example, if another user made changes at the same time, or if you accidentally deleted structure nodes. ƒƒ SAVE saves the current view of the layout structure. If you have made comprehensive changes and additions, you should use this tool from time to time to avoid accidental data loss. As well as the layout structure, the status of the structure levels (open, closed) for the current user is also saved.

Insert structural ­level

Assign layouts

Import data again

Save

34  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Shortcut menu for the Project structural level Save layout ­structure as a favorite

Load layout ­structure favorite

ƒƒ SAVE LAYOUT STRUCTURE AS A FAVORITE saves the entire layout structure as an XML file. All structural levels are saved with their name and the layouts assigned below them. All linked layouts are also saved with their name. ƒƒ LOAD LAYOUT STRUCTURE FAVORITE loads any required layout structure and overwrites the current layout structure of the current project. You can either import a structure that has been saved via SAVE LAYOUT STRUCTURE AS A FAVORITE or import the structure from another project (Project_Name/bim/Allplan_BIM_LayoutStructure.xml). ƒƒ DELETE ENTIRE LAYOUT STRUCTURE deletes the entire layout structure. This operation is irreversible. The structure files are saved as backup files in folder . Before deleting, we recommend using the SAVE LAYOUT STRUCTURE AS A FAVORITE tool to create a backup copy. ƒƒ COPY, CUT, PASTE, PASTE BEHIND and PASTE UNDER are tools you can use to copy and move data within the structure. ƒƒ REPORT generates a submenu in which you can select between four different output lists for ­ layouts. To display the required reports, MS Word Version 2003 or later must be installed on your computer. Alternatively, Word Viewer 2003 is sufficient. ƒƒ You can use the menu item SHOW “ALL LAYOUTS” STRUCTURAL LEVEL to hide/show the top structural level (all layouts) that is always available. The “ALL LAYOUTS” structural level is the only level that cannot be renamed and sorted alphabetically or numerically (in ascending or descending order) along with the other layouts. ƒƒSHOW ACTIVE LAYOUT opens the layout structure so that the selected layout is ­visible.

Shortcut menu for structural level Assign layouts

Assign linked layout

ƒƒ ASSIGN LAYOUTS opens the dialog box for assigning layouts to the selected structural level. You can enter individual layouts (e. g. 15), layout ranges (e. g. 1–10) or a combination of the two (e. g. 1–10, 15, 21–30, 35). You can use the SELECTION LIST button to open the ASSIGN LAYOUTS dialog box. ƒƒ ASSIGN LINKED LAYOUTS opens the dialog box for assigning linked layouts to structural levels. You can use linked layouts to create multiple sortings for layouts.

2.3 Dialog boxes for data organization 35

For example, you can create structural levels for different tradesmen and assign linked layouts to this node for all layouts containing these tradesmen. Your own layout structure for the “real” layouts is unaffected.

Shortcut menu for layout and link to layout ƒƒMAKE LAYOUT CURRENT activates the selected layout. As well as the selected layout, all links are also activated. ƒƒ UNLINK removes the selected layout from the structural level. Only the link assignment is removed, the layout is not deleted. ƒƒ DELETE LAYOUT CONTENT deletes the entire layout content including the assigned attributes. You can choose whether to retain or remove the layout name. ƒƒ CREATE LINK creates a link to the selected layout. The link is inserted directly under the layout and is only sorted under the layouts in the structural level the next time you open the layout structure. You can move and/or copy the link to wherever you wish in order to make the layout available in other contexts. You can change the name of the link to whatever you want.

Shortcut menu for layout

Shortcut menu for link NOTE: Layout links are ideal for displaying specific collections of documents

for clients or tradesmen alongside the entire layout list.

ƒƒ SHOW LINKED LAYOUTS opens the layout structure so that all links in the current layout are visible. This quickly provides an overview of which output collections contain a changed layout, making it possible to print the corresponding number of layouts. ƒƒ LIST LAYOUT ELEMENTS shows an additional window with a list of the drawing files in the selected layout. ƒƒ PROPERTIES opens the properties dialog box for the layout. All attributes that can be configured in the properties can be used to label the layout header. The layout properties are assigned in three tabs. The first tab (GENERAL) only contains the layout name. The second tab (SETTINGS) contains additional attributes, some of which are derived from a selection of names, and the third tab (CHANGE NOTICES) can be used to manage up to 100 changes. Every change comprises a date, an editing party and a comment (up to 80 characters long). As soon as a new date is created (including the editing party),

36  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

everything moves down a line. To delete a line, the comment and the editing party must both be deleted. The date is then automatically deleted when these changes are applied by clicking OK to exit the dialog box.

2.3.5 Open on a project-specific basis – select and move In the OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS dialog boxes, there are a few mouse buttons and mouse button key combinations that are very useful when working with structural levels and save you a lot of clicks.

Building structure – Derived from building structure – Actions ƒƒ LEFT CLICK in the structural level checkbox – activate/deactivate structural level

(complete) As soon as the checkmark is set for a structural level, all lower structural levels are also activated. All drawing files in the structural levels whose last status was Edit (yellow) or Reference (gray) are set back to this status. ƒƒ LEFT CLICK on one of the three boxes in front of the drawing file sets the status or removes it. ƒƒ LEFT DOUBLE CLICK on a drawing file opens this alone. All other drawing files of the same structural level are deactivated. All active structural levels except the one containing the drawing file are deactivated. ƒƒ CTRL+LEFT CLICK in structural level checkbox – activate/deactivate structural level (partial) This action activates/deactivates ONLY the selected structural level. The drawing files directly under the structural level are deactivated. The action ignores drawing files assigned to a structural level below the selected structural level, as well as the lower structural levels themselves. This type of activation/deactivation of structural level enables you to work in a very targeted way. ƒƒ RIGHT CLICK on selected structural levels, drawing files or the space opens various shortcut menus. ƒƒ LEFT CLICK+DRAG starts a move operation on the selected drawing files or structural levels. If structural levels are moved, all drawing files and/or structural levels assigned below them are also moved. You complete the move operation by dropping the objects at a permitted point. Structural levels can only be inserted at the higher structural levels (e. g. story to structure, building, site) ƒƒ ALT+LEFT CLICK+DRAG starts a move operation on the selected structural level. A structural level of the same type can be chosen here as the insertion point. The selected structural level is inserted below the structure at which it is dropped. ƒƒ CTRL+LEFT CLICK+DRAG copies the selected structural level or drawing file. The function works in the same way as functions COPY – PASTE UNDER/PASTE BEHIND from the shortcut menu.

2.3 Dialog boxes for data organization 37

Building structure and derivations from building structure – display ƒƒ None of the displayed structural levels are activated. The assigned drawing files as pale and are not loaded after the dialog box is closed.

ƒƒ Structural level Building – Design was activated by a left click on the checkbox. All lower structural levels are automatically set to active. All drawing files are loaded with the displayed activation states when the dialog box is closed.

ƒƒ The activation of structural level -1 – Cellar was reset by clicking the checkbox. The cellar drawing files are therefore not loaded. In addition, the display of the checkbox for structural level Building – Design has changed. It now symbolizes that not all lower structural levels are active but active ones are available. This is particularly important for compressed structures to ensure an overview of which structure areas drawing files are visible from. If you now also want to deactivate drawing files that are directly below structural level Building – Design, you can either set the status of the drawing file itself to not visible, or reset the activation by pressing CTRL+LEFT CLICK on the structural level checkbox.

Revised in version 2011

Layout structure All the mouse buttons and mouse button key combinations (except the additional ­activation states) described for the building structure can be used In the layout structure.

2.3.6 Open – custom NDW You can use the Windows OPEN dialog box to open any NDW. An opened custom NDW is highlighted in yellow. You can open any number of NDWs simultaneously, but they cannot be displayed “on top of one another” like drawing files. You can copy data freely between project drawing files and custom NDWs. You can also access all the resources of the open

Open

38  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

project in the NDW. The resources used are saved in the NDW. As long as custom NDWs are open, you will not be able to access all Allplan tools. As soon as you close or minimize the window for the custom NDW, you can go back to working with drawing files on a project-specific basis.

2.3.7 Open – custom layout Open

You can use the Windows OPEN dialog box to open any custom layout (NPL). Only NDW files can be saved to custom layouts. You also have no access to the tools for layout attri­ butes and project attributes. When a custom layout (NPL) is opened, the background is highlighted in yellow. To exit processing of the custom layout, you must activate a project-specific layout via OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS.

2.3.8 Select destination drawing file and related dialog boxes When working with Allplan, the SELECT DRAWING FILE or SELECT DESTINATION ­DRAWING FILE dialog box appears wherever you can select drawing files from the project. The tools and options that are actually available to you depend on the tool via which you opened this dialog box. The color of the drawing files indicates their current activation status. Drawing file/fileset

Building structure

Derived from ­building structure

Deselect all

ƒƒ DRAWING FILE/FILESET displays the fileset structure for selecting the ­drawing files. In addition to the created filesets, the system also displays the ALL DRAWING FILES node. ƒƒ BUILDING STRUCTURE displays the building structure with all structural levels. This view is ideal for copying across different stories and selecting source drawing files for views and sections, as well as selecting floor plans to be saved to layouts. ƒƒ DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE shows the elements derived from the building structure with all structural levels. This view is ideal for selecting the destination drawing file for hidden lines, as well as for selecting views and sections to be saved to layouts. ƒƒ CLEAR SELECTION deselects all drawing files. This tool is only available for dialog calls where multiple selection is meaningful. ƒƒ When the DRAWING FILES IN USE option is active, the system displays all drawing files that are currently in use. Deactivate this option if you do not want to display the drawing files that are in use.

2.3 Dialog boxes for data organization 39

ƒƒ When the EMPTY DRAWING FILES option is active, the system displays empty drawing files for selection. Deactivate this option if you do not want to select empty drawing files.

2.3.9 Saving documents When saving documents, Allplan differentiates between saving project-specific files and documents with a freely-definable storage location. While many actions lead to all projectspecific files being saved automatically, you must actively save NDW files and NPL files. They do not have an automatic save mechanism.

2.3.9.1 Saving project-specific data During many operations, Allplan automatically saves the loaded files without asking: ƒƒ When Allplan is closed correctly. ƒƒ When you switch the drawing file or current layout using OPEN ON A PROJECT-­ SPECIFIC BASIS. ƒƒ When you start a data import or export. ƒƒ When you start the COPY/MOVE ELEMENTS BETWEEN FILES function. The system always saves and compresses the current drawing files with status current and edit. This clears the Undo (reset, restore) memory. For some of these actions, Allplan creates a *.bak file if the CREATE BACKUP COPY OF DRAWING FILES option is activated (GENERAL option, OTHER tab, see also chapter 3.1.2, Settings and explanations on options). The restoring of data using *.bak files is described in chapter 2.3.10, Restoring files using *.bak files.

Auto-save

Allplan automatically saves all loaded (with status Current and Edit) drawing files/the loaded layout at a configured interval without deleting the Undo memory. The frequency of the save interval can be configured in the options under Desktop Environment – Save.

Manual save ƒƒ SAVE saves the drawing files with status Current and Edit/the loaded layout. The data is not compressed, and the Undo list is not deleted. ƒƒ SAVE AND COMPRESS saves all loaded documents, compresses the information and deletes the Undo list. The SAVE AND COMPRESS function frees up system memory.

Save Save and Compress

40  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.3.9.2 Saving file-specific data NDW and NPL files are only saved when the file is closed and Allplan asks you to confirm whether you wish to save it, possibly also requesting that you specify a storage location. When you are working with these files, you must save them yourself. When one of the two save tools is performed for a document for the first time, the system opens the default dialog box for saving files. Unlike for project-specific documents, there is no auto-save tool. Save Save and Compress

ƒƒ SAVE saves the opened document and overwrites the existing file. The UNDO list is not deleted while the document is still open. ƒƒ SAVE AND COMPRESS saves the open document, overwrites the existing file, and deletes the UNDO list. The file size is reduced in the same way as when closing the document.

2.3.10 Restoring files using *.bak files During some actions, backup files are created automatically (depending on the option settings – see 4.1.2 Settings and explanations on options) in Allplan that contain the original content of the drawing files/layouts. Only one backup file is ever saved. This means that in the case of repeat copying to a drawing file, only the last action is saved. Backup files are created during the following operations: Copy/move ­elements between ­documents Delete Document Import

ƒƒ COPY/MOVE ELEMENTS BETWEEN DOCUMENTS (see chapter 2.4.3, Moving/copying elements between documents) ƒƒ DELETE DOCUMENT ƒƒ Before data import using IMPORT (see chapter 4.5, Data exchange: importing/exporting) ƒƒ Before execution of the IMPORT DRAWING FILES AND LAYOUTS WITH RESOURCES TO PROJECT function (see chapter 4.5.1.6, Exchanging Allplan data (import/export)) NOTE: As considerable amounts of data can be generated by the *.bak

files, it may make sense to delete these in the project, at least once the project has come to an end. A backup copy more than a few days old will rarely contain useful data.

System description – restoring *.bak files The method for restoring files is relatively simple, but the instructions should be followed to avoid losing data if the restored file does not contain the expected data. hh Find out which drawing file or layout is to be restored. Make a note of the drawing file or layout number – e. g. drawing file 123 or layout 7. hh Find the project folder on the hard disk. The project folder can be found under OPEN PROJECT for the selected project at the bottom of the screen (see chapter 2.3.1, Open project) hh Close Allplan or switch projects to make sure the file you want to restore is not open.

2.4 Copying between files 41

hh Open the project file via Windows Explorer hh Rename the drawing plan or layout by adding a prefix or suffix (“old” or similar) – e. g. drawing file: tb000123.ndw or layout: pb000007.npl. hh Remove file extension *.bak for the file – e. g. change drawing file: tb000123.ndw.bak to tb000123.ndw or layout: pb000007.npl.bak to pb000007.npl hh Open the project and check the restored content.

■■2.4 Copying between files Allplan provides different options for copying data to other drawing files, from one layout to another or within a drawing file or layout. Each procedure has advantages and disadvantages and different areas of use, and you should evaluate the benefits for your own work.

2.4.1 Copying within the building structure Within the building structure, you have the option to copy the selected drawing file (or several drawing files, or entire structural levels). All data is duplicated, including the plane assignment. The tool described for copying drawing files can ONLY be found in the building structure.

Copy individual drawing file hh Open on a project-specific basis hh Select drawing file to be copied hh Shortcut menu → COPY hh Select structural level under which you wish to insert the drawing file. hh Shortcut menu → PASTE UNDER OR PASTE BEHIND

Open on a project-specific basis

42  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

The top of the dialog box displays the structural level that the drawing file comes from. The list displays all drawing files selected for copying. Allplan determines the next drawing file number that is not used or assigned, as a proposal for the drawing file to be inserted. NOTE: When copying a drawing file to another structural level, the planes

from the original structural level are assigned to the drawing file. If required, planes must be reassigned. hh Insert from drawing file number: → Specify drawing file

If necessary, the plane settings and the names of the drawing files should both be changed. The ASSIGN PLANES and RENAME tools are in the shortcut menu for the drawing files. For structural levels, the system copies all subordinate structural levels and the drawing files they contain. You can therefore copy an entire building with all subordinate stories/ partial stories in a single operation. Instead of all the data, it is also possible to copy only the structure, if you select the INSERT STRUCTURAL LEVEL WITHOUT DRAWING FILES button.

2.4.2 Copying within the layout structure Much like drawing files, it is possible to copy layouts within the layout structure. Unlike with drawing files a layout can be selected as the destination when copying layouts. The content of the source layout is copied to the (empty!) layout.

Copy layout Layout Editor Open on a project-specific basis

hh Layout Editor hh Open on a project-specific basis hh Select layout to be copied hh Shortcut menu → COPY hh Select the structural level beneath which you wish to insert the layout, or select an empty layout to which you want to copy the content of the source layout. hh Shortcut menu → PASTE If you selected an empty layout as the destination, then all data are copied to the layout. If you selected a structural level, the system displays a similar dialog box to that used for copying within the building structure, proposing the next available layout as the desti­ nation. The system copies all layout information, including the layout attributes. If the layout was configured so that the layout number appears in the layout header, the new layout number (file number) is displayed in the copy.

2.4 Copying between files 43

For structural levels, all lower-level structural levels are copied together with the layouts and linked layouts they contain. An entire section of the layout structure can be copied together with all subordinate levels in one operation. Instead of all the data, it is also possible to copy only the structure, if you select the INSERT STRUCTURAL LEVEL WITHOUT LAYOUTS button.

2.4.3 Moving/copying elements between documents If you only want to move or copy individual elements to another drawing file or layout, then the COPY/MOVE ELEMENTS BETWEEN DOCUMENTS tool is ideal. When editing the current drawing file (model), you can choose between different methods with or without the building structure/with or without displaying the destination drawing file. When editing the current layout (paper space), the system always creates a copy of the elements and the destination layout is selected via the layout structure.

Copying between documents with display hh Copy/move elements between documents hh Activate the DISPLAY DESTINATION DRAWING FILE option hh Select with building structure, COPY option hh The system displays the SELECT DESTINATION DRAWING FILE dialog box. hh Select drawing file and confirm

Copy/move ­elements between ­documents

44  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

The original is displayed on the left and the destination drawing file is displayed on the right. hh Select the elements you would like to copy on the left-hand side. hh Place the data wherever you wish to move it on the right. hh Press to quit the tool. You can use the DISPLAY DESTINATION DRAWING FILE option to place data anywhere on the destination drawing file regardless of the coordinates. Architectural elements that are associated with planes are linked with the planes of the destination drawing file. The Z coordinates and height of the components are also changed, if necessary.

Copying between documents without display Copy/move ­elements between ­documents

hh Copy/move elements between documents hh Select with building structure, COPY option hh The system displays the SELECT DESTINATION DRAWING FILE dialog box. hh Select destination drawing file and confirm hh Either select ALL in Entry Options or select the elements you wish to copy The data are copied immediately. You can use Allplan selection tools (see section 2.10.4, Selecting elements) to select several elements to be copied. The copied data are on the same X/Y coordinates as in the original drawing file. Architectural elements that are associated with planes are linked with the planes of the destination drawing file.

2.4.4 Copying using the Clipboard Copy Cut Paste Paste to Original Position

The Clipboard provides another way of copying data to another drawing file or layout. The Clipboard provides the only way of copying data to or from custom NDW files and/or NPL files. You can use the following four tools when working with the Clipboard. You use them in much the same way as you would in other Windows-based programs. You can also use the PASTE TO ORIGINAL POSITION to copy or move data while retaining the coordinates.

Copy/move between documents with the Clipboard hh Select elements (without active tool) hh COPY OR CUT (use CUT to move) hh Switch drawing file (destination drawing file) hh Paste

2.5 Storage locations and other data types 45

hh Select position to paste to Or: hh Paste to original position hh Elements are moved to the same coordinates as in the original. If copying architectural components with height assignment to planes, then these adopt the planes from the destination drawing file. The component height and the Z-axis position can therefore differ from the original.

2.4.5 Copying within a drawing file/layout The description above relating to copying elements using the clipboard can also be used to copy elements during editing of a drawing file/layout. However, note here that e. g. labels and dimension lines cannot be copied without their associated components, as otherwise relationships could be lost. It is better to use the COPY function (Edit toolbar) to copy data within a drawing file/­ layout, and the MOVE function to move components or the special functions available in the individual modules.

■■2.5 Storage locations and other data types Allplan manages all data via a separate (clearly structured) system. Depending on the data type, you can save the files in different locations. An overview of the possible data types and their storage locations can be found in chapter 2.6.3, Where to find which data type – overview table.

2.5.1 Predefined storage locations Predefined storage locations are only specified in Allplan with the corresponding names. When performing everyday tasks, it is not necessary to know where in the network the data is stored in order to work with it. In an unfamiliar desktop environment, you can work without any knowledge of the infrastructure (dispensing with time-consuming training periods). NOTE: In the case of workgroup installations, additional directories (com-

puters) can be included for storing projects and user directories in addition to the central file directory on the server.

46  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Office OFFICE represents the storage location for all resources that are accessible and standard-

ized for all users in the network. ƒƒ Storage location: Central file directory in the \STD sub-directory. NOTE: When installing without workgroups, every user can save and delete

data as required under OFFICE. In a system installed with Workgroup ­Manager, only users with SYSADM authorizations can save and delete data in the OFFICE path.

Project PROJECT is the storage location for all project-specific data and resources that can (and

should) only be accessed while working on the project. ƒƒ Storage location: Central file directory in the \PRJ\[PROJECT DIRECTORY] sub-directory. NOTE: Saving and deleting data in the PROJECT path is always permitted

for all users who have been granted authorization to work in the project.

Private (user directories) PRIVATE is the storage location for user-specific settings and private projects.

ƒƒ Storage location for standalone installations or network installations without a workgroup: Central file directory in subdirectory \USR\LOKAL ƒƒ Storage location for network installation with workgroup (server): Central file directory in subdirectory \USR\[USER NAME] NOTE: The PRIVATE path is computer-specific for installations without

Workgroup Manager and user-specific for installations with Workgroup Manager.

2.5.2 General storage locations Options

When you select OPTIONS – SAVE in the desktop environment, you can choose different directories for different Allplan file types. The selected storage locations are proposed every time you open the SAVE dialog box and the OPEN FILE dialog box for the corresponding file type. The following storage locations can be defined: ƒƒ PROJECT → Current project (not for NDW and NPL files).

2.5 Storage locations and other data types 47

ƒƒ PRIVATE → User’s private project. ƒƒ FREE → The path is freely definable. The BROWSE column displays three dots. You can define the path here. ƒƒ LAST → The system proposes the last selected path.

2.5.3 Favorites Favorites can be saved/read in many places throughout Allplan. They can be used to standardize settings for options, components or element definitions, or to save desktop environments.

Save favorites file Open favorites file

Favorites – Properties palette The settings are saved in a non-component-specific *.prop file. The LOAD and SAVE tools are only available for components whose properties are displayed in the palette. You can also use the properties palette to create favorites for lines, hatchings and similar.

Favorites – component and element-specific Favorites can be saved for nearly all components, as well as dimension lines and texts. In some places it is also possible to save partial settings (e. g. just the finish for rooms). The files are assigned unique, component/element-specific extensions and can only be used in the relevant dialog boxes.

Favorites – display Display favorites make it easy to save and restore screen settings up to and including setting layer visibility and drawing types. You can use display favorites to display different work scenarios (e. g. working drawing, detailed design, draft, etc.). See “screen display tools” in chapter 2.7.4, Display in the design and animation windows, for a more detailed description.

Save display favorite Read display favorite

48  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

■■2.6 ProjectPilot – data management ProjectPilot

Cross-project data is managed in the ProjectPilot data management tool. This tool can only manage data from Allplan. You can use ProjectPilot to copy or move most Allplan data types (projects, drawing files, icons, lists, label styles, etc.) between different projects. It is not possible to activate Allplan in your desktop environment when you are working in ProjectPilot. You are returned to Allplan when you exit ProjectPilot. You always need ProjectPilot when you need to move and/or copy data from one project to another. You also need ProjectPilot in order to copy resources (e. g. from DEFAULT to OFFICE or PRIVATE).

2.6.1 ProjectPilot interface

Overview of menus and tools FILE menu ƒƒ NEW  PROJECT starts the wizard for creating a new project (see chapter 4.1.1, New

­project . . .). ƒƒ EXIT closes ProjectPilot, allowing you to continue working in Allplan. VIEW menu

You can use the items in the VIEW menu to configure the way ProjectPilot looks to meet your requirements. Displaying large drawing files or layouts can slow down the system. In this case, select NONE under PREVIEW. New Project

ƒƒ NEW PROJECT starts the wizard for creating a project.

2.6 ProjectPilot – data management  49

Left window The left window displays your projects, the external path, the office directory, the private directory and the Allplan default. See section 2.5, Storage locations and other data types, for a description of the paths. Click on the plus sign in front of the individual sub-items (or double click on the structure node itself) to expand the sub-hierarchies.

Right window (top) The window on the right displays the documents/sub-folders for the item selected in the window on the left. You can click on the corresponding column heading to sort the displayed documents/subfolders according to the corresponding column value.

Right window (bottom) – preview window The preview window displays a preview of the currently selected document. Layouts and drawing files are displayed in the preview window. Other data types have no preview and cannot be displayed in ProjectPilot. You navigate in the preview window in much the same way as in a drawing file. For example, you can left click to open a zoom window, double click with the middle mouse button to display everything, or use the number keys to change the perspective. The drawing file display reacts based on which layers are currently set as visible in Allplan.

2.6.2 Tree structure PROJECTS lists all projects for which the logged in user is the owner or for which that

user has edit rights. Projects are assigned different icons, depending on whether the project is available, being edited, locked or unavailable/saved elsewhere. Icon

Meaning Project can be edited. Project cannot be accessed. Either the project folder has been deleted in Windows, or the computer on which the project is saved is currently unavailable via the ­network. Project checked out. The project is on a computer in the workgroup that is currently checked out. You can view an information box that displays the note entered when it was checked out. Project is locked. Project is in use. The project is from an earlier Allplan version. To use projects of this kind in ProjectPilot, you need to convert them to the current version first. To do this, open the project in question in the current Allplan version or use the tools in the SERVICES application (FILE menu).

Projects

50  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

The PROJECT, OFFICE, PRIVATE, STANDARD and EXTERNAL menu items have the following sub-items with their own assigned content and sub-structures. The area in which you can find the individual data types is displayed at the end of the overview. Filesets

Assigned drawing files

Fileset →

Drawing files

Drawing file (drawing files in use)

Layouts

Layout

Fonts folder

Nemetschek font files

Project organizations

Project structures

Hatching folder

Hatching

Patterns folder

Pattern

Symbol folder

Symbol files

Symbol

Text symbol folder

Text symbol files

Text symbol

Smart symbols folder

Smart symbol files

Smart symbol

Smart formwork symbol

Smart formwork symbol files

VTB folder

VTB files

VTB

Smart fit folder

Smart fit files

Smart fit

Lists/schedules folder

List files

Lists

Legends folder

Legends files

Document legend

Smart formwork symbol

2.6.3 Where to find which data type – overview table For various reasons, the different data types are not allowed everywhere. Also, the STANDARD directory has almost every data type, although the symbols in this directory cannot be managed in ProjectPilot, for example. Project

Office

Private Standard

External path

yes

no

no

no

yes

yes

no

no

no

yes

yes

no

no

no

yes

2.7 The Allplan Interface 51

Project

Office

Private Standard

External path

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

Ja

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

Office/project yes

yes

yes

yes

Office/project yes

yes

yes

yes

Office/project yes

yes

yes

yes

no

yes

yes

yes

no

no

yes

yes

yes

no

no

yes

yes

yes

yes

no

yes

yes

yes

yes

2.6.4 Using ProjectPilot ProjectPilot works in much the same way as Windows Explorer. However, data can only be moved or copied to a folder intended for the data type in question (a drawing file ­cannot be moved or copied to the SYMBOLS folder, for example).

■■2.7 The Allplan Interface The Allplan user interface is divided into the workspace and the toolbars positioned around or over the workspace. More or less icons appear, depending on which module is currently active.

52  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.7.1 Icons – cross-module similarities Allplan has many different tools for creating and changing elements and their properties. All Allplan icons follow certain fundamental rules. An icon will either contain a single symbol (e. g. Delete, Change, Line, Wall, etc.), or it will be composed of different elements. The tools within a family of modules generally look similar. Either they use the same color scheme, as in the following modules: . . . DRAFT → Blue E. g. LINE, RECTANGLE, . . . 3D MODELING → Gray E. g. SPHERE, BOX,

CIRCLE,

SPLINE,

RULED SOLID,

. . . SCAN → Turquoise E. g. LINK WITH SCANNED IMAGE,

MERGE SOLIDS, etc.

COPY IMAGE,

. . . WALLS, OPENINGS, COMPONENTS → Yellow E. g. WALL, STRIP FOUNDATION, DOOR . . . ROOMS, SURFACES, STORIES → Red E. g. ROOM, VERTICAL SURFACE,

PARALLELS LINES, etc.

MOVE, etc.

RESTORE 3D VIEW, etc.

GROUP ROOMS/STORIES, etc.

and/or a common element that is also found in al the tools of the same module, as in the following modules: . . . TEXT → The letter A E. g. HORIZONTAL TEXT,

TEXT LEADER,

CHANGE TEXT, etc.

. . . DIMENSION LINE → A dimension line E. g. DIMENSION LINE, DELETE DIMENSION LINE POINT, SION LINE, etc. . . . STAIR → A depiction of stairs E. g. STRAIGHT FLIGHT, STAIRS WIZARD,

MODIFY EXTEN-

SPIRAL STAIR, etc.

Also, certain elements are repeated in the icons in order to indicate a tool. The following icons recur in the module-specific tools: Main tool DELETE

Examples DELETE DIM. LINE POINT DELETE SECTION OF LINEAR COMPONENT

CHANGE FORMAT PROPERTIES

MODIFY POINT EDIT TEXT

OPTIONS IN FUNCTIONS CHANGE FORMAT PROPERTIES

CHANGE ARCHIT. PROPERTIES MODIFY DIM. LINE

2.7 The Allplan Interface 53

The following applies: ƒƒ DELETE is included if elements (within modules, just those in the corresponding module) can be fully or partially deleted. ƒƒ MODIFY is only included in tools if they significantly change geometries. ƒƒ Modify and the main icons for OPTIONS are included in tools that can be used to change the parameters of an element.

2.7.2 Allplan program interface The Allplan program interface consists of toolbars and information lines that are always present, as well as toolbars that can be activated or deactivated.

2.7.2.1 User interface fundamentals Title bar The title bar of the main window in Allplan displays the program version (Allplan 2012), the current project Allplan 2012 Practical Manual and information on the currently loaded documents.

Menus The menus are located at the top border of the Allplan window. These menu items include all the tools you can select using the toolbars.

Dialog line

Although the dialog line can be hidden, this is not advisable since Allplan communicates with the user via the dialog line. You can also use VIEW → TOOLBARS to define whether the system displays the dialog line with tool names. The dialog line is displayed differently, depending on the mode Allplan is currently in.

Status bar The status bar is positioned at the lower edge of the main window in Allplan. It displays information on the drawing file/layout/NDW/NPL can be changed to a certain extent. ƒƒ MODE displays the type of entry Allplan expects.

54  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

ƒƒ DRAWING TYPE is the display/selection field for the drawing type currently applied to the screen display. You can choose between the SCALE DEFINITION drawing type where all line styles and style areas react to a change in the reference scale, or you can use the drawing types available in the project. ƒƒ SCALE is the display/selection field for the drawing file scale. NOTE: As an alternative to the configuration options in the status bar, you

can also configure the unit and the default for the angle in the desktop environment options.

ƒƒ LENGTH is the display/selection field for the unit. You can change the unit at any time. When a change is made, all input fields are adjusted to the new unit (see also section 2.9, User entries). ƒƒ ANGLE displays the system angle for the drawing file, and changes it, if necessary. If rad is selected as the angle unit, the displayed value is based on a circle of 1 meter diameter. ƒƒ DEG is the display/selection field for the unit with which angles are displayed or entered. (DEG → circle divided into 360°, GON → circle divided into 400°, RAD → radian in m). See 4.1.2.1, Desktop environment options. ƒƒ % displays the memory usage (reserved for Allplan).  The display depends on the size of the drawing file, the data it contains, as well as the configured maximum size for the drawing file (see section 9.1, Services application – fundamentals).

Shortcut menu Allplan provides shortcut menus throughout the application. The system generates the appropriate shortcut menu, depending on the elements over which the crosshairs (cursor) are positioned. Allplan also differentiates between elements that can be edited and those that cannot.

2.7.2.2 Palettes Palettes can be freely assigned. Palettes can either be organized into tabs, called via a selection icon or positioned next to each other, as required. VIEW menu → Toolbars Modules

ƒƒ The MODULES palette opens a tree structure with all installed modules, from which you can select the module you wish to work with. You can use the shortcut menu to control how the lines and icons are displayed As soon as you select another module here, the module specific toolbars and the TOOLS palette change.

2.7 The Allplan Interface 55

ƒƒ The PROPERTIES palette displays the properties for the selected elements. These can be changed directly in the palette. Not all elements (e. g. complex elements such as architectural components) can be displayed. These are grayed out in the selection menu. For many elements, settings can be made when entering settings in the PROPERTIEs palette. ƒƒ ZOOM TO ACTIVE OBJECT changes the active window so that the active object fills the display area.

ƒƒ The TOOLS palette provides a clear overview of all tools. You can use the drop-down menu to choose the module area (general modules, additional modules . . .), and then the module (design, dimension line, text . . .), you wish to work with. Changing modules via the TOOLS palette also changes the module-dependent toolbars. ƒƒ FIND opens a dialog box which you can use to search for tools across all modules.

ƒƒ The WIZARD palette opens and manages the wizards in Allplan. The wizards make it easy to use template files containing predefined elements and components. When using wizards, as many tools as possible are called via the wizard’s components. This means it is not necessary to configure materials, format properties, etc. It is not possible to change the supplied wizards and groups.

NOTE: Just like the wizards supplied by Nemetschek, the wizards for this

book are stored locally in the ETC folder.

Properties

Zoom to active ­object

Tools

Find

Wizard

56  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.7.2.3 Toolbars ƒƒ Module-dependent

toolbars (e. g. Create, Design) display all the tools in the active module. It is possible to switch between modules, either via the Modules palette, by activating a tool, or by selecting the icon for a module icon in a separate toolbar. ƒƒ Toolbars with basic tools, such as OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS, LAYOUT MANAGER, OPTIONS, MEASURE, COPY, MOVE and similar, are assigned to static toolbars. These can always be displayed in the same format and should also be shown on-screen when the function call is to be made primarily via the Tools and/or Wizard palettes. ƒƒ Toolbars like BASIC TOOLS, that contains basic tools from DRAFT, TEXT, DIMENSION LINE, LAYOUT EDITOR and EDIT, as well as the module-dependent flyouts CREATE, CREATE II and CHANGE. This area contains collections of the most important tools for various different application groups. To open the flyout, first click on the first icon and, when the flyout opens, move the cursor over the required tool while keeping the left mouse button down. The system activates the tool over which the cursor is positioned when you release the mouse button.

2.7.2.4 Predefined user interface configurations Allplan provides you with a choice of user interface configurations. Each configuration is tailored to the needs of a particular user group. You will find the standard interfaces under VIEW → STANDARD CONFIGURATION. In all configurations, you can set up shortcut keys under VIEW → TOOLBARS → CUSTOM.

2.7 The Allplan Interface 57

ƒƒ DEFAULT ARRANGEMENT – CLASSIC In the default configuration CLASSIC, the toolbars are positioned on all four edges of the screen and the position of the MODULE palette is fixed. Different icons are displayed in the toolbars, depending on the module you select.

ƒƒ PALETTE CONFIGURATION The palettes for TOOLS, PROPERTIES and ­ IZARDS are docked, one after the other, on the W left-hand side of the screen. The modules are ­activated in the TOOLS palette.

ƒƒ CONFIGURATIONS SPECIFIC TO MODULE  ­FAMILIES (E. G. ARCHITECTURE CONFIGURATION)

The toolbars and their flyouts are arranged on the left-hand side. The flyouts contain the most frequently-used tools. The central area also contains three flyouts that change when you change module.

58  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.7.2.5 Downstream functions in dialog boxes Many dialog boxes provide almost identical tools. They are used in the same way everywhere. Match

file

Save favorites Open favorites file

ƒƒ MATCH temporarily hides the currently opened dialog box so that you can adopt the properties of a surface element of the same type. ƒƒ SAVE FAVORITE FILE/OPEN FAVORITE FILE opens the standard dialog box for reading and saving the standard settings of the component. It is only ever possible to access favorites of the same type.

2.7.3 Viewports – workspace Allplan offers different predefined viewport arrangements for you to work with. All viewports have one toolbar in which you can configure the perspective and the navigation mode, for example. When Allplan is in LAYOUT EDITOR mode, only one viewport can be opened. The tools that divide the screen into several viewports are deactivated.

Default viewport arrangements (selection) New viewport

1 viewport 2 viewports 3 viewports 4 viewports 2 +1 animation ­window

ƒƒ NEW VIEWPORT creates an additional display viewport that is maximized when you have just a single viewport and positioned in the middle of the screen when you are using several viewports. ƒƒ 1  VIEWPORT is the default setting. When you encounter display problems that you ­cannot solve in any other way, choose the 1 VIEWPORT tool. ƒƒ 2 VIEWPORTS, 3 VIEWPORTS, 4 VIEWPORTS and other tools divide the viewport up as indicated by the icon. The plan view is always on the right of the screen. The other viewports each have fixed default perspective settings/view settings. ƒƒ 2 + 1 ANIMATION WINDOW divides the screen into three viewports. The viewport in the top left corner is opened as the animation window.

Tools in the Viewport toolbar In every viewport (including the animation) tools are positioned either at the lower edge (default) or the top of the viewport. The position of the toolbar can be changed via VIEW → TOOLBARS → DISPLAY WINDOW TOOLBAR IN THE TOP BORDER. All the tools in the Viewport toolbar only affect how the data are displayed. They have no effect on the actual designs. Refresh

Zoom section Pan

ƒƒ REFRESH changes the display scale so that all visible elements in the document are displayed in full. If the viewport is fixed in position with SAVE, LOAD VIEW, this view is displayed. ƒƒ ZOOM SECTION zooms in on a section. To do this, press and hold down the left mouse button and enclose the elements you want to zoom in on in a selection rectangle. ƒƒ PAN pans the section that is visible in the active viewport by a vector you specify. To enter a vector, press and hold down the left mouse and then drag. You can also pan in

2.7 The Allplan Interface 59

the active viewport by pressing and holding down the middle mouse button and then dragging. Alternatively, use the cursor keys. ƒƒ REGEN regenerates the display in the corresponding design viewport. The display scale is not changed. ƒƒ REDUCE VIEW, ENLARGE VIEW incrementally reduces or enlarges the selection. The display scale is doubled or halved with each step. The screen contents are recalculated. ƒƒ SCROLL LEFT, RIGHT, UP, DOWN moves the view for the current viewport by a quarter of the viewport size in the corresponding direction. ƒƒ STANDARD VIEWS is used to select the view type for the corresponding design viewport. You can also set the standard views by pressing and holding down the CTRL key and pressing a number key on the number pad. ƒƒ You can use 3D VIEW to make any required settings for the selected viewport. You can use the folder icon to reimport the settings saved with the SAVE, LOAD VIEW TOOL.

ƒƒ NAVIGATION MODE changes the interpretation of mouse movement for the viewport to or from SPHERE OR CAMERA MODE. By default, it is deactivated for design viewports and activated for animation windows (see section 2.9.2, Making entries using the mouse – mouse button assignments). ƒƒ PREVIOUS VIEW, NEXT VIEW returns to the previous view or calls the next one. Both functions only affect the view. No work operations are reset or restored. ƒƒ SAVE, LOAD VIEW opens a dialog box for saving and loading views. You can use this function to save various views that are often needed for the current project. As well as loading views that were saved directly using this function, you can also save views that were saved using the corresponding function under 3D VIEW. ƒƒ DISPLAY SCALE displays the current setting for the display scale and provides an input field with a drop-down menu where you can select the required display scale. The display scale is used to configure the size of the display in the design viewport. The reference scale, on the other hand, defines the scale of the design elements with reference to one another. ƒƒ ALWAYS ON TOP fixes the viewport in the foreground if there are various overlapping views. This tool is not available when the viewport is maximized. ƒƒ HIDDEN-LINE IMAGE ON/OFF shows/hides the current contents of the design viewport with hidden lines. The drawing is displayed as a hidden line image the next time you click REFRESH or REGEN or turn the mouse wheel. With the enormously improved performance of Allplan 2011 and 2012 compared to the previous versions, even less powerful computers can permanently show hidden lines without slowing down processing.

Regen Reduce View Enlarge View Scroll

3D views

Navigation mode

Previous . . . Next view Save, load view

/ Always on top (off/on) Hidden line image on/off

60  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Section display

ƒƒ SECTION DISPLAY displays an architecture section (for selection) that was defined using the SECTION LINE tool. If you also activated the HIDDEN LINE ON/OFF tool for this viewport, the hidden edges and surfaces are hidden.

View menu The VIEW menu mostly contains the tools that occur in the viewport itself, It also includes a number of additional tools that can affect how the data are displayed. ƒƒ SHOW COORDINATE SYSTEM displays a coordinate system (3D) at the bottom left of

every design viewport. This makes it easier to orientate yourself in the work area.

2.7.3.1 Design viewport Depending on the navigation mode Allplan is in, and/or the elements selected, activating a shortcut menu either displays a general shortcut menu, a shortcut menu specific to the selected element, or, if design tools are activated, a shortcut menu with point snap tools.

General shortcut menu The general shortcut menu contains the following areas: ƒƒ Tools for controlling which data are edited and how (OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS . . ., LAYOUT EDITOR and SWITCH MODULE) ƒƒ The REPEAT tool, which always displays the last command used (here: MOVE) ƒƒ The tools from the Edit toolbar (e. g. DELETE, MOVE etc.). See section 2.10.3.2, Edit toolbar. ƒƒ MODIFY FORMAT PROPERTIES and RESTORE 3D VIEW, are included to provide quick access to these frequently used tools (see 2.10.3.2, Edit toolbar) ƒƒ Two tools for starting the animation window. ƒƒ The tools LINK WITH SCANNED IMAGE for saving scanned layouts, LIST DEFAULT PLANES (see section 2.12.1, Plane – basic terms) for quick access to the plane model, SELECT, SET LAYERS for setting the visible layers (see section 2.13, Layers – the special property) as well as PROPERTIES for displaying document properties.

Shortcut menu for the Point wizard The shortcut menu for the Point wizard always appears when a tool is active in Allplan and the system requests that you enter a point when you right click in the workspace. See section 2.11.2, Shortcut menu for the Point wizard, for a description of the available tools.

2.7 The Allplan Interface 61

Shortcut menu for an existing element The shortcut menus for existing elements are each tailored to the requirements and options available for the selected element. The structure is always the same, although with different tools, and is divided into the following areas: ƒƒ Activate tool (here: LINE) to activate the tool without copying properties and the function MATCH to start the tool shown above, including copying/adopting of all properties. ƒƒ General tools in the EDIT toolbar that can be applied directly to the element. The selected element is selected as the first element when one of the tools is activated. ƒƒ Tools in the EDIT toolbar that can be applied directly to the element. The selected element is selected as the first element when one of the tools is activated. ƒƒ General tools that are available for nearly all elements for displaying and changing object attributes, for changing the visible layers (see 2.13, Layers – the special property), for changing the sequence and displaying the format properties or the properties of the selected element.

2.7.3.2 Animation window The animation window can be called by activating the 2  +  1 ANIMATION WINDOW screen arrangement, pressing the F4 shortcut key, via the general shortcut menu (entire model or selected elements), via a shortcut menu for an existing component (only selected elements) or via the tools ANIMATION WINDOW – SELECTED ELEMENTS and ANIMATION WINDOW – ENTIRE MODEL in the VIEW menu. Within the animation window, you can access the most important tools of the ANIMATION module via the shortcut menu.

Animation window, entire model Animation window – selected elements

Shortcut menu in the animation window The general shortcut menu only appears if the navigation mode is set to SPHERE OR CAMERA MODE. ƒƒ SIZE OF ANIMATION WINDOW changes the window size for the dimensions to be entered. ƒƒ ANIMATION WINDOW PROPERTIES opens an option dialog where you can configure the animation window (e. g. for mouse sensitivity and axis, display for 3D geometries). ƒƒ SET & VIEW opens a sub-menu in which you can correct/control the camera alignment. You can also use the SET & VIEW sub-menu to scroll backwards or forwards through camera positions. ƒƒ CAMERA  ROTATION can be used to rotate the model in the desired direction and speed. Press ESC to stop the rotation. ƒƒ RUN MOVIE ALONG CAMERA PATH starts a movie running along the defined camera points in the animation window.

Run movie along camera path

62  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Set camera path

Surface settings

ƒƒ SET CAMERA PATH is used to set and change the camera paths that make it easy to create movies in Allplan. Camera paths are taken into account when exporting to a C4D file, for example. ƒƒ SURFACE SETTINGS defines a surface setting for the animation for every pen color. You can thus use this tool to combine groups of elements and quickly change their surface setting for the animation. For a colored layout output, you can restrict the method using the pen color. In these cases you use CUSTOM SURFACES. You can select from all 256 possible pen colors. You can either activate this tool using the icon in the corresponding module or via the shortcut menu for the animation window. ƒƒ CUSTOM SURFACE PROPERTIES displays the settings for the animation surface of the selected component.

More Tools Animation settings

Set Up Lights

Render Record movie Record sun study

ƒƒ ANIMATION SETTINGS is used to access the settings in the animation window. It includes settings such as textures and mist, or whether architecture surfaces (room finish) are displayed in the animation window. ƒƒ SET UP LIGHTS opens the definition dialog box for setting and managing the animation lighting sources. The settings apply to all animation windows. ƒƒ RENDER opens the dialog box for setting and calculating everything from simple to photo-realistic photos. ƒƒ RECORD MOVIE starts recording a movie following the course of the camera, when further settings are made. ƒƒ RECORD SUN STUDY calculates the path of the sun and provides either a film or individual pictures as the result.

2.7 The Allplan Interface 63

2.7.4 Display in the design and animation windows Various settings govern how elements and components are displayed in the Allplan design viewports. ƒƒ The pen settings and the selected reference scale define the actual thickness of the created lines. Alternatively, this can also be configured in the screen display itself. ƒƒ Style areas can be defined so that they react either to the reference scale of the drawing file or to the drawing type. ƒƒ Whether elements are displayed can either be defined in the layer visibility (and plot sets) or regulated directly in various basic elements. ƒƒ DRAWING TYPE, SCALE apply to all active drawing files. If you change the scale here, then the reference scale is reset in the current drawing file. It is not possible to change the reference scale within the layout editor. ƒƒ SET LAYER, PLOTSET, PRIVILEGE SET are used to show/hide (and also lock) elements in the loaded drawing files over their layer (see section 2.13, Layers – the special property).

Screen display tools ƒƒ SHOW/HIDE is used to define whether elements and components are displayed in the design viewport. It is possible to hide entire element groups and/or change basic settings. ƒƒ SAVE DISPLAY FAVORITE opens a dialog box via which you can save a display favorite composed of the current screen display, the settings for the privilege set, plot set and drawing type, as well as the reference scale for the drawing file. You can use the SETTINGS tool to select whether all pos­ sible settings or just some of them are saved. ƒƒ LOAD DISPLAY FAVORITE opens the file selection dialog box via which you can import the favorites saved in SAVE DISPLAY FAVORITE. You can either load all settings from the favorites file or use the SETTINGS tool to define which saved settings are loaded.

Reference scale and drawing type Allplan provides two options for displaying lines and surface elements dynamically. The user decides how to use/combine them.

Show/hide

Save display favorite

Retrieve display ­favorite

64  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

ƒƒ REFERENCE SCALE specifies the scale the user wishes to use during design work. Throughout the drafting process, it governs the true proportions of fixed settings (such as the text height, dimension lines, patterns, hatching . . .) relative to the object displayed on the screen. Every drawing file can have its own reference scale. As soon as several drawing files are displayed together, the reference scale of the currently active drawing file is used to display all drawing files. In other words, if you have activated a site plan (incl. texts) and also have a plan view (incl. texts and dimensioning) opened in reference mode in the background, the display is uniform. The reference scale is always active. Reference scale dependencies cannot be capped or deactivated.

ƒƒ DRAWING TYPE switches between different displays e. g. for working drawing and application plan. In this way, an area style with drawing type WORKING DRAWING can be displayed in red, and one with drawing type APPLICATION PLAN can be displayed with hatching. You can also use the drawing type to define line thickness. If drawing type is selected, the display used is based on the selected reference scale.

Layers Select Layer

The visibility of layers (elements should be created in layers) can be defined in the SELECT, SET LAYERS dialog box or via the MODIFY LAYER STATUS tool. Every status change for a layer is reflected in all loaded drawing files. The visibility of elements in drawing files open in edit or reference mode is also affected. The Standard layer is always visible and cannot be hidden. We recommend modifying elements created in this layer. NOTE: Layer is one of the format properties of an element. You can use

layers to control the line display for the element itself as well as its visibility during data processing and in the printout. Current

ƒƒ CURRENT can only be activated for one layer. New elements are created in this layer. If no tool is active, the standard layer should be set as the active layer, where possible.

2.7 The Allplan Interface 65

ƒƒ MODIFIABLE means that no new elements are created in the layer but all actions are possible in the existing element. ƒƒ VISIBLE, FROZEN means that the layer is visible, but the elements cannot be edited. To ensure a clearer overview, it makes sense to color-code the locked layers. Interactions between components (e. g. room and wall) are retained. A message appears if locked components need to be changed. ƒƒ HIDDEN, FROZEN means that all elements created in this layer are hidden. Interactions between components (e. g. room and wall) are retained. A message appears if locked components need to be changed.

Modifiable Visible, frozen

Hidden, frozen

2.7.5 Display in layout window The area for layout output with display in the layout window (Layout Editor) has been completely overhauled in Allplan 2011. As well as improvements and additions to existing tools, changes were made to the display of the layout in the layout window, in particular.

New feature in V2011

The layout window is now divided into three sections. The white section displays the area that will appear later in the printout. Combined with the light-gray frame, it provides the configured page format for the layout. The dark-gray area is not printed out. The preview can be activated via three new tools (draft view, color plot preview and grayscale plot preview), positioned in the viewport toolbar (either at the top or the bottom). ƒƒ DRAFT VIEW is the same as the layout view in the previous versions. It is a good place to prepare a layout for printing. All elements are displayed as they will be printed. The SHOW/HIDE settings influence the visibility of elements, while definitions from the PLOT LAYOUTS tool are not taken into account. The print result can differ from the display on the screen. ƒƒ COLOR PLOT PREVIEW displays the layout as it will be printed on a color plotter. The system takes into account the definitions from the PLOT LAYOUTS tool in the SELECTION tab, as well as the PEN AND COLOR ASSIGNMENTS (SETTINGS tab). SHOW/ HIDE only has three more options, and construction lines and other unprintable lines are hidden automatically. The COLOR PLOT PREVIEW is ideal for checking and formatting layouts with colors that must be printed in printers and plotters. ƒƒ GRAYSCALE PLOT PREVIEW displays the layout as it will be printed on a grayscale output device. The system takes into account the definitions from the PLOT LAYOUTS tool in the SELECTION tab, as well as the PEN AND COLOR ASSIGNMENTS (SETTINGS tab), although the colors are converted into grayscale. SHOW/HIDE only has three more options, and construction lines and other unprintable lines are hidden automatically. TIP: To make it possible to work in both preview modes (Color Plot and

Grayscale Plot), the system displays elements that are positioned outside the layout sheet, uses the activation and selection color; and displays the margins for the output device (when activated in Show/Hide).

Draft view

Color plot preview

Grayscale plot ­preview

66  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

■■2.8 Adapting the interface to your own requirements The Allplan interface can be adapted to your individual requirements. For most tools you can create new toolbars or set your own shortcuts (with and without selection icon), for example. Toolbars and palettes can also be docked onto all four screen edges and/or moved to a second screen. You can also create any number of wizards and import them into the WIZARDS PALETTE, and sort them into groups.

2.8.1 Toolbars and shortcut keys Setting shortcut keys and creating your own toolbars hh VIEW menu hh CUSTOMIZING hh TOOLBARS The CONFIGURATION dialog box opens. You can use the IMPORT, EXPORT buttons to import and export UBX files. The files contain the full interface settings. The LOAD and SAVE buttons are used to import and export the interface settings from registration. The settings are saved on a user-specific basis. You can use the CUSTOMIZE tab to search for tools from all modules and place them in new or existing toolbars. You can select different areas in CATEGORIES. This section also includes the MORE TOOLS WITHOUT ICONS option, containing many commands from shortcut menus (e. g. interface configurations).

You can select a shortcut for a tool in the lower section of the CUSTOMIZE tab. As soon as a tool is selected, its definition is displayed under EXISTING SHORTCUT.

2.8 Adapting the interface to your own requirements 67

You can create or delete your own toolbars in the TOOLBARS tab. You can configure the icon size for every toolbar individually. Palettes can be configured in the tab of the same name. As well as the settings that can be made in the shortcut menu (opened by right-clicking when the cursor is positioned over the palette), it is also possible to regulate which settings are hidden/shown.

2.8.2 Positioning toolbars and palettes Arranging toolbars Toolbars, whether they are your own ones or the standard ones, can be arranged around all four sides of the workspace or they can “float” where you choose on screen. When docked and not locked, every toolbar is shown with a bar in front of the first icon. You can use this bar to grab the toolbar and move it among the other toolbars or drag it into the workspace. Undocked toolbars can be grabbed along the top edge of the toolbar and positioned wherever you wish. The size of the preview changes whenever a toolbar is moved over an area where it can be docked. Double-clicking with the left mouse button in the top window frame automatically moves the toolbar to its last docking position. NOTE: Various tools such as layer, line, pen and color use different icons

depending on whether they are docked horizontally or vertically.

Arranging palettes Like toolbars, palettes can be docked along the four edges of the design viewport or they can be made to float on top of the toolbars and design viewports. Furthermore, palettes can be minimized along the edge. To move a palette, grab either the top edge of the palette or the tab name. When there are several palettes one behind the other in tabs, then these can be moved together beyond the edge of the viewport. The possible docking positions are indicated with blue symbols. The external symbols also appear in the middle of the edges, the middle symbol is only shown when the docking position is on top of another palette and tabs can be formed. The pin in the top bar can be used to automatically hide a palette that is docked. It appears either when activated using a shortcut key, automatically for entering properties or by pointing with the mouse pointer to the corresponding text in the size selected last.

68  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.8.3 Wizards Wizard

The Allplan wizards can be used to include any number of elements and components used to call functions and/or adopt properties. Wizards make it easy to create components with the same properties, even if they contain multiple settings. The data provided with this book contains wizards that include all the most important components and settings required to follow the examples.

Creating your own wizards When creating your own wizard, you take an empty drawing file, generate all the elements you wish to include in the wizard, and then save that drawing file as a wizard. The entire process flow is as follows: hh Create elements to be included in the wizard. Make sure that all the elements have the

required properties. hh Menu FILE → SAVE COPY AS . . . Enter storage location (e. g. user directory), enter file name → select either wizard with or without resources as the file type. NOTE: Where possible, use wizards without resources and create a tem-

plate project. Wizards without resources operate without any restrictions, even if they add to your resources.

Wizard

hh Call WIZARDS PALETTE hh Shortcut menu in group selection: NEW GROUP hh Select the storage location for group definition 
(ideally the same storage location as for the wizard) and specify the group name. hh Open shortcut menu in wizard: OPEN WIZARD hh Select and confirm the wizard The wizard is loaded to the view and you can switch to it via the tab. When you have created a group, you can load any number of additional wizards. The Allplan group and other groups created by installation routines cannot be changed or added to. You can use the SAVE COPY AS DRAWING FILE . . . function to save the content of the current wizard to a destination drawing file. NOTE: Group definitions are only reimported when you start Allplan,

whereas the wizards are updated every time they are called. This means you can overwrite an existing wizard at any time and use it upon switching wizards.

2.9 User entries 69

■■2.9 User entries All entries and specifications you make in Allplan are made either via the keyboard or the mouse.

2.9.1 Making entries with the keyboard As well as the many shortcuts (defined either in the system or by you), you must also make various entries in the dialog boxes. Nearly all dialog value fields can be entered directly. Dialog fields used to fill component properties (attributes such as Name, Material, etc.) are restricted to a limited number of characters. Different restrictions apply, depending on the attribute. TIP: To get to know the program, it can sometimes be useful to create

shortcuts, like in other CAD programs. However, most training courses have shown that this is subsequently more of a hindrance than a help.

2.9.2 Making entries using the mouse – mouse button assignments Allplan provides many options and combinations using the three buttons on a normal mouse. Allplan also makes a clear distinction between different program statuses. Different functions are assigned to the mouse buttons, depending on the current status in Allplan. Some of the mouse operations are performed in conjunction with a key on the keyboard. TIP: Recommendation: When working with Allplan, use a mouse with a

scroll wheel and two other buttons. If using a mouse with more buttons, we recommend assigning additional functions (such as ) that you might require to the extra mouse buttons. If you are using an older mouse (with a scroll wheel) you should configure the mouse driver settings for the scroll wheel to . This is not necessary for current models. The following explanations for the individual mouse buttons refer to the standard mouse button assignments. The scroll wheel is configured as the .

70  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.9.2.1 No tool active

The dialog line and the status bar indicate whether no tool is active. “Click left to select . . .” is displayed in the dialog line (as shown in the picture), while the status bar displays ?Select for the mode.

Left mouse button ƒƒ CLICKING on a command icon starts the tool and/or opens a dialog box. ƒƒ CLICKING on an element selects the element. The properties of the element are displayed in the PROPERTIES palette, if it is open. If, after activating an element, you select a tool such as COPY or MOVE, the tool is

applied to the selected element and then terminates. Left clicking again on a handle activates it for modifications. ƒƒ CTRL + CLICKING on an element selects an additional element or removes an element from the selection (only if at least one element is already selected!). The cursor displays a plus/minus icon when an element is within the cross hair’s detection area. Otherwise, a Totals icon is displayed. ƒƒ SHIFT + CLICKING on an element selects elements with the same group number. ƒƒ DOUBLE CLICKING

ƒƒ on an element opens the dialog box with the element’s properties or the PROPERTIES palette (Options → Desktop environment). ƒƒ in the workspace opens the OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS dialog box. ƒƒ SHIFT + DOUBLE CLICKING on an element displays the properties of the element in the dialog box. ƒƒ CTRL + DOUBLE-CLICKING ƒƒ on an element displays the format properties of the element. These cannot be ­changed directly. ƒƒ in the workspace opens the LAYER dialog box. ƒƒ CLICKING and DRAGGING in the workspace opens a selection window with which you can select elements. Depending on your system settings and dragging direction, the selection window selects either: only the elements within the selection window; elements within the selection window and those protruding beyond the selection window; only elements protruding beyond the selection window. The properties of the elements are displayed in the PROPERTIES palette and can be changed there.

Middle mouse button – scroll wheel ƒƒ SCROLLING zooms in and out on the cursor position. Turning the wheel is a quick and

easy way to refresh the screen content.

ƒƒ DOUBLE CLICKING sets the display scale and the screen so that all the visible elements

are displayed in their entirety.

2.9 User entries 71

ƒƒ CTRL + DOUBLE CLICKING regenerates the current view. Display errors are corrected. ƒƒ CLICKING + HOLDING + DRAGGING moves the current view (panning). Instead of the cross hairs, the cursor appears as a hand icon. ƒƒ CTRL + CLICK + HOLD + DRAG starts a zoom area to maximize a section.

Right mouse button ƒƒ CLICKING 

on an element opens the shortcut menu for the element. This includes most of the tools for the element itself, as well as some general tools. When activating tools via the shortcut menu for the element, the element is automatically selected and used. For tools where several elements are selected in a row, this element is set as element 1. The general shortcut menu opens in the workspace This contains several basic tools.

ƒƒ DOUBLE CLICKING

ƒƒ in the workspace opens the LAYER dialog. Box ƒƒ on an element activates the CREATE ELEMENT tool and copies all the element’s ­properties. Use this tool if you want to draw similar elements (also when copying from the wizard). If the AUTO-SELECT MODULE option is activated in the MISC. tab in the GENERAL options, the element module is activated. ƒƒ CTRL + CLICKING  in the workspace opens the FILTER WIZARDS as a shortcut menu, including activation options (see section 3.1.2.3, Selection options).

2.9.2.2 Design tool active – point snap active

The dialog line and the status bar indicate the current program mode. When a design tool is active (or point snap for edit tools) and different input options are available, then point snap tools and point entry options are displayed in the dialog line while the status bar displays ?Pt for the mode.

Left mouse button ƒƒ CLICKING

ƒƒ on an element selects the element for the tool or places a point on the element ƒƒ on a point places the point (starting point, next point, end point . . .) for the tool.

Middle mouse button – scroll wheel Within tools, the middle mouse button behaves in the same way as when there is no active tool.

72  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Right mouse button ƒƒ CLICKING 

ƒƒ in the workspace opens the point snap shortcut menu. ƒƒ on an element opens the point snap shortcut menu. When selecting a point snap ­sub-tool, the element is positioned as the base element (element 1). ƒƒ In input fields: opens a special shortcut menu for other options in many cases.

2.9.2.3 Edit tool is active

The dialog line and the status bar indicate the current program mode. When an edit tool is active, only the name of the tool and a question are displayed. The status bar displays ?Select for “Mode:” and “B Select” when the brackets tool is also activated.

Left mouse button ƒƒ CLICKING 

ƒƒ on an element (without brackets) selects the element for the tool. The mode changes and the dialog line displays point snap tools. ƒƒ on an element (with brackets) selects/deselects the element for the tool. ƒƒ SHIFT + CLICKING on an element activates a group (same group number) for the tool. ƒƒ CLICKING and DRAGGING in the workspace opens a selection window with which you can select elements. Depending on your system settings and dragging direction, the selection window selects either: only the elements within the selection window; elements within the selection window and those protruding beyond the selection window; only elements protruding beyond the selection window. When the brackets are active, several areas can be selected. When the brackets are not activated, however, the activated elements are immediately available for the tool.

Middle mouse button – scroll wheel Within tools, the middle mouse button behaves in the same way as when there is no active tool.

Right mouse button ƒƒ CLICKING  ƒƒ in the workspace starts and ends the brackets for tools with element selection, or confirms/executes actions if the CONFIRM query appears in the dialog line. When

the brackets are activated, you can perform further actions. These are only performed when you exit (confirm). ƒƒ CLICKING in input fields opens a special shortcut menu with additional options in many cases. ƒƒ CTRL + CLICKING  in the workspace opens the FILTER WIZARDS as a shortcut menu, including activation options.

2.9 User entries 73

Mouse button combination ƒƒ MIDDLE MOUSE BUTTON + LEFT MOUSE BUTTON (on the element) activates a group

(same group number) for the tool. ƒƒ MIDDLE MOUSE BUTTON → RIGHT CLICKING ƒƒ on an element activates all elements with the same pen thickness or line type (depending on the settings made in GENERAL options, SETTINGS tab).  ƒƒ in the workspace activates/deactivates the fence.

2.9.2.4 Navigating with the sphere and camera navigation mode When the navigation mode is activated for the corresponding viewport (design viewport, default = off, animation window, default = on), the mouse button assignment changes to facilitate navigation. Movements are made by holding down the relevant mouse button and moving the mouse.

Sphere mode In SPHERE MODE (default setting), you move the camera over the surface of an imaginary sphere around the target point. The target point should be as close to the object as possible. Sphere mode is especially useful if you want to rapidly view an object from all sides. ƒƒ LEFT MOUSE BUTTON + MOVING THE MOUSE moves the camera around the object over the surface of an imaginary sphere. ƒƒ MIDDLE MOUSE BUTTON + MOVING THE MOUSE moves the camera from side to side or up and down. This moves the target point in the object (center of the sphere). ƒƒ RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON + MOVING THE MOUSE moves the camera towards or away from the object (also available in camera mode). ƒƒ TURNING THE MOUSE WHEEL moves the camera towards or away from the object (also available in camera mode).

Camera Mode In the camera mode (CTRL key held down), you control the perspective of the camera. In other words, the position of the camera (the eye point/observer) does not change. The viewing direction (the target point) changes. Camera mode is particularly suited to viewing the building from within (e. g. along a corridor, up stairs, or similar). ƒƒ LEFT MOUSE BUTTON + CTRL + MOVING THE MOUSE rotates the camera around the eye point. ƒƒ RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON CTRL + CLICK + HOLD + DRAG starts a zoom area to maximize a section. ƒƒ RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON + MOVING THE MOUSE moves the camera towards or away from the object (also available in camera mode).

Navigation mode

74  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.9.3 Activating and exiting tools 2.9.3.1 Activating a tool There are several ways you can activate a tool. Depending on how you activate a tool, either properties are adopted/used or default values are set.

Match

ƒƒ Left clicking on the icon for the tool activates the tool. Depending on the configured options in the layer selection (AUTO-SELECT LAYER WITH MENU in the LAYER/VISIBILITY tab), the system proposes a layer and (when format properties are being adopted) format properties are set. ƒƒ Activation via a defined shortcut is the same as activating the tool by clicking the relevant icon (for more information on defining shortcuts, see section 2.8.1, Toolbars and shortcut keys). ƒƒ DOUBLE CLICKING (WITH THE RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON) on an element starts the tool with which the element was created and adopts all the settings of the element. Double clicking (with the right mouse button) on a component/element in an opened wizard allows you to access identical or similar components very quickly and easily. ƒƒ The first entry in the shortcut menu for an element activates the tool in the same way as activating the tool by clicking the relevant icon in the toolbar does. In this case no properties are adopted from the existing element. ƒƒ The second entry in the shortcut menu for an element (Match) is the same as for the first line, except that all the properties of the element are copied for the new element being created.

2.9.3.2 Queries within the tool Different entries are required within every tool. The dialog line displays which entries are possible/necessary. ƒƒ DIALOG LINE listing different queries separated by a slash ( / ). You can select from different options. In the illustration here, you can either set the properties of the door, or select the exterior wall line. Depending on the tool being used, you can choose between several options. ƒƒ DIALOG LINE with point snap always appears as soon as you can (or must) specify a point in the workspace. Depending on the tool, different input fields are displayed. Many tools also provide different options when you display the point snap tools. These options are displayed in front of the input fields.

ƒƒ DIALOG LINE with queries is displayed e. g. for the toolbar tools. This is where you must identify elements or points with which you wish to execute the selected action.

2.10 Working with elements (and components) 75

2.9.3.3 Exiting tools You can exit tools in different ways: hh key hh Cancel by selecting a different tool hh Right click on a toolbar Depending on the tool, the system creates elements or completely cancels your entries.

2.9.4 Undo and redo The UNDO and REDO tools process entire actions. Many tools have their own functions for undoing individual work steps. ƒƒ UNDO is used to undo individual steps. You can also use the drop-down menu to undo several steps at a time. It is not possible to undo a previous step while also retaining a more recent step. ƒƒ REDO restores the actions deleted with UNDO. ƒƒ REPEAT can either be activated via the REPEAT menu item with a list of the most recent functions, or it can be activated from the general shortcut menu. The general shortcut menu always displays the last tool activated. ƒƒ UNDO LAST ENTRY is available in many tools and is used to undo the last action without exiting the tool.

■■2.10 Working with elements (and components) This section describes the basic properties of elements, as well as how to create and modify them. We generally use the term element to mean simple elements (such as lines, circles, etc.). I have not concentrated on distinguishing between the terms, as basic properties and functions are described later on in this book.

2.10.1 Properties of elements 2.10.1.1 Format properties As well as information on its geometry, every element also contains information on how it must be displayed. These properties can be influenced via the FORMAT toolbar or in the PROPERTIES palette during creation.

Undo Redo

Undo last entry

76  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

The first three properties (pen thickness, line type and line color) can only be changed if the CONSTRUCTION LINE property is not activated and/or the properties are not copied from the layer (line style). ƒƒ PEN THICKNESS (15 line thicknesses) determines the

line thickness in the printout. A 1-m long, 0.25 mmthick line appears to be very thin on the screen if you are using a scale of 1:1 but relatively long in a scale of 1:1000. Depending on your setting for the THICK LINE option in the SCREEN DISPLAY settings, all lines are drawn with their “true” thickness or as construction lines. If the Color stands for pen option is active, then all line thicknesses are displayed on the screen using their color coding. The color coding can be set in the OPTIONS under DESKTOP ENVIRONMENT – PEN COLORS and is user-dependent. ƒƒ LINETYPE (up to 99 linetypes can be defined) specifies the drawing rules for the line itself. In other words, this is where you define which of the defined display types (from dotted to continuous lines) are used in the lines of your component. Line types 90 to 99 are reserved for the Allplan default and cannot be changed. ƒƒ LINE COLOR  (256 predefined colors) specifies what color a line should have in the normal printout. It is important to remember that the line color can also be displayed based on the pen thickness (setting for COLOR STANDS FOR PEN option in Show/Hide). If the screen background is set as black, then color 1 is set as white. If the COLOR STANDS FOR PEN option is activated in SHOW/HIDE, then the line colors are not displayed. ƒƒ LAYER  (depending on structure size) is a hidden property. Layers can be visible for processing, visible and frozen or hidden and frozen. You can also use the layer to control the PEN THICKNESS, LINE TYPE and LINE COLOR based on the definition of the layer. ƒƒ PEN,  LINE  and  COLOR FROM LAYER. When activated, this means that the element uses the line display from the layer. If one (or all) of the three checkmarks are set, then the corresponding property is grayed out and displays the value valid for the drawing type/reference scale. ƒƒ CONSTRUCTION LINE ON/OFF toggles the drawing mode. Elements created (or changed) with the construction line are not displayed in the animation or the layout printouts. It is not possible to change the format properties PEN, LINE TYPE and LINE COLOR. All elements using construction lines are displayed via the line type and line color configured in the OPTIONS under DESKTOP ENVIRONMENT – DISPLAY. You can use the CONSTRUCTION LINE option in SHOW/HIDE to hide all elements in the construction line, regardless of the layers to which they belong. ƒƒ Sequence defines how the different elements cover one another. The sequence can be assigned values from –15 to +15, where elements with a lower value are covered by elements with higher values. Depending on the element group, different values are preconfigured to represent a functioning base. The default values can be changed in OPTIONS, under DESKTOP ENVIRONMENT → DISPLAY SEQUENCE.

2.10 Working with elements (and components) 77

ƒƒ The group number is assigned automatically when elements are created. For symbols

from the symbol catalog that are made up of several elements, the same group number is assigned to all elements. You can use entity group selection to access several elements with the same group number.

Format properties from layer Format properties from layer use the layer of the element to define the display of the element lines depending on the line style defined for the layer. Line styles can be defined via the menu EXTRAS – DEFINITIONS → LINE STYLES, SURFACE STYLES, DRAWING TYPES, and assigned to layers via the CONFIGURE LAYER dialog box (format definitions tab). ƒƒ LINE STYLE defines the format properties used to display a line, depending on the scale. This means that you can use line styles to display a line in scale 1/100 with pen 0.35, and in scale 1:50 with pen 0.50, without needing to make changes. This means, for example, that within a few seconds, the system can display the pen thicknesses for your construction project’s detailed planning, which you can then use to print a texture planning.

2.10.1.2 Other element/component properties As well as format properties, which mainly influence how lines are displayed in plan view, all components also have other properties that are listed in the examples. All 3D components and 3D elements also include additional information on how they are displayed in the animation. The display in the animation can be influenced in two different ways. The surface can either be assigned based on the pen color or directly (via CUSTOM SURFACE). ƒƒ ASSIGN CUSTOM SURFACES TO 3D/ARCHIT. ELEMENTS opens the SURFACE PROPERTIES dialog box for assigning surfaces to 3D bodies and architectural elements. You can either copy the surface from a component (pipette) or open the SURFACE PROPERTIES dialog box by clicking on the SURFACE field. You can use the button next to the dropdown menu to access all the surface files (*.surf) already defined in the project and the office. If you use a surface from the office directory in the project, this is saved in the project folder together with the texture file. The folder structure that the file comes from is recreated in the project accordingly. For simple 3D elements and 3D components, the SURFACE PROPERTY is displayed in the PROPERTIES palette and can be changed directly there. For all architecture components, the surface is also displayed in the properties of the component.

Assign custom s­ urfaces to 3D/archit. elements

78  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.10.2 Creating elements Elements and components can either be created as new elements using the tools in the CREATE toolbar, by activating the relevant tool via existing elements/components with or without copying properties, or by copying existing elements using tools in the EDIT toolbar. You can also use some of the tools in the CREATE II toolbar create elements based on existing elements (e. g. filleting two elements from the DRAFT module). Depending on the element/component, all necessary properties should be set directly upon creation. When working with Allplan, you will frequently use the same tools for creating elements. A linear component (e. g. wall, strip foundation, beams) is entered in the same way as a line, while a floor is entered in the same way as a surface element (hatching, pattern, fill).

2.10.2.1 Point elements – drop-in point/reference point The drop-in point occurs for all elements and components where a point is sufficient for defining the geometry. It is usually also possible to specify an angle into which the element is to be dropped. The process is as follows: hh Created object is in crosshairs. hh Select drop-in point in the anchor point overview (click). hh Drop object in directly, or hh Configure cursor snap in Entry Options. hh Set the focus on the cursor snap field in the dialog line using the TAB key or by clicking on the field. hh Press or ↔ to rotate the object around the drop-in point with the specified cursor snap. hh Drop in object. Partial list of elements and components for which the drop-in/reference point appears. Column

Window

Chimney

Individual foundation

Door

Post

Niche, Recess, Slit, ­Opening

Recess, Opening in Slab/ Plate, etc.

Horizontal/vertical text, Text under angle

2.10.2.2 Line elements – linear input Linear elements are derived from the input type for the line. They always follow the same schema. hh Activate tool and make settings

2.10 Working with elements (and components) 79

hh Specify start point (From point) hh Specify TO point hh Specify other points or exit using Partial list of elements and components that follow the linear element logic when created. Line

Polyline

Spline

3D Line

Planar Polygonal 3D Surfaces

Offset 3D Polyline

Wall

Beam

Strip foundation

Profile wall

Installation component

Baseboard

2.10.2.3 Surface elements – polygonal entries Polygonal elements are entered in much the same way as linear elements. The first point is always selected as the final point (alternatively, cancel the function with ) in order to indicate the end of the shape to the program. There are also various special tools for entering polygons. All the tools and options possible for entering surface elements via polygonal input, have been summarized in Allplan 2011. The ENTRY OPTIONS toolbar is divided into four areas.

Basic setting – entering surfaces The first options are required every time you enter surface elements. They only govern whether individual or several surface areas are created continuously. ƒƒ SINGLE creates individual surface elements. The element is displayed immediately when the entry has been completed, the tool remains active and it is possible to create further individual surface elements with the same configuration. ƒƒ MULTI makes it possible to create surface elements with several areas and/or recesses. When you enter the first area, the INDIVIDUAL and MULTI icons are grayed out and you can use the PLUS/MINUS functions to determine whether the next area is added (plus) or subtracted (minus) to/from the surfaces.

Polygonization settings for existing elements The 2nd area is used to control the behavior of Allplan when elements are clicked on. ƒƒ Checkbox activated The elements clicked on are polygonized as per the configured option. ƒƒ Checkbox deactivated and outline auto-detection off Only points on elements are captured without further queries (reference point entry).

Single

Multi Plus Minus

80  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

ƒƒ Checkbox deactivated and outline auto-detection on Allplan attempts to determine a minimum enclosed shape from the element clicked on and then fills it. If the software cannot find a closed outline, it only captures the point on the element. If the checkbox is deactivated (and the outline auto-detection is off), elements are ignored and only points are captured. Polygonize Entire Element

Portion of element

Entering reference points

Find closed ­polylines

ƒƒ POLYGONIZE ENTIRE ELEMENT  copies the entire element when you click on it. If the last polygon point was the start point before the element was selected, then the entire element is copied immediately. Otherwise, the start point must be defined and used to determine the direction. The start points of the elements are represented by red squares. You can use this option to capture objects such as circles, ellipses or splines in their entirety. ƒƒ PORTION OF ELEMENT adopts a portion of an element to be polygonized. After clicking on an element, the system requests a start point (only if the start point of the element is not the last polygon point) and an end point for the element area to be polygonized. You can use this option to create objects such as circles, ellipses or splines in separate areas. ƒƒ ENTER REFERENCE POINT adopts a point on the element and requires that you enter a distance to the reference point. You can click to assign a new reference point. You can use this option to specify (for all elements – including arcs) points precisely with a given distance from an end point. ƒƒ FIND CLOSED POLYLINE is used to combine areas bounded by lines and polylines to a polygon. The inner or outer boundaries are used depending on whether the temporary point is inside or outside the outline. In the polyline entry options you can define that lines of architectural elements are ignored.

Segments/rises The entered value is interpreted based on whether the circle or rise button is activated. Segments in circle

Rise

ƒƒ SEGMENTS IN CIRCLE The polygonization value is interpreted as circle segments with the same angle. A configured division of 360 (maximum value – highest precision) sets points along the surface element every 1 degree, while a division of 8 (minimum value – lowest precision) sets them at every 45 degrees. The value should be set low for small circles and high for larger circles, in order to avoid any deviations. ƒƒ RISE The polygonization value is interpreted as a maximum rise. The rise defines the maximum distance of the secant (straight line between two points of the surface element on the arc) to the arc (in mm). Then a polyline is applied to the relevant arc so that the maximum distance between the segment of the polyline and the arc is less than or equal to the value entered.

2.10 Working with elements (and components) 81

NOTE: Polygonization specifying the rise is more precise than polygoniza-

tion specifying circle segmentations. Large arcs should be polygonized with rise. If, however, you want to retain the position of the polygon points when working with circles of different sizes, you should use circle segmentation.

Rectangular surface element (edges parallel with the crosshairs) hh Select tool hh Select first polygon point (preview displays a rectangle) hh Select second polygon point (preview displays a line) hh Exit the tool with . A rectangular surface element is created.

Filling geometric shapes – option 1 hh Any outline visible in the drawing file, no “open” points hh Activate outline auto-detect hh Click on the surface to be filled (circle in crosshairs)

Outline auto-detect

Filling geometric shapes – option 2 hh Any outline visible in the drawing file, no “open” points hh Activate outline auto-detect hh Checkbox for polygonization settings deactivated hh Click edge of outline → The surface with the minimum extent is recognized and filled automatically.

2.10.3 Working with existing elements Allplan provides you with two different options for working with existing elements and components. You either activate the function first or the elements/components first. Both options are described below.

Activate function → activate elements hh Select function hh Select elements (e. g. click, specify activation range) hh Process function-specific queries (some the same or similar) hh The function remains activated and you can immediately activate further elements The advantage is that you can fully exploit the more coordinated procedure and all options when processing elements. In addition, you can use all the functions, and automatically filter many functions by certain elements only.

Outline auto-detect

82  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Activate elements → activate function hh Select elements (e. g. click, specify activation range) hh Select function hh Process function-specific queries (some the same or similar) hh The function is ended automatically, the element activation is retained and you can continue to use the activation for the next function. The advantage is a very intuitive way of working, which enables you to work more quickly at certain points. The disadvantage is that not all functions can be executed with already selected elements, and the element selection offers fewer options. TIP: Mainly use the first option (especially if you are a new user or are

switching from other programs). As a result of the more coordinated procedure, many functions are easier to learn. In addition, you get a better insight into the way Allplan works. For individual actions, such as the deletion of a text, the second option is very well suited from the start.

2.10.3.1 Modifying elements Existing elements and components can be changed in many different ways. Every module has specific tools for changing the properties of the elements and components that can be created in that module.

Making changes using the Properties palette NOTE: Properties are not yet displayed for all elements and architectural

components.

As soon as one or more elements are selected (without active tool), the properties appear in the palette of the same name. If several elements are selected, the text *varied* appears if the properties are different. You can change most of the displayed properties directly. Also, match functions (call by right clicking the lines/headings) also make it possible to copy properties from the other displayed elements. You can filter step-by-step and/or use the drop-down menu from the top of the palette to restrict the display. The lower edge of the display lists the tools for loading and saving favorites. The settings saved here are not element/component-dependent.

2.10 Working with elements (and components) 83

Changing properties via the shortcut menu Every element or component can be changed directly via its shortcut menu. The bottom end displays the FORMAT PROPERTIES and PROPERTIES tools. ƒƒ For all elements, FORMAT PROPERTIES opens a small dialog box in which you can change the PEN THICKNESS, LINE TYPE, LINE COLOR, CONSTRUCTION LINE, GROUP NUMBER, LAYER and SEQUENCE for the individual element. PEN THICKNESS, LINE TYPE and LINE COLOR cannot be selected for surface elements or with activated line style match. For most architectural components, the CONSTRUCTION LINE property cannot be set. ƒƒ ELEMENT PROPERTIES opens the dialog box for the element properties or the PROPERTIES palette (Options → Desktop environment).

2.10.3.2 Edit toolbar The EDIT toolbar contains the most important tools for changing the geometry of elements and components. Most tools can be applied to all modules and with nearly all elements and components. ƒƒ MODIFY FORMAT PROPERTIES is used to change the format properties of elements. First you must configure the format that you want to assign to the elements/components, and then you identify the components you want to change. The system only changes the element properties that are checked. The remaining format properties remain how they were before the changes. As an alternative to the MODIFY FORMAT PROPERTIES tool, you can also use the PROPERTIES palette or the CHANGE GENERAL ARCHITECTURAL PROPERTIES tool (see also section 5.1.6, Modifying properties of components). ƒƒ STRETCH ENTITIES is ideal for changing element points together. You can, for example, use a selection rectangle to select a corner of a rectangle in order to change the end points for two lines simultaneously. As well as querying FROM POINT → TO POINT, you also have the option to specify the delta value for the modification directly. To do this, you only need to enter a value in the first field in the dialog line. Allplan automatically changes the input mode. ƒƒ MIRROR creates a mirror image of the selected elements in the specified axis. If 3D elements are activated in the view, the mirror level must be defined. ƒƒ MIRROR AND COPY creates a mirrored copy of the selected elements in the specified axis. If 3D elements are activated in the view, the mirror level must be defined. ƒƒ COPY AND PASTE is used to create one or more copies. If you leave the NUMBER OF COPIES set at 1, a copy is created at the point you specify at PLACE POINT. If another number is specified, the first copy is created at PLACE POINT and the others are spaced along an imaginary line from the FROM POINT to the TO POINT. ƒƒ MOVE moves the selected elements/components via FROM POINT → TO POINT. As well as querying FROM POINT → TO POINT, you also have the option to specify the delta value for the move directly. To do this, you only need to enter a value in the first field in the dialog line. Allplan automatically changes the input mode.

Modify format ­properties

Stretch entities

Mirroring Mirror and copy Copy and paste

Move

84  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Rotate

Copy along element

Resize Delete

ƒƒ ROTATE provides you with two different basic modes. If the NORMAL option is set, the system asks you for a rotation point. If the 3D option is set, the system asks you for a rotation axis. When rotating around a rotation point, you enter the angle directly, rotate the object using START POINT → DIRECTION POINT or identify a REFERENCE LINE and a DIRECTION LINE. You can use REFERENCE LINE/DIRECTION LINE, for example, to align a cupboard with a wall at a given distance. ƒƒ COPY ALONG ELEMENT copies 2D and 3D elements along a path consisting of any 2D elements or composite elements. You can specify the offset between the elements or the number of elements. You can also rotate the elements so that they are perpendicular to the path. ƒƒ RESIZE changes the size of selected elements either via factors towards X, Y and Z, or by entering a reference length. ƒƒ DELETE deletes the selected elements from the drawing file.

2.10.4 Selecting elements With most tools for editing elements, the system requests the elements to be processed only after the function has been activated. This is because many functions have built-in filters (e. g. EDIT TEXT filters text).

Selecting a single element Select a single element by clicking on the element (see also section 2.9.2, Making entries using the mouse – mouse button assignments).

Selecting several elements You can use the brackets function as well as the selection rectangle to select more than one element (see also section 2.9.2, Making entries using the mouse – mouse button assignments).

2.10.4.1 Selection rectangle Like in Windows Explorer, you can specify an area in Allplan within which you want to select elements. In the FILTER WIZARD, you can specify whether elements are fully bounded by the region, fully bounded and intersected, or only intersected elements are selected. Select elements ­fully bounded by ­selection window Select elements f­ully bounded and ­intersected by selection window

ƒƒ SELECT ELEMENTS FULLY BOUNDED BY SELECTION WINDOW ONLY only selects elements that are fully bounded by the selection rectangle. The border of the selection area is a continuous line and a transparent blue surface indicates the area. ƒƒ SELECT ELEMENTS FULLY BOUNDED AND INTERSECTED BY SELECTION WINDOW selects the elements that are fully bounded or intersected by the selection window. The border of the selected area is a dotted line and a transparent green surface indicates the area.

2.10 Working with elements (and components) 85

ƒƒ SELECT ELEMENTS INTERSECTED BY SELECTION WINDOW ONLY only selects elements that are intersected by the selection window. The border of the selected area is a dashed line and a transparent red surface indicates the area. ƒƒ SELECT ELEMENTS BASED ON DIRECTION – The result of selection depends on the direction of the selection area. If you enter the area in a positive X direction, only fully bounded elements are activated (SELECT ELEMENTS FULLY BOUNDED BY SELECTION WINDOW ONLY). If you enter the area in a negative X direction, elements that are fully or only partially bounded are activated (SELECT ELEMENTS THAT ARE FULLY BOUNDED AND INTERSECTED BY SELECTION WINDOW). ƒƒ FENCE must be expressly activated for the current active selection. You can select any number of shaped areas by setting individual points to create a closed polygon around all the elements you wish to select. Only completely bounded elements are selected.

Select elements i­ntersected by selection window only Select elements based on direction

Fence

2.10.4.2 Brackets You can activate the brackets function by right clicking, using the TOTAL button in the filter wizard, simply by holding down the CTRL key during selection, or by right clicking in the workspace. The brackets total function can be combined with area selection (symbolized by a brackets icon in the crosshairs). See also section 2.9.2, Making entries using the mouse – mouse button assignments.

Brackets

2.10.4.3 Activating with filters Allplan uses freely-combinable filters to provide countless variations for filtering the ­elements to be processed. The Filter wizard supports you in selecting elements. The filter functions are activated when the program expects you to select elements (e. g. after selecting an edit tool). You can use the filters to restrict selection to specific types of elements or exclusively to ­elements with specific properties. The filter wizard and the FILTER STEP-BY-STEP function contain the following filters. The special filters for engineering modules are not listed. ƒƒ MATCH (FILTER) Matches all or specific properties of an element and uses this/these as the filter criteria. The crosshairs display a pipette, as soon as you are able to adopt the element properties. This is also displayed when you select the match function within a single dialog box. Possible selections include: pen thickness, line type, color, layer, group number, element, hatching number, pattern number, area number, point symbol number, digital terrain number, urban planning/landscaping, architecture, Allfa, reinforcement bar, mesh, formwork, finite elements. You can also select several element types. All filters can either filter by the items selected in the selection (condition =) or they can exclude the items selected (condition ). You can use the two buttons next to the filter to enable this.

Match

86  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

If you want to create a filter condition using different filter settings (e. g. wall with a specific line thickness), you select the different filters in order and then make the area selection. For most selection dialogs, however, multiple selection is possible.

Filter by pen Filter by line

Filter by color

Filter by layer

Filter by group ­number Filter by construction line Filter by pattern ­lines property Filter by attributes By hatching . . . By pattern . . . Filter by area style number Filter by point ­number Filter by elements

ƒƒ The FILTER WIZARD toolbar combines all filters. The filter wizard also contains all the settings for area selection. ƒƒ FILTER BY PEN filters by elements that use a specific pen. You can choose from 15 different defined pen thicknesses. You cannot restrict by the pen thickness used. ƒƒ FILTER BY LINE filters by elements that use a specific line. The system displays all defined line types (up to 99). You cannot restrict by the line thickness used. You can also select several definitions. ƒƒ FILTER BY COLOR filters by elements that use a specific color. 256 colors are available. You can use the match function to select any desired color for fills. The element color is always adopted from other elements. Thus, in the case of a hatching area with a background color, it is not the background color that is used but the pen color used for the hatching instead. ƒƒ FILTER BY LAYER filters by the layer format property. All layers in the active document and the drawing files open in edit mode are available. The selection also displays layers for which the name has been deleted. These layers are displayed with their unique ID (number). You can either recreate the layer with this information or filter by these elements. ƒƒ FILTER BY GROUP NUMBER filters elements based on the group number. In the dialog box, you can only specify whether or not filtering is performed in the same way for the group numbers to be adopted. ƒƒ FILTER BY CONSTRUCTION LINE filters for all elements with (condition =) or without (condition ) the construction line property. ƒƒ FILTER BY PATTERN LINE PROPERTY filters by elements with (ON → =) or without (OFF → ) a pattern line property. ƒƒ FILTER BY ATTRIBUTES filters by any attribute that you include either via the button at the top right of the screen or that you can copy from an element in the drawing file using MATCH. ƒƒ FILTER BY HATCHING NUMBER FILTER BY PATTERN NUMBER FILTER BY AREA STYLE NUMBER are all used to filter by the corresponding surface

elements with a specific number. All definitions are displayed in the selection. ƒƒ FILTER BY POINT NUMBER filters by points with the specified number. ƒƒ FILTER BY ELEMENTS filters by selected elements. The system always displays all the elements that can be filtered with this filter. The following elements are possible: ƒƒ Line, polyline, circle/ellipse, text, text leader, dimension line ƒƒ Hatching, pattern, fill, fill line, bitmap area, style area ƒƒ 3D element, 3D body, 3D line, 3D area, smart symbol, element group, surface object, line object, general object, components ƒƒ Arcs, point symbol, point, bitmap, smart placement, XRef

2.11 Design tools 87

ƒƒ FILTER BY URBAN PLANNING OBJECTS/LANDSCAPING OBJECTS filters by objects from the LANDSCAPING and URBAN PLANNING modules. You can use the blue button to select all the objects. The white button deselects all selections. ƒƒ FILTER BY LAYOUT ELEMENT filters by layout elements in the plot layout. As long as you are in drawing file editing mode, the system only displays a message indicating that no layout elements have been saved yet. ƒƒ FILTER BY ARCHITECTURE COMPONENTS only displays architectural components that exist in the active drawing files. You can use the different fields, for example, to filter by a wall with a specific material and of a specific thickness. ƒƒ FILTER BY BUILDING ALTERATION CATEGORY allows the filter to directly access the three attributes of as-built, demolition, new building. ƒƒ FILTER STEP BY STEP. The FILTER STEP-BY-STEP dialog box contains all the filters in Allplan 2012, including the configuration options. The filter settings are displayed in the FILTER CONDITION line. Depending on requirements, you can use the functions under the filter conditions to further influence the filtering.

■■2.11 Design tools The point snap and track lines options in Allplan are extremely effective design tools. Due to the countless possible variations and combinations, you will only find a few standard cases in variants.

2.11.1 Input fields and symbols in the dialog line In the dialog line, you can choose between three main modes for point snap. The screen display and the significance of the individual fields change based on the mode you choose to work with (DELTA POINT, POLAR COODINATES or GLOBAL POINT).

Filter by urban ­planning objects/­ landscaping objects Filter by layout ­element Filter by architec­ tural components Filter by building alteration category Filter step by step

88  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Input fields for the dialog line In all fields that require you to enter a value, you can also enter a calculation. For example, if you enter 12*3 in the Length field, the system performs the calculation and uses 36 as the input value. A shortcut menu also provides you with further options, distances and lengths from your drawing. See the application examples for further details.

Input methods Allplan distinguishes between three different input methods that can be combined with other functions. The first area in the dialog line is displayed differently, depending on the configured method.

Delta point input method

Delta point Delta X Delta Y Delta Z

ƒƒ DELTA POINT activates input with relative coordinates. Entries are thus always relative to the snapped point or the point entered last. ƒƒ DELTA  X,  DELTA  Y,  DELTA  Z captures a point at the specified distance from the last specified point in the coordinate direction. Input fields with a white background indicate a reference to the last point in the design; input fields with a yellow background indicate a reference to the currently targeted point. DELTA Z is hidden in the DRAFT, DIMENSION LINE and TEXT modules.

Polar coordinates input method

Polar coordinates Angle Length Offset length

ƒƒ POLAR COORDINATES activates input via polar coordinates. ƒƒ ANGLE is used to enter an angle relative to the X axis for the crosshairs, starting from the captured (targeted) point. ƒƒ LENGTH is used to enter the distance of the point to be captured from the reference point along the configured angle. ƒƒ OFFSET LENGTH specifies the vertical distance of the point to be captured with reference to the specified ANGLE with the distance specified under LENGTH.

2.11 Design tools 89

Global point input method

ƒƒ GLOBAL POINT activates input with absolute coordinates. The coordinates entered always refer to the origin. A preview is not available when working with global point. ƒƒ GLOBAL X COORDINATES, GLOBAL Y COORDINATES, GLOBAL Z COORDINATES capture a point when you enter its global coordinates with reference to the system origin. GLOBAL Z COORDINATES are hidden in the DRAFT, DIMENSION LINE and TEXT ­modules.

Global point Global point input Global X coordinates Global Y coordinates Global Z coordinates

Further dialog line functions for point snap ƒƒ TRACK LINE activates the track line (including the track line grid). You can use the two drop-down menus to control how the spacing grid and the joint dimension are taken into account. ƒƒ ARRAY LENGTH deactivates the delta point input fields. The system can only capture points that match the selected spacing grid. If POLAR COORDINATES is activated, then the length rather than the coordinates is displayed and rasterized. ƒƒ BASIC DIMENSIONS makes it possible to preconfigure whether the spacing grid to be captured is used for a template, a pier or an opening. You can use the shortcut menu to freely define the width of the joint. ƒƒ ENTER ELEMENTS AT RIGHT ANGLES activates perpendicular input. It is only pos­ sible to create lines in X or Y direction (depending on DX/DY display). ƒƒ ENTER LINES USING CURSOR SNAP activates the cursor snap (with the specified angle) when you are entering lines. You can only create lines in the direction of the ­cursor snap. The length entry is always positive. ƒƒ OUTLINE AUTO-DETECT ON/OFF activates/deactivates automatic determination of closed, bordered surfaces. This option is only available for tools that require polygonal input. ƒƒ BACK takes you one step back within the workflow. This tool appears either in the dialog line or the PROPERTIES dialog box.

Track line

Array length

sions

Basic dimen­

Enter elements at right angles Enter lines using cursor snap Outline Auto-Detect on/off Back

2.11.2 Shortcut menu for the Point wizard Whenever the dialog line requires that you to enter a point, you can right click to call the point snap shortcut menu. If you call the shortcut menu when the crosshair is positioned over a point/element, it is used as the reference for the tool. ƒƒ BACK is only available with tools where it is possible to go one step back in the workflow (e. g. for line, polygon line, hatching, pattern, etc.).

Back

90  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Last point Temporary point for offset

Lock coordinate

Fixed X Fixed Y Fixed Z Center of arc Point of intersection Midpoint

Division point

Base of perpen­ dicular Reference point

Offset by radius Track/extension point Delete track points Point entry options Track tracing ­options

ƒƒ LAST POINT uses the last point as the current reference point. ƒƒ TEMPORARY POINT FOR OFFSET fixes the captured point for entering the distance. Entries in X, Y and/or Z direction refer to this point, even if you move the crosshairs. ƒƒ LOCK COOORDINATE opens a submenu in which you can choose which of the coordinates for the captured point are to be fixed. You can use the DELETE FIXED POINT tool to delete fixed points. ƒƒ FIXED X, FIXED Y, FIXED Z locks the selected coordinate. You can copy a coordinate from an existing point but still freely define the second and/or third coordinates. These then align with the fixed point. ƒƒ CENTER OF ARC captures the midpoint of an arc (ellipse, part of an ellipse or spline). ƒƒ POINT OF INTERSECTION calls the MIDPOINT tool, with which you can either capture the midpoint of an existing element or of any line (entered via start/end point). ƒƒ INTERSECTION enables you to determine the intersection of any two elements. ƒƒ DIVISION POINT can divide a line that you enter or an element into any number of segments. The division points can be addressed by clicking or entering a number. When entering negative (or larger) values, the distance is interpreted further in the extension of the element. ƒƒ BASE OF PERPENDICULAR finds the point on an element that is obtained by dropping a perpendicular line from an arbitrary point onto the element. ƒƒ REFERENCE POINT calls the reference point entry. The system displays an arrow and a square. The arrow indicates the reference point on the element from which the distance is entered (positive = arrow direction, negative = opposite direction). The square indicates the point that is adopted upon confirmation, in accordance with the entered distance from the reference point. ƒƒ OFFSET BY RADIUS captures the intersection of two new circles. ƒƒ TRACK/EXTENSION POINT positions a track line point at the point at which you called the shortcut menu. As an alternative to setting a track line point, you can also hover over a point. Track points are indicated temporarily with a blue cross. ƒƒ DELETE TRACK POINTS deletes one or all track line points. This can be necessary if too many (or even superfluous) track points are set. ƒƒ POINT ENTRY OPTIONS opens the OPTIONS dialog box. The DESKTOP ENVIRONMENT – POINT SNAP area is displayed directly. ƒƒ TRACK TRACING OPTIONS opens the OPTIONS dialog box. The DESKTOP ENVIRONMENT – TRACK TRACING area is displayed directly.

2.11 Design tools 91

2.11.3 Point snap POINT SNAP displays all the settings with which you can determine whether a specific

point type will be detected automatically. You can also specify whether an acoustic signal is sounded for an undefined point, and whether the point snap generally needs to be activated. When querying an element and/or point, Allplan always indicates what type of point is captured. You can use the POINT ENTRY options either to completely deactivate the point snap or to exclude individual point types. As long as no point is captured, the cursor is displayed as a circle representing the size of the snap radius. As soon as a point is captured, it is selected with a red cross and the corres­ ponding point snap symbol is displayed to the left over the crosshairs.

2.11.4 Point snap options Under OPTIONS the DESKTOP ENVIRONMENT – POINT SNAP area contains all the settings for displaying the point snap symbols.

Point entry options

Snap options ƒƒ DETECTION AREA provides two options via which you can control whether points and elements can be found in active and/or reference drawing files. Both options apply both to the point snap and to track lines.

Point snap Apart from the (END) POINT option, all capture points can be deactivated. When point snap symbols are deactivated, the points are not captured. ƒƒ (END) POINT displays the next closest end point for an element or a point. Where there are several different possible snap options, end points are determined in the snap radius before other points. The (END) POINT option cannot be deactivated. ƒƒ POINT OF INTERSECTION is displayed if the point of intersection for two elements is captured. ƒƒ MIDPOINT appears if the midpoint for an element is within the snap radius. ƒƒ TANGENTIAL POINT indicates whether, for example, the end point for a line is positioned on a tangential point of a circle or of an ellipse. ƒƒ QUADRANT POINT indicates whether a quadrant point of a circle or an ellipse can be captured. ƒƒ GRID POINT captures the next closest grid point within the snap radius. A design grid can be processed in the VIEW menu with the DEFINE GRID and GRID ON/OFF tools. This is only a non-printable coordinate grid.

(End) point Point of inter­ section Midpoint Tangential point Quadrant point Grid point

92  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Reference point of dimension line

Element

ƒƒ REFERENCE POINT OF DIMENSION LINE appears if the reference point of a dimension line is captured. Dimension line reference points can be permanently shown/hidden in the DIMENSION LINE options. When point snap is activated for REFERENCE POINT OF DIMENSION LINE, hidden reference points are also captured. ƒƒ ELEMENT always appears if a point on an element is captured.

Point snap display

The point snap display area combines various options for displaying tools. Deactivating the display does not deactivate the functionality.

Entering reference points It is not possible to deactivate reference point entry. Depending on the setting for the OFFSET ENTERED IS BASED ON POINT SNAPPED option, the input values in the dialog line are measured either from the captured point or always from the start point of the element being created.

2.11.5 Track tracing Options Point entry

Track tracing makes it easier to create an intelligent, definable interpretation of elements that have a­ lready been created and to display track lines. Without activating additional tools, you can use track lines to find virtual points of intersection, create lines parallel to existing lines, and much more. The grid is always active when you are working with track lines. As soon as a point on a track line is captured, the dialog line switches to the offset entry/the fields are highlighted in yellow. You can use up to five automatically (or explicitly) collected track points that may be important for the point you are searching for. These are indicated with blue crosses. As soon as a dashed line appears, a tooltip appears by the cursor, indicating the types of track lines determined and the type of point that has been captured. Track lines can be used in 2D and 3D.

2.11 Design tools 93

Types of track tracing ƒƒ EXTENSION appears if an existing line (or a circle) is interpreted further.

Click on the end point of an element. Move the cursor in the direction of the element extension. The track line appears and you can specify in the dialog line the offset for the point to the end point of the element, or you can work with the grid. ƒƒ ORTHOGONAL TRACK LINES appear as soon as you move the crosshairs from a track

point in the X or Y axis direction. The system angle is evaluated.

ƒƒ POLAR TRACK LINES are different from ORTHOGONAL TRACK LINES in that the angle is freely definable. Under OPTIONS, DESKTOP ENVIRONMENT – TRACK TRACING, you

can define the angle for which polar track lines are used. ƒƒ PERPENDICULAR can be used either from an element, or you can drop it onto an

­element.

Draw line vertically to an existing line: Define the start point on the existing line, move the crosshairs roughly vertically away from the existing line, specify the offset of the end point. Position the start point with an offset to an existing line. Set a track point by clicking on a construction point, move the crosshairs roughly vertically away from the existing line, enter the offset ƒƒ PARALLEL LINE only appears if the first point of the new element has already been

defined and you have already targeted an existing line.

Draw line parallel to an existing line: Define start point of the new line, move the cursor over an existing line until the parallel icon appears, move the crosshairs at an offset from the first point to the line (parallel), enter the line length. ƒƒ ASSUMED POINT OF INTERSECTION appears when two track lines intersect the extension. Capture virtual intersection point of two lines: 1. Set 1st track point (start/end point, line 1), set 2nd track point (start/end point, line 2), move the crosshairs to an extension of a line, until the EXTENSION; EXTENSION view appears. Click on a point to select it The different track line types are freely combinable. The tooltip indicates which types of track lines are used to determine the snap point. In many situations, it makes sense to use several texts. The program only uses one of them in the view.

94  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.11.6 Examples of use for point snap – initial design The following section includes a number of solutions for typical problems. There are many solutions for each problem. We will demonstrate one or two possible solutions per example. When reproducing the individual problems, pay careful attention to what is shown on screen. The preview is updated with every input. The first step is always to activate a tool (e. g. the LINE tool). Use the Tab key to move from one data input box to the next.

2.11.6.1 Point at an offset from an existing point Given: point 1 (corner of room), distances between walls Wanted: point 2 (start point of cupboard)

Solution 1 (without track line): hh Aim at point 1 (boxes are highlighted yellow) hh Enter offset in X direction (50) hh Enter offset in Y direction (5) hh Click point 1 or confirm input by pressing

Solution 2 (with track line): hh Hover over point 1 or set point 1 as a track point hh Move the crosshairs on the track line slightly to the right hh Enter length (50), enter offset length (5) hh Click point 1 or confirm input by pressing when the display for the track line is as shown.

2.11.6.2 Point on an element at offset from end point Given: element, on which point 1 is located, and offset to an end point Wanted: starting point of the dashed line on the line for the wall.

Solution 1 (without track line) hh Open shortcut menu and activate REFERENCE POINT

hh Click element Reference point display appears. hh Check whether reference point arrow is on the correct point. If necessary, move it by clicking another point. hh ENTER OFFSET TO REFERENCE POINT and press to confirm

2.11 Design tools 95

The REFERENCE POINT tool starts automatically when creating architectural components. The approach is the same as when explicitly selecting the tool.

Solution 2 (with track line): hh Hover over the end point of the element or set it as a track point hh Move crosshairs on the element to the left hh ENTER OFFSET TO REFERENCE POINT and

press to confirm or click point

2.11.6.3 Define virtual point of intersection as point Given: two edges (setoff) Wanted: point of intersection of the edges (point 1)

Solution 1 (without track line) hh Open shortcut menu and activate POINT OF INTERSECTION

hh Click element 1 hh Click element 2 hh Point 1 was selected as starting point. As long as you are only pointing at one element, it is highlighted in red. With the second element the point of intersection between the first element and the second element is also shown.

Solution 2 (with track line) hh Hover over the end point of element 1. hh Hover over the end point of element 2. hh Move the crosshairs in such a manner that the display is as shown here and then click the point. What is shown in the display varies between EXTENSION; PERPENDICULAR and PERPENDICULAR; PERPENDICULAR depending on the constellation. NOTE: From the point found you can carry on with the design in both direc-

tions by entering X and Y coordinates before confirming the point.

96  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.11.6.4 Line in the shape of a rectangle Given: point 1 Wanted: line in the shape of a rectangle (without using the RECTANGLE tool)

Solution 1 (without track line) hh Select start point of the first line hh Enter offset in X direction (1.00) → hh Enter offset in Y direction (−0.75) → hh Enter offset in X direction (−1.00) → hh Enter offset in Y direction (0.75) → or click point 1 Do not move the mouse while entering the offsets. The perpendicular red cross moves with every entry you make; the slanting red cross represents the current reference point. Please also note that the values for upward and to the right have to be entered as positive values while downward and to the left require negative values.

Solution 2 (with track line) hh Select start point of the first line hh Point in the direction of the first point (top right corner) and enter offset (1.00) hh Point in the direction of the second point (bottom right corner) and enter offset (0.75) hh Point in the direction of the third point and enter offset (1.00) When track line is activated, you only need to point in the general direction and enter the value for the offset. The offset must always be entered as a positive value. It is only important that POLAR TRACK LINES with a cursor snap of e. g. 45° are set.

■■2.12 The Allplan plane model Allplan works with reference planes – default planes and special planes (for roofs, etc.) – to which architectural components (together with top level and bottom level) can be connected. This means that the component height is not configured to a precise height in the component properties (except in very special cases). The component only gets the definition of

2.12 The Allplan plane model 97

the rule and links to the planes of the drawing file. This means that a component in the lower floor and a component in the top floor can have exactly the same settings, but can be straight at the top and sloped at the top in each case respectively. IMPORTANT: Planes always come in pairs. An upper plane always has a

lower plane that must be set to the required height. This is particularly important for roofs! When linking to the reference planes, you do not need to calculate the position of the top and/or bottom level for every component in all stories – instead you work with relative references. Thus, a sill that needs to be 90 cm high is that high in all stories, without you needing to know at exactly which bottom level the sill needs to start. If you change the reference height of a drawing file, all components that refer to these planes are automatically adjusted. Allplan provides the following tools with integrated functions for working with planes. A description of the settings that can be made for the components can be found in section 5.1.1, Height association of components.

2.12.1 Plane – basic terms Default reference plane Every drawing file (like every NDW file) has a pair of planes, default planes that have no boundary and are always level. The height of the lower and upper planes can be set to any value or can be adopted from the plane model. ƒƒ LIST DEFAULT PLANES displays the planes assigned to the drawing files that can currently be edited. This list serves as a platform for changing height references for the opened drawing files while editing the drawing files.

List default planes

Roof frame and custom planes Roof frames and custom planes are special planes that replace the default reference planes in a defined area and assume their functions. Outside the special planes, the default planes continue to apply. A component with height settings that are referenced to the planes, and which is positioned in the special planes area, adapts to the special planes in that area. If a component extends across several areas with special planes and/or areas without special planes (default planes), then it adjusts to the relevant conditions in each area. ƒƒ ROOF FRAMES are special planes that have been configured to create regular roof shapes. The lower plane cannot be inclined for roof planes. DORMERS can only be used in ROOF FRAMES. ƒƒ CUSTOM PLANES are ideal if you want to incline the lower plane as well as the upper plane.

Roof frame Dormer Custom planes

98  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Both tools create a pair of planes, always consisting of an upper and a lower plane.  You can use both types of special plane (custom frame or roof plane) in the FLOOR MANAGER as the basis for ROOFSCAPES. The advantage of roof planes compared to custom planes can be summarized in the following two points: hh Roof planes can be put together across areas with different incline levels, but still be processed as a single element. With custom planes, areas with different incline levels are created individually and are not part of the adjoining areas. hh Roof planes can be changed in the same dialog boxes in which they were created. Custom planes have an advantage over roof planes hh The lower plane of custom planes can be inclined and it is possible to copy nearly all roof shapes from 3D entities.

2.12.2 The Floor Manager Open on a project-specific basis Floor Manager

The FLOOR MANAGER provides central management for all plane settings for a project. This is where you can create, maintain and change all plane models. All the plane models for the current project are clearly presented in a list and they each have their own graphic in Floor Manager.

A bottom level, a top level, and a roof landscape is assigned to the individual drawing files via the ASSIGN PLANES or LIST DEFAULT PLANES tools. Any changes made to the height settings in the FLOOR MANAGER are applied in all the drawing files concerned. Changing the corresponding value in the Floor Manager triggers this change automatically in all drawing files.

2.12 The Allplan plane model 99

The left-hand side of the Floor Manager displays a tree structure of the plane models in the project. The right hand side displays overviews of the individual plane models. The graphic always displays the plane model that is currently selected on the left.

Tools in the Floor Manager You can access the following tools directly via the Floor Manager, while some of them can also be accessed along with other standard tools via shortcut menus. ƒƒ EXPAND SELECTED ENTRIES expands all sections of the tree structure where you have selected a line. In several models, the tool only ever affects the section of the tree structure in which a line is selected. ƒƒ COLLAPSE ALL ENTRIES reduces the tree structure to the initial model nodes. This view provides a better overview of the plane models in the project. ƒƒ NEW MODEL starts the wizard for creating a new (additional) plane model. You can use the plane model to create a corresponding building structure in which the new planes are already assigned to the structural levels. For most of the height settings, the created plane model uses default values that can then be changed after creation. ƒƒ MODIFY MODEL opens the MODIFY MODEL dialog box, which is similar to the NEW MODEL dialog box. The selected plane model can either be reset to a uniform default value and/or have more planes added to it. Remember that for differing values the text “Varied” is displayed. If this is changed to a precise value, then all corresponding height specifications are reset to the new, uniform value. ƒƒ DELETE MODEL deletes the selected plane model from the Floor Manager. The settings in the individual drawing files are retained. In the LIST DEFAULT PLANES overview, unknown appears in the Model column instead of a model name. After the plane model is deleted, the building structure displays question marks instead of the values for the individual planes, because the height information comes from an unknown (deleted) plane model. ƒƒ FLOOR MANAGER OPTIONS is used to configure how the planes are displayed in the Floor Manager. The colors you select here are also used in the building structure for the plane info fields. You can also specify whether the heights displayed for the lower planes represent the corresponding finished/unfinished floors. The Allplan default is to consider the lower plane as an unfinished floor. ƒƒ INSERT PAIR OF PLANES inserts a new pair of planes into the plane model. You have the choice as to whether you make the entries manually or copy them from a drawing file. New planes can only be inserted under the lowest or over the highest plane in the plane model and cannot intersect existing planes. Where possible, use the MODIFY MODEL tool to insert additional planes. ƒƒDELETE PAIR OF PLANES deletes the selected pair of planes from the plane model. You can choose whether to move plane pairs up or down to close the gap in the plane model.

Expand selected entries Collapse all entries New model

Modify model

Delete model

Floor Manager ­options

Insert pair of planes

Delete pair of ­planes

100  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Insert roofscape

Replace roofscape

Delete roofscape Load favorite Save as favorite

ƒƒ INSERT ROOFSCAPE inserts a roofscape at the selected node. Roofscapes are either fixed in the plane model and/or custom planes that can be assigned to any number of drawing files. You need a drawing file with a special plane as the basis. You can use another query to determine whether the planes of the drawing file are copied one-to-one (DO NOT CHANGE ROOFSCAPE (COMPARED WITH SOURCE)), whether the bottom level of the story in which you position the roofscape is copied (THE BOTTOM LEVEL OF THE ROOFSCAPE IS EQUIVALENT TO THE BOTTOM OF THE STORY . . .), or whether the roofscape should be raised to the height of the bottom of the story (THE ROOFSCAPE AS A WHOLE IS MOVED TO THE HEIGHT OF THE BOTTOM OF THE STORY . . .). ƒƒ REPLACE ROOFSCAPE is used to exchange the selected roofscape. All references are retained. When you replace a roofscape with a new one (e. g. gable roof replaced by ­barrel roof), you will find the new geometry on all drawing files to which the original roofscape was assigned. ƒƒ DELETE ROOFSCAPE deletes the selected roofscape from the model. The roofscape is deleted from drawing files to which it has been assigned. ƒƒ LOAD FAVORITE/SAVE AS FAVORITE opens the standard dialog box for reading and saving favorites. You can use this dialog to save an entire plane model for use in later projects. When you create a plane model from a favorite, you can use the wizard to ­create the building structure in the same way as for the NEW MODEL tool. You can also use SAVE AS FAVORITE and LOAD FAVORITE to copy a plane model within a project. The recently inserted plane model is completely identical to the original (including the name). ƒƒ MODIFY HEIGHT Every height value that appears either in the overview, or the list can be clicked on and changed directly. This always starts the MODIFY HEIGHT tool. As soon as the changed height is confirmed, the system displays a dialog box in which you can define how the current change affects the height and plane settings above and below.

2.12.3 Assigning planes to drawing files In order to control heights within the project using the plane model, you must assign the corresponding planes to the drawing files and/or structural levels. This can be done either via the building structure, via the shortcut menu for the structural levels and drawing files, or when working on the actual drawing files using the LIST DEFAULT PLANES tool. Every change to the plane model is transferred automatically to all drawing files.

Assigning planes via the building structure Building structure

You can find the entire structure in the BUILDING STRUCTURE tab of the OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS: DRAWING FILES FROM FILESET/BUILDING STRUCTURE

dialog box.  Planes can be assigned to structural levels or drawing files. All drawing files that are directly assigned to a structural level and which have NO settings of their own, adopt the

2.12 The Allplan plane model 101

setting for the structural level. If you change the settings for the structural level, then the settings for the drawing files that refer to it are changed. The ASSIGN PLANES tool is in the shortcut menu of the structural levels, drawing files and the PLANE SETTINGS view (per drawing file/structural level) on the left-hand side of the BUILDING STRUCTURE tab. This is where you can select either individual or several drawing files (either just drawing files or structural levels) and open the shortcut menu. The columns that display the settings for the planes also display a tooltip with the name of the plane model and the planes (or roofscape).

A plane assignment to a structural level affects all drawing files assigned to the structural level but with no plane assignment of their own. If a roofscape is assigned to a structural level, it is transferred to a drawing file the first time it is opened. You can use the ASSIGN PLANES dialog box to assign planes to structural levels and/or drawing files. A checkmark is set for the planes assigned to the drawing file (or structural level). You can select any two planes from a model and, if necessary, a roofscape as well. You can use the subsequent dialog box to influence how the new settings apply to the drawing files. Elements that are not linked with the planes cannot be changed with them. You can save yourself subsequent work if you make your settings carefully here. The settings in this dialog box are meaningless as long as there are no components in the drawing files affected by the change.

Plane settings tooltip

102  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Assigning planes via List Default Planes (drawing file)

List default planes

The LIST DEFAULT PLANES tool can be found in the general shortcut menu, in the ­drawing file, as well as in the GENERAL ARCHITECTURE module, for example. It lists all the settings for default planes for the currently loaded drawing files. You can change the settings by clicking on the corresponding line. As well as the plane settings for the loaded drawing files, all the relevant information for active NDWs is displayed. For drawing files to which planes are assigned from the plane model, the system displays the name of the model and of the assigned plane. The plane name clearly indicates which story (plane pair) the setting belongs to. For drawing files that have no information from a plane model, only the values of the default plane are displayed. These can be changed directly. Clicking on the plane name opens the ASSIGN PLANES dialog box. The planes assigned to the drawing file are selected and displayed below. As soon as the two checkboxes ­ USTOM HEIGHT AT BOTTOM and CUSTOM HEIGHT AT TOP are activated, the drawing C file is uncoupled from the plane model.

■■2.13 Layers – the special property 2.13.1 Definition of terms Layers Metaphorically speaking, a layer is not a transparency. Rather, it is an element’s attribute or property, which you can assign to design elements belonging to a specific category (e. g. load-bearing walls, non-bearing walls). Think of a layer as an element color or a line type. Layers are not the equivalent of drawing files. Using layers, you can toggle the visibility/ invisibility of all elements that have the same property (the layer). Each drawing file contains at least the DEFAULT layer. The DEFAULT layer is a layer that is always available to all users. Its status is always MODIFIABLE. The DEFAULT layer cannot be assigned any format properties, elements cannot copy the properties from the DEFAULT layer, and the DEFAULT layer is the only layer that cannot be hidden. Allplan provides 65535 different layers. The numbers between 1 and 32767 are reserved for Allplan layers. You can save your own layers to numbers between 32768 and 65535. All layer definitions, those you create yourself and the Allplan layers, are saved in a file. 

2.13 Layers – the special property 103

If you assign a layer to an element, the only information the element receives is the number of the layer, as well as the setting for whether format properties are copied from the layer. The name and characteristic value of the format properties are not saved in the element. NOTE: The layer is one of the format properties of an element. You can

use layers to control the line display for the element itself as well as its visibility during data processing and in the printout.

Line style The format properties (pen, line, color) you define for a layer can be saved in a named line style. Elements can then adopt these format properties as fixed values from the layer (from the line style of the layer). When you define the line styles, you define how the line changes when the scale or the drawing type is changed.

Drawing type Creating drawing types and defining them in line styles and/or area styles makes it ­possible to generate display variants for different scales and/or drawing contents. You can use drawing types, for example, to take an intersected wall with hatching for the working drawing (1:50) and create a display for the draft (1:200) or for the foundation plans without needing to change a single setting for the wall.

2.13.2 Drawing files ↔ layers? Many users still continue to use a working method based solely on drawing files, placing all components and elements on different drawing files depending on their purpose. The only advantage when structuring a project using drawing files is that project data can be accessed more easily by numerous project members.

Disadvantages of structuring projects with only drawing files: ƒƒ Switching between drawing files takes more time than changing the layer display. ƒƒ Switching drawing file deletes the undo list; changes to the layer settings do not. ƒƒ Layer visibility can be changed while drawing. Switching between drawing files automatically exits the active tool. ƒƒ You can only display 80 drawing files at any one time (e. g. ten drawing files per story → a maximum of eight stories can be displayed in full). ƒƒ It is not possible to enter associative labels and dimensioning across different drawing files. ƒƒ Limited dynamic element display options.

104  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.13.3 Tools and settings Allplan provides different options for configuring your work with layers to match your specific working methods and requirements. There are also tools that largely automate working with layers, facilitating tasks so much that users immediately recognize the ­benefits of working with layers.

Selecting layers, controlling visibility of layers Layers work in a similar way to drawing files. A layer is active. Its properties are attached to the new element being created. Other layers can be modifiable, visible and frozen, and hidden and frozen. Current layer

Modifiable Visible and frozen

Hidden, frozen

ƒƒ One layer is always current (SET CURRENT LAYER). This is used when creating new elements. Every time you activate a tool, Allplan automatically proposes the last layer used for the selected tool group. The “quick select” also displays a selection of layers that are suitable for the selected tool. ƒƒ Elements with MODIFIABLE layers can be changed, deleted, etc. ƒƒ Elements with a layer that is VISIBLE AND FROZEN cannot be modified. The LAYER SELECTION/VISIBILITY tab in the SELECT/CONFIGURE LAYER dialog box can be used to display the visible and frozen layer in a single, uniform color. ƒƒ HIDDEN, FROZEN is ideal for switching entire component groups to hidden via the layer element property. For example, you could hide dimensions to make it easier to work when furnishing a plan view. NOTE: There are many components that interact with one another. When

one of these components is modified and affects another component with a layer that is visible and frozen, or hidden and frozen, a message appears informing the user that elements have been changed on frozen layers.

Format properties from layers You can use layers to control not only visibility, but also how the lines of elements are displayed. There are three different settings for this, with different advantages and dis­ advantages. ƒƒ DO NOT USE, IGNORE FORMAT PROPERTIES OF LAYERS does not set default format properties or copy them as fixed from the layer. When you use this setting, you must select all format properties for the element being created. This setting is ideal if you want to define every line separately, but it is useless if you want to use drawings for various purposes without post-editing (foundations, draft, preconstruction plan, working drawing, fire protection plans . . .). ƒƒ COPY TO FORMAT TOOLBAR AS A PROPOSED VALUE WHEN LAYERS ARE SELECTED assigns the preset values for the layer to the format properties pen, line and color. These can be overwritten. You can define for yourself which settings are proposed (pen thickness, line type, line color). You can change the format settings at any time.  This setting is useful if you want elements to have the same general appearance when

2.13 Layers – the special property 105

you assign a layer, but also want to change them as required. Here too, the setting is useless if you want to use drawings without subsequent processing for different purposes. ƒƒ MATCH FROM LAYER BASED ON LINE STYLE, PEN, LINE, COLOR ASSIGNED (FIXED SETTING): As well as the simple format settings, a line style can be assigned to every layer. The line style defines which format properties are to be displayed depending on the configured drawing file scale. When working with format properties transferred from layers (pen, line, color of layer, line style), the selection fields for pen thickness, line type and line color are grayed out. The field display is always the same as the display for the current scale/drawing type. This setting is ideal if you want to use different displays for each layout, without needing to create duplicate data in several drawing files. Checks for line thickness, line type and line color are based on line style definitions and are called via drawing types or the reference scale. This setting allows you to create uniform layouts with well-sorted data quickly and easily. NOTE: Working with layers AND line styles requires the most preparation but

provides the highest level of automation. The wizards are particularly convenient. This approach is used in this book. All the wizards are coordinated.

Select, set layers SELECT, SET LAYERS combines all the functions required to work with layers. Depending

on where and when you are working, the system displays either all tabs or just the layer selection/visibility tab to set the current layer and/or to influence the visible layers.

Select, set layers

106  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

ƒƒ The LAYER SELECTION/VISIBILITY tab displays a tree structure on the left and various different options on the right. In the tree structure, you can select layers and toggle them with the buttons under CHANGE STATUS. If a higher-level node is selected, then the status change is transferred to all subordinate layers. To gain a better overview, you can use the LIST EXISTING LAYERS IN OPEN DOCUMENTS option to restrict the display to the layers in use. ƒƒ You can use the PLOT SET tab to create plot sets that you can use to change the status of many layers quickly. Plot sets can be used in many display favorites and for plot layout. ƒƒ You can use the PRIVILEGE SET tab to influence whether all users have full rights for all layers, or whether, for example, building service providers or structural designers can only view different layers but cannot edit them. ƒƒ The FORMAT DEFINITION tab is used to combine line styles and format properties in the layer. Changes made here affect the display. ƒƒ The LAYER STRUCTURES tab displays the numbers of the individual layers and can also be used to save the layer structure and/or to enter new layers from the Allplan default settings (saved in the ETC directory) into the layer structure of the current project (or office).

Change layer visibility The layer status can either be set using the tool MODIFY LAYER STATUS or whenever the tree structure of the SELECT, SET LAYERS dialog box is opened. This means you can select layers and configure layer visibility at the same time. Changing the layer status

ƒƒ MODIFY LAYER STATUS is available either via the shortcut menu of an element or as a separate tool. When you select the tool on the shortcut menu for an element in the workspace, the element layer is read and influenced directly. When you select the tool from the toolbar or via shortcut keys, you first define the actions for the layers of the elements you select subsequently.

Modifying element layers The layer for any element can be changed via the format properties of the element, the properties palette, or any tool in which the layer can be selected. You can select the new layer either via a quick selection list or via the tree structure for all layers.

2.14 Display in the design and animation windows 107

■■2.14 Display in the design and animation windows Only elements and components that are on the drawing file with status Current, Edit and Reference are displayed. Various settings govern how elements and components are displayed in the Allplan design viewports. ƒƒ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS: DRAWING FILES – Current drawing file, Edit drawing files, Reference drawing files ƒƒ SET LAYER, PLOTSET, PRIVILEGE SET: These functions are used to show/hide (and also lock) elements in the loaded drawing files over their layer (see chapter 2.13, ­Layers – the special property). ƒƒ The pen settings and the selected reference scale define the actual thickness of the ­created lines. Alternatively, this can also be configured in the screen display itself. ƒƒ Style areas can be defined so that they react to the reference scale of the drawing file or to the drawing type. ƒƒ Whether elements are displayed can be either defined in the layer visibility (and plot sets) or regulated directly in various basic elements. ƒƒ DRAWING TYPE, SCALE applies to all active (and reference) drawing files. If you change the scale here, then the reference scale is reset in the active drawing file. It is not ­possible to change the reference scale within the layout editor.

2.14.1 Displayed drawing files The database is determined by switching the active drawing file and the other visible drawing files. The area (story) of the model, view, section or other drawing file in which work is to be carried out is defined. There are four different drawing file status values. The status is changed either by pressing one of the other buttons or selecting the colored button. ƒƒ Current (active) – red marking – drawing file is displayed and new elements are gener-

ated on the active drawing file. ƒƒ Edit – yellow marking – drawing file is displayed. ƒƒ Reference – gray marking – drawing file is displayed in the reference color, and data cannot be changed. The reference color can be set in the OPTIONS in the DESKTOP ENVIRONMENT – DISPLAY area. ƒƒ Not selected – no marking – drawing file is not displayed.

108  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

Open on a project-specific basis: Drawing files In the OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS: DRAWING FILES dialog box, the drawing files to be displayed for editing are selected. Up to 80 drawing files can be displayed ­simultaneously. They are selected either via the drawing structure from a drawing or via the building structure, put together from any structural levels.

Change drawing file status Change drawing file status New in version 2012

You can use the CHANGE DRAWING FILE STATUS function to change the displayed drawing files directly, without having to open the OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS dialog box. The top area shows the drawing file that contains the element via which the function was called. Under this are buttons for changing the drawing file status. In the area at the bottom, the drawing file can be isolated (all others are hidden) or switched to active (all other drawing files are switched to reference). Alternatively, all drawing files can be switched to active. This function is ideal for hiding some of the drawing files when searching for an error without knowing exactly which drawing file contains the element.

2.14.2 Visible layers The visibility of the layers can be changed in the SELECT, SET LAYERS dialog box or by using the MODIFY LAYER STATUS function. Each status change for a layer affects all the loaded drawing files. The visibility of elements in drawing files open in edit or reference mode is also affected. If, for example, the layer of the supporting exterior wall is hidden for a completely visible building (all drawing files of the building in edit mode), the exterior walls are hidden in ALL stories. Current Modifiable Visible, frozen

Hidden, frozen

ƒƒ CURRENT can only be activated for one layer. New elements are created in this layer. If no function is active, the default layer should be set as the active layer, where possible. ƒƒ MODIFIABLE means that no new elements are created in the layer but all actions are possible in the existing elements. ƒƒ VISIBLE, FROZEN means that the layer is visible, but the elements cannot be edited. To ensure a clearer overview, it makes sense to color-code the locked (frozen) layers. Interactions between components (e. g. room and wall) are retained. A message appears if locked components need to be changed. ƒƒ HIDDEN, FROZEN means that all elements created in this layer are hidden. Interactions between components (e. g. room and wall) are retained. A message appears if locked components need to be changed.

2.14 Display in the design and animation windows 109

Set layer The central interface for layer control is the SET LAYER dialog box described in chapter 2.13, Layers – the special property. You can access all options in the dialog box.

Set layer

With the complete overview of all layers, you have an overview of all layers and, if the display is restricted, of the layers in use. In the shortcut menu, you also have direct access to the created plot sets, the settings of which can be copied. The SET LAYER dialog box is ideal for making more extensive changes to the visible, ­visible frozen, and hidden layer settings.

Modify layer status The general context menu of every element and component contains the MODIFY LAYER STATUS function. The top area shows the layer to which the element is assigned (here AR_FUELL), and the status can be changed directly. In addition, you can isolate the element layer or set it to status MODIFIABLE. You can use the ALL LAYERS TO MODIFIABLE button to make all layers visible again very quickly.

Modify layer status

The MODIFY LAYER STATUS function is ideal to hide individual layers that are currently in the way or to display all layers again.

2.14.3 Functions for the screen display ƒƒ SHOW/HIDE is used to define whether elements and components are displayed in the design viewport. It is possible to hide entire element groups and/or change basic settings. ƒƒ SAVE DISPLAY FAVORITE opens a dialog via which you can save a display favorite composed of the current screen display, the settings for the privilege set, plot set and drawing type, as well as the reference scale for the drawing file. You can use the SETTINGS function to select whether all possible settings or just some of them are saved. ƒƒ RETRIEVE DISPLAY FAVORITE opens the file selection dialog via which you can import the favorites saved in SAVE DISPLAY FAVORITE. You can either load all settings from the favorites file or use the SETTINGS function to define which saved ­settings are loaded.

Show/hide Save display favorite

Retrieve display ­favorite

110  2 An Introduction to Allplan 2012

2.14.4 Reference scale and drawing type Allplan provides two options for displaying lines and surface elements dynamically. The user decides how to use/combine them. ƒƒ REFERENCE SCALE specifies the scale the user wishes to use during design work. Throughout the drafting process, it governs the true proportions of fixed settings (such as the text height, dimension lines, patterns, hatching) relative to the object displayed on the screen. Every drawing file can have its own reference scale. As soon as several drawing files are displayed together, the reference scale of the active drawing file is used to display all drawing files. If you have activated a site plan (including texts) and have a floor plan (including texts and dimensions) in reference mode, everything is displayed uniformly.  The reference scale is always active. Most dependencies can be deactivated. ƒƒ DRAWING TYPE switches between different displays for working drawing and pre-­ construction plan, for example. In this way, an area style with drawing type Working drawing can be displayed in red, and one with drawing type Preconstruction plan can be displayed with hatching. You can also use the drawing type to define line thickness. If drawing type is selected, the display used is based on the selected reference scale.

2.15 Display in layout window 111

■■2.15 Display in layout window Display in the layout window can be changed using functions similar to those in the design viewport. The scale cannot be changed, and only one layout can be displayed. The layout elements themselves can be defined in great detail in the content display. This is described in more detail in chapter 8.1, Layout editor – printing layouts. The layout window is divided into three sections. The white section display the area that will appear later in the printout. Combined with the light-gray frame, it provides the configured page format for the layout. The dark-gray area is not output. The preview can be called via three new functions (draft view, color plot preview and grayscale plot preview), positioned in window toolbar on the right (either at the top or the bottom). ƒƒ DRAFT VIEW is the same as the layout view in the previous versions. It is a good place to prepare a layout for printing. All elements are displayed as they will be printed. The SHOW/HIDE SETTINGS influence the visibility of elements, while definitions from the PLOT LAYOUTS function are not taken into account. The print result can differ from the display on the screen. ƒƒ COLOR PLOT PREVIEW displays the layout as it will be output on a color plotter. The system takes into account the definitions from the PLOT LAYOUTS function in the SELECTION tab, as well as the PEN AND COLOR assignments (SETTINGS tab). The HIDE/SHOW setting only has three more options, and construction lines and other unprintable lines are hidden automatically. The COLOR PLOT PREVIEW is ideal for checking and formatting layouts with colors that must be printed in printers and plotters. ƒƒ GRAYSCALE PLOT PREVIEW displays the layout as it will be printed on a grayscale output device. The system takes into account the definitions from the PLOT LAYOUTS function in the SELECTION tab, as well as the PEN AND COLOR assignments (SETTINGS tab), with the colors being changed to grayscales. The HIDE/SHOW setting only has three more options, and construction lines and other unprintable lines are hidden automatically. NOTE: To make it possible to work in both preview modes (Color plot and

Grayscale plot), the system displays elements that are positioned outside the layout sheet, uses the activation and selection color, and displays the margins for the output device (where activated in the Show/Hide settings).

Draft view

Color plot preview

Grayscale plot ­preview

3

Basic settings

■■3.1 Options Allplan 2012 provides many different settings and options that you can use to define just about everything from the interface to how components behave. The OPTIONS dialog box has been completely reworked in the 2011 version of Allplan. The left-hand side lists main groups and sub-groups. The right-hand side lists the corresponding options and settings for the point selected on the left. At some points, drop-down menus are provided and/or subdialogs opened. The following describes the most important options and settings in the areas of DESKTOP ENVIRONEMENT, PLANES, COMPONENTS, ROOMS and TEXT and DIMENSION LINE. The recommended setting for

working with the Allplan 2012 Practical Manual is indicated accordingly. For further information on the remaining options, see the Allplan help.

Revised in V2011 Options

114  3 Basic settings

3.1.1 Using the Options dialog box The options displayed on the right depend on the line selected on the left. The magnifying glass icon for the search function is always displayed, while the star with the arrow is only displayed if the cursor is moved over the relevant area. If you move the cursor over an info button (available for some options), additional information for the corresponding option is displayed.

Searching for a specific option Search in options

You can click on the magnifying glass icon (search in the options) to open an input line. As soon as you make your entry, the system displays the areas and options that match the search criterion. You only need to enter a few letters in order to complete the search for a specific setting. If an option is selected, the corresponding area is opened and the matching entries are highlighted in ­yellow.

Favorites and options Save, load and reset options

New feature in V2011

After clicking on the SAVE, LOAD AND RESET OPTIONS button, the system displays three functions for managing your own settings on the right. ƒƒ EXPORT FAVORITES OPTIONS is used to save the settings for the selected areas. You can hold down the CTRL key and click to select other areas. You can press CTRL+A to select all areas. Only options directly subordinate to the selected areas are saved.

ƒƒ OPTIONS IMPORT FAVORITES enables you to load saved settings using the BROWSE button. After you have selected a file, all areas that are saved in the favorite file are highlighted. You can deselect areas that you do not want to change at any time. This changes ONLY those settings that were included in the file and whose area was selected during the import.

3.1 Options 115

ƒƒ By choosing RESET OPTIONS you can quickly reset all options to the default settings. You should always do this if Allplan is not behaving as usual. We recommend backing up your current status BEFORE you reset the options.

3.1.2 Settings and explanations on options In the following section you will see a list of options that are either important, or that require special settings so that Allplan responds to all actions that are described in this guide in the way stated in the example.

3.1.2.1 Desktop environment options On the one hand, the desktop environment is the heading for additional areas such as display and activation; on the other hand, it can also refer to important settings. Here are just the most important ones:

General

ƒƒ LANGUAGE displays all installed languages. The required language is configured when you restart Allplan. The installed languages may depend on the languages that are activated by the license. If you select a language that is not available in your license, Allplan starts up with the default language in your license. ƒƒ LENGTH IN enables you to change how lengths are entered and displayed. You can choose between units of length from the metric system, as well as feet and inches. ƒƒ ENTER ANGLE IN enables you to change how angles are entered and displayed (DEG → circle divided into 360°, GRN → circle divided into 400°, RAD → radian in m). ƒƒ ENTER SLOPE AS defines how angles should be interpreted in the POLAR COORDINATES. The settings you make apply to the X axis (even with rotated crosshairs). ƒƒ The MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN POINTS option specifies how large the real ­distance between two points can be, between which Allplan recognizes two points as identical.

116  3 Basic settings

ƒƒ DISPLAY PROPERTIES IN PALETTE defines that for all elements whose properties are currently mapped in the palettes, they can also only be displayed using the PROPERTIES palette when you double-click an element with the left mouse button. If the option is not selected, the properties of these elements are displayed in dialog boxes that ­correspond to the entry dialog boxes. ƒƒ DISPLAY SEQUENCE uses element groups to control the default sequence of elements and components. The settings are the same throughout your office and may only be changed by the SYSADM (administrator) in the case of installations with Workgroup Manager. ƒƒ OPTIMIZE WORKING WITH LARGE COORDINATES enables you to make improvements to performance and display if your data is very far away from the origin.

Save

If the CREATE BACKUP COPY OF DRAWING FILES option is active, this means that with some actions, *bak files are automatically created by the drawing files in question. Actions whereby backup copies are created automatically include all functions where data is moved or copied from one drawing file to another. ƒƒ If the AUTOSAVE DRAWING FILES AND LAYOUTS option is selected, this saves drawing files and layouts in the specified SAVE INTERVAL. If your system is not stable, or if you are working with sensitive data, we recommend reducing the SAVE INTERVAL from the default 15 minutes to 5 or fewer minutes. ƒƒ STORAGE LOCATIONS defines the preferred storage locations for most of the data types that can be imported or exported with Allplan. You can change the setting by choosing IMPORT/EXPORT from LAST to PROJECT.

3.1.2.2 Mouse and crosshairs options Mouse

3.1 Options 117

Activating the BEHAVIOR WHEN DOUBLE-CLICKING THE RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON – SWITCH MODULES AUTOMATICALLY option makes it possible to specify that the ­module is switched automatically. This could be useful, for example, if you need special functions of a module and have elements from the module in the drawing file.

3.1.2.3 Selection options

Selection In the SELECTION area you can configure the selection color and determine when the selection preview should be active.

Element info

The element info is a small window that automatically appears, displaying various pieces of information about the element on which the crosshairs are placed. The information helps grab the correct element and find errors in the data structure. In addition to the default settings, you should select the DOCUMENT option.

3.1.2.4 Catalog options In the CATALOG options, you can define for eleven components or component groups from which data pool the material name should come, or in which data pool it should be saved. In this way, you can give a wall just one name, for example, or link the wall directly to a position from the tendering, awards and invoicing (TAI) system.

118  3 Basic settings

To work through the example in the guide, the catalogs should be on a project-specific basis. Configure each catalog separately as follows: Options

hh OPTIONS → CATALOG area hh Select the catalog assignment of the component (or component group) that should be changed.

hh Click on the catalog of the Material attribute to be changed (material and name for room).

hh On the right, select the catalog (here, katlg1) and underneath, set the selection to ­project. When you name the rooms, an additional option “++” appears in the bottom-right area, which you should select. hh Confirm the settings in the dialog boxes.

3.1 Options 119

3.1.2.5 Component options Architectural settings across modules

For architectural components, PROPERTIES FROM THE FORMAT TOOLBAR determines whether format properties can be configured in the Component dialog box only, or also in the Properties palette or in the toolbar. ƒƒ . . . IN ADDITION TO SETTINGS IN DIALOG BOX activates the format properties, even if they can be configured in the Component dialog box. ƒƒ . . . ALSO APPLY TO MULTI-LAYER COMPONENTS activates the format properties, even if they can be configured in the Component dialog box. Because of the multi-layer structure and limited possibilities, it is not possible to give each component layer different format properties with this option.

Components ƒƒ DISPLAY JUNCTION LINES, DIVISION LINES BETWEEN determines whether division lines are to be displayed between two adjacent components. The division lines are displayed for either different material names or different surface elements. ƒƒ DISPLAY JUNCTION/DIVISION LINES BETWEEN STYLE AREAS allows the above point to be defined in more detail when checking style areas to specify whether they are to influence division lines by means of the number only or the currently displayed content.

Component axis

120  3 Basic settings

The Component Axis area allows you to activate the display of the axes for linear components and influence this display (see also section 5.2, Walls and other linear components).

Component profile

Activate these options if required. You can choose between exact penetration and a ­rectangle enclosing the profile. The setting affects all profile component penetrations, but is only applied to existing ones if a modification is carried out or as a result of RESTORE 3D VIEW.

3.1.2.6 Rooms options

Create ƒƒ If the MAKE ROOMS AND BEAMS INTERSECT option is active, this means that finish specifications can be created even for beams that cross the room. Enable this option.

Room finish If none of the three options for vertical surfaces, floors, and ceilings is activated, then each room on all sides (if finishing layers were defined in the room) has the entire floor space and vertical surfaces with the height of the room. Finish specifications are not ­created for rooms that directly border the next room. Select the first option if, as is necessary for the example in the guide, you only want to have vertical surfaces where walls, columns, and so on adjoin the room.

3.2 Additional basic settings 121

■■3.2 Additional basic settings 3.2.1 Building structure/fileset structure, layout structure In the OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS dialog box you can change how the tree structure is displayed and also change various basic settings according to your own requirements. You can select only some of the options, depending on the status (fileset structure/building structure or layout structure) in which the dialog box is opened.

Proposed folders for saving favorite files ƒƒ SUBFOLDER OF USER Users save their own favorites in the project. It is extremely difficult to access a colleague’s favorites. ƒƒ COMMON SUBFOLDER FOR ALL USERS All users save their favorite files in the same folder. With this setting, an employee can carry out “preliminary work”, by creating the structure with the most frequent favorites.

3.2.2 Office-specific modification In many places, particularly in output lists, the office name and possibly an office logo should appear. You can configure this (in the case of a workgroup, carried out by the SYSADM) in EXTRAS → DEFINITIONS. The data should be entered successivel.

Enter office name and address hh Menu EXTRAS → DEFINITIONS hh OFFICE NAME AND ADDRESS hh Enter the OFFICE NAME and confirm hh Enter the OFFICE ADDRESS and confirm hh Enter the TELEPHONE NUMBER and confirm hh Enter the EMAIL ADDRESS and confirm hh and lastly, a file selection screen is displayed for selecting an image file for your office logo.

122  3 Basic settings

TIP: The path for the company logo is stored. A copy of the file is not stored

centrally. You will achieve good results with a logo with a height/width ratio of 1:2.3; the permitted file types are: *.png, *.jpg and *.bmp.

3.2.3 Share project attributes You can save default values for each project in Project attributes. The attributes are not available immediately in the Allplan default installation because there would be too many of them for most offices. For this reason, the attributes have to be individually shared. The restricted number is available in all projects. The settings apply to all projects. You can only share the SYSADM attribute with workgroup installations. Use the SELECT ATTRIBUTES button when you select a project to share the required attributes for use.

Share project attributes

Open project Select attributes

In the FILE menu, click on OPEN PROJECT. hh Click on SELECT ATTRIBUTES. hh Select the desired attributes and click OK to confirm. For the guide project, you have to share the following attributes at least: Architect, Architect address, Architect zip code/city, Architect street, Architect fax n ­ umber, Architect telephone number, Construction stage, Client, Client address

3.2 Additional basic settings 123

3.2.4 Settings for layers To make full use of layers and the automatic functions they offer, you should check the following settings before starting work:

Layer/menu automation There is one option under LAYER/MENU AUTOMATION. If this option is activated, the layer is automatically proposed for every function or function group. The last layer used with the function is used here. In addition to proposal of the active layer, layers are offered in the fast selection list that are thematically related to the selected function. This list can be extended.

Format properties from layers In the Format properties from layers area, you can set which properties of a layer are to be copied. Either (as displayed), the properties of the line style assigned to the layer (fixed properties) can be copied or, if the “Copy to format toolbar as a proposed value when ­layers are selected” option is selected on the FORMAT DEFINITION tab rather than the MATCH FROM LAYER BASED ON LINESTYLE, PEN, LINE, COLOR ASSIGNED (FIXED SETTING) option, pen, line and color are used as default values.

When working through this book, you should set the layer options as shown in the ­screenshots. This enables you to test all the advantages offered by the specified resources including wizards.

4

Project start to site plan

This chapter provides all the information and procedures you need to start a new project: we start by creating a project using a project template, importing scanned single-color plans and sketches, simple 2D entities consisting of lines and circles right up to text and dimension lines, as well as importing and aligning site plans received from the surveyor’s office as a DXF file. It also describes how a plan can be imported into Allplan from a different project (or by a partner office using Allplan).

■■4.1 Create a project – project properties You can create a new project either as a copy of an existing (template) project, or as a new project (with or without a structure). The advantage of using template projects is that different resources (depending on the project type and client) can exist without the resources becoming too unmanageable. In addition, wizards can be used in all projects that provide a different look (e. g. color or black/white) for each building client. You can therefore standardize the working methods without having to sacrifice display variants.

4.1.1 New project . . . You access NEW PROJECT . . . either via the PROJECTPILOT or by using OPEN PROJECT. You can use the Wizard that is displayed to create a project with most project settings. The Wizard must run through to the end (see also section 2.1, The project-based approach). You can make different settings in the individual Wizard steps for creating a new project.

Open Project ProjectPilot New project . . .

126  4 Project start to site plan

Dialog box: New Project – Specify Project Name

ƒƒ PROJECT NAME is the name under which the project appears in the project list. You can only assign a name that does not yet exist in the project list. Special characters are not allowed. ƒƒ PROJECT LOCATION is only available for workgroup installations. With this type of installation, Allplan projects can be stored on several computers to accelerate data access. ƒƒ SAME FOLDER AS PROJECT NAME specifies whether the Windows folder on the hard drive should have the same name as the project or whether the internal project number is used. Activate this option if possible. You can change the default setting for this in the Services application. See section 9.1, Services application – fundamentals, setting the SAME FOLDER NAME AS PROJECT NAME option.

Dialog box: New project – additional settings (resources)

4.1 Create a project – project properties 127

ƒƒ PATH SETTINGS allow you to control whether the project uses office standard resources or project-specific resources (see section 2.1.3, Resources (office or project)). If the path is changed to Project, you can choose whether the data should be copied from the office or from another existing project into your new project. The different resources build upon each other and should always be transferred from a source as a whole whenever possible (selected resources in the graphic). ƒƒ You require OFFSET COORDINATES if you want to (or have to) work directly on data that are based on Gauß-Krüger coordinates.

Dialog box: New project – additional settings (structure)

You can use a structure template when creating a new project. Structure templates ­(provided they were created in V2009 or a later version!) contain all information about the building structure, the plane model, the layouts and the drawing file names with assignments and layout names. Some project structures can be derived from existing projects using ProjectPilot.

New project – additional settings (rights) – only for workgroup

Here, you can define the owner of the project and the users who should be given authorization to work on the project. Only selected users see the project when they select a project and in ProjectPilot.

4.1.2 Copy project Another way of creating a new project is to use a copy of an existing project (or a special template project). By using template projects, you can use several different resources without having to worry about other projects when you further modify them. ALL settings and data that exist in the template project are duplicated.

128  4 Project start to site plan

Copy project (Select project)

You access COPY PROJECT either in the project’s shortcut menu under OPEN PROJECT, or in the project’s shortcut menu in the PROJECTPILOT.

When you execute the COPY PROJECT function, the name of the target project and the storage location (only for workgroup, all networked computers) have to be specified.

4.1.3 Project settings Almost all of the settings that can be made when you create a new project can also be changed after the project is created.

4.1.3.1 Rename project You can change the project name using the shortcut menu for the relevant project in the OPEN PROJECT – RENAME dialog box. The same restrictions in terms of special characters and length apply as when you create a project.

4.1.3.2 Properties You can display the properties using the shortcut menu for the relevant project in the OPEN PROJECT dialog box.

Project information The PROJECT INFORMATION area contains only information about the project size, where it is stored, the creation date, and the amount of disk space available. Only the following information can be changed here: ƒƒ SAME FOLDER AS PROJECT NAME specifies whether the Windows folder on the hard drive should have the same name as the project or the internal project number. Selecting or deselecting this option renames the Windows folder on the hard drive accordingly. ƒƒ ASSIGN ATTRIBUTES is used for entering standard information about the building ­project which can be retrieved at different places (such as layout headers, lists and so on). Before they are used, the project attributes must be shared once for all projects (also see chapter 2.3.1, Open project). The Computer name, Owner and Authorized user fields only exist with workgroup installations.

4.1 Create a project – project properties 129

ƒƒ OWNER specifies which user has all rights in the project. This user is highlighted in blue. The owner or the SYSADM can change the owner and/or add or remove users. ƒƒ AUTHORIZED USERS displays all users. The users who are activated for this project are highlighted in blue.

Path settings ƒƒ Path settings such as PEN AND LINE DEFINITIONS and ATTRIBUTES PROPOSED can be configured here only from Office to Project, or vice versa. You cannot transfer data from other projects using the Properties dialog box from the OPEN PROJECT dialog box. If the path is changed from Project to Office, the project-specific data are deleted! ƒƒ DRAWING SYMBOL REGULATIONS is used to manage and specify the required drawing symbol regulations that should be used in the project. The setting is only important in the field of urban planning. ƒƒ CAD-TAI project assignment – Set research project “(Re)search projects” refers to TAI projects that are searched for quantities involved when the quantity takeoff schedules are created, that is, with which a “search” is performed. In doing so, the sequence of the element masters and element schedules that are selected when the search project is defined also defines the sequence for the search (from top to bottom). As only the elements that are found can be itemized in the positions from which they are constructed, it is important that only those element catalogs that are ­actually saved when the quantity takeoff schedules are created are used for the ­material definition. You can use this mechanism to analyze several positions from a material with the correct dimensions which can be activated with formulas, for example. ƒƒ Set (re)search path Before you set the (re)search project, you have to set the path to the project data ­tables. To do this, you have to open the properties of a project and then click on the ­ AD-TAI RESEARCH button at the bottom. C Use the PATH button to set the correct path to your Allplan 2012 BCM project. ƒƒ Set (re)search project In the CAD TAI Project Assignment dialog box you can now configure which projects should be accessed during the element search. To do this, move the ***End of ­research*** line down using the gray button. If the required (re)search project is not at the top, you can move it. You can easily test the setting by opening any component screen (such as Wall), under Catalog Assignment set nem_ava as the Material, and then trying to set the ­material.

Settings ƒƒ You require OFFSET COORDINATES if you want to (or have to) work directly on data that is based on Gauß-Krüger coordinates. ƒƒ INPUT/OUTPUT CURRENCY specifies which currency should be used.

130  4 Project start to site plan

4.1.4 Example – copy project template For the exercises in this book, you should use the project template that was automatically installed during setup. The components are displayed exactly as shown in this book only if you use a copy of the project template.

Copy project template Open Project Copy project

ZZ OPEN PROJECT ZZ Select project ZZ COPY PROJECT

The storage location (computer) only has to be specified for a workgroup installation. ZZ Project name The project folder is created and the data is copied from the template project to your project. Once all the data have been copied, the OPEN PROJECT dialog box closes and the new project opens. You can tell from the program line that you are now in your own project.

Fill out project attributes Open Project

ZZ OPEN PROJECT ZZ Select  (the project you have just created) ZZ SHORTCUT MENU → PROPERTIES The PROJECT SETTINGS dialog box opens. Here you see all of the settings with which the project was created. You can change the resource settings if you need. To work on the example, you should leave the settings as they are. ZZ Use the ASSIGN ATTRIBUTES button to open the dialog box for entering the project attributes, and enter data in the following lines. (You can find a brief guide to activating project attributes for use in chapter 3.2.3, Share project attributes.)

4.2 Create project structure – create plane model 131

PROJECT ATTRIBUTES

Assignment

PROJECT ATTRIBUTES

Assignment

ARCHITECT

Office name

CLIENT ZIP CODE/CITY:

00000 Client name

CLIENT STREET

Client street 1a

ARCHITECT ADDRESS ARCHITECT ZIP CODE/ CITY

00000 Architect city

CONSTRUCTION YEAR (COMPLETION)

2007/2008

ARCHITECT STREET

Architect street 0815

CONSTRUCTION SITE

Construction city

ARCHITECT FAX NUMBER

CONSTRUCTION PROJECT

New build of terraced houses

ARCHITECT TELEPHONE NUMBER

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION PROJECT

With parking lots

CONSTRUCTION STAGE

Second construction stage

HEIGHT RELATIVE TO ­NORMAL 0

378.50

CLIENT

Client name

PROJECT NUMBER

RH01

CLIENT ADDRESS

Additional line for client name

LOCATION/PLOT

Fl. No. 43/239, District Construction city

ZZ Confirm each individual dialog box with OK. The new project should now be opened.

■■4.2 Create project structure – create plane model 4.2.1 Structure project – fundamentals There are two ways of structuring a project’s individual drawings in Allplan 2012. OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS opens the dialog box for selecting the files

you want to edit. In Allplan, this dialog box has two tabs (Fileset structure and Building structure). The fileset structure offers a flat structure (only one hierarchy) and the option of linking drawing files in several filesets. You cannot directly activate drawing files from different filesets. The building structure maps a building (or another project) using substructures. Each drawing file has a defined place within the building structure. Drawing files from different structural levels can be directly activated together without the need for any additional measures.

Open on a project-specific basis

132  4 Project start to site plan

4.2.2 Edit drawing files – fundamentals Up to 80 drawing files can be edited simultaneously (as a drawing file stack), regardless of whether you are working with the drawing structure or building structure. Drawing files can be hidden, they can be in reference mode, in edit mode, or activated. The following applies: only one drawing file can be active, while 79 drawing files can be in reference mode and in edit mode.

4.2.3 Fileset structure – fundamentals

Fileset structure

Project structuring in filesets gives you the option of assigning each drawing file to different (or even several) filesets. You can divide your project into planes, details, views, and ­sections. Only one fileset can be active at any time. If, for example, you created a fileset for every story and assigned your drawing files there, you cannot view the building in its entirety without an additional fileset (working model). A possible fileset structure for the sample project can be found in the finished sample project.

4.2.4 Building structure – fundamentals The building structure works with a unique assignment of the drawing files to structural levels. The drawing files to be activated can be assigned to any structural levels. The building model (3D model) is displayed on the left – BUILDING STRUCTURE tab – and on the right you see all data that can be derived from the model (views, sections, lists) – Derived from building structure.

Building structure – building model Building structure

The following predefined structural levels exist for the building structure (the left-hand side of the tab); these can be selected and assigned using the shortcut menu or the respective functions.

4.2 Create project structure – create plane model 133

Property –

Building –

Buildings –

Story –

Substory

as well as any structural levels Any structural level

Predefined s­tructural levels Structural levels

You can add drawing files and/or additional structural levels to any level. Bear in mind that predefined structural levels are included in the hierarchy. If you are planning to output data using the IFC interface, you can activate the RESTRICTIONS OF BUILDING STRUCTURE (shortcut menu PROJECT LEVEL BS). This restricts the possible structural level according to the IFC guidelines or your own requirements for the current project.

Derived from building structure – views, sections, and lists Derived from building structure is grouped into three different areas in which structural levels can be created. Drawing files can be assigned to the structural levels of views and sections. Views →

View and

Sections →

Section

Only structural levels of the same type can be subordinate at any one time. Drawing files that can be defined as destination drawing files can be assigned to the lower level. Destination drawing files are denoted separately and, in addition to the data, have additional information such as a source drawing file list and settings for the hidden line image. Lists

List

Drawing files cannot be assigned to lists. The list itself contains all information such as source drawing files and the settings for the list calculation. It is advisable to give the list the same name as the calculation list.

Insert new ­structural level

134  4 Project start to site plan

Opening the Building structure tab for the first time NOTE: When adopting a structure from an existing project, the project’s

BIM folder has to be selected. This contains all the necessary information. The first time you open the BUILDING STRUCTURE tab (or after you delete the building structure), a Wizard appears with which you can create a ready-made default structure, a structure from an existing project, a structure to be created from existing filesets, or else you can start from scratch.

Create building structure – Wizard using FLOOR MANAGER Floor Manager

New model

You can use the FLOOR MANAGER to start a Wizard with which you can create a new plane model and, at the same time, create a suitable building structure. This also creates the links from the structural levels to the planes. A model does not yet exist the first time you start the Floor Manager. ƒƒ NEW MODEL opens a dialog box with which you make important settings for the plane model. These are simplified basic settings that create a basic structure. These can easily be refined once they have been created in the Floor Manager, and adapted to the ­necessary situations.  If you select the CREATE/EXTEND BUILDING STRUCTURE checkbox and then close the dialog box by clicking OK, this starts an additional Wizard with which you can set up the building structure whose number of stories ­corresponds to the plane model. This automatically assigns the relevant planes to the structural levels.

4.2 Create project structure – create plane model 135

ƒƒ CREATE/EXTEND BUILDING STRUCTURE If you have already created a project structure (at least one node on the left), the system asks you under which node you want to insert the new structural levels. The structural levels in the upper area are created with the assigned drawing files in the building structure (building model). The settings in the lower area (views, sections) create one node each under the ­“Derived from building structure” section with each assigned drawing file. You can enter a name for the structural levels in the NAME column. These are used as the name when the structural levels are created.

4.2.5 Example – project structure and plane settings For the example, a structure is created using the Floor Manager and a Wizard. Please ensure that you answer the prompt correctly and do not use a building structure from existing data. The project contains the finished building structure and a possible fileset structure. The entire example in this guide is based on the building structure, it does not include any explanations on the fileset structure. The plane model can also be used if the project without a building structure should be exclusively managed using a fileset structure.

136  4 Project start to site plan

Create structure using Floor Manager Open on a ­project-specific basis Building structure

Floor Manager

New model

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ BUILDING STRUCTURE tab ZZ Choose DO NOT GENERATE A BUILDING STRUCTURE; IT WILL BE CUSTOMIZED ZZ FLOOR MANAGER

ZZ NEW MODEL

ZZ Set the values in the NEW MODEL dialog box as shown here. ZZ Select and confirm the CREATE/ EXTEND

BUILDING

STRUCTURE

checkbox ZZ CREATE/EXTEND BUILDING STRUCTURE dialog box Make entries as shown.

(Dialog box only appears the first time you open or entirely delete the building structure.)

4.2 Create project structure – create plane model 137

As soon as you close the CREATE/EXTEND BUILDING STRUCTURE dialog box with OK, the Floor Manager appears again.

The building structure is created when you exit the Floor Manager. If you want to make changes to the floor heights for basements or similar, reopen the Floor Manager either after you have opened a drawing file or after you have saved the building structure AND the “Derived from building structure” section using the relevant save function.

The project structure is now created and can be used. Some drawing files already have a name and are partly filled with data. Using these templates ensures that you can copy individual drawing files from the finished project to your sample project at any time, and then combine it with your own data.

4.2.6 Example – assigning drawing file names The structural levels and the drawing file numbers alone can provide a great deal of information on what the respective drawing files contain. However, it is essential to name the drawing files clearly and following a logical scheme.

Save Save

138  4 Project start to site plan

Drawing file names in the building structure Open on a project-specific basis Building structure

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ BUILDING STRUCTURE tab ZZ Open the structural levels of the building structure (left-hand side) in such a manner that you can see all the stories clearly and rename the drawing files listed in the table. Structural level

No.

Drawing file name

Story −2 . . .

210 211

Story −2 – foundations and drainage floor slab/foundation slab

Story −1 . . .

220 221

Story −1 – basement model floor slab over story −1

Story 00 . . .

230 231

Story 00 – lower floor model floor slab over story 00

Story 01 . . .

240 241

Story 01 – upper floor model floor slab over story 01

Story 02. . .

250 251

Story 02 – top floor model floor slab/roof over story 02

Drawing file names in the objects derived from the building structure Like in the building model, the drawing files assigned for views and sections also need to be named. Open on a project-specific basis Building structure

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ BUILDING STRUCTURE tab ZZ Open the structural levels for the objects derived from the building structure (righthand side), and rename the drawing files listed in the table. Structural level

No.

Drawing file name

View from South

260 261 262

View from South – background elements

265 266 267

View from West – background elements

Structural level

No.

Drawing file name

View from North

270 271 272

View from North – background elements

275 276 277

View from East – background elements

View from West

View from East

View from South – foreground elements View from West – foreground elements

View from North – foreground elements View from East – foreground elements

Section A-A

280 281

Section A-A detailing

Section B-B

285 286

Section B-B detailing

4.3 Insert site plan as scanned image 139

■■4.3 Insert site plan as scanned image 4.3.1 Scan – fundamentals Allplan provides options for storing images and scanned drawings in a drawing file in ­different ways, and linking them with each other. Use the SCAN module for line drawings that do not require colors or grayscales. In the SCAN module you can convert any image file you like into a color gradient (pixel has color – no color) RLC file and link it with the drawing file (insert). You can use the settings for the scanned image and different functions in the Scan module to create scale plans from almost all (including slightly distorted) data.  All actions that you perform on the scanned image using commands from the Scan m ­ odule (turquoise) are saved directly in the RLC file. In other words, if you have stored a scanned image with several drawing files, then any changes (rotate, delete, resize etc.) are immediately visible in all other drawing files. ƒƒ INSERT IMAGE can be found either in the general shortcut menu or in the SCAN module. You can use the IMPORT button to select any image file on your computer. This converts the image file into an RLC file whose name you can specify. The storage location of the RLC file is always the current project.

You can make the following settings in the INSERT IMAGE dialog box. ƒƒ COLOR: Sets the color of the pixels in the scanned image. Here you can choose between 256 shades. ƒƒ DPI VALUE: A resolution is proposed. Unfortunately, this rarely corresponds to the real resolution of the original file which you should set here. You can see the resolution of the original file using Windows Explorer – File Properties. ƒƒ ZOOM FACTOR: regulates the scale of the display. The following applies:

Scan

Link with Scanned Image

140  4 Project start to site plan

Reposition image

Delete area Rotate area

Create bitmap area

Original scale

Zoom factor

Original scale

Zoom factor

1:1

0.010

1:100

1.000

1:10

0.100

1:200

2.000

1:25

0.250

1:500

5.000

1:50

0.500

1:1000

10.000

ƒƒ REPOSITION IMAGE is used to move the scanned image. After you have activated a function, specify a reference point (FROM POINT) in the scanned image and a target point (TO POINT) in your drawing. ƒƒ DELETE AREA deletes any part of the scanned image. The area to be deleted is selected using the general polyline tool input. ƒƒ ROTATE AREA rotates any part of the scanned image. You select the area to be rotated using the general polyline tool input. You have to specify a rotation point and a rotation angle. ƒƒ CREATE BITMAP AREA directly converts the selected area of a monochrome scanned image into a bitmap area. Its size and position correspond precisely to the scanned image. The function is ideal if you had to edit and correct a plan using the Scan module, but you do not want to have the disadvantages created by the line-by-line structure of the scanned image during printing.

4.3.2 Scanned image – check size The first action after linking the scanned image should always be to check the scale. To do this, you ideally need only one line. With templates that you received by fax, you have to measure both in the X and Y direction. It is best if you use the following checklist to set the scale more precisely.

Scenario 1: Checking the scale results in a consistent resizing factor for the X and Y directions. Link with Scanned Image

hh Choose LINK WITH SCANNED IMAGE to check the properties of the scanned image and, if necessary, to change the DPI value and/or the zoom factor.

Scenario 2: Measure length

Resize area

Checking the length results in different resizing factors for the X and Y directions. hh Rectangle with the precise dimensions of a building object with a corner lying on a point in the scanned image. hh Choose RESIZE AREA and specify the area to be resized hh As the reference point, identify the corner of the rectangle that is lying on the scanned image point. hh FROM POINT is the point on the scanned image – TO POINT is the corresponding corner of the rectangle.

4.3 Insert site plan as scanned image 141

These steps have to be performed individually in both directions, or else you calculate the two factors for X and Y and enter them.

Scenario 3: Checking the scale and angle did not provide any useful results. hh Rectangle with the precise dimensions of a building object with a corner lying on a point in the scanned image. hh Choose 3-POINT CORRECT and specify the area to be resized hh You can now resize the scanned image using the three points.

3-point correct

It may be necessary to resize the scanned image more than once. Each action is carried out directly on the scanned image file.

4.3.3 Example – Link site plan with scanned image The next step in the sample project is to link a site plan in drawing file 100. To do this, you need the SCAN module and no. 100 as the current drawing file.

Link with Scanned Image ZZ Choose OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS and select drawing file 100. (Only drawing file 100 and the structural level above it are active.) ZZ LINK WITH SCANNED IMAGE ZZ IMPORT button ZZ Change the file type to TIF – TIF Files ZZ In the project directory, select the site_plan_rotated.tif file. ZZ Confirm your file selection ZZ Now enter site_plan_org.rlc as the file name and confirm the value when the system asks about the brightness of the conversion. Now change the following settings in the LINK WITH ­ SCANNED IMAGE dialog box: ZZ COLOR → Gray 23 ZZ DPI VALUE → 600 ZZ ZOOM FACTOR → 10,0 ZZ Confirm your entries The site plan is displayed with color 23 (gray) in the drawing file.

Open on a project-specific basis Link with Scanned Image

142  4 Project start to site plan

■■4.4 Prepare site plan There are different ways of using the site plan. For example, you can request a DXF file from the relevant surveyor’s office and either integrate or import it as a free Xref. For the first step, it is usually best to redraw the site plan with lines and to extend it with your own texts and dimension lines. The degree to which this is precise strongly depends on the template that you use.

4.4.1 Draft module – fundamentals Draft

Undo last entry (back)

In the Draft module you see most of the functions for creating and changing elements which you need for simple tasks and basic initial designs. The input mechanisms always follow the input options described in chapter 2.10.2, Creating elements. ƒƒ START SYMBOL and END SYMBOL can be freely selected for many elements (such as line, circle). ƒƒ UNDO LAST ENTRY appears either in the dialog line or in dialog boxes for setting element properties and undoes a function in individual steps.

Tools Line

 

 Single line mode  Polyline mode

ƒƒ LINE (SINGLE LINE, POLYLINE) The line is the prototype of all linear elements and components that have to be entered. When you enter a polyline, this creates individual elements; when you enter a polyline, this creates a single element. Single lines are usually easier to process further. ƒƒ Only one line is ever created in Single line mode. When you have specified the second point, the function stops and asks for a new starting point. ƒƒ In POLYLINE mode, polylines are created whose single lines are not connected. You can close the polyline by pressing . Canceling it once cancels the polyline input, but the tool remains active. Enter them according to this pattern:

Rectangle

ƒƒ From POINT/ELEMENT ƒƒ TO POINT or FROM POINT/ELEMENT ƒƒ RECTANGLE offers four different methods for creating a rectangle. The most important method is the entry via diagonals. This is also used for surface elements. Only individual lines are created. You can set the four input modes in the input options. Depending on the option you choose, the system requests different information in the dialog line. The first button – Create rectangle as a polyline – allows you to define whether the four lines of the rect­ angle are to be created as a unit or as independent lines.

4.4 Prepare site plan 143

ƒƒ BASED ON DIAGONALLY OPPOSITE POINTS: The system prompts you for the start and end point of the rectangle’s diagonals. The inclination of the finished rectangle on the screen depends on the system angle that is set. ƒƒ BASED ON BASELINE: The system prompts you for the start and end point of the baseline. You then specify the width of the rectangle by making an entry in the ­dialog line or in the fileset. ƒƒ BASED ON CENTERLINE: The system prompts you for the start and end point of the center line. You then specify half the width of the rectangle by making an entry in the dialog line or in the drawing. ƒƒ BASED ON CENTER: The system prompts you for the center and a corner of the ­rectangle. ƒƒ CIRCLE offers you three input options for the position and the radius of the circle, as well as four options for entering a full circle or an arc.

Diagonals

Baseline

Center line

Midpoint Circle

Depending on which input type you have selected, the individual steps for creating a circle differ from each other slightly. The following information is required for each: ƒƒ CIRCLE BASED ON CENTER The first point you specify is the center of the circle. You can specify the radius ­either by pointing and clicking in the drawing or by entering it in the dialog line. ƒƒ CIRCLE BASED ON 2 POINTS The two points you specify define the diameter of the circle. ƒƒ CIRCLE BASED ON THREE POINTS OR TWO POINTS AND RADIUS Here you can enter a circle either by specifying three points or by specifying two points and then entering the radius. Instead of defined points, you can also select an existing element that should form the tangents to the circle. If several solutions are possible, all solutions are temporarily available for selection.

Circle based on center Circle based on 2 points Circle based on three points or two points and radius.

Additional entries are available for entering the opening angle (arc) or a complete circle. The following section explains how to create a circle based o is center point. ENTER FULL CIRCLE

hh MIDPOINT hh Enter RADIUS. Finished. ENTER END ANGLE

hh MIDPOINT hh Enter RADIUS. hh Enter the START ANGLE (relative to the X axis) hh Enter the END ANGLE (relative to the X axis) Finished. ENTER END ANGLE BASED ON DELTA ANGLE

hh MIDPOINT hh Enter RADIUS.

Enter full circle

Enter end angle

Enter end angle based on delta angle

144  4 Project start to site plan

hh Enter the START ANGLE (relative to the X axis) hh Enter DELTA ANGLE (measured from the starting angle). Finished. Enter end angle based on arc length

ENTER END ANGLE BASED ON ARC LENGTH

hh MIDPOINT hh Enter RADIUS. hh Enter the STARTING ANGLE (enter the length of the arc part relative to the X axis) hh Enter the ARC LENGTH (relative to the starting angle) Finished.

Surface elements hatching, pattern, fill, bitmap area, style area Hatching Pattern Fill Bitmap Area style General settings

The hatching, pattern, fill, bitmap area, and style area functions all have a similar functionality. All five surface areas can be converted into the other element types.  They are entered in accordance with the rules for general polyline input (see chapter 2.10.2.3, Surface elements – polygonal entries). The surface elements have similar or the same settings in part. If you modify existing elements, all settings are displayed as a table in the properties palette and can be changed. All changes are displayed immediately. ƒƒ ANGLE specifies the angle by which the surface element should be rotated. With fills, you find the option under ADVANCED. ƒƒ The checkbox DIRECTION SIDE activates the transfer of a side of polygon as the base line for the surface element. ƒƒ The checkbox BACKGROUND COLOR activates the COLOR button. You can select any RGB color as a background color for hatching and pattern. ƒƒ ORIGIN ↔ CUSTOM POINT Depending on which reference point you choose, the origin is selected as a reference or a reference point that you determine for the current surface element.

Parameter HATCHING ƒƒ LINE SPACING ƒƒ CONSTANT IN LAYOUT, AS SET IN DEFAULTS means that the line spacing of the

hatching always remains the same, regardless of the scale. The spacing is based on the setting made in the hatching defaults. This setting is the default in architecture components. ƒƒ ADJUST TO SCALE IN LAYOUT – REFERENCE SCALE BASED ON DEFAULTS ­changes the line spacing based on the reference scale value set in defaults for the scale adjustment of the line spacing.

Parameter PATTERN ƒƒ RESIZE – HEIGHT/WIDTH ƒƒ ADJUST TO SCALE IN LAYOUT – CONSTANT IN LAYOUT With the ADJUST TO SCALE IN LAYOUT option, the size of the pattern elements changes according to the scale that is set; with the CONSTANT IN LAYOUT option,

4.4 Prepare site plan 145

the size of the pattern elements is always governed by the size set in the pattern ­defaults, regardless of the selected scale. ƒƒ WIDTH FACTOR/HEIGHT FACTOR Specifies the size of the pattern elements or scales them. The setting is always based on the height and width set in the pattern defaults. It affects scale-dependent patterns and scale-independent patterns. Values >1 enlarge the pattern elements, values > – REDUCE > to define a color gradient for the tree.

Shown here are some example settings. To fill the circle with color you can use either the outline auto-detect tool again or you can use Allplan’s polygonization tools.

Check the sequence of elements created When you display all the layers, it is possible that not all the elements will be visible. Allplan creates new elements in the sequence defined in the GENERAL options. In the case of elements with the same sequence the element that was created or modified last is visible before the others. The site plan could look like this. Changing the color of the fill in the plot causes the remaining fills to “disappear”. The fills for the tree and the roof therefore have to be changed in a sequence that ensures that they are one level before the plot but still behind the lines surrounding them. The sequence of elements can be changed in various ways. You first need to determine which value the elements have as far as the sequence is concerned ZZ Click the fill in the plot and check the value in the palette. The sequence should be set to –7. ZZ Now click the circle used to represent the tree. In the PROPERTIES palette the sequence should be set to 0. The fills for the tree were also created using the sequence –7. NOTE: For all the new basic elements the sequence is set by default in the

program options.

170  4 Project start to site plan

Change the sequence of elements created The sequence of the fills for the tree and the building is to be modified. We will change the sequence of these fills from –7 to –4 (i. e. bring them three levels forward). This way the fills are behind the surrounding lines but still in front of the fill used for the plot. Filter step by step Filter by elements

Use selection ­rectangle, new filter

ZZ FILTER STEP BY STEP (PROPERTIES PALETTE) ZZ FILTER BY ELEMENTS ZZ Fill checkbox ZZ Confirm ELEMENT FILTER dialog box ZZ USE SELECTION RECTANGLE, NEW FILTER ZZ Confirm FILLET STEP BY STEP

dialog box ZZ Open a selection rectangle from

top right to bottom left over the site plan. The fill for the plot should not be entirely enclosed by the selection rectangle.

Only the fills for the roof and the tree should be marked with handles. If more than this is selected, press to cancel and try again. ZZ In the palette’s properties change the value for the sequence to –4. The change you made in the palette’s properties is reflected immediately in the drawing. Press to confirm the new value for the sequence.

Copying elements – copy tree Copy and paste

ZZ COPY ZZ OPEN A SELECTION RECTANGLE around the tree (all the elements of the tree should be fully bounded by the selection rectangle) ZZ SPECIFY FROM POINT, e. g. corner of a building. ZZ TO POINT (place the tree)

4.5 Data exchange: importing/exporting 171

Finished site plan ZZ Below is a possible result with the site plan. Arrows for the entrance and access to the parking area have been added (using triangles made of lines and a fill). The sequence of the lines and fills have been further refined so that the trees cover the boundary lines, for example. If you take a closer look at the finished example from the Allplan 2012 Practical Manual project, you can see the corresponding settings e. g. via the ­element information.

In chapter 8, Data output, we show how the “cluttered” site plan with information on the new building and demolition can be used to make two different layouts without the need for several drawing files or duplicate elements.

■■4.5 Data exchange: importing/exporting Allplan provides import and export functions in the FILE menu. This area contains nearly all functions for data exchange. The example at the end of this chapter shows you how to import DXF files or a layout from Allplan along with the corresponding drawing files.

4.5.1 Import and export Allplan offers a wide range of import and export formats. A number of formats can be excluded depending on the type of data required. Most functions are combined under Import and Export on the FILE menu.

172  4 Project start to site plan

4.5.1.1 DWG, DXF, DGN and other data types Data import The import process is structured the same for AutoCAD files and other data types. When you activate this tool, a file selection screen appears. Here, each file type is restricted to specific data types. You can use the OPTIONS and PREVIEW buttons and the EXCHANGE FAVORITE and CONFIGURATION selection boxes to preview the file you want to import and control the import process.

�

�

ƒƒ PREVIEW is disabled until a file is selected. PREVIEW allows you to display the contents of the selected file in a separate window. The preview is usually sufficient for determining whether the ­correct file was selected for the import. If the file contains one or more paper spaces in addition to the model space, you can switch between the views via a shortcut menu. ƒƒ OPTIONS opens a dialog for detailed configuration of the import process. Allplan provides a variety of options for controlling the import and export process. These options are different for each file type. Exchange favorites give you access to the most common exchange scenarios.

4.5 Data exchange: importing/exporting 173

� NOTE: Options will differ according to the file type you have selected or the

file version.

GENERAL SETTINGS tab

ƒƒ CURRENT EXCHANGE FAVORITE is used for selecting exchange favorites you saved earlier and saving current settings in a new exchange favorite. When you select a different favorite, all settings are defined based on the defaults you saved earlier. ƒƒ In TRANSFER MODE, you can define whether hidden data is included in the import. You can also define how elements are transferred. If you select 2D, all data is transferred as 2D data or converted into 2D data. ƒƒ COORDINATES AND LENGTH PARAMETERS Depending on the file you are importing, you should make settings here. In LAYOUT SCALE (1:X) you define the scale of the file you are importing. The size of the text is defined according to the scale. UNIT AND SCALE FACTOR

define how drawing units are transferred to Allplan. If a drawing was imported with the incorrect size, you can enter corrections here before reimporting it. For test purposes, change only one of the two settings. ADDITIONAL OFFSET (M)

offsets the data by set values when you import a file. For example, you can import a site plan so that the center of the file is flush with zero.

174  4 Project start to site plan

ALLPLAN 2012 SPECIFIC tab

ƒƒ DISTRIBUTE LAYERS defines how the layers of the file you are importing are translated in Allplan. The default setting is LAYER. If you are importing a large file and/or need to distribute layers across different drawing files, select DOCUMENTS (NOT VALID FOR CONTENTS OF A REFERENCE FILE). ƒƒ IMPORTED REFERENCE FILES defines how XRefs from the file you are importing are created on drawing files in Allplan. For files with many XRefs, we recommend creating a drawing automatically. ƒƒ LAYER HIERARCHY IF LAYERS GENERATED DURING IMPORT defines the layer group in Allplan in which new layers are to be created. If you have created groups in Allplan specifically for exchanging data with a design partner, select these groups here. ƒƒ CREATE DURING IMPORT defines whether Allplan automatically creates new definitions during import. For example, if you activate PATTERN DEFINITIONS, unknown patterns will be created automatically in Allplan. This enhances the display of the imported file, but increases your office- or project-related resources.

Individual tools for importing files ƒƒ IMPORT AUTOCAD FILES. . . opens the dialog box for importing AutoCAD files. You can select the file extensions *.dwg, *.dxf, *.dwt and *.dxb. ƒƒ IMPORT OTHER DATA. . . opens the dialog box for importing MicroStation files (*.dgn and *.s??), HPGL2 files (*.plt, *.hp, *.hpg, *.hpl, *.prn, *.p0? and *.p1?) as well as MicroStation V8 drawings (*.dgn). ƒƒ LAST LOG FILE opens the transfer log of the last import or export. The log lists details such as the number of files transferred and the assignment of patterns and layers.

Data export The export process is similar to the import process. In addition to the settings you define for an import, you must also select the file format to which the data is to be written.

ƒƒ EXPORT AUTOCAD FILES. . . allows you to output *.dwg and *.dxf files (version V12 to 2010), *.dwf files (versions V6 and V7) and *.svg files. The options vary depending on the data type selected. ƒƒ EXPORT OTHER DATA. . . allows you to output MicroStation V8 drawings (*.dgn). ƒƒ LAST LOG FILE opens the transfer log of the last import or export. The log lists details such as the number of files transferred and the assignment of patterns and layers.

4.5 Data exchange: importing/exporting 175

4.5.1.2 PDF files Developed by Adobe Systems as a cross-platform format for documents, PDF stands for Portable Document Format and was first published in 1993. The reason for developing this file format was to provide a format for electronic documents that can be used with any operating system and hardware platform and would therefore always ensure faithful reproductions. PDF files can be created via PDF printers (low data quality and small file sizes) or saved directly from a variety of programs (high data quality with much larger files). ƒƒEXPORT PDF FILE generates a PDF from the current layout. In the EXPORT PDF FILE dialog box you can define whether the file is printable or password-protected or specify the resolutions for bitmaps, etc. The EXPORT PDF FILE tool is only available in layout mode. PDF files can also be output in print preview and schedule output mode.

Export PDF File Revised in V2011

NOTE: The following restrictions apply if you have selected PDF/A-1a

(PDF/A is an ISO standard for using the PDF format for long-term archiving of electronic documents): Layers cannot be transferred, TrueType fonts must be embedded. Transparent fills are not possible, passwords for opening and closing the document cannot be assigned and document printing cannot be restricted or disabled. For more information on PDF/A, see http://www.pdfa.org. ƒƒ IMPORT PDF FILE imports 2D and 3D PDF files to the document that is currently open. Depending on the origin of the PDF file, data quality and display will vary greatly in Allplan. When you import 2D data, the PDF file is placed so that its bottom left corner is at the origin. The coordinates of 3D data are retained. ƒƒ EXPORT 3D PDF  creates a PDF file. The transfer includes the geometry, materials (textures), cameras and lights. The EXPORT 3D PDF tool is only available on the shortcut menu of animation windows (also see chapter 2.7.3.2, Animation window). NOTE: 3D-PDF files can be opened in Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 7

and higher. This means you can send the building client the building model as an e-mail attachment. The client can then navigate within the model.

4.5.1.3 IFC files IFC stands for Industry Foundation Classes. IFCs define an object-oriented data model for all those involved in the building process. It can be used by all applications that support IFC. It facilitates the accurate exchange of data between these applications. IFCs are defined and developed by the IAI (International Alliance for Interoperability).

Import PDF file

Export 3D PDF file

176  4 Project start to site plan

With IFC version 2x, you can transfer a large number of elements to other systems or from other systems to Allplan 2012. Import IFC data

Export IFC data

ƒƒ IMPORT IFC DATA imports IFC data to Allplan. During the import, you will be prompted to specify the first drawing file. The imported data is then saved to subsequent drawing files. ƒƒ EXPORT IFC DATA exports a part of the project to an IFC model in the IAI-certified formats 2x, 2x3 or 2x3 XML. Geometry data of elements as well as assigned attributes are transferred. NOTE: In the IMPORT/EXPORT IFC DATA dialog box, there is a colored

options button at the bottom. This button lets you control data exchange in more detail. You can control the resizing factor, coordinate placement and the elements to be transferred.

4.5.1.4 3D graphics files Import functions Import CINEMA 4D data

files

Import SketchUP

Import STL files Import Rhino data

ƒƒ IMPORT CINEMA  4D DATA imports C4D files (R10 or higher) or C4D XML files that were created for Allplan in Cinema 4D (R9.5 or higher). Cinema 4D version R10.5 and higher provides a function that allows you to write data from Cinema 4D directly to a drawing file. When you do this, no functions or NDW file may be open. If the drawing file you want to write to is already in use, a confirmation prompt will appear. ƒƒ IMPORT SKETCHUP FILES imports data from Google SketchUp as *.skp files. The data of the 3D model retains the coordinates defined in Google SketchUp and is placed in the document as 3D surfaces. ƒƒ IMPORT STL FILES imports data in *.stl format. The data is transferred as 3D triangular surfaces. The current format properties are used for the imported elements. ƒƒ IMPORT RHINO DATA imports *.3dm files into Allplan. All data is created as 3D surfaces with the original coordinates of the source system. Complex, parametric objects such as nurbs are converted into polyhedrons. You can set the density during the import.

Export functions Export to CINEMA 4D/VRML/3DS/U3D

files

Export SketchUP Export STL files

ƒƒ EXPORT TO CINEMA 4D/VRML/3DS/U3D exports files from 3D information that can be opened and edited with a variety of 3D presentation programs. If possible, use the most up-to-date format offered. ƒƒ EXPORT SKETCHUP FILES stores model data as Google SketchUp files (*.skp). This data can then be used in applications such as Google Maps. ƒƒ EXPORT STL FILES saves the model data as *.stl files. You can choose between binary and text formats. The STL format (surface tessellation language, stereo lithography) defines the surface of 3D solids using triangles. The following properties are not transferred: surfaces, textures, line colors, line types, pen thicknesses and layers. Polygonal surfaces with more than four points are divided into triangles.

4.5 Data exchange: importing/exporting 177

ƒƒ EXPORT RHINO DATA exports a file in *.3dm format from 3D elements. The element color, line type, pen thickness, material (with texture files) and layer with layer color are transferred.

Export Rhino data

4.5.1.5 Allplan BCM – data exchange with the TAI system This interface can be used to transfer data either to the TAI system or to Excel. Transferring the data back to the CAD system provides you with a very comfortable way of modifying data in Allplan. This way you can, for example, change the material for all the walls in a drawing file in just a single step or even for specific walls that you have filtered out with the external application. ƒƒ EXPORT ALLPLAN BCM AND QUANTITIES Data saves information (attributes, quantities etc.) for the components in the active documents (drawing files or custom NDW) in XCA files in list format. The data can be read by external applications like Allplan BCM or Microsoft Excel for further processing there. Furthermore, the external applications can be opened automatically by Allplan as soon as the data have been exported. ƒƒ IMPORT ALLPLAN BCM AND QUANTITIES DATA imports XCA files that have been edited in external applications. The changes are updated directly in Allplan. NOTE: The first column of the file you want to import must include the

component ID attribute; this column must not be changed.

4.5.1.6 Exchanging Allplan data (import/export) EXPORT LOADED LAYOUT WITH RESOURCES, EXPORT DRAWING FILES WITH RESOURCES are convenient tools for exchanging parts of a project. In addition to the

three functions for exchanging Allplan data, you can use the external path in the ProjectPilot, project backups from the SERVICES application or Save COPY AS to exchange saved data.

Export ƒƒ EXPORT LOADED LAYOUT WITH RESOURCES saves the current layout with corresponding drawing files in a zip archive. The drawing files are saved as NDW files with resources. ƒƒ EXPORT LOADED DRAWING FILES WITH RESOURCES saves the current drawing file and all the drawing files that are open in edit mode as NDW files in a zip archive.

Import ƒƒ ADD DRAWING FILES AND LAYOUTS WITH RESOURCES TO PROJECT is used for reimporting data that was exported with one of the above functions. Drawing files and/ or layouts already in the project can be overwritten (*.bak files are generated).

Exporting Allplan BCM and quantities data

Importing Allplan BCM and quantities data

178  4 Project start to site plan

Application example ƒƒ Transferring data to the structural designer who is also using Allplan 2012 (or a newer version). ƒƒ Incorporating external employees. In this case, external employees have a complete copy of the project on their computer (original is on office server) and send only the finished layouts, including corresponding drawing files. NOTE: Scanned images are not exported. Scanned images must either

be converted to bitmaps or sent separately (*.rlc file) and saved in the destination project. Alternatively, you can use the CREATE BITMAP AREA function (Scan module) to convert the scanned images to bitmaps.

4.5.2 XRefs and custom XRefs Two functions for XRefs are available via the INSERT menu. Both functions work in a similar way but use different data.

Project-specific references Project-specific XRefs allow you to bypass the limit of displayable drawing files, for example. You can save any number of XRefs to a drawing file.

XRef

ƒƒ XREF opens the context toolbar for configuring and selecting a project-specific drawing file as an XRef. Only individual drawing files can be saved as XREFS. ƒƒ DRAWING FILE NO. opens the standard dialog box for selecting drawing files. You can select the drawing file via FILESET STRUCTURE, BUILDING STRUCTURE or DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE. ƒƒ DROP IN  (CUSTOM  →  RETAINING COORDINATES  →  CONGRUENT) defines whether the drop-in point of the XRef is determined automatically or freely. Depending on your settings, the drop-in point is corrected automatically. ƒƒ RESIZING 1:. . . defines whether the drawing is reduced or enlarged when you save it. For example, you can integrate a detailed drawing into your drawing file. ƒƒ PLACING MODE  (NORMAL  →  ADVANCED) defines whether the XRef is created as a normal XRef (2D display only, clipping possible) or as an advanced XRef (3D display with levels from the source or target).

External references CUSTOM XRefs can be used to save various data formats to drawing files that are not

imported into the project. In each case the path is saved as an absolute path.

4.5 Data exchange: importing/exporting 179

ƒƒ CUSTOM  XREF opens the file section dialog box before the CUSTOM  XREF dialog box. Here you can select an NDW, DGN, DWG or DXF file from any path and define it as a CUSTOM XREF. Note that the path of the file must always exist. Only a reference to the file and the display rule are saved in the drawing file. Copy the file you want to store to the project folder to ensure that the file is saved along with a project backup. Depending on the data type you want to use, you have two ways of making settings.

ƒƒ The NDW file format (*.NDW) offers the most settings because it is a native Allplan data format. This format gives you the same options as an XRef from a drawing file.

ƒƒ MICROSTATION FILE (*.DGN) AUTOCAD FILE (*.DWG) AUTOCAD FILE (*.DXF) only offer the options RESIZING and DROP-IN. A normal XRef is always created. TIP: The Custom XRef function allows you to save data from design profes-

sionals to your design without having to import the data into Allplan. In this way, many import problems and display problems can be avoided.

4.5.3 Importing site plans as DXF files For rough sketches and quick site plan drafts, a scanned image is sufficient. If you have received precise data from the surveyor’s office, you should always use it (for greater accuracy) and import it into the project. Before importing the data, you must define the import destination.

Destination 1: You only need the exact dimensions of the plot. Enter changes to existing borders and/or divide up the plot. → Import the data into the drawing file and move and rotate it on the design.

Custom XRef

180  4 Project start to site plan

Destination 2: The data must not be changed. → Save the DXF file directly to the drawing file as an XRef. Align it with the design.

Destination 3: You need a coordinate layout for the construction site. →  Data must be imported with original coordinates. There are two options for further processing: create the design completely on the original coordinates (GENERAL option, Optimize working with large coordinates) or save the most important drawing files of the design to the site plan as an XRef and save the site plan to your design as an XRef. Note that you must use different drawing files here.

4.5.4 Example – extending the building structure You would like to extend the existing building structure by one structural level for the site plan. You also need a structural level to save the drawing files that are imported via an Allplan data import (“Construction stage I” – Site plan from Allplan 2008 manual and the Allplan 2009 Practical Manual). You would like to insert any desired structural level in front of the floors, to which the trial drawing files can be assigned for data import.

Insert structural level Open on a project-specific basis Building structure

Any structural level

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ BUILDING STRUCTURE tab ZZ Open the shortcut menu of the PROPERTY structural level. ZZ INSERT STRUCTURAL LEVEL

ZZ ANY STRUCTURAL LEVEL

4.5 Data exchange: importing/exporting 181

The structural level is inserted directly after the PROPERTY structural level. ZZ Insert another STRUCTURAL LEVEL of any type ZZ Rename the upper structural level to Site plan and the lower structural level to Site plan construction stage I – 2008/2009.

Assign drawing files ZZ ASSIGN DRAWING FILES ZZ Select drawing files 110 to 119. ZZ Drag and drop the drawing files to the Site plan structural level of your choice.

NOTE: The drawing files have been assigned to the structural level. You

can remove the drawing files from a structural level in the same way.

ZZ Assign drawing files 120–129 to structural level Site plan construction stage I – 2008/2009. ZZ Rename the drawing files as follows: No.

Drawing file name

110 112 113 115

Site plan – Custom XRef (DXF) Site plan – DXF – Data import → moved, rotated Site plan – DXF – Data import → on Gauss-Krüger coordinates Site plan – XRef from drawing file 113

Assign drawing files

182  4 Project start to site plan

4.5.5 Example – Importing site plan data, XRef This example describes the individual steps for three ways of importing site plans with DXF data. The moved and rotated site plan is usually imported first. The site plan is in the project directory. It was also included in the template project.

Import site plan – on Gauss-Krüger coordinates ZZ Drawing file 113 current (drawing file 113 only!) ZZ Import AutoCAD Data. . . ZZ AutoCAD filetype (*.dxf) ZZ Path = project path, plot.dxf file ZZ Open OPTIONS. ZZ Select EXCHANGE FAVORITE in the GENERAL SETTINGS tab. ZZ Then change the LAYOUT SCALE (1:X) to under COORDINATES AND LENGTH PARAMETERS and under REFERENCE FILE PARAMETERS.

NOTE: The selection of available current exchange favorites changes when

the setting no longer precisely matches the favorite. You can save the changed settings as your own favorites via SAVE AS. . ..

4.5 Data exchange: importing/exporting 183

ZZ Open the ADVANCED SETTINGS tab and set the checkmark in front of SMART SYMBOL.

In this example, you want to clear the smart symbols in the original file. ZZ Open the ALLPLAN 2012 SPECIFIC tab and change the following settings: Layer level 1 → Site plan Layer level 2 → Site plan

LAYER LEVEL 2 = FILE NAME → Disabled ZZ Open the GENERAL SETTINGS tab again. ZZ Click SAVE AS under EXCHANGE FAVORITES to save the current settings as an

exchange favorite . You can reuse these settings the next time you import a site plan. ZZ Confirm your entries in this dialog box and in the OPEN dialog box by choosing OPEN. The configurations are imported via this dialog box. ZZ MODIFY → Open configuration for conversion

NOTE: You can control the “translation” of the data in the individual tabs.

The source system is the AutoCAD file and the target system is Allplan 2012. You can change the automatic assignment via the shortcut menu and modify it to meet your needs.

184  4 Project start to site plan

Measure length

Measure ­coordinates

ZZ Confirm both dialog boxes. The data is then imported and displayed on the screen. ZZ Use MEASURE LENGTH to check the building on parcel no. 43/56. The dimensions of the residential building are 10.98 x 9.24 m. ZZ Use MEASURE COORDINATES to check the specified point of the residential building on parcel no. 43/56. The coordinates show that the property is very far from the origin. This site plan is an ideal basis for a coordinate layout. It is not very suitable for other work on the building model. If you display one of your other drawing files at the same time, only two very small points will be displayed at the bottom left and top right of the workspace.

Import site plan – on design coordinates

Measure ­coordinates

ZZ Drawing file 112 current (drawing file 112 only!) ZZ Import AutoCAD Data. . . ZZ AutoCAD filetype (*.dxf) ZZ Path = project path, plot.dxf file ZZ Open OPTIONS. ZZ In the GENERAL SETTINGS tab, choose the EXCHANGE FAVORITE you just saved, , or configure the options as described above. ZZ Under COORDINATE AND LENGTH PARAMETERS, change the option ADJUST CENTER OF GRAVITY TO to ORIGIN. ZZ Save the current settings as an exchange favorite . ZZ The rest of the import process is the same as the process for importing Gauss-Krüger coordinates. ZZ Use MEASURE COORDINATES to check the same point of the residential building on parcel no. 43/56. The coordinates are close to the origin. This is ideal for either creating the whole design on this basis, or moving the site plan to the current design status and aligning it with this status.

Storing drawing file 113 as an XRef on design coordinates The design should not be created directly with reference to drawing file 113 (Site plan – DXF – Data import → On Gauss-Krüger coordinates) because if it is very far away from the system origin there can be problems displaying components. Views and sections derived from a model are also placed near the origin. When you simultaneously view data near

4.5 Data exchange: importing/exporting 185

the origin and on Krüger coordinates, only two small points are displayed in the design window (usually at the bottom left and top right).  To ensure that the original coordinates remain unchanged, drawing file 113 is saved to another drawing file (as an XRef). The XRef can be moved freely without having to change the original coordinates. ZZ Drawing file 115 current ZZ XREF (INSERT menu)

XRef

ZZ Select drawing file 113 in the drawing file selection dialog box (click in the white box next to the drawing file number) ZZ Placing mode: normal, DROP-IN POINT: any ZZ Format properties LAYER (LS_ALL) ZZ Drop the XRef on the drawing file and exit the tool by pressing . The position of the XRef on the drawing file is unimportant at this point. It will be aligned in the next step.

Saving the site plan as a custom XRef NOTE: The path is displayed in the lower margin under OPEN PROJECT, for

example. See also section 2.3.1, Open project, – status bar. ZZ Drawing file 110 current ZZ CUSTOM XREF ZZ Open the folder of the current project.

ZZ FILE TYPE → AUTOCAD FILE (*.DXF) and select the file plot.dxf.

ZZ Drop-in point: any ZZ Format properties LAYER (LS_ALL) ZZ Place the XRef on the drawing file and exit the tool by pressing . The position of the XRef on the drawing file is unimportant at this point. It will be aligned in the next step.

Custom XRef

186  4 Project start to site plan

4.5.6 Example – importing a site plan from construction stage I The site plan has two plots. The one at the top was used for three terraced houses (two semi-detached houses and one in between) in the first two issues of this book. We will use the bottom one to create a house in this issue. The site plan for the plot at the needs to be imported as a layout. This is essentially the manner in which you can also exchange data with design partners or external staff (with the same version of Allplan).

Import layout ZZ Activate any drawing file ZZ FILE menu → IMPORT ZZ IMPORT DRAWING FILES AND ­ AYOUTS WITH RESOURCES TO L PROJECT

ZZ Open the folder of the current project ZZ Select the file Lageplan BA I.zip to open it. ZZ If they are not already selected, select all the drawing files and layouts offered for import and press to confirm your selection.

NOTE: If a drawing file or layout in your project is not yet in use, then

“New” is displayed in the “Action” column. If a drawing file or layout with the same number already exists, then “replace” is displayed in the “Action” column. You can always decide for yourself exactly which data you want to import. When exchanging data with a freelance member of staff, data usually have to be replaced. ZZ Acknowledge the confirmation prompt that follows and which indicates how many files will be overwritten/added to the project by pressing YES. The data is imported and marked in the project in the corresponding views. This is followed by a message showing which files were processed and how.

4.5 Data exchange: importing/exporting 187

NOTE: For every file that was replaced, Allplan automatically creates a

*.bak file. If incorrect data were imported, the old status can thus still be restored using these files. Please consult the online help for more infor­ mation.

4.5.7 Example – Aligning a site plan The first site plan and the imported data from the surveyor’s office must now be aligned. Firstly, the imported szite plan must be moved and rotated onto the layout. Secondly, the layout you drew must be adjusted to the correct boundaries to achieve its level of precision without the need to recreate the drawing. The individual steps for adjusting the imported site plan to the new site plan drawing are almost identical. With XRefs, you only have to select one element for moving and rotating, and with site plans on design coordinates, you must select all elements at the same time.

Adjusting imported data ZZ Open drawing file 101 in reference mode (gray), and make either drawing file 110, 112 or 115 current (red). ZZ Hide any layers that are in the way. It is enough if the plot boundaries are visible. ZZ MOVE ZZ Select all the elements to be moved. ZZ Specify the top right corner of the plot (data to be moved) when the FROM POINT PROMPT IS DISPLAYED. ZZ TO POINT: click the corresponding corner of the site plan you drew. ZZ ROTATE

Move

Rotate

188  4 Project start to site plan

ZZ Select all the elements to be rotated. ZZ Enter the base point for the rotation (common point). ZZ SPECIFY THE START POINT ZZ SPECIFY THE DIRECTION POINT The site plans are now aligned and have a common point. The scanned image that you reproduced as a site plan is more or less exact and needs to be modified in the next step. You should also align the data on the other two drawing files in the same way.

Align drawn site plan ZZ Drawing files 110, 112 are open in ­reference mode (gray), drawing file 101 is current (red) ZZ Zoom in to the top right corner. ZZ Show all the layers to be modified.

NOTE: When several points from different elements are superimposed

(e. g. when the corner of a fill is congruent with the end points of lines), you can change the position of them all in a single step. The gray lines are the exact data, the green lines are the lines drawn to reproduce the scanned image – they are the ones that need to be adjusted in line with the exact data. Show/hide

ZZ If necessary, change the option THICK LINE and SURFACE EEMENTS IN BACKGROUND in SHOW/

Stretch entities

HIDE. ZZ STRETCH ENTITIES ZZ Select the points you want to modify → Open a selec-

tion rectangle over the corner.

NOTE: A selection rectangle is the only way of selecting all the super-

imposed points belonging to the various elements in a single step. All the elements affected by the modification are shown in the selection color.

4.5 Data exchange: importing/exporting 189

ZZ FROM POINT → point in current (colored) drawing file ZZ TO POINT → gray point in background drawing file Align all the points in your drawing with the background drawing file and then check the surface area of the plot and the dimension lines.

Align site plan CS I The data that were imported in the preceding example for construction stage I need to be adjusted to match your design (or vice versa). Here, the imported site plan will serve as the basis, to ensure that your building model is placed precisely on the given coordinates. The procedure is essentially always the same. The data to be moved are set to current or edit mode (you can open several drawing files) while the reference drawing file is opened in reference mode in the background. If you only moved one of the site plans to your design, then display just that one. ZZ Drawing file 120 is open in reference mode (gray), drawing file 101 is current (rot) and drawing files 110, 112, and 115 are open in edit mode (yellow) ZZ MOVE and select EVERYTHING ZZ FROM POINT → TO POINT: proceed as in the previous example so that your design is in line with the imported data. If necessary, adjust the position of the scanned site plan using the commands in the Scan module in order to perfect the display.

Move

190  4 Project start to site plan

4.5.8 Example – result of site plan Below is a possible result with the site plan. If you take a closer look at the finished example from the Allplan 2012 Practical Manual project, you can see the corresponding settings e. g. via the element information.

5

Building model – unfinished structure

Before you can start editing the floor plan (or the model) you need some basic information on components and their attributes as well as how to associate architectural components with the default planes.

■■5.1 Architectural components – fundamentals Once you start working with components, you will notice that many settings are available for almost all of them. For this reason, we would like to explain the parameters generally available for solid components such as WALL, COLUMN, CEILING, BEAM, FOUNDATION, LINTEL, ROLLER BLIND before explaining special components. Multi-layer components can have most of the following settings for each individual layer. These are always displayed in a list. Many of the following settings are available for all architectural components.

5.1.1 Height association of components All architectural components are created with reference to planes (see the Allplan plane model in chapter 2.12, The Allplan plane model). This means that when you enter the component, you do not have to know its exact height. Instead, you have to define the reference to the planes. The reference to the planes can be configured in a variety of ways and is identical or similar for all architectural components. All components have similar height displays. What they all have in common is that icons for the currently defined association are displayed. These icons form the button, or there is a HEIGHT button

Basic: Walls, ­openings, components Special: Walls, openings, components

192  5 Building model – unfinished structure

The top level and the bottom level of the component are associated with the planes in this dialog box. Several options are available that can be freely combined for the top level and bottom level of the component. You can combine the following settings in logical ways, but remember that the bottom level of the component must be below the top level of the component, otherwise strange effects may occur.

Settings for component top/bottom levels

With the lower plane With the upper ­plane Perpendicular Vertical Absolute TL Absolute BL From TL of ­component From BL of ­component

When you associate the component with planes, you distinguish between its bottom level and top level. Both can be associated with different planes (top or bottom plane), the same plane, absolute elevations irrespective of planes, or with reference to an existing component. Some settings can be combined and some settings are mutually exclusive. When you enter offsets, a positive value specifies the offset upwards in the Z direction and a negative value always specifies the offset downwards in the Z direction, in each case relative to the upper or lower plane. ƒƒ Associate component edge WITH LOWER PLANE with offset ƒƒ Associate component edge WITH UPPER PLANE with offset ƒƒ PERPENDICULAR/VERTICAL OFFSET specifies how the offset is measured from the plane. The on/off button has no effect on default planes, but is necessary for sloping (roof) planes. ƒƒ ABSOLUTE TL and ABSOLUTE BL are used for giving the component a precisely defined top level and/or bottom level. Component edges that are specified as absolute values are always horizontal. The button for perpendicular/vertical is hidden and replaced by the text ELEVATION. Values entered are always based on ±0.00. ƒƒ MATCH TOP LEVEL/BOTTOM LEVEL OF AN EXISTING COMPONENT is used to select the height of the component top or bottom level of another component or plane that

5.1 Architectural components – fundamentals 193

does not extend across the component. Only matching is carried out; an association is not established. If the height of the component from which the height was adopted subsequently changes, this does not affect the height of the component whose height you have set. If you change the matched component or matched plane, this does not affect the component. ƒƒ FIXED COMPONENT HEIGHT can only be set for either the top level or bottom level of the component. The value to be entered is always positive; entered upwards for top level with fixed component height, downwards for bottom level with fixed component height. If the component height is combined with an absolute elevation, you cannot select PERPENDICULAR/VERTICAL.

Fixed component height

Special settings for the component top level There are additional settings for the component top level that are needed primarily when editing top floors. ƒƒ NORMAL associates the component along the plane. In the case of a sloping plane, the component is also cut. ƒƒ JAMB WALL fixes the lowest point of the component that intersects the plane as the height. The component is always cut horizontally. ƒƒ FIREPLACE, CHIMNEY fixes the highest point of the component that intersects the plane as the height. The component is always cut horizontally. (Not available for COMPONENT HEIGHT.) ƒƒ MAXIMUM COMPONENT HEIGHT specifies the maximum height that a component can have relative to its lowest point. To be used for components below top floor levels that can only be, for example, 2.60 m (up to collar tie BL) high. These components adapt themselves to the plane until the maximum height is reached. There, they become horizontal.

5.1.2 Format properties Single-layer components You can configure the behavior of these components with regard to their format settings using OPTIONS → ARCHITECTURE in such a way that the setting can be made during input via the FORMAT toolbar or the PROPERTIES palette.

Multi-layer components For multi-layer components, you should always make all format settings in the component dialog box. This is the only way you can differentiate between the load-bearing wall leaf and the full thermal insulation, for example. Alternatively, you can make the layer setting

Normal Jamb wall Fireplace, chimney

Maximum component height

194  5 Building model – unfinished structure

for all layers of the component via the FORMAT toolbar or PROPERTIES palette (see also section 3.1.2.5, Component options).

5.1.3 Surface elements Surface elements

All architectural components have parameters for displaying the surface elements and/or outline elements.

You can select HATCHING, PATTERN, FILL, BITMAP AREA and STYLE AREA and the combinations HATCHING/FILL und PATTERN/FILL. If you activate the SHOW SURFACE ELEMENTS IN PLAN VIEW option, the component is filled with the selected surface elements in plan view. The display in the section is always calculated with surface elements if one is selected in the component.

5.1.4 Surface (animation)– preview window Assign custom ­surfaces to 3D/archit. Elements

SURFACE  (ANIMATION) opens the dialog box for defining the CUSTOM SURFACE for the animation. You can either select an

existing surface file or create a new one. NOTE: In the case of multi-layer components, a surface can be defined

for each layer. You can therefore set a red surface for brick and a yellow surface for mineral wool for a brick wall with full thermal insulation.

5.1.5 Material and further attributes For a differentiated evaluation filtered by components, you can attach component names, materials, trades for calculation, building alteration category and other attributes to architectural components. These can be attached to almost all components. Depending on the component, the attributes are accessed in different ways. Depending on the component, buttons are available for the attributes, or the details are displayed in a list.

5.1 Architectural components – fundamentals 195

ATTRIBUTES area

ƒƒ TRADE opens a dialog box containing all the available trades. The component’s trade is used to control quantity takeoff in accordance with the building regulations (VOB). ƒƒ In the case of overlapping components, PRIO­ RITY determines which of the components is to be calculated (and displayed) throughout. Not all components interact with every other component. ƒƒ CALCULATION MODE or UNIT specifies the unit to be used to evaluate the component quantity. This information is not mandatory for many lists, but should nevertheless be entered correctly. MATERIAL SELECTION area

ƒƒ Depending on the catalog setting, MATERIAL/ QUALITY opens a selection of materials. The material is also output in the lists. You can either enter a material, or in an additional dialog box, you can specify different values for different evaluations. ƒƒ BUILDING ALTERATION CATEGORY is used for the as-built, demolition or new building values and is used to differentiate between components when planning large and small alterations. For more information, see the Allplan help. ƒƒ CATALOG ASSIGNMENT provides a selection of catalogs from which you can select entries under MATERIAL/QUALITY. Depending on the component group, a different number of catalogs can be used for the qualities. The more catalogs you select, the more entries you can make in the component. By clicking on the catalog name, you go to the catalog selection for the individual attribute (see also section 3.1.2.4, Catalog options).

5.1.6 Modifying properties of components There are several ways of modifying component properties. Depending on the method used, you can change a single component, only components of the same type, or certain properties for any number of components. After creation, you can change most components in a dialog box that is similar to the one used to create the component.

196  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Component properties by double-clicking the left mouse button

Match

hh Move the crosshairs over the component you want to change until the selection display shows the required component. hh Double-click the left mouse button hh Change the component parameters hh If required, match the properties with a component that has already been changed.

Component properties using the shortcut menu hh Move the crosshairs over the component

Match

you want to change until the selection ­display shows the required component. hh Right mouse button → shortcut menu hh PROPERTIES hh Change the component parameters hh If required, match the properties with a component that has already been changed. The two methods work for almost all components. Always make sure that the required component is selected. NOTE: If the component you want to change cannot be accessed directly

(overlapping elements), you can use the MODIFY LAYER STATUS → ­HIDDEN, FROZEN function to quickly and easily hide components that are “in the way” via their layers.

Tools for changing one or several components Apply archit. ­component properties

ƒƒ APPLY ARCHIT. COMPONENT PROPERTIES is ideal if you want to make extensive changes to the same components. hh Apply Archit. Component Properties hh Click on the element whose settings you want to match (defines the component type to be changed) hh Change the component properties. hh Select all the components to be changed. The brackets feature is automatically active. hh Click APPLY or right click to transfer the properties to the components.

In the selection dialog box, you define whether the currently set attributes should be reapplied in full (existing ones are deleted), or whether the currently set attributes should be added to components.

5.1 Architectural components – fundamentals 197

NOTE: If changes are made to the component axes, the linear components

are re-generated on the basis of their axis. This can cause walls to move. If changes are made to the geometry of columns, the center of gravity of the old column form is taken as the fixed point and the new profile shape is created above this. ƒƒ CHANGE ARCHIT. PROPERTIES is the general tool for changing architectural components. If a field is not filled in the dialog box (field empty, checkbox not selected), the corresponding property is not changed in the component. This means that you can give all the walls a different height, for example, while the material, surface elements and format properties of the walls remain unchanged. hh Change Archit. Properties hh Directly enter the properties to be changed or match the properties of an existing component hh Deactivate properties that you do not want to apply to other components hh Select the components you want to change hh Click APPLY or right click to transfer the ­properties to the components.

Change archit. ­properties

Match

With CHANGE ARCHIT. PROPERTIES, you can change the properties available in the selection. Geometries (layer thicknesses, profiles for columns, etc.) are not changed. Use the filters or hide the layers to restrict the selection of components to be changed. ƒƒ CONVERSION FOR BUILDING ALTERATION WORK changes the format properties, surface elements and attributes of existing components. When building alterations are being planned, you can quickly and easily change the display of the walls to be calculated and their attribute values. You can also use the functions to assign other materials and their ­display to components. The format properties in the CONVERSION FOR BUILDING ALTERATION WORK dialog box can also be transferred to 2D elements. See also section 2.10.3.2, Edit toolbar, – Modify Format Properties.

Conversion for building alteration work

198  5 Building model – unfinished structure

■■5.2 Walls and other linear components 5.2.1 Linear components – fundamentals Linear components are a group of components that, in terms of input, are structured in a similar way to the line in the Draft module.

5.2.1.1 General properties of linear components The group of linear components includes walls, strip foundations and beams, for example. All components have one axis and one or several layers.

Input types The segmentation for circular and spline-based plans can be influenced in the ARCHITECTURE options. Circular and spline-based plans are not available for linear components with custom cross-sections. Straight component

Rectangular ­component

Curved component

ƒƒ STRAIGHT COMPONENT creates a straight linear component. The approach is largely the same as that for the LINE tool in the DRAFT module. You enter the first point (START POINT) of the component, followed by further points (TO POINT). ƒƒ RECTANGULAR COMPONENT creates a rectangular polyline consisting of four individual linear components. The approach is largely the same as that for the RECTANGLE tool in the DRAFT module. Depending on the input option selection, you are required to enter different information. ƒƒ CURVED COMPONENT creates a curved linear component starting from the secant. Steps in the function for a curved linear component: hh Enter the start and end point of the curved linear component. hh Enter the arc extension point in the workspace. hh A preview is displayed based on the last specified radius. hh Enter the radius. hh Check the preview. hh Correct or confirm the radius.

Circular component

ƒƒ CIRCULAR COMPONENT creates a circular linear component based on a midpoint. Steps in the function for a circular component hh Enter the midpoint. hh Enter the radius. hh Enter the starting angle and end angle (full circle: starting angle 0°, end angle 360°)

Polygonal c­ omponent (inscribed)

ƒƒ POLYGONAL COMPONENT (INSCRIBED) creates a linear component in the form of a polygon that is based on the radius of an inscribed circle. The number of segments must

5.2 Walls and other linear components 199

be entered in the Context toolbar. The two inscribed parts together count as one. The steps in the function are the same as those for a curved linear component. ƒƒ POLYGONAL COMPONENT (CIRUMSCRIBED) creates a linear component in the form of a polygon that is based on the radius of an inscribed circle. The number of segments must be entered in the Context toolbar. The steps in the function are the same as those for a curved linear component. ƒƒ ENTITY-BASED COMPONENT creates linear components based on 2D entities (e. g., lines, polylines, ellipses, splines) or composite elements. Element-based linear components have restricted functionalities.

Polygonal component (circumscribed)

Entity-based ­components

Steps in the function for an element-based linear component hh Draw 2D element (e. g. by means of composite element) hh Identify the start and end point of the 2D element as the start/end point of the linear component. hh The form is created automatically. ƒƒ SPLINE-BASED COMPONENT creates a spline-based linear component whereby you enter auxiliary points. The data is entered in the same way that splines are entered in the DRAFT module. A maximum of 99 auxiliary points can be entered.

Spline-based component

NOTE: Depending on the component input selected, additional information

may be required. Curved and spline-based components can only be ­created with a rectangular cross-section.

Offset direction Every linear component has a thickness (and sequence of layers), which must be defined in the PROPERTIES. When drawing the component, you can use the REVERSE button to change the offset direction. Layer 1 is displayed with an arrow and the number 1 in the preview on the screen. The component is created using COMPONENT AXIS (linear).

Component axis area Linear components are created and managed using their axis. The component axis can be moved freely within the width of the component. You either use the grid points (layer edges, layer centers) to set up the axis or you enter the desired value as the distance from the outer edges of the component. ƒƒ SETTINGS FOR COMPONENT AXIS opens the options with the Components area. In COMPONENT AXIS, you can activate the component axis and influence how it is ­displayed. It may be useful to display the component axis if changes are made to existing components, for example (see also section 3.1.2.5, Component options).

Settings for component axis

200  5 Building model – unfinished structure

5.2.1.2 Wall, profile wall, beam, strip foundation linear components Wall

ƒƒ WALL creates a linear component with a rectangular cross-section, which can have up to five layers.

The Wall dialog box is divided into tabs. If you select the TOTAL tab, all the wall properties are displayed, and the dialog is so big that the toolbar at the bottom is no longer ­visible if the screen resolution is low. Depending on the number of wall layers selected, the lines are added to the overview. Most of the parameters can be defined individually for each layer or matched up using the checkboxes in the layers. Within the lists, you can call up a shortcut menu with additional functions, which enables you to reverse the setup of layers or remove/add individual wall layers. Downstand beam, upstand beam Profile wall

ƒƒ DOWNSTAND BEAM,  UPSTAND BEAM and PROFILE WALL create either linear components with a rectangular cross-section, or, using a symbol for a closed outline or several outlines, linear components with any cross-sections. The two symbol catalogs STEEL PROFILES and ANGULAR STEEL SECTIONS, which you can select when you install Allplan, are ideal for steel components.

5.2 Walls and other linear components 201

The DOWNSTAND BEAM, UPSTAND BEAM and PROFILE WALL functions are similar in most respects. The only difference is that with downstand beams, you cannot create any window or door openings and with profile walls, you cannot switch to a rectangular cross-section. ƒƒ In the SHAPE OF CROSS-SECTION area, you can use the PROFILE button to import a symbol from a data catalog. If it is suitable (does not contain any unpermitted elements or branches), the symbol is displayed. You can use MIRROR and ROTATE to align the ­shape. ƒƒ SETTINGS FOR COMPONENT AXIS AND PROFILE opens the options with the ­Components area. In COMPONENT PROFILE, you can influence how beams are ­displayed in 3D (see also section 3.1.2.5, Component options). ƒƒ STRIP  FOUNDATION  provides parameterized  shapes  for foundations. As an alternative to the predefined shapes, you can load a custom shape from a symbol. ƒƒ SHAPE OF CROSS-SECTION activates various parameters, which define the selected shape. You can choose be­ tween: RECTANGULAR, STEPPED and BEVELED, at top or bottom, as parameterized shapes and PROFILE to load custom shapes. For custom shapes, you need a closed shape that has been saved as a symbol. (See Downstand beam and Profile wall.) ƒƒ For strip foundations, AXIS provides an additional function. With the ­ ENTERED BELOW WALL option C (the setting for the WALL THICKNESS (or MATCH)), you can set the founda­ tion axis in such a way that you only need to grab the outer edge/inner edge of the wall in the drawing, and the foundation is centered below the component.

Rectangular (for downstand beam only) Profile

Settings for c­ omponent axis and profile Strip foundation

Rectangular Stepped Beveled Beveled at bottom Profile

5.2.2 Editing linear components To edit linear component, you have, in addition to the general functions for architectural components, the following three main tools. ƒƒ JOIN LINEAR COMPONENTS is used to join linear components of the same type. The component selected first determines the component type. In the case of T-connections,

Join linear ­components

202  5 Building model – unfinished structure

the first component you click is lengthened or shortened as appropriate; the other ­component does not change. In the case of corners, either linear component can be lengthened or shortened. The component you click second is given a higher priority. In the dialog line, you can also enter a joint width for the connection. An additional component (joint) is created. Only straight linear components can be joined. Always make sure that the linear components you want to join are not parallel. Join linear ­component with line Delete section of linear component Restore 3D view

ƒƒ JOIN LINEAR COMPONENT WITH LINE joins a linear component with an existing line. The component area that was clicked is retained if the line intersects the component. Always make sure that the line and the linear component are not parallel. ƒƒ DELETE SECTION OF LINEAR COMPONENT removes sections from linear components and surface elements. Elements inserted in these sections (such as windows, doors, etc.) are also deleted. The area is specified via two points on the linear component. ƒƒ RESTORE 3D VIEW is used to recalculate all the architectural components and labels on the active drawing files. Hidden layers may be ignored, depending on the option settings.

5.2.3 Example – lower floor walls In the next step, you will create the exterior and interior walls of the terraced houses. The settings for material etc. serve as a guide and illustrate the Allplan features. As an alter­ native to the displayed properties, you can use the settings from the wizards.

Configure display ZZ REFERENCE SCALE: 1:100 ZZ DRAWING TYPE: Pre-construction plan (group: floor plans – Allplan Practical Manual)

Create exterior walls

Wall

ZZ Drawing file 230 current, drawing file 101 open in reference mode Also hide all used layers except LS_BUI (building). ZZ WALL – or DOUBLE RIGHT CLICK on the component in the wizard ZZ Open PROPERTIES and define as follows: NOTE: If you copied the component from the wizard with a double click on

the right mouse button, the settings have already been made. However, check each component in order to familiarize yourself with the dialog boxes and settings. ZZ SETUP, NUMBER OF LAYERS → 2 ZZ Wall properties as shown

5.2 Walls and other linear components 203

To select/enter the values, click in the field that is to contain the value. ZZ The ALL LAYERS SAME SETTINGS option should be activated for HEIGHT. ZZ Check the height setting in a layer. ZZ Move the wall axis to the top level of the insulation layer. The dimensions of the building should be taken from the site plan. ZZ Press OK to confirm the settings. ZZ Set the input option to STRAIGHT LINEAR COMPONENT.

ZZ In the workspace, select the first point of the wall. ZZ Check the offset direction of the wall. You can change the offset direction with REVERSE. ZZ Draw the first three walls (points 1 through 4) of the left-hand building and then the corresponding walls (points 5 through 8) of the second part of the building. After the fourth point, you must cancel the polyline once with to create the gap between points four and five. After point eight, you can exit the tool. ZZ Adopt the properties (double click with right mouse button) of the glass façade (design) 8 cm – component 31, Walls and Columns wizard – for the top and bottom of the glass structure.

Straight linear ­component

204  5 Building model – unfinished structure

ZZ Select the START POINT of the first wall at the end point of the site plan line. ZZ TO POINT of the wall is the second end point of the same line on the other side of the structure.

NOTE: Depending on the point you start with, you may need to correct the

offset direction of the wall using the button.

Entry of the wall is automatically canceled, as at this point it makes no sense to connect further walls. ZZ Create the other glass wall in the same way.

Hide drawing files To edit the example further, you no longer need the site plan, because all the information (plans of the building) were transferred to the floor plan with the first walls. You can hide drawing files in two ways. You either open the OPEN ON A PROJECT-­ SPECIFIC BASIS: DRAWING FILES dialog box and remove the reference setting for ­drawing file 101, or you follow the next steps and hide the drawing file using the CHANGE DRAWING FILE STATUS function. ZZ Right mouse click on a fill of the reference drawing files The shortcut menu opens. Change drawing file status

ZZ CHANGE DRAWING FILE STATUS ZZ Click the UNSELECTED button.  Drawing file 101 is hidden. As a result, only the exterior walls are ­visible on drawing file 230.

Separating wall to glass object (point to point) The next walls to be created are the loadbearing interior walls, which should enclose the recreation area up to the glass structure. ZZ Copy the properties of the “Light Brick 17.5 cm” wall from the wizard (component 03).

5.2 Walls and other linear components 205

ZZ Create each of the separating walls from the inside corner point of the brick wall to the other side of the building. The wall intersection is defined in the next step. Make sure that the wall extends in the direction of the next exterior wall.

Match properties from an existing wall The next walls are the load-bearing separating walls with the same properties as the separating walls. You have several ways of matching the properties from those of an existing wall (component). Solution 1 – Match with pipette ��

ZZ WALL ZZ MATCH in the WALL input options ZZ Click the element whose settings you want to match All properties of the wall are adopted. Solution 2 – function call for direct matching of properties NOTE: Depending on the setting defined for the option “Behavior when

double-clicking the right mouse button – Switch modules automatically”, the system automatically switches to the module to which the component belongs.

Requirement: No tool may be active. ZZ DOUBLE CLICK with right mouse button on Wall – or shortcut menu → MATCH ZZ The WALL function is started and all the wall properties were applied.

Wall Match

206  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Interior wall (wall to wall) Wall

ZZ WALL ZZ Properties as shown (component 05) ZZ Check the priority. The correct value is 130. ZZ Define the START POINT (on the inner edge of the right exterior wall) ZZ (If required) set the reference point to the inside corner of the walls with a left click. ZZ Enter 4.26 as the OFFSET VALUE and confirm with . ZZ Check the OFFSET DIRECTION of the wall (upwards) → change if necessary ZZ Define the TO POINT (drawn horizontally from the start point of the wall to the right interior wall → click on the point. ZZ When entering the reference point, confirm the offset value with , if the same value as before is displayed. If not, change to 4.26.

Interior wall of any length Wall

ZZ WALL ZZ Properties as shown (component 04) ZZ Define the START POINT (on the inner edge of the left interior wall) ZZ (If required) set the reference point to the inside corner of the walls with a left click. ZZ Enter 4.26 as the OFFSET VALUE and confirm with . ZZ Point horizontally to the left and enter the OFFSET TO REFERENCE POINT as 2.50 (dialog line) and confirm with ZZ Finish entering walls.

Overview of interior walls Create the interior walls shown in the overview. Make sure that you adopt the specified walls from the wizard (the component number relates to the Walls and Columns wizard).

5.3 Windows, doors and other openings 207

■■5.3 Windows, doors and other openings 5.3.1 Openings in linear components – fundamentals Openings are components that need a superordinate component that they are cut out of. Openings are therefore negative shapes that create holes in components. The size of the opening is always specified as an unfinished dimension and is thus reflected in the dimension lines.

5.3.1.1 Entering openings Windows and door openings have a defined interior and exterior side. With the first click, you always define the exterior side of the opening. As openings can only exist in components, Allplan offers direct support for entering openings.

Door Window Corner window Wall niche, recess, slit, opening Polygonal wall n­ iche, recess, slit, ­opening

Enter offset directly option The option is located in the dialog line in front of the first input field. This leads to the following steps for entering an opening:

Enter offset directly switched on

208  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Enter offset switched on hh Activate the required tool for the opening hh Switch on the ENTER OFFSET DIRECTLY option hh Point to the required wall → Snapped architectural point is marked with a cross, component preview is displayed with the specified offset. (If necessary, move the reference point by clicking on a point.) hh Check the preview and, if necessary, move windows by clicking on a different position. hh Enter the required offset in the dialog line. hh Confirm your input with or by clicking on the wall. hh If the PROMPT FOR OPENING WIDTH option is activated, enter the opening width.

Enter offset deactivated Enter offset directly switched off

hh Activate the required tool for the opening. hh Deactivate the ENTER OFFSET DIRECTLY option. hh Click on the area of the wall in which the opening is to be created. hh The reference point entry is activated automatically. (If necessary, move the reference point by clicking on a point.) hh Enter the offset of the first opening point to the selected reference point. hh Confirm your entries with . hh If the PROMPT FOR OPENING WIDTH option is activated, enter the opening width.

5.3.1.2 General properties of openings The DOOR, WINDOW, CORNER WINDOW, WALL NICHE, RECESS, SLIT, OPENING and POLYGONAL WALL NICHE, RECESS, SLIT, OPENING components have very similar properties.

Get Opening Designer data from catalog Anchor point

ƒƒ GET OPENING DESIGNER DATA FROM CATALOG opens a dialog box, which you can use to read in completed opening settings including smart symbols, roller blind, lintel, facing and rabbet. ƒƒ ANCHOR POINT defines the point at which you attached the component preview to the crosshairs. Only the lower anchor points can be selected. With the first click, you also define where the component has its outer edge. ƒƒ PROMPT FOR OPENING WIDTH defines whether the system prompts you for the width of the opening in the dialog line after you have confirmed the first opening point, or whether the width defined in the properties is adopted without a prompt. The option is activated by default. ƒƒ PLACE LABEL defines whether the dialog box for the component label is to be opened automatically after the component has been generated. The option is deactivated by default.

5.3 Windows, doors and other openings 209

5.3.1.3 Properties for doors, windows and corner windows Most of the properties for windows or doors are the same or similar and are grouped together here using sections from the component dialog box for the door and window.

Door

OPENING tab

Corner window

ƒƒ SHAPE provides different basic shapes for the opening. For door openings, you can choose from four parameterized shapes, for window openings from six (plus custom shapes). Depending on the shape you select, the DISPLAY SETTINGS on the right-hand side of the dialog box change, and on the left, the PARAMETERS required to define the opening are displayed. ƒƒ OPENING DIR. opens the dialog box for selec­ ting the opening direction symbols. Unless a smart symbol with several opening casements is used, each door opening can be assigned only one opening direction. An opening direction symbol is not possible for window openings. ƒƒ PARAMETERS displays the current settings for the geometry of the opening component. In OPENING WIDTH, you can enter the width of the opening. This value is proposed during input (or is applied without a prompt). The HEIGHT OF SILL and OPENING HEIGHT fields are primarily for checking the defined RELATIVE HEIGHT. Changes directly affect the settings made for the RELATIVE HEIGHT. Depending on the plane association, the result may be as required or may deviate considerably from what is required. Always make all settings for the component height via HEIGHT. ƒƒ You need the FRENCH DOOR option to correctly display the balcony doors. The calculation of the floor area, area exposed to light etc. is based on the component and recognizes that the doors are exterior doors. ƒƒ SMART SYMBOL 1 TO N displays the smart symbols assigned to the opening and offers the following functions for managing these. ƒƒ GET SMART SYMBOL opens the dialog box for selecting smart symbols. ƒƒ REMOVE SELECTED SMART SYMBOL ­removes the smart symbol with the number displayed in the selection field from the ­component. Removal of the smart symbol can only be undone by exiting the component dialog box.

Window

Get smart symbol

Remove selected smart symbol

210  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Retrieve reveal

ƒƒ REVEAL ƒƒ An activated CREATE REVEAL ELEMENT activates this option in the tab. On the REVEAL tab, the opening smart symbol can be positioned and the window/door reveals can be specified. ƒƒ RETRIEVE REVEAL opens the default dialog box for reading in saved door and window reveals. ƒƒ DOOR SILL/SILL REPRESENTATION Depending on the option set (NONE, OUTSIDE, INSIDE, ON BOTH SIDES), one or two lines are created as a plan view of the sill of the opening component. ƒƒ STRIP/SILL FORMAT PROPERTIES provides format properties for representation of the sill and strip. If DOOR SILL/SILL REPRESENTATION is set to NONE, the format properties are not available for selection.

REVEAL tab

Selection of the reveal types is not activated until you have entered a start point for the opening on a wall. Before you do this, you cannot enter anything, as all values depend on the number and thickness of the wall layers. ƒƒ TYPE offers six different reveal types for selection. Depending on the type you select, further input fields are displayed in PREVIEW on the right-hand side. If you select one of the two right reveal options with facing, the FACING area and INPUT SIDE OF OPENING WIDTH (EXTERIOR SIDE/INTERIOR SIDE) options are activated. Try out the settings. You should save complex settings as a favorite. ƒƒ PARAMETERS defines the reveal of the opening and the door/window depth. ƒƒ The CREATE REVEAL ELEMENT option activates further parameters. If the option is deactivated, a REVEAL ELEMENT is not created, and opening smart symbols are placed centrally. ƒƒ You can use the REVEAL ELEMENT OUTSIDE THE WALL option to create a reveal in front of the opening. Opening smart symbols are placed outside the wall. You use Overlap (O) to enter the overlap.

5.3 Windows, doors and other openings 211

ƒƒ DOOR DEPTH/DEPTH OF WINDOW specifies the thickness of the jamb of the ­opening smart symbol. ƒƒ OUTER REVEAL (OR)/INNER REVEAL (IR) defines the outer and inner reveal. If one of the two settings is changed, the second is adjusted in accordance with the wall thickness. ƒƒ GET REVEAL/SAVE REVEAL opens the default dialog box for reading in/saving door and window reveals (see also section 2.5.3, Favorites).

Get reveal Save reveal

5.3.1.4 Properties for niche, recess, slit (including polygonal) ƒƒ TYPE specifies the basic type of component. Depending on the TYPE, different parameters are available. ƒƒ If type NICHE is selected, VISIBILITY OPTION is deactivated. For recesses, you can define whether the recess is to be visible in 3D. Niches are always visible and are given room finishes. ƒƒ PLAN DISPLAY enables you to select between OPEN TO FLOOR, NO LINE and SHOW LINTEL HEADER/SILL LINE. PLAN DISPLAY enables you to select between OPEN TO FLOOR, NO LINE and SHOW LINTEL HEADER/SILL LINE. ƒƒ SHAPE provides various parameterized shapes and also enables you to use a custom shape. Depending on your selection, PARAMETERS displays different input fields, and the overview on the right changes. ƒƒ PARAMETERS displays the current settings for the geometry of the component. You can enter the WIDTH and DEPTH of the component. These values are proposed during input (or are applied without a prompt). The HEIGHT TO BL and HEIGHT fields are primarily for a visual check of the defined RELATIVE HEIGHT. Changes directly affect the settings made for the RELATIVE HEIGHT. Depending on the plane association, the result may be as required or may deviate considerably from what is required. Always make all settings for the component height via HEIGHT.

Wall niche, recess, slit, opening Polygonal wall n­ iche, recess, slit, ­opening

212  5 Building model – unfinished structure

5.3.2 Example – lower floor interior doors For interior doors (as for the other openings), you must take account of the floor structure for the entry of the unfinished dimensions. For the interior doors, this means that they are to be created 2.295 m high. The bottom level of the component is then defined on the top level of the uncovered floor and the top level with the corresponding offset. The opening height is calculated as follows: Planned floor structure on lower floor

→ 0.16 m

Door height from finished floor to BL lintel (unfinished)

→ 2.135 m

Total:

→ 2.295 m

In addition, openings can be created immediately with a smart symbol (fixture). All the openings in the wizard are defined in this way.

Changing the display To gain a better overview of the elements during creation, you can set a drawing type in which the walls are displayed as hatching only. The “Working drawing” drawing type in the group “Floor plans – Allplan Practical Manual” is suitable for this, for example. The line thicknesses of this drawing type are optimized for scale 1:50. For this reason, the scale should also be changed accordingly. ZZ Drawing type → Working drawing (Floor plans – Allplan Practical Manual) ZZ REFERENCE SCALE → 1:50 The plan is then displayed without colors.

Interior door As with the walls, the components from the wizard should be fully configured. However, check the settings now to help you create components that deviate from those in the wizard more easily later. The first door should lead to the WC, which is enclosed by the glass structure. Door

ZZ DOOR – or DOUBLE RIGHT CLICK on the component in the wizard (component 21) ZZ Open PROPERTIES ZZ OPENING tab ZZ Shape → Rectangle

5.3 Windows, doors and other openings 213

ZZ Door swing e. g. around 90°

ZZ SMART SYMBOL 1 TO N → 1 (Block frame – Black . . .) ZZ DOOR SILL → None ZZ CREATE REVEAL ELEMENT (REVEAL) option → deactivated

ZZ HEIGHT (button) → TOP LEVEL → Fixed component height  COMP. HGT → 2.2950 → BOTTOM LEVEL → With lower planes OFFSET → 0.000

Fixed component height With lower plane

This means that the bottom level of the door opening is the same as the top level of the unfinished floor and is 2.295 meters high (to the top level of the lintel). ZZ Press to confirm the settings in the two dialog boxes. ZZ Deactivate ENTER OFFSET DIRECTLY in the dialog line.

ZZ Place the first opening point.

ZZ OFFSET TO REFERENCE POINT → 0.125

ZZ OFFSET TO END OF OPENING  → 0.885

Enter offset directly switched off

214  5 Building model – unfinished structure

ZZ Left click on one of the points marked on the image to enter the opening direction of the smart symbol (door fixture). Right-click in the workspace to confirm the settings. NOTE: The smart symbol is

not visible in all drawing types or scales with the degree of detail displayed here. ZZ Format in the PROPERTIES palette: LAYER (AR_DOOR), PEN FROM LAYER, LINE FROM LAYER and COLOR FROM LAYER

→ activated ZZ Define the opening direction by fixing the displayed preview with a left click.

Overview of interior doors ZZ Create the interior doors shown in the overview. The figures shown relate to the component number that defines the door in the Windows and Doors wizard. Apply the properties.

NOTE: In the case of double-wing doors, you must place a separate door

wing for each door leaf.

5.3 Windows, doors and other openings 215

5.3.3 Example – lower floor exterior doors The terrace doors should have an insulated jamb to minimize this thermal bridge. In addition, the window smart symbol (contains two wings and transom light) should be used to create an exterior window sill. All the settings are again contained in the wizard and are shown here for checking purposes. To be able to hide the door sill/sill representation at a later point individually, a separate layer from the Window area is used, rather than the component layer.

Terrace door ZZ DOOR and apply the settings from the wizard or DOUBLE CLIKC WITH THE RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON on the component in the wizard (component 11) ZZ Click on A LINE OF AN EXTERIOR WALL in the terrace door area. NOTE: For all openings placed in exterior walls, the outer-

most wall line must be clicked. The reveal is calculated from this first level.

ZZ Open PROPERTIES ZZ REVEAL tab ZZ Change the TYPE, and activate the CREATE REVEAL ELEMENT option. The display changes, and further input fields appear. ZZ PARAMETERS DOOR DEPTH → 0.0800  OUTER REVEAL (OR) → 0.14

(= Thickness of the insulation layer) ZZ DISPLAY: Exterior side → 0.0300 (dimension used to insulate the jamb) The values for the other sides should automatically be based on the entry in the first field.

NOTE: A selection for setting the TYPE in the REVEAL tab is not displayed

until you have identified the wall in which the opening is to be placed. Beforehand, the numerous options for defining the reveal of the opening may not be displayed correctly.

Door

216  5 Building model – unfinished structure

ZZ OPENING tab ZZ DOOR SILL → Exterior option active

ZZ STRIP: FORMAT PROPERTIES LAYER (AR_WINMU) NOTE: The Pen, Line and Color selection windows cannot be selected as in

the Set layer dialog box, the three checkmarks for format properties are set to layer. Fixed component height With lower plane

ZZ HEIGHT (button) → TOP LEVEL → Fixed component height  COMP. HGT → 2.7600 → BOTTOM LEVEL → With lower planes OFFSET → 0.000 The floor thickness is taken into account by the smart symbol that has a doubled jamb as the bottom strip and is therefore placed on an unfinished floor0} ZZ Confirm the entries. Check the position of the reference point: the arrow should be at the outside corner. If the reference point is somewhere else, move the arrow by clicking on the new position (point). ZZ OFFSET TO REFERENCE POINT → 1.13 ZZ OFFSET TO END OF OPENING → 1.51

NOTE: The opening width (offset to point of the opening) is always entered

in the direction of the arrow, even if the anchor point was selected differently. The display on the screen may be inconsistent in the meantime.

5.3 Windows, doors and other openings 217

ZZ Turn the smart symbol so that the wings point inwards, and confirm the direction of the smart symbol with a right click. ZZ Format in the Properties palette: LAYER (AR_DOOR), PEN FROM LAYER, LINE FROM LAYER and COLOR FROM LAYER → activated ZZ Determining the opening directions of the two wings one after the other. The door swing is set with a left click when the preview looks correct.

NOTE: In the case of opening smart symbols that have several wings,

a door wing symbol can be placed for each.

5.3.4 Example – lower floor windows The windows are basically entered in the same way as the doors. Only three different window types should be inserted.

Inserting windows ZZ WINDOW and apply the settings from the wizard or DOUBLE CLIKC WITH THE RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON on the component in the wizard (component 04)

ZZ MOVE THE ANCHOR POINT IF NECESSARY.

The anchor point is always entered on the exterior wall line. Seen from below, the exterior wall line is at the bottom in the selection field. ZZ OPENING tab ZZ SILL DISPLAY → Exterior option active ZZ SILL: FORMAT PROPERTIES LAYER (AR_WINMU)

Window

218  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Fixed component height With lower plane

ZZ HEIGHT (button) → TOP LEVEL  → Fixed component height  COMP. HGT → 0.8250 → BOTTOM LEVEL → With lower planes OFFSET → 1.100 The main dialog box should now display the following: This means that the window will have a sill from the unfinished floor to the bottom level of the window (unfinished sill) of 1.10 m. In the finished state, the sill height is reduced as a result of the floor structure and is then increased again as a result of the window sill. ZZ REVEAL tab ZZ Set the same reveal type etc. as for the exterior doors, or check the settings. ZZ Click OK to confirm the entries. ZZ Check the position of the reference point: The reference point (arrow) should be positioned at the outermost corner of the building. ZZ OFFSET TO REFERENCE POINT → 0.63 ZZ OFFSET TO END OF OPENING → 1.26

Supplement windows and doors ZZ Create the windows, French doors and front entrance shown in the overview. The ­figures shown relate to the component number that defines the door in the Windows and Doors wizard. Apply the properties.

5.3 Windows, doors and other openings 219

All the specified dimensions relate to the load-bearing wall layer (brick). The offset dimensions to the building corners relate to the insulation layer.

5.3.5 Example – copy lower floor as template for basement and top floor The current lower floor should be copied to the relevant drawing files as the basis for the upper and top floors. You use the copying method based on the building structure.

Copy drawing files ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ BUILDING STRUCTURE tab ZZ DRAWING FILE 230 Story 00 – Model – Select lower floor ZZ Shortcut menu → COPY

ZZ Structural level Story 01 – Select lower floor ZZ Shortcut menu → PASTE UNDER ZZ Paste from drawing file number → 240 ZZ Confirm entry

Open on a project-specific basis Building structure

220  5 Building model – unfinished structure

A copy of the lower floor was created. Proceed in the same way to create another copy for the basement in drawing file 220 and for the top floor in drawing file 250. ZZ Change the two drawing file names back to the names you gave the drawing files in section 4.2.6, Example – assigning drawing file names.

NOTE: The created copies are exact copies of the original. The plane assign-

ment (not visible for story 00) is subsequently retained and displayed with blue numbers because it does not correspond to the superordinate structural level. The plan settings are set in the examples in the next section.

■■5.4 Using the default planes In section 4.2, Create project structure – create plane model, the building structure was created and the main work for assigning the planes to the structural levels and drawing files via the wizards was carried out automatically. The building structure was also extended in section 4.5.4, Example – extending the b­ uilding structure, with a structural level for the site plan import.

5.4 Using the default planes 221

Further modifications, e. g. for drawing files with a floor slab or upper slabs, are usually required and are described below. The basic information on the Floor Manager and plane model can be found in section 2.12, The Allplan plane model.

5.4.1 Assign planes In the automated creation of the building structure, the individual structural levels were already assigned planes from the plane model. If you now insert further structural levels in your building structure and/or want to assign the drawing file different default planes than the superordinate structure node, you have two ways of doing this. The plane model is the basis for all heights of the building. The Floor Manager provides you with an overview of the entire building. Every drawing file (or every structural level) is linked with any two height definitions from the plane model. The two settings then produce the height setting of the default planes. Usually, the lower floor has the settings Top Level Lower Floor and Bottom Level Lower Floor, the upper slab for the lower floor the setting Bottom Level Upper Floor and Top Level Lower Floor. After a change to the plane assignment, the BEHAVIOR OF DRAWING FILES dialog box is displayed, in which you can define the behavior of elements that are not planedependent. If changes to the plane assignment are made to structural levels, you also have the option of transferring the settings to all the drawing files directly subordinate to the structural level.

222  5 Building model – unfinished structure

5.4.1.1 Assigning planes via the building structure Allplan’s central interface for activating drawing files is the OPEN ON A PROJECT-­ SPECIFIC BASIS dialog box. If you work with the building structure, you can use this dialog box to assign planes. You can also see at a glance which drawing files have which default heights. Open on a project-specific basis Building structure

Assign planes hh OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS hh BUILDING STRUCTURE tab hh Open the shortcut menu at one of the specified points

hh ASSIGN PLANES

hh Select planes in the ASSIGN PLANES dialog box hh Read the BEHAVIOR OF DRAWING FILES dialog box and select options as required. NOTE: The settings in the “Behavior of drawing files” dialog box are irrele-

vant if planes are assigned to empty drawing files. In the case of drawing files with data, you should think about the effect changing the heights should have.

5.4.1.2 Assigning planes via List default planes While editing of drawing files, you can use the LIST DEFAULT PLANES tool to call up a list of all drawing fields with their plane settings. The list also shows opened custom NDW files. If you only work with fileset structures (i. e. without a building structure), you can use this dialog box to access the plane models. If you work with the building structure, this view provides an alternative.

Assign planes via List default planes List default planes

hh List default planes

hh Click on the value you want to change

5.4 Using the default planes 223

Click in the Model to Roofscape area of the list to open the ASSIGN PLANES dialog box. You can either select a plane from a model, or select a custom height for top and bottom. It is possible, but not advisable, to combine a custom value (top or bottom) with a plane from a plane model. The data from older versions of Allplan, the values of the default levels are in CUSTOM HEIGHT AT TOP and CUSTOM HEIGHT AT BOTTOM. hh Confirm your entries hh Make settings for BEHAVIOR OF DRAWING FILES

hh Confirm the entries. The changes to the default planes are executed immediately. The BEHAVIOR OF DRAWING FILES dialog box can also be called up in the list in the BEHAVIOR WHEN APPLYING RAISE FILE and DELTA Z fields.

5.4.2 Example – assigning planes The drawing files of the basement and upper floor were filled with data as a result of a copy operation. The default plane setting was also copied and needs to be changed. The drawing files for upper slabs and floor slab should also be given plane settings that allow the thickness of the slab (floor slab) to be defined.

Assign planes – floor heights ZZ Open the shortcut menu for drawing file 220 → Assign planes.

ZZ Activate plane Bottom level story −1 and plane Top level story −1. ZZ Confirm the entries and the subsequent prompt with OK.

224  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Plane assignment for drawing file 240 – Story 01 – Upper floor model Plane assignment for drawing file 250 – Story 02 – Top floor model

Assign planes – drawing files with upper slabs ZZ Open the shortcut menu for drawing file 221 →

Assign planes. ZZ Activate plane Top level plane −1 and plane Bottom level plane 00.

The upper slab of the basement is therefore assigned the upper level of the basement as its bottom plane and the bottom level of the lower floor as its top plane. The upper slab thickness is calculated based on the distance of the two planes from each other. Plane assignment for drawing file: No.

Drawing file name

211

Floor slab/foundation slab

Top level plane −2 Bottom level plane −1

221

Floor slab over story −1

Top level plane −1 Bottom level plane 00

231

Floor slab over story 00

Top level plane 00 Bottom level plane 01

241

Floor slab over story 01

Top level plane 01 Bottom level plane 02

NOTE: The values for the height settings of the planes appear in the build-

ing structure behind the drawing files in the Height (bottom) and Height (top) columns in blue font. If you hold the mouse pointer over a value, a ToolTip is display showing the model and plane the value comes from.

5.4.3 Example – change component properties – basement and top floor The copied components in the basement, upper and top floor are still exactly the same as the originals in the lower floor. Only the height has changed. For subsequent editing, it is necessary to change the basement from masonry with insulation to reinforced concrete with perimeter insulation, for example. In addition, all floors contain too many walls and openings.

5.4 Using the default planes 225

Clean up basement Activate drawing file 210 – Story −1 – Basement model, and delete all components of the left-hand building object and of the passage. Also remove doors, windows and interior walls until the content of your drawing file matches the adjacent screenshot.

Change exterior wall to reinforced concrete and perimeter insulation ZZ CLICK THE ELEMENT WHOSE SETTINGS YOU WANT TO MATCH → Reinforced concrete 24 cm, perimeter 12 cm (component 11) in the wizard.

Apply archit. ­component properties

The component dialog box is opened with the settings of the wall from the wizard.

Apply architectural ­component properties

ZZ Change the component axis to the outer line of the insulation layer NOTE: The component is recreated based

on the axis. The axis then remains (e. g. if the thickness is changed) in the same place, while the two outer edges may change.

ZZ Confirm the new properties by choosing OK. ZZ Choose the option NEW ATTRIBUTES. ZZ Select all exterior walls with two construction layers.

226  5 Building model – unfinished structure

NOTE: It does not matter whether you select just one or both wall layers.

Allplan recognizes the relationship between the wall layers and executes the change correctly. ZZ Press APPLY to execute the step. The display including all properties and attributes is transferred to the components. All exterior walls are given the new properties and are recreated.

NOTE: If you activate the “Pre-construction plan” drawing type instead of

the “Working drawing” drawing type (from the same group), you can see the difference much more clearly.

ZZ Change the left brick wall so that your left edge remains the same and material and display are shown in reinforced concrete. Use component 12 from the same wizard as the basis.

Change brick wall to reinforced concrete

Change archit. ­properties Match

The wall next to the glass structure should be one exterior basement wall, because the basement should only extend across part of the building. You have several ways of applying the properties. You can proceed in the same way as for the exterior wall and transfer the properties of the corresponding wall from the wizard, or use the CHANGE ARCHIT. PROPERTIES function to only transfer the attributes and display of the inner wall layer of the exterior wall to the brick wall. ZZ CHANGE ARCHIT. PROPERTIES

ZZ MATCH → Click on reinforced concrete wall The properties of the component are imported to the selection dialog box. In this case, it is right to overwrite all properties. If necessary, you can select which properties are to be changed and which are not. To do so, simply de­select the checkboxes for the values you do not want to change.

(Drawing type: Pre-construction plan)

ZZ Select the separating walls and confirm your selection with APPLY.

5.4 Using the default planes 227

Remove components in upper floor Activate drawing file 240 – Story 01 – Upper floor model, and remove all components except those shown here. The walls of the glass structure should be retained.

Remove components in top floor As in the basement and upper floor, all openings (doors and windows), the interior walls and also the walls of the glass structure are to be removed in drawing file 250 Story 02 – Top floor model. In the top floor, the wall adjoining the glass structure is to be replaced with an insulated exterior wall. Make sure that the outer edge (toward the glass structure) remains the same.

Supplement basement and upper floor Now supplement the two plans of the basement and upper floor as specified in the dimensioned overview. In the basement, make sure that the windows are attached to the upper plane or that you transfer the correct windows from the wizard.

228  5 Building model – unfinished structure

5.4.4 Example – changing floor heights The basement now has the same height as the lower floor and upper floor, as only one height can be entered in the wizard when the plane model is generated.  However, the basement should have a clear height of 2.44 m when finished. The (unfinished) height to be entered is 2.44 m (clear height finished) + 0.16 m (floor structure) = 2.60 m. Open on a project-specific basis Floor Manager

Adapt floor height of basement ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ FLOOR MANAGER ZZ Click on the value for the clear unfinished floor height of the basement and change this to 2.60.

5.5 Roofscape, roof plane, custom pair of planes 229

ZZ In the ADAPT HEIGHT OF PLANES dialog box, set the RETAIN HEIGHT option for higher planes and MOVE UP for lower planes, and confirm the setting. ZZ Also confirm the changes in the Floor Manager. ZZ In the subsequent prompt, you should activate both options. All structural levels and drawing files that use the plane settings of the planes below the basement are updated automatically.

■■5.5 Roofscape, roof plane, custom pair of planes The basic features of the Allplan plane model were described in chapter 2.12. You are also familiar with the Floor Manager’s basic functions and default planes. This section covers the special planes for roofs and other non-flat components. NOTE: All planes that are not default planes (i. e. must be created sepa-

rately) are covered by the term “special plane”.

5.5.1 Special planes Special planes are either used as the basis for inclusion in the plane model (as roofscapes) or can be inserted directly in drawing files. Every special plane consists of an upper and lower plane. In the case of custom planes, both can be inclined, in the case of roof planes and dormer windows, only the upper plane can be inclined.

5.5.1.1 Custom planes A custom pair of planes is determined using three points to define the inclination of the planes. The area in which the custom pair of planes apply in plan view is defined separately. The properties of the custom pair of planes are only used to configure the height of the planes and/or the distance between them. After the settings have been confirmed, the extent of the plane has to be defined in plan view.

Custom planes

230  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Absolute elevation (top) Absolute elevation (bottom) Fixed offset Upper plane custom Lower plane custom Perpendicular Vertical

Depending on the combinations you choose for LOWER PLANE and UPPER PLANE, ­various input fields are available to you. The icons have the following meanings: ƒƒ ABSOLUTE ELEVATION (TOP) and ABSOLUTE ELEVATION (BOTTOM) are used to configure the plane of the pair horizontally at the defined height above the datum level. ƒƒ FIXED OFFSET enables you to define one plane relative to the other. For example, you can set up a pair of planes running at an angle in the room by defining one of the two planes. ƒƒ UPPER PLANE CUSTOM and LOWER PLANE CUSTOM are needed if one or both planes of the custom pair of planes is or are to be inclined. ƒƒ You can use the perpendicular/vertical switch to control how the entered value is interpreted. Always pay attention to the graphic in the right-hand area of the dialog box. In the DEFINITION POINTS area, you can either enter coordinates for the height setting of the planes manually, or use POINTS to transfer the desired points from your drawing. If you transfer points from the drawing, you are asked to specify their Z coordinates.

5.5.1.2 Roof plane and dormer window Roof plane Dormer

Roof planes (including dormers) are parameterized custom pairs of planes. The Roof Plane function helps you to create regular roof shapes. ROOF PLANE calls up the Context toolbar for the roof plane. In the dialog line, you are

first required to enter the outline of the roof plane. Depending on the roof shape you select, you are provided with different input fields. TOP LEVEL and BOTTOM LEVEL are always available. You can design roofs with any plan view and enter different inclinations and/or roof shapes for every roof edge.

5.5 Roofscape, roof plane, custom pair of planes 231

Functions, input fields ƒƒ MATCH is used to transfer the settings from an existing roof edge. Only the settings of this roof edge are read in, not those of the entire roof plane. ƒƒ ELEVATION LINE creates a line that follows the course of the roof exactly at the specified height. The line created here can be used in the design to estimate the room areas over 2 meters. The correct 2-m line (and 1-m line) must be derived from the area calcu­ lation, as finish specifications can be taken into account fully only there. ƒƒ HEIGHT OF EAVES specifies the height of the roof plane at its lowest point. This can be, for example, the point where the bottom level of the rafters intersects the outer edge of the exterior wall. ƒƒ TOP LEVEL specifies the maximum height of the roof. Always select a high enough value for this to ensure that the ridge height is lower than the TOP LEVEL. Otherwise you will have a horizontal plane area. ƒƒ BOTTOM LEVEL defines the height of the internal plane of the pair of roof planes. ­Usually, the height of the lower default plane in the drawing file should be entered here. The BOTTOM LEVEL must be below the desired EAVES HEIGHT.

Match

Settings for the individual roof shapes Depending on the roof shape you select, different entries are necessary and possible. The Context toolbar is extended, modified or restricted accordingly. The Top level, Bottom level and Elevation line fields are always available. ƒƒ GABLE/HIP ROOF ƒƒ INCLINATION/RISE is used to specify the inclination of the roof. As soon as you enter one value, the second is automatically calculated. For INCLINATION, you enter the roof inclination in degrees, for RISE as a percentage. ƒƒ The THROUGH POINT input option is used to determine the eaves height using a freely definable fixed point on the roof. You always enter a GABLE/HIP ROOF in the following steps: hh Enter top level and bottom level of the roof hh Determine the outline of the roof plane (the outer edge of the walls is the default) hh Enter the inclination or rise, and the height of the eaves hh Click roof edge for which the values (inclination, eaves height) are to apply hh Change settings for the next edge and/or click on further roof edges

Gable/hip roof

232  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Gable/hip roof using two points

ƒƒ GABLE/HIP ROOF USING TWO POINTS defines the roof inclination using two freely definable points, for which the height must be known. The points can also be outside the area of the roof plane, because only the inclination is calculated based on the points. You can also grab points in the perspective view (the height is then applied). You always enter a GABLE/HIP ROOF USING TWO POINTS as follows: hh Enter top level and bottom level of the roof hh Determine the outline of the roof plane (the outer edge of the walls is the default) hh Enter point 1 (enter height if point was identified in the floor plan) hh Enter point 2 (enter height if point was identified in the floor plan) hh Click roof edge for which determined height and inclination are to apply

Barrel roof

ƒƒ BARREL ROOF opens the dialog box for configuring the barrel roof profile. You can make entries here depending on your roof requirements and the parameters you know. The values are mutually interdependent. If, for example, you enter the MAX. HEIGHT, the RISE HEIGHT changes. You always enter a BARREL ROOF as follows: hh Enter top level and bottom level of the roof hh Determine the outline of the roof plane (the outer edge of the walls is the default) hh On the Context toolbar, switch to Barrel Roof. hh Enter the required parameters. hh Click on two opposite roof edges that are parallel

Gambrel roof

ƒƒ GAMBREL ROOF opens the dialog box for configuring the gambrel roof profile. Here, you can attach individual areas with different inclinations and lengths to each other. The only prerequisite is that the inclination must always be positive. You always enter a GAMBREL ROOF as follows: hh Enter top level and bottom level of the roof hh Determine the outline of the roof plane (the outer edge of the walls is the default) hh On the Context toolbar, switch to Gambrel Roof. hh Enter the required parameters. hh Transfer the profile to a roof edge by clicking on the edge. NOTE: All roof shapes and input options for the roof apply in the same way

for the dormer. However, dormers require a roof plane into which they can be inserted.

5.5 Roofscape, roof plane, custom pair of planes 233

5.5.2 Modify special planes The most important tools for modifying custom pairs of planes and roof planes are described below. ƒƒ MODIFY PLANES is used to move the upper or lower plane in a custom pair of planes (inclination of the planes is retained) in Z direction or to move the definition points of the plane in order to change the inclination. ƒƒ MODIFY ROOF FRAME is used to change a roof frame that has already been created. The same dialog box as for creating the roof plane is displayed. You can change the ­setting for each roof edge. ƒƒ DELETE PLANES IN A ROOF FRAME removes roof planes from the roof frame. You can use this to remove dormers from the roof frame, for example.

Modify planes

Modify roof frame

Delete planes in a roof frame

NOTE: The Architecture – General: Roofs, Planes, Sections module con-

tains further tools, e. g. copy planes in a roof frame, mirror roof frames etc. for modifying special planes. These work in the same way as the corresponding tools in the Edit toolbar except that they can only be applied to roof frames (special planes).

5.5.3 Roofscape Roofscapes cannot be created directly and instead have to be derived from drawing files with existing roof planes and/or custom pairs of planes. The roof­ scape data is transferred from the special planes and saved in the corresponding node in the plane model. For display purposes, a small roof symbol is used with an additional checkbox, which has to be selected for drawing files and/or structural levels that are to contain the roofscape. In drawing files to which a roofscape was assigned, the plane is displayed as though it were created in the drawing file, but it cannot be changed directly. If changes need to be made to the roofscape, the roofscape must either be isolated from the plane model or replaced.

Including roofscapes in a plane model Note: The individual functions for the Floor Manager are described in section 2.12.2, The Floor Manager. hh Create ROOF PLANE and/or CUSTOM PLANES in a drawing file hh OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS hh FLOOR MANAGER hh Select the plane model and mark the node title below which the roofscape is to be inserted

Open on a project-specific basis Floor Manager

234  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Insert roofscape

hh INSERT ROOFSCAPE hh From drawing file (or NDW file) hh Select the drawing file containing the prepared roof frame. hh If necessary, change the name of the roofscape or copy the document name. hh Set the option for inserting the roof­ scape in the plane model. hh Confirm your entries. The roofscape is inserted in the plane model, and the plane model with the defined name is displayed below the two subitems that were already there. NOTE: Depending on the options you defined for insertion, you may get

different results. Test different application scenarios.

Replacing a roofscape Open on a project-specific basis Floor Manager

Replace roofscape

hh Create alternative ROOF PLANE and/or CUSTOM PLANES in a drawing file, or change existing ones. hh OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS hh FLOOR MANAGER hh Select the plane model and mark the roofscape you want to replace hh REPLACE ROOFSCAPE hh From drawing file (or NDW file) hh Select the drawing file containing the prepared roof frame. hh If necessary, change the name of the roofscape or copy the document name. hh Set the option for inserting the roofscape in the plane model. hh Confirm your entries. In all drawing files and structural levels in which the replaced roofscape is used, the information on the new roofscape is entered when the drawing file is opened. NOTE: The functionality for replacing a roofscape can be used to change

plane information in many drawing files simultaneously. If you still use drawing files to structure the elements (instead of layers), you can in this way to avoid errors caused by different roofs in a story.

5.5 Roofscape, roof plane, custom pair of planes 235

Isolate roofscapes from plane model In the active drawing file, a roofscape can be isolated from the plane model at any time. As a result, roof planes and custom pairs of planes are created, which you can edit further with the standard tools. This may be useful, for example, if the original drawing file in which the special planes were created is no longer available for changes, or if you want to create variants. You isolate planes as follows: hh Open the drawing file with the roofscape hh Open the shortcut menu with the right mouse button (mouse pointer over the roof­ scape) hh Isolate planes from plane model

5.5.4 Example – create roof plane The two outer building objects should now each be given a pitched roof. The glass structure should be given two sloping windows of glass with a flat roof between them (via a connecting walkway between the upper floors of the building object). The roof frame must be created in several steps from four roof planes. The roof planes for the plane model should be prepared in drawing file 105 and 106. Before starting the exercise, rename drawing file 105 as Preliminary design for roofscape – main roof and drawing file 106 as Preliminary design for roofscape – glass structure.

Create pitched roofs of the main building ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS

ZZ Drawing file 105 current and drawing file 230 open in reference mode ZZ ROOF PLANE ZZ Enter the outline of the left roof plane. ZZ Change the values in the Context toolbar as shown. ZZ Click the left edge (click edges of the roof frame to apply slope). The eaves should be here.

Open on a project-specific basis

Roof plane

236  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Check the plane in the perspective view or with the 3-viewport view to see whether a plane is visible above your plan. ZZ On the second side of the building, create a pitched roof with eaves on the right-hand side.

Create pitched roofs of the glass structure A walkway, with a flat roof made of reinforced concrete, is to be incorporated at the rear of the glass structure. The glass roof itself should connect up with the parapet of the flat roof and has a defined point through which the slope will pass there. Roof plane Open on a project-specific basis

ZZ ROOF PLANE ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ Drawing file 106 current, drawing files 230 and 105 open in reference mode ZZ Enter the outline of the roof plane. ZZ Input option → THROUGH POINT (Point through which the slope is to pass) ZZ Click on point H (on the top line of the plane outline you just created) ZZ ENTER THE HEIGHT OF THIS POINT → 6.530 ZZ Set the INCLINATION to 4° and BOTTOM LEVEL to 2.915. ZZ Click on the bottom level of the plane outline as the eaves (CLICK EDGES OF THE ROOF FRAME TO APPLY SLOPES), and conclude entry of the roof plane with CLOSE.

In the upper area, also create a roof plane with a highest point of 6.24 m and eaves at the top.

5.5 Roofscape, roof plane, custom pair of planes 237

NOTE: With the Through Point method, the height of the eaves in the

­ roperties dialog box is not relevant. Only the top level, bottom level and P inclination are used.

5.5.5 Example – including roofscape in plane model To work most effectively with the roof planes you just created, these are included in the plane model. The roof planes of the glass structure are included in Story 01 – Upper floor and those of the main building in Story 02 – Top floor.

Insert roofscape ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ FLOOR MANAGER ZZ Select Story 02 – Top floor. ZZ INSERT ROOFSCAPE

ZZ FROM D-FILE → Select drawing file 105 → Confirm selection

ZZ Rename the ROOFSCAPE as Main Roof. ZZ Select the second option. For the lower plane, the roofscape takes the bottom level of the top floor as the height.

Open on a project-specific basis Floor Manager Insert roofscape

238  5 Building model – unfinished structure

The roofscape is displayed in the Floor Manager and can be assigned after you exit the Floor ­Manager. Insert the planes from drawing file 106 in Story 01 – Upper floor in the same way. The name of the roofscape should be Glass Structure.

Assign roofscape To assign a roofscape to a drawing file or structural level, you use the same procedure as for normal default reference planes from the plane model. ZZ Select the structural level Story 02 – Top floor. ZZ ASSIGN PLANES (structural level shortcut menu) ZZ Select the checkbox for TOP FLOOR or the three checkboxes individually.

NOTE: If you only want to assign the default reference planes of the

top floor to a drawing file, only the two checkboxes for the top level and bottom level may be selected.

ZZ Confirm the assignment with . ZZ Select the TRANSFER INFORMATION FROM PLANES TO ALL DRAWING FILES OF THE STRUCTURAL LEVEL option in the BEHAVIOR OF DRAWING FILES dialog box. ZZ Confirm with . The information is transferred to all drawing files. The symbol for the roofscape appears in all the drawing files that already have content and in the named drawing files. The plane setting for the default reference planes is not displayed, as this is the same as that of the structural level.

5.6 Further architectural components 239

As soon as you open an empty drawing file of a structural level with roofscape, this is written to the drawing file and can be used there. ZZ Assign the planes with the glass structure roofscape to structural level Story 01 – Upper floor and drawing file 240. In the structural level, make sure that in this case, the information is not transferred to the drawing files below the structural level, as this would overwrite the plane settings of drawing file 241. Drawing file 241 is also assigned the roofscape of the glass structure.

■■5.6 Further architectural components In addition to the linear architectural components, Allplan offers area components and components that can be entered using a point (anchor point).  In some cases, you can switch the input method for the component, e. g. for the column, from a drop-in point to an area-based input method. For all components that have several types of input, the Properties dialog box contains a button to activate the polygonal shape.

5.6.1 Slab and other area components The slab, slab foundation and roof covering are area components. While only one layer is possible for the slab and slab foundation, up to five layers (cf. wall) can be entered for the roof covering. The slab and slab foundation are associated with the planes in the same way as walls. The roof covering is the only component that interprets the special planes beyond their scope.

5.6.1.1 Slab and slab foundation SLAB,  SLAB FOUNDATION are area components

that are created in the same way as the area elements in the Draft module (hatching, pattern etc.). As a rule, slabs and floor slabs are created in separate drawing files. The slab thickness is then derived from the plane model. The time advantage over placing the component in the drawing file for the walls lies not during creation, but in the ease with which the slabs and slab thicknesses can be changed via the central interface for height entries (Floor Manager).

Slab Slab foundation

240  5 Building model – unfinished structure

5.6.1.2 Roof covering Roof covering

The roof covering can have up to five layers and only adapts to the upper plane in accordance with the entry type. As a result of the ­special type of plane association, the roof covering can interpret ­special planes beyond their scope and thus enables you to create roof overhangs. Depending on the number of wall layers selected, the lines are added to the overview. Most of the parameters can be defined individually for each layer or matched up using the checkboxes in the layers. Within the lists, you can call up a shortcut menu with additional functions, which enables you to reverse the setup of layers or remove/add individual wall layers.

5.6 Further architectural components 241

Properties of the roof covering The properties of the roof covering provide settings that go beyond those for normal architectural components. For the roof covering, the shape of the eaves and the shape of the ridge can also be specified for each layer. ƒƒ ASSEMBLY defines the number of layers in the roof covering. Depending on the setting, a different number (1–5) of layers are available. The lists are extended automatically. ƒƒ Entry type There are three entry types for the roof covering. The roof covering reacts to the dormers in the roof plane. ƒƒ ENTRY TYPE – ACROSS ALL Entry across all roof/dormer planes and input in one go. A roof overhang is not possible for dormers. ƒƒ ENTRY TYPE – DORMER CUT OUT Entry of the outer edges of the roof. Fully bounded roof planes such as dormers are cut out. ƒƒ ENTRY TYPE – DORMER ONLY Entry of the dormer roofs including their overhangs. The dormer structure must be completely bounded by the roof structure, dormers may have roof overhangs. NOTE: The Dormer only entry type is also suitable for creating roof

­ verhangs at the desired points for several roofs. Holes in roof coverings o created with the Dormer only entry type result in an incorrect display. In these cases, use the Skylights function. ƒƒ POSITION ƒƒ HEIGHT OF BOTTOM LEVEL ABOVE ROOF PLANE specifies how far above/below (+/–) the roof plane the bottom level of the roof covering is situated.

Across all Dormer cut out Dormer only

242  5 Building model – unfinished structure

ƒƒ POLYGON ENTERED IN PLAN defines whether the roof covering entry in plan relates to the top level or bottom level of the roof covering. You usually know the bottom level of the roof covering (e. g. top level of rafters). Taking eaves flashing, angle and thickness of the roof covering into account, the program automatically calculates the projected position of the top level. This option is only available when creating the component and cannot be subsequently changed. Ridge shape

ƒƒ EAVES SHAPE/RIDGE SHAPE defines the shape of the eaves and ridge. Either a shape can be entered for each layer, or (checkboxes EAVES SHAPE, RIDGE SHAPE) one shape can be selected for all layers.

Eaves shape

5.6.2 Openings in area components 5.6.2.1 Recess and opening Recesses in slabs and slab foundations can either be entered using RESHAPE SURFACE ELEMENT, ARCHITECTURAL AREA, can be taken into consideration during entry of the components, or created using the RECESS, OPENING IN SLAB tool. The list evaluation for recesses and similar objects can only be carried out correctly if the openings were created using the Recess, Opening in Slab tool. Recess, opening in slab

RECESS, OPENING IN SLAB creates recesses and openings

in slabs. You can choose between rectangular, round, polygonal (inscribed or circumscribed) and free-form opening. You can also select an opening from the symbol catalog. Slab recesses can be inserted from the top or bottom. ƒƒ TYPE specifies whether the recess goes through the entire slab (OPENING) or only affects part of the slab thickness (RECESS). Depending on the option you select, the bottom section of the parameters is activated or deactivated. ƒƒ OUTLINE defines the shape of the recess. Here, note that the rectangular, round, polygonal, and symbol catalog openings have a drop-in point, while the freeform opening has to be specified in plan view. Free-form openings are ideal e. g. for stair recesses, parameterized openings for installation shafts. ƒƒ PARAMETERS defines the shape of the recesses in detail. In the case of an opening, the height setting is transferred from the slab and cannot be changed. Recesses must be defined in more detail.

5.6 Further architectural components 243

ƒƒ SMART SYMBOL displays the smart symbol linked in the opening. Slab openings can only contain one smart symbol. ƒƒ GET SMART SYMBOL opens the dialog box for selecting smart symbols. ƒƒ REMOVE SELECTED SMART SYMBOL removes the smart symbol with the number displayed in the selection field from the component. Removal of the smart symbol can only be undone by exiting the component dialog box.

Insert smart symbol Remove selected smart symbol

5.6.2.2 Skylight Skylights an only be used in roof coverings. There, they are automatically adapted if the roof inclination changes. Even if you move a skylight in plan view, it remains in the roof covering and the height is adjusted automatically.

In the Context toolbar, you can set a fixed TOP LEVEL or BOTTOM LEVEL for the skylight. The height entry in these fields is made relative to the adjacent REFERENCE PLANE. As soon as you enter a fixed TOP LEVEL or BOTTOM LEVEL, the skylight can only be inserted in the roof covering at the defined height. ƒƒ REVEAL There are four different reveal shapes for the top and bottom side, which you can freely combine with each other. In the case of non-rectangular window shapes, the two settings on the right are not available. Depending on the desired reveal, further geometric information may be necessary and is displayed in the preview graphic. ƒƒ SHAPE, DIMENSIONS provides different basic shapes for the opening. Depending on the shape, additional input fields are displayed in the SIZE area. In the case of a rectangular shape, all reveal combinations are possible; for the other shapes, neither the reveal shape nor the depth can be entered.

ƒƒ GEOMETRY provides an overview of all the measurements required. The bottom section contains the input fields for the reveal shape and the position of the

Skylight

244  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Insert smart symbol Remove selected smart symbol

smart symbol. The input fields are only displayed if a smart symbol was selected and/or if settings were selected for the reveal shape that make further entries necessary. ƒƒ SMART SYMBOL displays the smart symbol linked in the opening. Slab openings can only contain one smart symbol. ƒƒ GET SMART SYMBOL opens the dialog box for selecting smart symbols. ƒƒ REMOVE SELECTED SMART SYMBOL removes the smart symbol with the number displayed in the selection field from the component. Removal of the smart symbol can only be undone by exiting the component dialog box.

5.6.3 Column and other symbol components The column, block foundation and chimney components follow the same rules during entry. For all components, you can enter a horizontal cross-section, and only one point should be entered for drop-in. Column

ƒƒ COLUMN Four parametric shapes, one polygonal input method, and free profile selection are available for the column. Depending on the shape you choose, further input fields are displayed in the Parameters area. For the polygonal shape, the drop-in point is not available, and a request to enter the polygon is displayed in the dialog line. NOTE: If columns are replaced with the APPLY ARCHIT. COMPONENT

PROPERTIES tool (change to cross-section), the center of gravity of the

existing column is taken as the fixed point and the new shape is inserted accordingly.

Block foundation

ƒƒ BLOCK FOUNDATION Three parametric basic shapes and polygonal entry are available for block foundations. For the basic shapes and polygonal shape, the sides of the foundation are always vertical. In the case of the last two basic shapes, you can create foundations tapering upward or downward. ƒƒ POSITIONING provides a method that enables you to set up the drop-in point by means of a MATCH from an existing component by only having to click on an existing corner point of the ­component as the drop-in point.

5.6 Further architectural components 245

ƒƒ CHIMNEY There are 17 different shapes for the chimney: from a round, one-flue chimney to a chimney with up to four flues (both round and rectangular). Depending on the shape you select, the overview drawing changes. The flues are always numbered and the definition direction for thicknesses and widths is shown. The properties of chimneys created in version 2011 can be transferred for new components.

Chimney Revised in V2011

5.6.4 Miscellaneous architectural components A few additional useful architectural components are described in brief below: ƒƒ FLUSH PIER creates a flush pier on a wall. You must have a wall in order to create a flush pier. ƒƒ LINTEL/HEADER creates a lintel or header above an opening. The bottom level of the lintel/header is read from the opening. A lintel/header cannot be created without an opening. In the finished demo project, lintels/headers were created over the interior doors. ƒƒ ROLLER BLIND creates a roller blind above an opening (of a linear component). Roller blinds can only be created above openings and always fully within a wall layer. ƒƒ PLUMBING COMPONENT creates linear or polygonal plumbing components for masonry, etc. Plumbing components are taken into consideration correctly in the calculation of floor area and contain their own information on the finish or take this infor­mation from the room.

Flush pier Lintel/header

Roller blinds Plumbing ­component

5.6.5 Example – slab In the building, several false ceilings and two connecting walkways can be created.

Slab above story 01, 02 and −1 If you adopt the properties from the wizard, all the settings should be the same as those shown. However, check these, to get an overview of the possible settings. ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ Drawing file 241 (Floor slab over story 01) current, drawing file 240 (Story 01 – Upper floor model) open in reference mode ZZ SLAB – or DOUBLE RIGHT CLICK on the component in the wizard

Open on a project-specific basis Slab

246  5 Building model – unfinished structure

ZZ PROPERTIES HEIGHT DIALOG BOX → HEIGHT . . . TOP LEVEL to UPPER PLANE, BOTTOM LEVEL to LOWER PLANE Each with OFFSET 0.00 ZZ ATTRIBUTES: TRADE → Concrete work PRIORITY → 100 MATERIAL/QUALITY → C 30/35

ZZ SURFACE ELEMENTS: SHOW SURFACE ELEMENTS IN PLAN VIEW  → deactivated STYLE AREA

→ 6 – reinforced concrete – 2 ZZ Confirm settings ZZ Format in the Properties palette: LAYER (AR_SLAB), PEN FROM LAYER, LINE FROM LAYER and COLOR FROM LAYER → activated ZZ Enter the corner points of the slab above story 01 as shown. Make sure that the outer edge of the brick leaf is the same as the outer edge of the slab. As a guide for the walkway, use the points of the roof­ scape that are to be visible.

Also create the slab above story 00 and story −1. For the slab above story 00, it makes sense to activate the slab above story 01 in order to take the measurements from it.

5.6 Further architectural components 247

Slab opening – stair (basement slab) A large recess is needed for the stairs. You can do this with RECESS, OPENING IN SLAB or by removing the surface with RESHAPE SURFACE ELEMENT, ARCHITECTURAL AREA. The basement stair should be place in the right-hand part of the building and should be 36.5 cm from the wall at the top and 1.25 m at the bottom. 4.02 m remain as the length of the stair. The procedure using RESHAPE SURFACE ELEMENT, ARCHITECTURAL AREA is described below. ZZ Drawing file 221 current, drawing file 220 open in refer-

ence mode

ZZ RESHAPE SURFACE ELEMENT, ARCHITECTURAL AREA

Reshape surface element, architectural area

Identify the slab as the surface element to be modified by clicking on the slab (info text). ZZ INPUT OPTIONS → MINUS ZZ Enter the outlines of the stairs with the specified measurements. Use as many available points as possible as reference points.

Create edge insulation strip There are two solutions for the edge insulation strip requirement (at the moment, an insulation strip with the slab thickness is outstanding). You can either connect the insu­ lation layer of the exterior walls higher or lower, or in the slab drawing file, draw a wall with properties of the insulation and height of the slab. The second method is described here.

ZZ WALL or double right click on the component in the wizard ZZ Create the edge insulation strip in accordance with the insulation of the exterior walls Create the edge insulation strips in drawing files 221, 231 and 241. The edge insulation strip of the basement slab should have perimeter insulation (component 23). In the area of the glass façade of the glass structure, create façade elements in drawing file 231 in order to close the gap that would otherwise arise there.

Wall

248  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Slab opening – waste water pipes A channel for the waste water pipes should be created in the right-hand building object as an example of a slab recess. Open on a project-specific basis

slab

Recess, opening in

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ Drawing file 231 (Floor slab over story 00) current, drawing file 231 (Story 01 – Upper floor model) open in reference mode ZZ RECESS, OPENING IN SLAB

(or copy drawing file 31 from the wizard) ZZ Identify the slab. ZZ ANCHOR POINT → top left ZZ PROPERTIES: TYPE → OPENING, OUTLINE → RECTANGLE → WIDTH → 0.20 LENGTH → 0.40 ZZ Insert the recess in the corner as shown. ZZ The same recess is to be designed in the slab between the basement and lower floor. Here, the recess should only be enlarged on the left up to the next wall.

5.6.6 Example – roof covering The roof covering has layers that are the same across its entire extent. It is therefore advisable to create a separate roof covering for the roof overhang. Alternatively, the roof covering can be designed in a single piece either as a “thin” covering or with a noise attenuation package also in the roof overhang area. If you intend to create rafters, it may make sense to create the roof covering with layers, design the rafters and only then change the roof covering to create an intricate roof overhang. For terraced houses, the roof overhang will be narrow and is stabilized with a multilayer slab.

Create roof covering – interior area Open on a project-specific basis Roof covering

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ Drawing file 251 current, drawing file 250 open in reference mode ZZ ROOF COVERING – or DOUBLE RIGHT CLICK on the component in the wizard (component 22) ZZ HEIGHT OF BOTTOM LEVEL ABOVE ROOF PLANE → 0.00

ZZ POLYGON ENTERED IN PLAN → TOP LEVEL ZZ PROPERTIES (roof with insulation)

5.6 Further architectural components 249

Make sure you select the vertical line for ridge and eaves. ZZ In plan view, define the extent of the roof covering of the left-hand building object so that it is flush to the outer edge of the masonry, and create a second roof covering on the right-hand building object. ZZ By matching the properties, transfer the roof covering without insulation from the wizard (component 21). ZZ Select mode MULTI: ENTER AN AREA COMPOSED OF ­SEVERAL PARTS in the input options. ZZ In the dialog line, enter 0.50 for the offset.

NOTE: Entering the offset means that the roof edge (here 50 cm) is outside

(click points in counterclockwise direction) the selected points. ZZ Enter the four outer corners of the load-bearing exterior wall layer. ZZ In the input options, now select MINUS, and select the four points again. By doing so, you define the “hole” in the thinner roof covering.

Shape of ridge Shape of eaves

250  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Modifying the insulation The insulation layer of the exterior walls is too low. You have two options here. You can either create a single-layer wall with the settings of the insulation layer in the roof covering drawing file, or change the insulation layer from the drawing file of the top floor in the plane association. Perpendicular

ZZ Change the plane association (change top level only) of the insulation layer of the exterior walls in drawing file 250 as shown. Make sure you enter PERPENDICULAR for the offset. The value to be entered is calculated from the difference between the bottom layers of the two roof coverings used.

5.6.7 Example – floor slab The floor slab is to be included on two different planes: once as a floor slab in the drawing file of that name, and once as a higher element in the slab drawing file above the basement, as the floor slab here should be the same height as the basement slab.

Floor slab – lower level Open on a project-specific basis Slab foundation

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ Drawing file 211 (floor slab/foundation slab) current, drawing file 220 (Story −1 – Basement model) open in reference mode ZZ FLOOR SLAB – or DOUBLE RIGHT CLICK on the component in the wizard (component 01) ZZ The component characteristics are the same as those for the slab. NOTE: Instead of a floor slab, you can also use a slab component. If you

use different components, evaluation may be performed differently in the list evaluation. ZZ Enter the dimensions of the floor slab the same as those for the slab above the basement. ZZ Also create an edge insulation strip (perimeter insulation, component 23 – Walls and Columns wizard)

Floor slab – upper level Open on a project-specific basis

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ Drawing file 221 (Floor slab over story −1) current, drawing file 230 (Story 00 – Lower floor model) open in reference mode

5.6 Further architectural components 251

ZZ FLOOR SLAB – or DOUBLE RIGHT CLICK on the com-

ponent in the wizard (component 01) ZZ Create the floor slab under the left-hand building section and glass structure as shown. Make sure you select the outer edge of the masonry and the inner edge of the glass structure as reference points. ZZ Create an edge insulation strip of perimeter insulation here too. In the glass structure area, the insulation thickness should be reduced from 14 cm to 8 cm. To do this, open the wall properties, click on the thickness of the layer to be changed and enter the new value.

Slab foundation

The height of the edge insulation layer is then adapted to the foundation so that the foundation reaches around 1 m under the surface of the ground.

5.6.8 Example – strip foundations Like the floor slab, the foundations are to be created on two planes; the lower plane below the basement (in drawing file 210) and the upper part in the basement drawing file. The different foundations are contained in the Slab, Roof and Floor Slab wizard.

Foundations – lower level In the lower area, a strip foundation with a width of approx. 55 cm is required, on which the floor slab directly rests. ZZ Drawing file 210 current, drawing files 220 and 211 open in reference mode ZZ STRIP FOUNDATION or double right click on the component in the wizard ZZ PROPERTIES HEIGHT DIALOG BOX → HEIGHT . . . TOP LEVEL to UPPER PLANE, BOTTOM LEVEL defined via component height → 0.300 ZZ ATTRIBUTES: TRADE → Concrete work; PRIORITY → 100 MATERIAL/QUALITY → C 30/35 ZZ SURFACE ELEMENTS: SHOW SURFACE ELEMENTS IN PLAN VIEW → deactivated STYLE AREA → 6 – reinforced concrete – 2

Strip foundation

252  5 Building model – unfinished structure

ZZ Select the MATCH function in the AXIS area and in plan view, click on the base layer of an exterior wall. After you have identified a wall, the position of the component axis for the strip foundation is calculated in such a way that you only need to click on the outer edges of the wall and take account of the offset direction. ZZ Confirm the settings and create the foundations of the exterior walls.

Foundations – upper level The foundations in the upper areas should be visible with the walls of the basement, but should not have the full story height. Check the height setting and, after creation, the position of the foundations. ZZ Drawing file 210 current, drawing files 220 and 211 open in reference mode ZZ STRIP FOUNDATION – or DOUBLE RIGHT CLICK on the component in the wizard (component 42 and 43) ZZ Create the foundations under the walls as shown below. The foundation under the glass structure has a higher priority because otherwise, there would be a gap at the inner foundation. Strip foundation

NOTE: In the case of linear components with an irregular cross-section

(not rectangular), there may be gaps in the corners. Draw a diagonal line, and connect the linear components to it.

5.6 Further architectural components 253

Change edge insulation In drawing file 221 – Floor slab over story −1, change the edge insulation strip so that it extends to the top level of the foundations. The required value is calculated from the height of the foundations minus the lower foundation area (120 cm − 30 cm) and is to be entered as the offset from the lower level downward (i. e. with a minus sign) for the bottom level of the edge insulation.

5.6.9 Example – columns and roof upstand The final components to complete the shell of the building are two columns in the upper floor for the glass structure to support the slab, and to divide up the gallery. In the top floor, two roof upstands are needed on the slab above the walkway.

Columns in the upper floor The columns should be positioned so that the center point of the column is on the top/ bottom edge of the separating walls of the bathroom (left-hand part of the building) and the edge of the column is the same as the exterior edge of the wall below. ZZ Drawing file 240 current, drawing files 230 and 231 open in reference mode ZZ COLUMN – or DOUBLE RIGHT CLICK on the component in the wizard (component 09) ZZ Create the two columns on the left by setting the anchor point to middle, right and using the track line to make use of the existing wall edges. ZZ Also place the two columns on the other side of the building.

Parapet in top floor In the drawing file for the top floor, also create two parapet walls the front edge of which is flush with the slab.

Column

254  5 Building model – unfinished structure

■■5.7 Stairs Stairs

The Stairs module contains all the functions for creating stairs of various shapes. All stair shapes use the same basic elements and can be created in two ways: either by entering the shape by entering the geometry in plan view or by using the wizards for parametric entry. The stairs created have the same properties and can be modified in the same way. NOTE: Stairs always relate to the finished floor height and cannot be

­connected to planes.

5.7.1 Stair components – fundamentals The same components and settings exist for every stair.

Stair representation in 2D – Format, 2D tab On the Format, 2D tab, the format properties can be defined for every component of the stair. Each component can have different properties, and can therefore be hidden easily in the layout, for example, if a separate layer was created in each case.

5.7 Stairs 255

Geometry, 3D tab The Geometry, 3D tab contains all the settings available for defining the component geo­ metry and its display in the animation and in the section. You can also enter the material/ quality attributes.

You can use the buttons for the individual components to access individual dialog boxes for defining the geometry. ƒƒ Detailed settings for the individual components. All stair components are defined on the basis of the outline. Depending on the component type, the offset to the exterior boundary of the stair and the width of the element can be entered. Only positive values can be entered. If you need a lateral overlap of the treads above a reinforced concrete carriage, for example, the carriage is to be defined with an offset to the outline. Above the outline display, you have 3D geometry settings for all stair components. ­Different options are available depending on the component. In some cases, further ­settings are available in an additional dialog box. The following components have separate dialog boxes. ƒƒ TREAD (WITH NOSING), RISER

ƒƒ INNER CARRIAGE, CENTER CARRIAGE, OUTER CARRIAGE ƒƒ INNER STRINGER, CENTER STRINGER, OUTER STRINGER ƒƒ INNER HANDRAIL, OUTER HANDRAIL ƒƒ INNER USER-DEF. ELEMENT, CENTER USER-DEF., OUTER USER-DEF., STDS TEST ELEMENT

256  5 Building model – unfinished structure

5.7.2 Create stair All available stair shapes except spiral stairs, three quarter-turn stairs and free-form stairs can be easily created using the stair wizard. Stair wizard

ƒƒ STAIR WIZARD You can use the stair wizard to create the most important stairs largely automatically with just a few entries. Stairs that have been created can be changed using the MODIFY STAIR tool. ƒƒ STAIR SHAPE, PLAN DIMENSIONS provides all the stair shapes except THREE QUARTER-TURN STAIR and SPIRAL STAIR. Depending on the geometry you select, different input fields are activated for specifying the basic geometry.

ƒƒ HEIGHT, RISE, NUMBER OF STEPS defines the number of rises and the height difference between the bottom (HEIGHT (BOTTOM)) and top (HEIGHT (TOP)) of the stair. For stairs, the height entries are not dependent on he planes (absolute elevation) and cannot be connected to the planes.

ƒƒ STAIR COMPONENTS is used for a more detailed initial definition of the stair ­components. In the top area, you can choose between different combinations, in the bottom area, you define the format properties of the VISIBLE and HIDDEN ­COMPONENT LINES.

5.7 Stairs 257

ƒƒ You can use MATCH to import and use the components (and all properties) of an existing stair. After the properties of an existing stair have been imported, the STAIR COMPONENTS section of the dialog box is deactivated.

Match

NOTE: You can use the tools below to either create stairs easily using plan

dimensions or use irregular stair plans as a basis. The number of outline points to be entered is binding in each case. ƒƒ STRAIGHT STAIR Requires four points in the outline. ƒƒ HALF-TURN STAIR Requires eight points in the outline. ƒƒ QUARTER-TURN STAIR Requires six points in the outline.

Straight stair Half-turn stair Quarter-turn stair

NOTE: For turned stairs, you can choose between six different skew

­methods for the individual steps. ƒƒ DOUBLE QUARTER-TURN STAIR Requires eight points in the outline. ƒƒ THREE QUARTER-TURN STAIR Requires ten points in the outline. ƒƒ U-TYPE STAIR Requires eight points in the outline.

Double quarter-turn stair Three quarter-turn stair U-type stair

NOTE: For the landing stair types, you can also define the position of the

individual steps at the bottom and top of the landing.

ƒƒ SINGLE QUARTER LANDING STAIR Requires six points in the outline. ƒƒ DOUBLE QUARTER LANDING STAIR Requires eight points in the outline. ƒƒ A SPIRAL STAIR is defined using the center of the stair, inner radius and outer radius of the stair. The opening angle of the spiral staircase is also queried via the start and end point. Select a very small inner radius for spiral stairs.

Single quarter ­landing stair Double quarter ­landing stair Spiral stair

258  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Free-form stair

ƒƒ A FREE-FORM STAIR is defined using (practically) any number of outline points. In addition to the outline of the stair, you must specify the position of the line of travel.

Entering a stair using the stair wizard Stair wizard

hh STAIR WIZARD hh Select the stair geometry and enter the dimensions hh Define the height position of the stair relative to ±0.00 of the building (finished floor heights) hh Either enter the required basic properties of the stair components, use components of an existing stair, or: hh Confirm the properties hh Define the stair drop-in point (FLIP FLIGHT DIRECTION changes the flight direction) hh Select the stair drop-in point

Entering a stair by specifying the geometry in plan view hh Call up the stair shape you require hh Enter the exterior dimensions of the stair, starting at the bottom of the stair hh Enter the top and bottom height hh Define the stair details

hh Define the stair components in Properties hh Finish stair design by choosing Close hh Place the stair label (or cancel without entering a label)

5.7.3 Further stair tools Section in plan Revised in V2011

ƒƒ SECTION IN PLAN creates section lines for the outline of the stair. The section lines are created with the defined offset. In the properties, you can separately define the display for the stair areas that are above and below the section line. You can also define the display of the line of travel.

5.7 Stairs 259

NOTE: In each case, the format properties are only redefined. The layer

assignment of the underlying elements of the stair are therefore retained. ƒƒ SHOW/HIDE LINE OF TRAVEL shows or hides the stair’s line of travel. ƒƒ MODIFY STAIR opens the dialog box for the stair geometry again. You can change all parameters of created stairs. After you have applied the changes, the stair must be labeled again (this is done automatically).

Line of travel on/off Modify stair

5.7.4 Displaying the stair across stories At the moment, Allplan does not have a mechanism for optimum display of stairs in all stories. However, it is easy to achieve a correct display of the stair in the floor plans. A practical, simple procedure is described below (basement-lower floor-upper floor): hh Create all stairs of a building starting with the lowest stair. The stairs are to be created in the drawing files whose bottom level corresponds to the bottom of the stair. Each stair is created once only. hh Upper floor drawing file current, lower floor drawing file open in reference mode Draw lower floor-upper floor stair with lines. If necessary, create an element group from the individual lines (stair layers). hh Lower floor drawing file current, basement drawing file open in reference mode hh Create section in plan for lower floor-upper floor stair PROPERTIES: REPRESENTATION AT TOP tab CHANGE REPRESENTATION OF COMPONENTS AT TOP → HIDDEN CHANGE REPRESENTATION OF LINE OF TRAVEL AT TOP → HIDDEN REPRESENTATION AT BOTTOM tab:

No changes The bottom part of the stair is displayed in accordance with how the components were created, and the top part is completely hidden. hh Draw the top part of the basement-lower floor stair with lines

Section in plan

260  5 Building model – unfinished structure

hh Basement drawing file current hh Create section in plan for basementlower floor stair PROPERTIES: REPRESENTATION AT TOP tab CHANGE REPRESENTATION OF COMPONENTS AT TOP → CHANGE FORMAT PROPERTIES CHANGE REPRESENTATION OF LINE OF TRAVEL AT TOP →  CHANGE FORMAT PROPERTIES REPRESENTATION AT BOTTOM tab:

 No changes The elements of the top part of the stair are displayed with dashed lines, while the bottom part of the stair is displayed with the settings that were defined for the components in the stair properties. NOTE: As an alternative to drawing the stair, you can create a hidden-line

image from the stair area and insert this in the drawing file.

5.7.5 Example – stair lower floor – upper floor The stair from the lower floor to the upper floor should be a single-flight, straight stair with the bottom of the stair wider than the top. In both stories, the floor structure to be taken into consideration is 16 cm. The best overview for creating stairs is provided by the 3 viewports option.

Viewport setting and display 3 viewports

ZZ 3 VIEWPORTS (in the Window menu) ZZ Pre-construction plan → Drawing for permission to build (Floor plans – Allplan Practical Manual) ZZ REFERENCE SCALE → 1:100 The floor plan is now displayed in color. As an alternative to defining the drawing type and reference scale individually, you can also use display favorites.

5.7 Stairs 261

Change display using display favorites ZZ Retrieve display favorite In the FAVORITES – PROJECT folder M100_Pre-construction_plan.bdfa: Select and confirm.

Retrieve display ­favorite

The favorite ONLY changes the scale and drawing type.

Stair from story 00 (lower floor) to story 01 (upper floor) with entry of the outline in plan view ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ Drawing file 230 current, drawing file 231 open in reference mode ZZ STRAIGHT STAIR – or DOUBLE RIGHT CLICK on the component in the wizard (component 01) ZZ Format properties LAYER (AR_STAIR), PEN FROM LAYER, LINE FROM LAYER and COLOR FROM LAYER → activated ZZ ENTER THE STAIR OUTLINE

Open on a project-specific basis Straight stair

MAKE SURE YOU ENTER THE POINTS IN EITHER ASCENDING (1–4) OR DESCENDING (4–1) ORDER.

NOTE: In all stair plans, the first and last points define the bottom of the

stair.

ZZ THE STAIR OUTLINE/LINE OF TRAVEL/HEIGHT DIALOG BOX IS DISPLAYED. CLICK ON THE FIELD AFTER HEIGHT.

Enter the following values in the STAIR HEIGHT dialog box: NUMBER OF STEPS → 17 HEIGHT (BOTTOM)→ 0.00 HEIGHT (TOP)→ 3.075 CREATE TOP STEP AT HEIGHT OF SLAB option activated ZZ Click OK to confirm both dialog boxes.

Value 3.075 is calculated from the unfinished floor of the upper floor plus the floor structure (2.915+0.16).

262  5 Building model – unfinished structure

The stair is created and a dialog line is displayed with further setting options.

ZZ STAIR COMPONENTS AND PROPERTIES ZZ FORMAT 2D tab – check settings Stair ­components and properties

ZZ GEOMETRY 3D tab – check settings

5.7 Stairs 263

You must now define the component geometry in more detail. In plan view, all components are to be connected to the OUTLINE on both sides with 0.00. Change the other ­settings as shown. ZZ STAIR TREAD

The stair tread should have an even thickness of 7 cm. The value must be defined separately for the front and rear edge. The treads should also have an offset of 2 cm (stringer width) from the outline.

ZZ INNER STRINGER OUTER STRINGER

The thickness of the stringer is to be entered in the floor plan section as an offset (0 cm and 2 cm) to the outline. The other values can be copied from the graphic. Both stringers (inner and outer) should be given the same settings.

ZZ INNER HANDRAIL OUTER HANDRAIL

The width of the handrail is to be entered in the floor plan section as an offset (0 cm and 5 cm) to the outline. The height of the handrail is entered top right (5 cm). ZZ Confirm all the dialog boxes and answer YES to the following prompt.

264  5 Building model – unfinished structure

ZZ Cancel stair labeling. The label will be created later after setup of the plan view.

Match

NOTE: During stair creation, you can use MATCH at any time to copy the

properties of a stair from the wizard or from a stair in a visible drawing file.

5.7.6 Example – stair basement – lower floor The stair from story −1 (basement) to story 00 (lower floor) should be created with the stair wizard. This is ideal for geometries that only have right angles and/or whose dimensions are clearly defined (e. g. precast stairs). The stair should be created as a reinforced concrete stair with stone steps and a stainless steel handrail.

Stair lower floor – upper floor – create stair using stair wizard Open on a project-specific basis Stair wizard

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ Drawing file 220 current, drawing file 221 open in reference mode ZZ STAIR WIZARD

ZZ First, define the geometry of the stair with the plan dimensions. The stair length (SEGMENT LENGTH A) should be 4.05 m, the FLIGHT WIDTH 1.135 m. ZZ Change the NUMBER OF RISES to 15, the HEIGHT (TOP) to 0.00, HEIGHT (BOTTOM) to −2.800, and activate the CREATE TOP STEP AT HEIGHT OF SLAB option.

5.7 Stairs 265

ZZ Change the format settings for VISIBLE COMPONENT LINES as shown.

ZZ MATCH ALL COMPONENTS FROM AN EXISTING STAIR→ select stair in wizard (com-

ponent 03) ZZ Confirm the message; the settings in the Stair Component area are grayed out and ­cannot be changed until the MATCH ALL COMPONENTS FROM AN EXISTING STAIR option is deactivated again.

ZZ Confirm the setting. ZZ CHANGE THE FLIGHT DIRECTION WITH FLIP, MOVE THE ANCHOR POINT AND USE THE DIALOG LINE TO TURN THE STAIR SO THAT YOU CAN PLACE THE STAIR ACCURATELY. THE OFFSET AT THE TOP OF THE STAIR TO THE REINFORCED CONCRETE WALL SHOULD BE 36.5 CM.

ZZ Cancel stair labeling. The label will be created at a later point.

266  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Check stair components Modify stair

ZZ MODIFY STAIR and identify the stair

ZZ STAIR COMPONENTS AND PROPERTIES Stair components and properties

NOTE: As an alternative to the Modify Stair tool, you can call up the stair

properties using the shortcut menu.

5.7.7 Example – stair display in the stories In order to display the stairs correctly in all stories, you must draw the main stair in the upper floor and the basement stair in the lower floor with lines.

Stair display, upper floor – main stair plan view Line Circle

ZZ Drawing file 240 current, drawing file 230 open in reference mode ZZ Hide all layers that are in the way. ZZ Use the Line and Circle tools to draw the outline of the stair. Check the format setting of the elements (Layer → AR_STAIR). In the stair wizard, 2D elements with the correct properties are available for copying.

Stair display, lower floor – basement stair plan view In drawing file 230, create a plan view of the basement stair by redrawing the lines. The main stair is given a section in plan view. Section in plan

ZZ Drawing file 230 current ZZ SECTION IN PLAN select stair

5.7 Stairs 267

ZZ PROPERTIES REPRESENTATION AT BOTTOM tab

→  components  unchanged. Afterwards, no options are active. REPRESENTATION AT TOP tab → settings as shown ZZ Confirm the settings in both dialog boxes. ZZ Specify the position of the section in plan view. Make sure that the START and END POINT are on the outline of the stair. ZZ Also create a section in plan view with the same settings for the basement stair.

NOTE: If you now hide layer AR_STC2, you see the stairs as they will appear

later in the printout if the layout is set up correctly.

268  5 Building model – unfinished structure

■■5.8 Dimension building, label components To dimension walls and label components, Allplan provides associative dimension lines and labels that are automatically changed if the component geometry changes.

5.8.1 Dimension walls Dimension walls

ƒƒ DIMENSION WALLS automatically creates one or more dimension strings for one or several walls. The dimension lines created with the DIMENSION WALLS tool are associative if they are in the same drawing file as the components being dimensioned. NOTE: After creation, you can only tell the difference between associative

dimension lines and simple dimension lines by looking at the shortcut menu of a dimension line. The Dimension Walls tools is contained in the shortcut menu for dimension lines created with this tool. The settings are almost identical to those for the normal dimension line. Dimension lines you created using DIMENSION WALLS can be edited with the standard functions of the DIMENSION LINE module. You can find an explanation of these settings in section 4.4.6, Dimension Lines module – fundamentals. DIMENSION BLOCK tab

Under STYLES, you can select the dimension line types shown in the dimension block. You can enter the spacing between the individual dimension lines in a block on the ENTRY OPTIONS tab in the DIMENSION LINES area. The Centered on openings and Show height of openings dimension line types only take account of the door, French door, and window components. At the moment, niches etc. cannot be dimensioned automatically. The value for the opening dimensions is always based on the wall layer defined as the direction element. The dimensions of the openings that the component has are output (usually unfinished dimensions).

5.8 Dimension building, label components 269

NOTE: If you need the opening height relative to the finished floor of the

adjoining room, you can either correct the dimension, enter the required height as an additional text (in this case the opening height must be hidden), or use a label style (example included in the template project) in which the room finish is evaluated. ƒƒ LAYER displays the layer for each dimension line type. You can use the button next to the display to define the layer for each type. ƒƒ Style combinations ƒƒ OVERALL DIMENSIONS (1) The points to be dimensioned are determined along the direction element. ƒƒ OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS (2) The points to be dimensioned are determined along the direction element. ƒƒ ROOM DIMENSIONS (3) The points to be dimensioned are determined along the line that is opposite the ­direction element. ƒƒ CENTERED ON OPENINGS (4) The axes of openings are dimensioned. The opening points to be dimensioned are ­determined along the direction element. ƒƒ SHOW HEIGHT OF OPENINGS (5) The axes of openings and the heights of the openings are dimensioned. The opening points to be dimensioned are determined along the direction element. The associative dimensioning of walls is carried out as follows: hh Dimension walls hh Define the properties of the dimension block you want to create hh Select the walls to be dimensioned hh Confirm selection with a right mouse click hh Select active wall line as direction element. The wall line is used as the reference line for the dimension line block and therefore controls dimensioning. hh Place dimension block. If necessary, rotate and/or use the offset point.

5.8.2 Label components Almost all properties of a component (architectural component) or simple element with attributes can be labeled. When the various components (e. g. openings, stair) are created, the system automatically switches to the labeling function afterwards. For other compo-

Dimension walls

270  5 Building model – unfinished structure

nents (or those that already exist), you must activate the tool separately and select the object you want to label. Labeling

ƒƒ LABEL is used for the subsequent labeling of components and objects. For many components, the LABEL prompt appears automatically after the creation process. The only difference between the LABEL tool and the direct labeling after component creation is that the LABEL function has to be explicitly activated. ƒƒ STANDARD LABEL

Sill height Elevation

Document legend

Depending on the component, different dialog boxes are displayed that enable you to access basic elements in order to label the component. The standard label cannot be extended or replaced. ƒƒ LABEL STYLE enables you to access freely definable labels, which you can create yourself. Almost all attributes can be evaluated. You can also define label styles that display different content depending on the defined scale or drawing type. By using formulas in label styles, you can label component associations, e. g. an opening height relative to the finished floor of a room. You can use MATCH to copy a label from another component. Provided that label styles are defined, labeling using label styles can completely replace the object label, sill height and elevation and is therefore ideal for achieving a consistent look, above all in working drawings. ƒƒ OBJECT LABEL opens the SELECT LABEL ATTRIBUTES dialog box, which you can use to access a selection of attributes for the label. Only attributes and a few ­geometric values are displayed. Many attributes (e. g. VOB_Area, Floor_area_­ finished_dimensions) cannot be accessed. ƒƒ HEIGHT OF SILL provides either a basic label for the sill heights or access to label styles. ƒƒ ELEVATION POINT is used to label a component with an elevation at a defined point. In the case of sloped top and bottom levels of components, you can therefore use ELEVATION POINT at any points to read out and label the component heights. ƒƒ DOCUMENT LEGEND creates legends for objects and architectural components. The legends are stored in the document. Depending on the type of creation, the document legends are updated automatically if the components are changed. Depending on the document legend selected, different components are displayed.

5.8.3 Example – dimension lower floor The plans should now be dimensioned with the openings. The interior doors and supplementary dimensions for the inside should be dimensioned on an extra layer. Before you start dimensioning, load the display favorite M100_ pre-construction_ plan. bdfa.

5.8 Dimension building, label components 271

Dimension lower floor walls – show height of openings The opening dimensions of the opening dimension string and the dimension string ­centered on openings are determined in the wall layer that the DIRECTION ELEMENT is on. ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ Drawing file 230 current ZZ DIMENSION WALLS ZZ Change the properties as shown, or copy the properties from the wizard (component 12). The Match function is available in the Properties dialog box of the dimension line. NOTE: The layer setting in the Dimension block tab cannot be copied from

existing dimension lines. This is always done separately. ZZ PROPERTIES Define ARROWHEAD Text size → 2.00 ZZ DIMENSION BLOCK tab STYLES → SHOW HEIGHT OF OPENINGS LAYER → DL_50

In the preview, the system displays the dimension lines to be created. ZZ Confirm your entries. ZZ Select the top exterior walls. Make sure that your selection includes the corner. If it does not, also select the adjoining wall.

ZZ Right-click to confirm. ZZ Click on the interior wall edge as the DIRECTION ELEMENT. ZZ OFFSET TO DROP-IN POINT ON, FLIP DIMENSIONS, to display the dimension line above the crosshairs. ZZ Place the dimension line by clicking on the corner point of the building.

Open on a project-specific basis Dimension walls

272  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Dimension lower floor walls – room dimensions For the room dimensions, all walls that are opposite the wall edge activated as the direction element are dimensioned as interior walls. Dimension walls

ZZ DIMENSION WALLS ZZ PROPERTIES ZZ DIMENSION BLOCK tab STYLES → ROOM DIMENSIONS LAYER → DL_100

ZZ Confirm your entries. ZZ Select walls → confirm. ZZ Click on the outer edge of the wall as the DIRECTION ELEMENT. All walls that adjoin the wall side opposite the direction element are recognized as room dimensions and included in the dimension string.

ZZ Place the dimension line in the workspace.

Dimension lower floor walls – outside dimensions and overall dimensions For the outside dimensions, the component and selected walls on the direction element are dimensioned. Parts of the wall that do not connect to each other (such as the south and north external wall) are dimensioned with their joints. The overall dimensions line always specifies the complete dimension of the selected walls (i. e. their maximum extent) on the direction element. Dimension walls

ZZ DIMENSION WALLS PROPERTIES DIMENSION BLOCK tab STYLES  → OVERALL DIMENSIONS → OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS LAYER → in each case DL_100.

ZZ Confirm your entries. ZZ Select walls → confirm. ZZ Click on the outer edge of the wall as the DIRECTION ELEMENT. ZZ Place the dimension line block.

5.8 Dimension building, label components 273

Dimension other walls Dimension the remaining walls of the lower floor. For the interior walls with doors, use the Show height of openings dimension line type, and remove surplus dimension line points or add missing ones (DELETE DIMENSION LINE POINTS, ADD DIMENSION LINE POINTS). You can use the MODIFY EXTENSION LINES tool to group together the dimension lines visually in a block. You should dimension the two other floors in the same way. Try out different settings for creating dimension lines. For example, also test other values for the dimension line offset in the ENTRY OPTIONS tab.

Add dimension line point Delete dimension line point line

Modify dimension

You can find a dimensioned and labeled provisional result in chapter 5.8.4, Example – labeling components. Supplement the dimension lines with the remaining three building sides and the interior doors. Add dimension lines in the basement and upper floor too. The interior doors and supplementary dimensions for the inside should be dimensioned on an extra layer.

5.8.4 Example – labeling components Every component can be labeled. There are different labeling options depending on the component’s properties. You can use label styles and object labels for advanced labeling options.

Label stair

�

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS, drawing file 220 current. ZZ LABEL ZZ Select stair → confirm selection ZZ Select the settings for the label. If the Context toolbar is displayed differently, you should select the first button.

Open on a project-specific basis Label

274  5 Building model – unfinished structure

Parameters/Data Entry Toggle

ZZ PARAMETERS/DATA ENTRY TOGGLE → define text parameters Text height and text width e. g. 2.00 ZZ Select the text direction using the entry options

ZZ Add label

Create document legend for walls Document legend

ZZ DOCUMENT LEGEND ZZ Legend selection List 5 wall display ASSOCIATIVE LEGEND option of active document selected

ZZ Confirm with OK ZZ Layer AR_LABEL ZZ PLACE DOCUMENT LEGEND All walls of the loaded drawing files that are visible are evaluated. Hidden layers are not evaluated in the document legend.

Left: Drawing file 220 current Right: Drawing file 220 open in edit mode, drawing file 230 current

5.9 Example – building model result – unfinished structure 275

■■5.9 Example – building model result – unfinished structure You can find further examples as PDF files in the project folder of the following project: ƒƒ Project Allplan 2012 Practical Manual or on the website ƒƒ http://www.zeichenatelier.com/Allplan2012

276  5 Building model – unfinished structure

6

Building model – finish

■■6.1 Quantity takeoff: rooms, surfaces, stories The Quantity Takeoff module contains all the functions relating to the finish (interior and exterior). The Room and Story components are used as the base for the finish specifications and for the evaluation of the 277 lists relevant in building law, for DIN floor space regulations and the building application.

Quantity takeoff: rooms, surfaces, stories

6.1.1 Rooms, stories, finish specifications – fundamentals The ROOM and STORY functions have similar attributes and properties. Both components are entered in the same way as surface elements, i.e. with the polygon entry tools. Rooms are used to determine the interior finish surfaces, area calculation, effective areas, net areas and net room volume. Stories are used to determine the façade areas, gross base areas, land act areas and gross room volume. The following attributes are available directly for the room and story. The attributes are used to label the rooms in the drawing file and for output (in some cases also structuring) in lists.

Room attributes, story attributes ƒƒ A story code (e. g. E_00) should be entered in STORY CODE. Many lists are structured on the basis of the story code.

Room Story

278  6 Building model – finish

ƒƒ A number should be entered in NAME. If you choose the NAME button, you can access the name attribute and the building alteration category. The catalog assignment can be used to also activate usage of the material and production type attributes. If only the name attribute is selected in the catalog assignment, Catalog ++ can be selected to specify that names that end with numbers are automatically incremented (see section 3.1.2.4, Catalog options). ƒƒ FUNCTION is used to enter the exact room function such as living, dining and so on.

General attributes ƒƒ TEXTS provides five attribute fields for your own entries. Attributes Text1 through Text5 are in some cases used to structure lists. ƒƒ USER-DEFINED ATTRIBUTES – ATTRIBUTES displays all attributes directly connected to the room/story. You can select further attributes from the various directories or define your own in order to manage special information (e. g. room temperature). ƒƒ FACTOR specifies a multiplier for the component, which is taken into consideration in lists. Factors for determining the area of rooms are specified in the DIN  277, FLOOR AREA, tab.

Height ƒƒ Height setup In the HEIGHT area, you can use the standard functions for connecting components to the default reference planes. By default, rooms are connected to the top and bottom plane without offset. In the basement, stories must reach to the bottom level of the floor slab and their upper level should always reach to the bottom level of the plane (see also section 5.1.1, Height association of components).

Finish – general The FINISH tab for the room contains the following finish elements. ƒƒ VERTICAL SURFACE COVERING defines the surface finishes along walls (e. g. plastered areas). ƒƒ CEILING COVERING defines the upper room finish horizontally or inclined (e. g. suspended ceilings). ƒƒ FLOOR COVERING defines the floor finish of the room. ƒƒ BASEBOARD defines the baseboards. For stories, you can only enter vertical surface coverings. The settings are the same as those for the vertical surface coverings of the room.

6.1 Quantity takeoff: rooms, surfaces, stories 279

Finish – columns and functions

For the surface finishes, you can enter up to 10 layers, which can be evaluated individually. All settings are managed separately for each layer. In the animation, the complete finish is displayed in the surface settings of the top layer. ƒƒ NO specifies the layer number. The layer with the highest number is the top layer. ƒƒ CONDITION opens a dialog box in which you enter a condition for the layer. You can define, for example, that a room is only plastered on walls with the Masonry trade, and that plaster is not evaluated on walls with Concrete or Dry Construction trades. A condition is always defined as follows: Click on the CONDITION field for the layer → define the condition e. g. via TRADE = → Masonry work (dropdown list) → confirm condition. ƒƒ MATERIAL/QUALITY defines the material. You can use CATALOG to define the catalog from which the material can be selected (also see chapter 3.1.2.4, Catalog options). ƒƒ THICKNESS specifies the layer thickness. You can use the OFF button in the selection dialog box to set the layer thickness to zero or deactivate it. ƒƒ TRADE opens the list of trades, from which you can select the trade for the layer. If you want to completely remove the selected trade for the finish layer, use the OFF button in the selection dialog box. ƒƒ TEXTS provides five attribute fields for your own entries. Attributes Text1 through Text5 are in some cases used to structure lists. ƒƒ ATTRIBUTE displays attributes connected to the finish layer. ƒƒ CUSTOM SURFACE is used to configure the surface for the animation. In the event of several layers, only the top layer valid at this point is shown in the animation. In the case of floor and ceiling surfaces, the complete finish thickness is always shown. ƒƒ HEIGHT (for VERTICAL SURFACES only) is used for a more detailed definition of the height of the vertical surface relative to the room. The selection enables you to easily create a room that, for example, has 1 m high wooden paneling all the way round and above this a white plastered surface. ƒƒ HATCHING,  PATTERNS,  FILLS  (not for VERTICAL SURFACE) are only visible in the section. If you make settings here, you simplify subsequent work in the sections. ƒƒ For each finish, you can use the FAVORITES and MATCH functionalities for properties of existing components. Only the properties that correspond to the finish are imported/ saved. (For more information on FAVORITES and MATCH, see chapter 2.7.2.5, Downstream functions in dialog boxes) ƒƒ The TOTAL FINISH area provides the functions for the favorites and for matching the complete finish. You can use DELETE to remove the complete finish.

Off

280  6 Building model – finish

ƒƒ The LAYER area is used to add and remove individual layers. The selected layer is removed. Using the INSERT function, you can choose whether a further layer is added

before or after the selected layer. ƒƒ ATTRIBUTE CATALOG ASSIGNMENT AREA

You can use the left-hand button to define the source (see section 3.1.2.4, Catalog options) from which you obtain the information for the material attribute for the ceiling surface, vertical surface and floor surface. You use the right-hand button to define the same for the baseboard.

Special room options DIN 277, FLOOR AREA tab

You can select the attribute using either the dropdown menu or the buttons. DIN 277 ATTRIBUTES area  ƒƒ ENCLOSURE can contain the values a, b and c

in accordance with DIN 277. ƒƒ OCCUPANCY TYPE is used to define the occupancy type for the room in accordance with DIN  277. The Occupancy type attribute can contain values UA, WA or CA (in accordance with the most recent version of DIN 277). ƒƒ AREA TYPE is used to set the calculation type for the room (N = net floor area and NCC, M = multi-story NCC, no net floor area, L = empty, neither NFA nor NCC) in accordance with DIN 277. ƒƒ DIN 277 FACTOR specifies a factor that is only used for DIN 277 evaluations. FLOOR AREA ATTRIBUTES area ƒƒ TYPE OF FLOOR AREA is used to set the floor

area calculation type. The following floor area types can be set: LI (living area), SS (special space), ES (economic space) and NL (non-­ living area). ƒƒ FACTOR FOR FLOOR AREA CALCULATION is used to enter a deduction factor for floor area calculations. Here, enter the parameters for balconies, terraces and similar areas in accordance with the new 2004 regulations for calculating floor space. The deductions for rooms with a room height of below 2 meters and 1 meter are determined automatically from the room geometry. ƒƒ FLAT-RATE SUBTRACTED TO ACCOUNT FOR PLASTER is no longer needed when entering rooms that are to be calculated in accordance with the new 2004 regulations for calculating floor space. For a calculation in accordance with the second directive, you can define here that for balconies, for example, the flat-rate deduction of 3 % is to be ignored.

6.1 Quantity takeoff: rooms, surfaces, stories 281

Special story options DIN 277 LAND ACT tab LAND ACT area

ƒƒ The land act attributes determine how the story is to appear in the lists and in the label style in the template project from a building law point of view. DIN 277 ATTRIBUTES area  ƒƒ ENCLOSURE can contain the values a,

b and c in accordance with DIN 277. ƒƒ AREA TYPE is used to define the story calculation type (B = gross floor area and GCC, M = multistory GCC, not GFA, U = empty, neither GFA nor GCC, V = unoccupied, not empty) in accordance with DIN 277. ƒƒ DIN 277 FACTOR specifies a factor that is only used for DIN 277 evaluations.

6.1.2 Further room and story functions ƒƒ VERTICAL SURFACE, CEILING, FLOOR create special finishes that cover the rooms and stories in the respective areas. Special finishes can have the same settings as the finishes of a room (story) and also a separate height definition. In the evaluation, special finishes in the area of a room are evaluated with the room finish. Other special finishes are listed separately. ƒƒ BASEBOARD creates the special Baseboard finish object. ƒƒ GROUP ROOMS/STORIES is used to group together rooms or stories into occupancy groups that can be jointly labeled and evaluated in certain lists. ƒƒ REDEFINE ROOMS, SURFACES, STORIES is used to change the selected component type. Depending on the component selected (FILTER) in the Context toolbar, the possible settings are displayed. Attributes that were not filled out are not changed. ƒƒ AREA CALCULATION, APPLICATION opens the dialog box for evaluation using lists/ reports with special settings for floor space lists, DIN 277 lists and building application lists.

6.1.3 Explanation of the label styles used below For the Room and Story components, the template project contains special label styles whose functionalities go beyond those supplied in the standard system. For the Room Group and Story Group, the Allplan standard system contains two smart label styles that react correctly to the different settings for the grouped components.

Vertical area Ceiling Floor Baseboard Room/story group Redefine rooms, surfaces, stories

Area calculation, application

282  6 Building model – finish

6.1.3.1 Different behavior of label styles (Standard – Office) If you use a label style from the Allplan standard system, you must take account of the format settings when placing it in the workspace. All parts of the label style on all defined foils are generated with these format settings in the drawing file. If you use a label style that you defined yourself, the format settings used to create the individual parts are used. As a result, you can hide individual pieces of information on the foils using layers and use different colors and line widths in your label styles. It does not matter here whether the label style was saved in the office or in the project.

6.1.3.2 Label style for rooms The room label label style has three foils (scale range 1–75, 76–150, 151–500). You can completely move the label style by using MOVE. You can find a copy of the label style for rooms under number 11 in the same file. This is the same as the first label style except that the elevation is missing.

The individual foils: Foil scale 1–75 – working drawings ƒƒ Group → NAME attribute of the ROOM GROUP to which the room belongs ƒƒ 00_01 → NAME attribute ƒƒ Living → FUNCTION attribute ƒƒ VOB area of the floor covering if a finish was assigned. Otherwise, base area of room. ƒƒ Material of the top layer of the floor covering ƒƒ Finished floor elevation → Total layer thicknesses of floor covering + unfinished elevation ƒƒ Unfinished floor elevation → as a rule, same as the bottom plane of the drawing file Foil scale 76–150 – pre-construction plan ƒƒ Group → NAME attribute of the ROOM GROUP to which the room belongs ƒƒ 00_01 → NAME attribute ƒƒ Living → FUNCTION attribute ƒƒ Floor area (FA), if TYPE OF FLOOR AREA is LI, SS or ES, otherwise DIN 277 base area (BA) ƒƒ Finished floor elevation → Total layer thicknesses of floor covering + unfinished elevation Foil scale 151–500 – design ƒƒ FUNCTION → Living ƒƒ Floor area (FA), if TYPE OF FLOOR AREA is LI, SS or ES, otherwise DIN 277 base area (BA)

6.1 Quantity takeoff: rooms, surfaces, stories 283

Labeling small rooms

In the case of small rooms, the label style may be too big. You can use the INPUT OPTIONS → SIZE toolbar to reduce (or enlarge) the label style. To do so, you must select SIZE and enter a factor (e. g. 0.5) in the dialog line.

6.1.3.3 Label style for stories The label style for the story contains only one foil, which is visible in scales 1/76 through 1/500. Foil scale 76–500 – pre-construction plan/design ƒƒ Group → NAME attribute of the STORY GROUP to which the story belongs ƒƒ E_00 → STORY CODE attribute ƒƒ 00_01 → NAME attribute ƒƒ Living → FUNCTION attribute ƒƒ Land Act evaluates the Land Act area. FA = floor area of building, FS = full story, SA = story area ƒƒ DIN 277 evaluates the DIN 277 area and displays the gross room volume and floor area in accordance with DIN 277. Both values are always displayed. TYPE = enclosure, GCC = gross room volume, GFA = gross floor area

6.1.3.4 Layer style for room and story group To label room and story groups, a detailed label style is available for each in the Allplan basic installation in germany. Here, you see the foils for scale 1:100. For scale 1:200, the two label styles do not have a display, in scale 1:50 only the group name is specified for the room groups drawing file, and the façade quantity and reveal quantity are specified for the story groups label style. A more detailed explanation of the label style can be found in the Allplan help.

6.1.4 Example – create rooms with finish Entering rooms is just as easy as drawing a fill or similar element. The applicable regulations (DIN 277 and floor space regulations) make it necessary to specify the room finish. This is the only way the room finish can be correctly (and automatically) taken into account in the lists.

284  6 Building model – finish

Open on a project-specific basis Room

Lower floor rooms ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS, drawing file 230 current. ZZ ROOM – double right-click on the component in the wizard (01) ZZ PROPERTIES ZZ ROOM tab STORY CODE → E-00 NAME/QUALITY → 00_01 FUNCTION → Living/dining ZZ HEIGHT DIALOG BOX → HEIGHT . . . TOP LEVEL to UPPER PLANE, BOTTOM LEVEL to LOWER PLANE Each with OFFSET 0.00 Surface files from the Standard folder of the Design folder were used for the surfaces of the finishes (and for almost all other component surfaces). ZZ FINISH tab – VERTICAL SURFACE COVERING No. Material/quality

Thickness

Trade

1

Cement plaster

0.015

2

White coat of paint

0.000

Plaster and stucco work Painting and ­varnishing work

Surface /Ingrain wallpaper 1.surf

CEILING COVERING

No. Material/quality

Thickness

Trade Plaster and stucco work Painting and ­varnishing work

1

Ceiling plasterwork

0.015

2

White coat of paint

0.000

Surface /Plaster 1.surf

FLOOR COVERING

No. Material/quality 1 2 3 4 5 6

Seal Insulation+footfall sound insulation PE foil Heated screed Filling Parquet

Thickness

Trade

0.000 0.075

Screeding work Screeding work

0.000 0.065 0.005 0.015

Screeding work Screeding work Parquet work Parquet work

BASEBOARD

No. Material/quality

Trade

1

Parquet work

Timber strip

Surface

/Afrormosia1.surf

6.1 Quantity takeoff: rooms, surfaces, stories 285

Conditions are entered for various finish layers. These ensure that the finish layer is only created where this makes sense. For example, it does not make sense for a glass façade to have plaster and/or screed. Conditions can be created as follows: ZZ Click in the CONDITION field of the layer to which you want to assign a condition (e. g. for the 2nd layer of the vertical service). ZZ “not” → open brackets → trade = window work → “or” → trade = metal construction work → close brackets The condition could therefore be as follows and allows vertical finish layer 2 to be created on all subsurfaces that adjoin the room (e. g. walls), unless the trade for the component is window or metal construction work. The rooms from the wizard and also the stories have conditions in all ­layers that are needed for the example. Use these as a guide for your own creations, and try out conditions. ZZ DIN 277, FLOOR AREA tab DIN 277 ATTRIBUTES area ENCLOSURE → a OCCUPANCY TYPE → UA DIN277 AREA TYPE → N DIN 277 FACTOR → 1.000 FLOOR AREA ATTRIBUTES area TYPE OF FLOOR AREA → LI  FACTOR  FOR FLOOR AREA CALCULATION → 1.000

ZZ Confirm your settings. ZZ Click the outline of the first room. For room entry, you can use all polygonal entry options. Make sure that every room point is on the corner point of the wall. The geometry of the first room is shown on the adjacent image; the gray area is the living/dining room, the white area is the kitchen. ZZ On the Context toolbar, click the LABEL STYLE labeling option. ZZ Click in the LABEL STYLE field to open the SELECT LABEL STYLE dialog box.

286  6 Building model – finish

ZZ DIRECTORY → Project FILES → 1 Rooms/Story LABEL STYLE → 1 Room Label ZZ Confirm your selection. ZZ Place the label style in the room.

Create the other rooms in the same way. The stair also needs a room (OCCUPANCY TYPE  →  CA, TYPE OF FLOOR AREA → NL), and you should also create a room for the terrace (ENCLOSURE → a, FACTOR FOR FLOOR AREA CALCULATION → 0.250), in which you do not need and vertical or ceiling coverings. The effective floor area, not the base area, is output in the label style. You can find an overview of the labeled rooms of all three stories in chapter 6.5, Railing and façade. Also compare the data from the finished project with your results.

TIP: Make sure you enter rooms only once! If you forgot to place the label,

the room is still created. Label these subsequently with the Label function (e. g. shortcut menu for the room).

6.1 Quantity takeoff: rooms, surfaces, stories 287

6.1.5 Example – create story For other lists required by building law, you need stories per plane, classified by calculation method. The stories must be connected in such a way that the volume calculations required by building law can be output correctly. The lower floor is to be constructed up to the bottom level of the upper floor, the basement from the bottom level of the floor slab to the bottom level of the lower floor and the top floor up to the top level of the roof covering.

Lower floor stories ZZ Drawing file 230 current ZZ STORY (COMPONENT 42, WIZARD) ZZ PROPERTIES STORY tab STORY CODE → E_00 NAME/QUALITY → Lower floor FUNCTION → Living/office

Story

HEIGHT DIALOG BOX → HEIGHT . . . TOP LEVEL to UPPER PLANE, OFFSET 0.20 BOTTOM LEVEL to LOWER PLANE, OFFSET 0.00

VERTICAL SURFACE COVERING

No. Material/quality 1 2

Plaster (with fabric) Light gray exterior paint

Thickness Trade

Surface

0.010 0.00

/Plaster 1.surf

DIN 277, LAND ACT tab

Land Act area ADD TO FLOOR AREA OF BUILDING

→ Active ADD IN FULL TO STORY AREA (FULL STORY) → Active DIN 277 ATTRIBUTES area ENCLOSURE → a DIN 277 AREA TYPE → B DIN 277 FACTOR → 1.000

Plaster and stucco work Painting work

288  6 Building model – finish

ZZ Press OK to confirm the settings. ZZ Enter the dimensions of the story for the complete building. Make sure that you find the right points for the glass structure. The area in gray represents the story (outer edge everywhere).

ZZ Click in the LABEL STYLE field to open the SELECT LABEL STYLE dialog box.

ZZ Select the following label style: FOLDER → Project SUBFOLDER → 1 Rooms/Story LABEL STYLE → 2 Story.

ZZ Click OK to confirm. ZZ Place the label style below the floor plan. Create a story for the terrace in the same way as for the other stories. Use the components from the wizard and check the changes compared with the lower floor. The story for the terrace should not have any interdependencies with the building story. Therefore, you should create a small gap between the two components (e. g. 1 cm), otherwise no vertical surface is created on the area of contact between the two stories, and the animation and evaluation of the vertical surfaces will be incorrect. Also compare the data from the finished project with your results.

6.1 Quantity takeoff: rooms, surfaces, stories 289

6.1.6 Example – group rooms To enable differentiated evaluation of areas and room volumes separately for individual terraced houses, the rooms and stories must be divided into groups. The ROOM/STORY GROUP function is always based on the current drawing file only.  Here, groups are only created for the rooms. If you also want the gross areas to be evaluated for each unit, the stories must be divided up accordingly. Here, you must only make sure that separating lines of stories should (if possible) run within walls, as otherwise there may be problems with finishes. For a differentiated evaluation of the two units (living and office), it is useful to create two groups. The function only affects the current drawing file, and the label also only shows the areas of the current drawing file. In the evaluation with reports and lists, a total is created above the name for groups with the same name.

Lower floor room group – living ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS, drawing file 230 current. ZZ GROUP ROOMS/STORIES → ROOM GROUP

ZZ INPUT OPTIONS → MAKE ZZ Name → Living, Fill color → 30

ZZ Remove the surface element (click the HATCHING field and select OFF).

ZZ Select all living spaces on the left and right side of the glass structure and the entrance area in the middle (rooms marked in red). ZZ Confirm the selection with a right click on the APPLY button.

Open on a project-specific basis Group rooms/­ stories

290  6 Building model – finish

ZZ Click in the LABEL STYLE field to open the SELECT LABEL STYLE dialog box. ZZ Select the following drawing file: DIRECTORY → Projekt FILE 

→ 1 Room and Stories LABEL STYLE  →  5  Label – group of rooms. ZZ Format properties Layer (AR_LABEL)

ZZ Place label Create a second room named Office and a pale yellow as the color on the lower floor, and a room group in both the basement and upper floor with the same settings as the Living group on the lower floor. The label for the groups in the lower floor shows two different areas for the living space, as this can either be evaluated in accordance with the floor space regulations or, like the office, in accordance with DIN 277.

■■6.2 Smart symbols for opening components 6.2.1 Opening smart symbols – fundamentals What are smart symbols? The display of smart symbols depends on the drawing file scale or the defined drawing type. Depending on the settings, only the foils of the smart symbol intended for projection and the scale/drawing type are visible. It is therefore easy to create objects that consist of a line only in scale 1:100, of details in scale 1:10, and of 3D objects in the projection. Smart symbols always have a name and information on the catalog they come from.

6.2 Smart symbols for opening components  291

In addition to the reference to the scale, you can define smart symbols whose display relates to the drawing type. These smart symbols depend on the resources of the project in which they were created. All smart symbols that are available in the wizards and the guide project depend on the drawing type.

Smart symbols for openings The openings in the Windows and Doors wizard (without smart symbols) are only represented as holes in the walls. Take an empty drawing file, create a wall, and place an opening in the wall by transferring the properties from the Windows and Doors wizard (without smart symbols). In the animation, you can identify the plastered reveal surfaces and the area of the opening, in which the window smart symbol will be positioned. In the floor plan, this area will be marked with blue dashed lines and called the reveal element. The window will be fitted into this area. If you create your own smart symbols without the SMART WINDOW SYMBOL, SMART DOOR SYMBOL and SMART WINDOW SILL SYMBOL functions, the smart symbol’s min-max box corresponds to the reveal element when the smart symbol is placed in an opening.  In the case of openings for which a reveal element was not created, the smart window symbols are placed centrally, and when the finish is calculated, a reveal is not used for the opening. This setting is ideal for interior doors that are to have a closed frame. NOTE: If a smart symbol is placed in the opening, the lines of the reveal

element are hidden by the lines of the smart symbol.

Smart symbol catalog There are several points at which you can access smart symbols. The catalog itself is always the same. The smart symbol catalog is split into the same areas that you are familiar with from the resources in the PROJECTPILOT.

Get from library

292  6 Building model – finish

In the left-hand area, a tree structure is displayed for managing the smart symbols, and the window on the right-hand side either contains the selected smart symbol or the content of the selected smart symbol folder. From the left-hand window, you can see, as soon as a smart symbol is selected, whether it contains further functionalities. For example, a smart window symbol could create a window when it is placed in a wall.

Functions for accessing the smart symbol catalog Insert smart symbol in opening

Smart symbol ­catalog Get from library

ƒƒ INSERT SMART SYMBOL IN OPENING enables you to place a smart symbol in an existing opening, either by selecting a smart symbol from the catalog or by transferring a smart symbol located in a drawing file. ƒƒ SMART SYMBOL (in opening component dialog boxes) You can use this to select one or more (in the case of window and door) smart symbols for your opening. The smart symbols are placed when the opening is created, their size is adjusted accordingly, and after the opening has been created you need to specify a reference point. If smart symbols are added to an opening subsequently using INSERT SMART SYMBOL IN OPENING, they are also included in the properties under SMART SYMBOL. ƒƒ SMART SYMBOL CATALOG opens the smart symbol catalog for the selection and/or management of smart symbols. With the SMART SYMBOL CATALOG function, you can access all smart symbols in all projects. ƒƒ GET FROM LIBRARY opens the SELECT CATALOG dialog box, via which the different data types can be read out. To select smart symbols from the smart symbol catalog, you must select data type SMART SYMBOL CATALOG and confirm the selection. You have access to the smart symbols of the current project and the standard resources.

6.2.2 Create and edit opening smart symbols There are two wizards that carry out a large amount of the work involved in creating smart symbols for windows and doors. You can also create your own smart symbols with any content and purpose. Because of the large number of variations, only the procedures for creating smart window/door symbols and smart window sill symbols will be described here.

6.2.2.1 Smart window and door symbols Procedure for creating a smart window or door symbol Smart window and door symbols

hh SMART WINDOW SYMBOL, SMART DOOR SYMBOL hh Identify the opening for which you want to create the smart symbol hh Select and configure the frame Depending on the component, a FRAME TYPE is automatically proposed (door → doorframe, window and French door → window frame).

6.2 Smart symbols for opening components  293

For French doors, you should cancel the selection and select the DOORFRAME frame type in order to create a frame with a strip. hh SET THE PEN, COLOR, AND SURFACE OF THE ELEMENTS. (Set properties apply for the subsequently created elements of the smart symbol.) hh MATCH ELEMENT → the frame is created and is displayed in the preview. hh Create profile elements and/or casement, door leaf

Match element

Select the elements you want to create. Enter the profile thickness. Configure the arrangement, orientation etc. MATCH ELEMENT

hh Check the display properties for scale and drawing types.

Match element

2D floor plan → window display or door display Set window elements or door elements → always make sure you use similar settings for your smart symbols. It does not make much sense if casements are visible in one smart symbol in scale 1/100 while only a line is visible in another smart symbol. If possible, configure both display variants (reference scale and drawing type) for every smart symbol. Confirm your entries. hh You can use ATTRIB to add further attributes to the smart symbol, and LABEL TO SAVE A LABEL STYLE WITH THE SMART SYMBOL.

hh Enter the reference point and confirm with a right click. hh Either save the smart symbol in an existing catalog or create a new catalog (shortcut menu). hh Enter the smart symbol name.

TIP: Use the same language when naming smart symbols.

6.2.2.2 Smart window sill symbol Procedure for creating a smart window sill symbol hh SMART WINDOW SILL SYMBOL hh Identify the opening for which you want to create the smart symbol

Smart window sill symbol

294  6 Building model – finish

hh Select TYPE → depending on the type, the preview on the right-hand side and the input fields under PARAMETERS CHANGE. SET THE PARAMETERS UNTIL YOU HAVE THE DESIRED GEOMETRY FOR THE DISPLAY OF THE WINDOW SILL IN 3D. hh Set MATERIAL/QUALITY

Enter a trade SPECIFY THE CALCULATION TYPE

hh SPECIFY THE POSITION (window sill inside/ outside proposes the defined position when the smart symbol is placed in an opening). hh Check the display properties for scale and drawing types. If possible, configure both display variants (reference scale and drawing type) for every smart symbol. hh Enter format properties for the individual elements of the smart symbol (including surface for the animation). hh Confirm your entries. hh You can use ATTRIB to add further attributes to the smart symbol, and LABEL TO SAVE A LABEL STYLE WITH THE SMART SYMBOL. hh Enter the reference point and confirm with a right click. hh Either save the smart symbol in an existing catalog or create a new catalog (shortcut menu). hh Enter the smart symbol name. NOTE: Use the same language when naming smart symbols.

6.2.2.3 Further functions for smart opening symbols file

Save favorite Open favorite file

Flip smart opening symbol

ƒƒ SAVE FAVORITE FILE/OPEN FAVORITE FILE opens the smart symbol catalog in the dialog boxes for creating smart symbols. You can access, use, and/or edit finished smart symbols. Take this opportunity to look at the settings in smart window sill symbols in the template project. ƒƒ You can use the FLIP SMART OPENING SYMBOL to change the position of smart symbols that you have already inserted in wall openings (in windows, doors, niches, recesses etc.,). When you zoom in on an opening or set a different reference scale, you may find that the window casement of a smart window symbol you have inserted in this opening needs to be turned around. You can correct this using this tool.

6.2 Smart symbols for opening components  295

ƒƒTURN SMART SYMBOL USING HANDLE is the easiest and most intuitive way of changing the direction of smart symbols. To do this, proceed as follows: ƒƒ CLICK ON THE SMART SYMBOL YOU WANT TO TURN. → IT IS HIGHLIGHTED IN RED, AND A BLUE DOUBLE ARROW APPEARS.

ƒƒ CLICK ON THE ARROW.

ƒƒ THE SMART SYMBOL CAN NOW BE MOVED IN THE OPENING. MOVE THE CROSSHAIRS SO THAT THE CASEMENT POINTS IN THE DESIRED DIRECTION.

ƒƒ CONFIRM THE NEW REFERENCE POINT WITH A LEFT CLICK. MAKE SURE THAT THE EXTERIOR SIDE HELP TEXT IS ON THE RIGHT SIDE FOR YOU WHEN YOU CONFIRM THE REFERENCE POINT.

The main advantage of the handle is that a complete view of the smart symbol (from its 3D components) is displayed, regardless of the scale. TIP: For doors, you can change the opening direction symbols in the same

way. As soon as you have changed the opening direction of a door, its smart symbol is also turned accordingly.

ƒƒ REPLACE SMART SYMBOL, REPLACE PLANT OBJECTS is used to exchange individual smart symbols. You can use the REPLACE SMART SYMBOL function to replace all windows of a plane that have the same name with a different window, for example. For this, you can select either a smart symbol in the drawing file or a smart symbol from the catalog.

6.2.2.4 Insert smart symbol in opening – system description The openings used in the example already have smart symbols. However, there is also a wizard that contains the same openings without smart symbols. If you use this wizard, or if openings are specifically created without smart symbols, they must be inserted afterward. You can do this either in the properties of the component (without the option of entering the opening direction) or by using the SMART SYMBOL IN OPENING function. In an empty drawing file, create a few walls and openings from the Windows and Doors wizard (without smart symbols). In the screenshots, component 03 of this wizard is used.

symbols

Replace smart

Replace plant object

296  6 Building model – finish

Smart symbol in opening

ZZ SMART SYMBOL IN OPENING ZZ SMART SYMBOL CATALOG ZZ Under PROJECT, select your project. The Windows subfolder contains the entry 1 casement, sill glazed. Select this and confirm. ZZ CLICK OPENING IN WHICH TO INSERT SMART SYMBOL → Click on the window opening in which you want to insert the smart symbol. NOTE: As an aid for the reference point,

the system displays which side of the opening is defined as the EXTERIOR SIDE. The text always appears on the side clicked first when the opening was created. ZZ PLACE NEW REFERENCE POINT FOR SMART SYMBOL → Click on the room → c­ onfirm with right mouse button If smart opening symbols are inserted in doors, the opening direction must also be specified. You can insert further smart symbols in openings in the same way. Each window and door opening can have several smart symbols. The openings in the Windows and Doors wizard contain up to three smart symbols (one for the window, two for the window sill).

6.2.3 Example – change and replace smart window symbols The windows from the wizard are defined in full, but now have to be changed slightly. The next task is to change the color for the frame of the casement. First, a window needs to be changed and the smart symbol replaced for all windows with the same geometry.

Change display using display favorites Changes that relate to the component that are first displayed in full in more detailed scales and/or drawing types should always be made there. Retrieve display ­favorite

ZZ RETRIEVE DISPLAY FAVORIT → select M50_Working_drawing.bdfa and confirm. or ZZ DRAWING TYPE → Working drawing (Floor plans – Allplan Practical Manual) ZZ REFERENCE SCALE → 1:50

6.2 Smart symbols for opening components  297

Change smart window symbol ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS, drawing file 230 current. ZZ Open the shortcut menu via the smart symbol in the displayed window. NOTE: Windows and doors consist of

s­ everal components, each of which can be snapped separately. ZZ Properties (in the shortcut menu) The current data of the smart window symbol is copied and displayed in the dialog box. To give the frame of the casement a different surface, it must first be removed. Perform the following steps: ZZ UNDO (1) – removes the most recently created element from the smart symbol.

Open on a project-specific basis

298  6 Building model – finish

ZZ At Casement, Door Leaf, open the surface (2) opens the SURFACE PROPERTIES dialog box. ZZ Open the file selection (3) and in the office path (toggle top right) search for surface Metal  black. surf in the Default/Building/Finishes/Metal folder and confirm the selection in both dialog boxes with Open or OK. ZZ Under CASEMENT, DOOR LEAF (4), select the window openings and in the OPENING STYLES dialog box, select the display for TILT-TURN HINGED ON LEFT. ZZ The fields for entering the casement dimension are displayed in white. Change the values to 68/68 mm. (5) ZZ Under DEF . . . (6), check the settings for the smart symbol display in the plan. Check all foil settings if possible (scales and drawing types). ZZ Check the opening direction CASEMENT, DOOR LEAF (7) → Inner. ZZ Click on the field in which the casement is to be created (3D view), and create the casement again (8). The casement is displayed in the 3D view. TIP: The display properties should be the same or similar for all smart

symbols (if possible office-wide).

ZZ Confirm the new settings by choosing OK (9).

ZZ Respond to the prompt about whether the settings should be changed with YES. ZZ Shortcut menu of the Windows folder in your project → MAKE ENTRY (10) ZZ Enter a new name for the smart symbol. The smart symbol is saved in the catalog and can be used within the project.

Replace smart window symbols You can now open the properties of every window and change the smart symbol there, or perform this step in one go for all the same smart symbols in both stories. Replace smart s­ ymbols

ZZ REPLACE SMART SYMBOLS ZZ WHAT TO REPLACE? → smart symbol (click to toggle) ZZ Click on the smart window symbol on the left next to the edited window (1)

6.3 Furniture and equipment elements 299

ZZ Replace with which smart symbol definition? 

→ Click on the changed smart window symbol (2)

All the same smart symbols are changed automatically one by one. If several drawing files are active, Allplan also searches for smart symbols to replace in the drawing files open in edit mode. Also replace the smart symbols in the upper floor and change the remaining smart symbols with casements so that these also have one dark casement frame (or two).

■■6.3 Furniture and equipment elements Allplan offers a wide variety of options for creating, importing and using symbols in 3D and 2D. During installation of Allplan, you can select various symbol catalogs, which you can access. You can also create your own symbols and/or purchase further catalogs from Nemetschek and its partners. From Allplan 2011, Nemetschek offers web content, some of which is freely available. As soon as new content is available, the Allplan Connect symbol is displayed in color in the standard toolbar next to the help. After you have visited the page, it is displayed paler (gray). At http://www.allplan-connect.com, you have access to the extended online content. However, the example only uses the symbols that are available in every standard installation without the internet connection. An explanation of how you can use the different file types can be found in the Allplan help. There are also PDF explanations for all objects.

6.3.1 Symbol catalogs In a symbol, several elements (simple and complex) are grouped together for an element and saved in a file. When a symbol is placed in the drawing file, individual elements are created that have the same segment number.

Snoop functionality of a symbol ‘Intelligent (smart) symbols’ are elements that can automatically be placed at a fixed offset to boundaries of architectural elements so that they are parallel to these architectural elements (e. g. walls, slabs, rooms, roof planes).

Allplan Connect

300  6 Building model – finish

Functions for symbols Get from library

ƒƒ GET FROM LIBRARY opens the SELECT CATALOG dialog box, in which the data type and path for the required symbol ­catalog must be selected before a symbol can be selected.

Procedure for retrieving symbols from a library Get from library

hh GET FROM LIBRARY hh SELECT DATA TYPE hh SELECT THE CATALOG UNDER PATH hh Select an umbrella term in the File area hh In the Entry area, select the required symbol → is displayed center right hh Confirm selection

Either place the symbol or predefine it with ENTRY OPTIONS and then place it Write to library

ƒƒ WRITE TO LIBRARY saves elements of your choice as symbols in a library. Procedure for saving a symbol in the catalog

Write to library

hh WRITE TO LIBRARY

hh Select storage location for the symbol hh Select the elements that are to be saved as a symbol hh ENTER THE SYMBOL’S BASE POINT hh ACTIVATE OR DEACTIVATE THE SNOOP FUNCTIONALITY If the SNOOP FUNCTIONALITY is active, a symbol line (with or without offset) must be entered as the reference line. hh Enter the file and entry for saving

6.3 Furniture and equipment elements 301

Standard symbols and layers Most of the symbols in the installed catalogs are stored on the default layer. In the options, you can define that all elements of the symbols read from the catalog are assigned on the current layer. As this option would also effect optimally saved symbols, it is advisable not to use this option, and to modify the equipment objects after placing the symbol.

6.3.2 Example – plumbing component The plumbing component should be created in the two WCs on the lower floor. In the bathrooms of the upper floor, you also need masonry, although it is better if you create the furniture first.

Fronting wall for WC lower floor Before the fronting wall is created, component 07 of the Walls and Columns wizard should be used to add a channel in the righthand WC, which has the dimensions of the slab recess and extends to the wall. ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS, drawing file 230 current. ZZ Hide all layers assigned to elements that are in the way. ZZ FRONTING WALL or copy component from the wizard ZZ PROPERTIES → COMPONENT tab ZZ HEIGHT setting TOP LEVEL → With lower planes, offset → 1.250 BOTTOM LEVEL → WITH LOWER PLANES, OFFSET → 0.000

Open on a project-specific basis Fronting wall

302  6 Building model – finish

ZZ FINISH tab

COVERING AT TOP and VERTICAL COVERING, each defined with a separate finish inde-

pendent of the room. ZZ Confirm the settings and create the fronting wall along the interior wall. You can check the component in the animation. Try out different surfaces for the finish of the room and the fronting wall.

6.3.3 Example – furniture Furniture consisting of 2D symbols should now be added to the plan. If you prefer to use 3D symbols, you should use a separate drawing file for this, because depending on the object size and hardware, the processing speed may be reduced. You can either place symbols so that the elements retain the layer that they had when saved, or all layers of the symbol are on the active layer.

Furnish WC in lower floor Get from library

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS, drawing file 230 current. ZZ GET FROM LIBRARY ZZ SELECT CATALOG LIBRARY → Symbol catalog PATH → 2D Architecture ZZ GET SYMBOL FILE → Bathroom 1:50 Entry → 33 WC 35x57

6.3 Furniture and equipment elements 303

ZZ Confirm selection ZZ ENTRY OPTIONS → DROP-IN POINT Place the drop-in point bottom center ZZ Set cursor snap to 45° ZZ Turn the focus on cursor snap in the dialog line and symbol using +/– so that the edge of the WC is parallel to the masonry ZZ Place WC on the center point of the masonry Furnish all rooms of the lower floor and upper floor. Take note of the fronting wall components in the bathrooms of the upper floor.

Modify layer – using function All symbols from the Architecture 2D catalog are on the default layer. The data is sorted most effectively if the sanitation objects are assigned to layer DE_SANI (sanitation) and the other equipment objects are assigned to layer DE_FURN (furniture). ZZ Hide layers that are in the way, and set the others to visible, frozen. ZZ MODIFY FORMAT PROPERTIES ZZ Set layer DE_SANI → OK

ZZ Place a selection rectangle over WC and washbasin. The elements are modified and should be displayed in a ­thinner pen after the change.

NOTE: The line thickness is only visible if the Thick Line option is active in

Show/Hide.

Modify layer – using palettes As an alternative to functions, you can use palettes to change properties for many elements. It is important that a function is not active when the elements are activated. ZZ Select the equipment objects for the 2nd WC.

ZZ Open the shortcut menu via the layer in the palette

Modify format ­properties

304  6 Building model – finish

ZZ MATCH PARAMETERS: LAYERS

ZZ Either click on an element of the already changed equipment objects or transfer the layer from the Layers wizard. Make sure that after you have transferred the layer, the Pen, Line, and Color options of the layer are active. NOTE: The shortcut menu of the palette

can be used to display the Match buttons for all properties in the palette. You can use these to quickly copy properties from other elements. For all other equipment, correct the layer either to DE_SANI (for sanitation objects) or to DE_FURN (for all other furniture).

6.3.4 Example – add external facilities The last step that is required before calculation of the views, sections, lists, and layout setup is the addition of external facilities. It is a good idea to store this in a separate drawing file under the Building – Design structural level. The terrain, flat terrain, can in this case be created as a simple slab. A terrain with an even incline can be displayed with a

6.3 Furniture and equipment elements 305

custom plane and a slab. For a terrain with different inclines, slopes, elevations and depressions, you need the DIGITAL TERRAIN MODEL or 3D MODELING module or ­several custom planes that recreate the terrain. In addition to the terrain, you should create other elements such as walls for the light wells and/or paths in the external facilities. Some elements are contained as templates in the External Facilities wizard. The basic information for the site plan is included in the wizard for copying the properties.

Settings for the basement light wells The walls for the light wells are defined so that the top level of the light well created in the basement drawing file matches the external facilities created in drawing file 230. In your own projects, you must make sure you create a consistent system for the heights of the external facilities relative to the building. ZZ Basement light well in drawing file 220 Story −1 – model ZZ WALL or copy component from the wizard ZZ PROPERTIES

Wall

HEIGHT DIALOG BOX TOP LEVEL → WITH UPPER PLANE → 0.22 BOTTOM LEVEL → component height → 1.30

Format settings: Layer (AR_C_NB) MATERIAL → Precast RC part PRIORITY → 100 THICKNESS → 0.100

Prepare drawing file for external facilities ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ Change name of drawing file 200 to External facilities ZZ ASSIGN PLANES Top level → Bottom level GF BOTTOM LEVEL → Top level 1st UF The top level of the terrain should be defined dependent on the bottom level of the basement slab. The height settings of components in the wizard are prepared accordingly.

Open on a project-specific basis

306  6 Building model – finish

Slabs as terrain For the external facilities drawing file (200), also open the site plan (101) and basement (220), as well as the lower floor drawing file (230) in reference mode. As a result, you have to hand the information you need to create the terrain of the external facilities using slabs. Slab

ZZ Copy components from the wizard and create edge reinforcements. Then fill the areas with the slabs from the same wizard. Check the properties of the components, and configure the slab properties so that you can also evaluate different materials, even if you do not need to do this at the moment. Use different surface elements and display these in the plan. As a result, you can quickly ­create a clear plan of the external facilities without having to create other elements.

■■6.4 SmartParts for furniture New in version 2012

Chapter 10, SmartParts, provides a detailed description of SmartParts. For this reason, the description here is limited to a comparison with other objects and the use of finished SmartParts in the SmartParts wizard, which was installed with the demo data, as well as the options this contains.

6.4 SmartParts for furniture 307

6.4.1 Comparison of symbols – smart symbols – SmartParts In addition to the simple symbols and smart symbols, you can use SmartParts in Allplan as of version 2012. A short description of symbols, smart symbols and SmartParts is provided below to illustrate the different terms and the areas of use. ƒƒ Symbols are stored in the symbol catalog and contain simple and complex geometries that can be inserted when you place objects. After placement, all elements are indivi­ dually available on the drawing file as they were created. Main area of use: Furniture in 2D and 3D, templates for details, legends and similar items. ƒƒ Smart symbols are stored in the smart symbol catalog and have additional properties, such as consideration of finish surfaces, areas that remain the same during resizing (see window), different displays for scales and/or drawing types, and can be analyzed. The geometries in smart symbols are connected, meaning that one smart symbol is one object. Main area of use: Windows and doors, more complex equipment objects, fitting objects for analyses, such as electrical installations. ƒƒ SmartParts are stored individually or in smart symbol catalogs. SmartParts can do practically everything smart symbols can. They also have added intelligence. For example, for a roof ladder it is possible to change the inclination of the ladder for levels that are always horizontal, or for a table with chairs, pull all the chairs away, define the number of chairs based on the table size, and much more. The SmartParts options are restricted only by the SmartPart size and the skills of the programmer. For a basic description, see chapter 10, SmartParts. Main area of use: SmartParts are of interest for practically all areas, both 2D and 3D, as long as standard objects can be used.

6.4.2 Example – furniture with SmartParts The floor plan is to be furnished with a few SmartParts. In addition to the SmartParts in the wizard, there are additional objects in the ETC directory of your Allplan installation, as well as a constantly growing range at http://www.allplan-connect.com.

Dining table with variable size and number of chairs A dining table with 6 places (longitudinal sides only) is to be positioned directly in front of the north window, next to the kitchen. The table contained in the wizard has the correct number of chairs, but the basic area is too small. ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS, drawing file 230 active ZZ Hide all layers assigned to elements that are in the way. ZZ Double click with the right mouse button to copy the table from the Furnishings – SmartParts wizard. Make sure you click the plan view, as the image is only used for display purposes. ZZ Use the functions in the dialog line to rotate the table and place it approximately as shown.

Open on a ­project-specific basis

308  6 Building model – finish

After placement, many of the lines disappear, and the table is displayed as in the wizard. ZZ Open the PROPERTIES of the table by double clicking the table with the left mouse button or via the shortcut menu. ZZ Remove the checkmark for TABLE ENDS WITH CHAIRS and confirm the new para­ meters with OK. The superfluous chairs are removed. The dimensions of the table can be directly changed, but should subsequently be changed using handles. Modify SmartPart using handles

ZZ Call SmartParts shortcut menu ZZ MODIFY SMARTPART USING HANDLES After you have called up the function, round points are displayed in blue. As soon as the crosshairs are over one of these points, the ­system displays the directions in which the handle can be pulled. ZZ Click the bottom left point. The points you see may differ from those shown here. In this case, select a point for which the “Length” text is displayed.

ZZ Drag the point by moving the crosshairs down until the tooltip displays the text “Length=1,700”. Click the point.

NOTE: In the dialog box, other basic conditions can be changed for this

table. The distance of the chairs from the table can also be set using the handle. Try out different settings.

6.5 Railing and façade  309

Add other objects Add other objects to the plan. You will see that the dialog boxes are not the same, and offer very different options. Always make sure you select the object itself, not the adjacent display.

■■6.5 Railing and façade The railing and façade components can be used to include a greater amount of building detail and to improve the appearance of the glass façade (up to now with reduced display). The two functions have a similar structure and require similar input steps.

Revised in V2011

6.5.1 Railing The railing function is used to create and edit linear, evenly subdivided construction elements. These include not only railings, but also fences, crash barriers and tracks, as well as cornices and façades.

6.5.1.1 Railing – fundamentals For each railing you want to create, you must first enter a path. This is symbolized by a red line with arrow in the railing properties in the overview graphic. The path is divided into equal fields. The elements are always arranged in the same way – be it at the division points or within a section.

Basic terms and components: ƒƒ Railing → Entire railing along a path ƒƒ Section → Section of a railing, enclosed by posts (division 1) ƒƒ Handrail (blue) → Elements extend across the entire length ƒƒ Post (red) → Elements that are repeated at the division points ƒƒ Field (green) → Fields are repeated between the posts ƒƒ Path → Base line of the railing, the geometry of which defines the outline of the railing. The path can have a bend and incline.

Railing

310  6 Building model – finish

Terms: ƒƒ A section with all its elements is called a field. ƒƒ The sum of the elements at a division point is referred to as a post. ƒƒ The handrail is defined by all the elements that stretch across the entire path. ƒƒ All the field, post, and handrail elements together are referred to as a railing style. ƒƒ The type of division is a division style. ƒƒ Sections with different division styles can be included in a railing. These sections are called regions.

6.5.1.2 Railing – functions The Railing toolbar contains all the functions you need to create and change a railing. The most important functions for editing railings are found in the Railing shortcut menu. All functions for editing railings require you to identify the railing in question, by clicking on either a path or a railing element.

Properties Open favorite file Delete railing Modify railing

Fold railing Modify path point Join railings

Split railing Delete regions Create regions

ƒƒPROPERTIES are used as in conventional components to define the properties of the components. The properties of the railing are displayed in the individual components. ƒƒ OPEN FAVORITE FILE imports a saved railing style. In the PROPERTIES dialog box, you can save favorites and assign info texts. ƒƒ DELETE RAILING removes all elements of a railing from the drawing file. Use this, instead of the normal DELETE function, to delete a railing. ƒƒ MODIFY RAILING is used to change existing railings. To make a change, you must click on either the railing path or an element of the railing. All properties of the railing can be changed. You can use the REGION button to toggle between the regions and e. g. change the values for OFFSET START and OFFSET END. ƒƒ FOLD RAILING adds further points to the railing path. ƒƒ MODIFY POINTS OF PATH is used to move existing path points when changes are made to the plan geometry. ƒƒ JOIN RAILINGS joins two railings that connect to each other, in order to form one railing. A railing with at least two regions is created as a result. The JOIN RAILING function can only be used to join railings of the same style. Therefore a pale fence cannot be joined to a balustrade. ƒƒ SPLIT RAILING splits a railing at the desired point to form two independent railings, which can then be edited separately. ƒƒ DELETE REGIONS deletes the region separation and connects them up. ƒƒ CREATE REGIONS separates one region of the railing into two regions at the desired point and inserts a post at the division point.

6.5 Railing and façade  311

ƒƒ MOVE POSTS changes the position of a post. If a post is moved to the end of a region, the OFFSET START or OFFSET END value changes. If you move a post within a region, the other divisions are reset and the end point is also moved. ƒƒ SETTINGS opens another dialog box in which you can make basic settings for the display, input, and creation of railings. ƒƒ REVERSE changes the position of the railing relative to the path. It is used in the same way as the REVERSE function for linear components such as the wall or strip foundation.

Move posts

Settings Reverse

Procedure for creating a railing hh RAILING hh PROPERTIES (1) Create railing style or select an existing railing style

Railing

hh Define the path of the railing using points (in the plan or perspective view) hh If necessary → Define the division (2) etc. for the region and lock with Region (3) hh Conclude input of the railing with or Apply (4)

6.5.2 Façade Façades can either be created individually in each story or (better for airy spaces across several stories) using a complete building height. The height can be set in the plan. If a façade is created across several stories, it makes sense to supplement the display in the upper stories in 2D so that you do not create any duplicate components (see also section 5.7.4, Displaying the stair across stories). ƒƒ FACADE is used to create façades of any shape. You can enter free forms via the plan view, in elevation or perspective view, or copy 3D surfaces or objects as the basic shape. All segments are variable. The created components can ONLY be changed and/or supplemented/deleted using the functions available in the Facade toolbar and Facade shortcut menu. After you call up the function, the entry of a new linear façade is enabled by default. A façade with the same settings as the previous façade can therefore be created immediately without you needing to define it further.

Revised in V2011

Facade

312  6 Building model – finish

General functions Match all Retrieve facade ­favorite

ƒƒ MATCH ALL copies all the properties except the geometry from an existing façade. ƒƒ RETRIEVE FACADE FAVORITES opens the file selection for loading a saved façade favorite.

1 – Create ƒƒ SCHEME SETTINGS is used to define repetitive (periodic) or exact (scaled) arrangements of façades. ƒƒ OBJECT LAYOUT SETTINGS is used to define repetitive components of the façade. You can define opening elements, canopies, or special edges, for example. ƒƒ SUBDIVISION SETTINGS enables you to subdivide the façade into practically any fields. ƒƒ OBJECT DEFINITIONS displays three tabs, in which you can define and/or change the components of the façade. ƒƒ Façade path ƒƒ FACADE WALL enables you to extrude the entered path to a linear façade. ƒƒ FACADE FACE enables you to enter an area façade. ƒƒ STRAIGHT COMPONENT, CURVED COMPONENT, POLYLINE-BASED COMPONENT, SPLINE-BASED COMPONENT are used to define the shape of the façade region you want to enter. You can alternate as required between regions with different settings. ƒƒ CURVE NUMBER When you enter a path, the current curve number is displayed here. The façade is given several regions, which you can select here. ƒƒ REVERSE is used to turn the offset direction of the façade via the path/area in a similar way to the linear components. ƒƒ HEIGHT is used to enter the (extrusion) height of the path. ƒƒ ANGLE is used to enter the (extrusion) angle of the path. In the case of a linear façade, 90° is perpendicular. ƒƒ FINISH CURVE finishes a curve during point input and starts a new curve. The individual curves of a path can have different heights and angles. You can change the curve type at any time (even while entering points) until you close a region.

2 – Modify ƒƒ MODIFY is used to change existing façades. After you have activated the façade, it is displayed in the preview and you can make changes. ƒƒ MODIFY POINTS OF CURVES/PATH is used to move path points of the façade. It works in the same way as Modify Points. You exit the function by clicking on Apply or Cancel. ƒƒ ADD POINTS TO CURVE adds points to the path. It works in the same way as Fold Line. You exit the function by clicking on Apply or Cancel. ƒƒ MODIFY LOWER/UPPER HEIGHT enables you to make changes to the height of individual path points. If you make changes to the lower points, the offset of the upper ones

6.5 Railing and façade  313

is kept; if you make changes to the upper points, the position of the lower ones remains the same, and the offset of the points changes. At fold points, both façade regions can be changed independently. You exit the function by clicking on Apply or Cancel.

3 – Assign (layout functions) ƒƒ ASSIGN OBJECT inserts an object into an existing façade. ƒƒ ASSIGN EDGE LAYOUT changes the edges in an existing façade field. ƒƒ ASSIGN COMBINING OF FIELDS combines an existing façade field with another one (two fields combined to form one). ƒƒ ASSIGN SUBDIVISION subdivides an existing façade field again.

4 – Convert 3D object to façade ƒƒ OPTIONS opens the OPTIONS dialog box, in which further settings can be made for creating the façade. ƒƒ CONVERT 3D OBJECT TO FACADE copies an existing 3D object as a façade surface. The 3D object does not have to be closed (connected 3D areas). ƒƒ CONVERT 3D OBJECT TO FACADE AND SUBDIVIDE FACADE copies an existing 3D surface as a façade surface and permits graphical subdivision. ƒƒ CONVERT FACADE TO 3D OBJECT converts façades to 3D objects or 3D surfaces. The geometry of the 3D object can be changed using appropriate functions.

6.5.3 3D modeling – basic functions Many façades, façade elements and individual parts for special railing elements are based on custom 3D shapes created with the 3D Modeling module. A few of the functions that could be of help to you in these tasks are described below. ƒƒ 3D LINE creates lines in the room (3D lines). ƒƒ RECTANGULAR 3D SURFACE is used to create rectangular 3D surfaces that are parallel to the coordinates plane and positioned anywhere in the room. ƒƒ You can create two types of BOX. Boxes can be parallel to the coordinates plane that lie flat on the drawing surface or work plane, or they can be positioned anywhere in the room. ƒƒ PLANAR POLYGONAL 3D SURFACE creates planar 3D polygonal surfaces from existing closed 3D polylines or through the entry of new boundary lines. ƒƒ You can create two types of CYLINDER. Cylinders can be parallel to the coordinates plane that lie flat on the drawing surface or work plane, or they can be positioned anywhere in the room. The base of the cylinder is approximated by a regular polygon. ƒƒ SPHERE allows you to create spherical objects that are either divided like a globe ­(rectangles, and triangles at the pole) or divided into triangles. ƒƒ You can use the CONE/PYRAMID tool to create a pyramid-like solid on a planar surface. If you use a regular polygon with the same number of edges for the base, a conical solid is obtained.

3D modeling – group; additional ­modules 3D line Rectangular 3D ­surface Box

Planar polygonal 3D surfaces Cylinder

Sphere Cone/pyramid

314  6 Building model – finish

Polyline sweep solid

Slice Parallel lines Parallel surfaces

ƒƒ POLYLINE SWEEP SOLID creates a solid from an outline and a path. The path should be continuous and may not include any breaks or branches. You can also use a 3D surface for the path. The path can be open or closed and does not have to be planar. ƒƒ SLICE separates the 3D solid (3D surface) at any plane, which is to be defined using three points. ƒƒ PARALLEL LINES creates parallel 3D lines from 3D elements (edges of solids and surfaces and 3D lines). ƒƒ PARALLEL SURFACES creates parallel surfaces on the basis of existing surfaces. NOTE: In the functions below, solids or 3D surfaces must exist. The format

properties of the first active element are used as the basis for the properties of the final object. Merge solids Create volume from intersection Subtract and ­remove solid Subtract and retain solid Remove common volume Create 3rd solid from common volume of 2 solids 2D entities to 3D Convert elements Copy, convert ­elements across ­drawing files Delete surfaces

ƒƒ MERGE SOLIDS merges several 3D solids or several 3D surfaces to form a single 3D element. You can also create a volume solid from 3D surfaces (e. g. a box based on six 3D surfaces). ƒƒ CREATE VOLUME FROM INTERSECTION/REMOVE COMMON VOLUME/SUBTRACT AND RETAIN/REMOVE COMMON VOLUME/CREATE 3RD SOLID FROM COMMON VOLUME OF 2 SOLIDS are Boolean operations for intersecting solids. Depending on the

function, you can select several solids. If solids are split and result in individual, independent volumes, an additional prompt is displayed asking whether these are to be connected or completely separated. ƒƒ CONVERT 2D ELEMENTS TO 3D, CONVERT ELEMENTS and COPY, CONVERT ELEMENTS ACROSS DRAWING FILES are used to convert elements from/to 2D or 3D and/or convert architectural components. Different options are available depending on the function. ƒƒ You can use DELETE SURFACES to delete surfaces in 3D solids. The resulting form then consists of connected surfaces and is e. g. ideally suited as a terrain and/or the basis for façades. If you add the missing surface with a new 3D surface and merge these surfaces, you have a closed volumetric solid again.

6.5.4 Example – stair and gallery railing In preparation for the railing that is to run from the gallery to the bottom of the stair in a single piece, you must modify the stair so that there is no stringer or handrail. The position of the treads should remain unchanged. The stringer and handrail are developed from the railing.

6.5 Railing and façade  315

Create railing for gallery and stair ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS, drawing file 240 current, drawing files 230 and 231 open in reference mode ZZ RETRIEVE DISPLAY FAVORITES → In the FAVORITES – PROJECT folder Select Insert_railing.bdfa and confirm.

Open on a project-specific basis Retrieve display ­favorite

NOTE: In the Insert_railing.bdfa display favorites, a plot set is used in

which many layers are hidden. Alternatively, you can also restrict the visible layers until only the slab and stair are visible.

ZZ 3 VIEWPORTS – FRONT LEFT ISOMETRIC VIEW ZZ RAILING or copy component from the wizard ZZ RETRIEVE RAILING FAVORITES FAVORITES – PROJECT

Select railing_gallery_stairs.rds and OPEN (not necessary if you transfer the properties from the wizard, component 01) ZZ FORMAT PROPERTIES LAYER (AR_RAIL) The basic path of the railing is at finished floor height. For this reason, enter a Z value of 16 cm for the first two points of the railing. The walls are also hidden to provide a better overview. However, the start of the railing should coincide with the inner edge of the brick wall.

3 viewports Railing

316  6 Building model – finish

ZZ Enter the path of the railing: From the first point (1), the starting point of the railing is 16 cm away in direction Z and 24 cm in direction Y. The second point (2) of the railing is 16 cm over the corner point (bridge). The remaining points are on the last step rear right (3) and front right (4) and the first step bottom right (5). ZZ After point 5, conclude entry of the railing with or APPLY. Create the other railings in the same way; one on the other side of the stair, and the third railing as a guardrail on the back of the walkway.

In drawing file 250 – Story 02 – top floor model, a sheet covering is also needed for the parapet, and in drawing file 251 – floor slab/roof over story 02, gutters are missing. Both components can be created with the RAILING function. You can find templates for these components in the Railing and Facade wizard or stored as a favorite in the project. Note the info text of the favorites or the text explanations for use in the wizard. Use the gutter or parapet sheet to create your own sheet finishes e. g. for the ridge or verge.

6.5.5 Example – façade of the glass structure As a template for the façade, you should use two merged 3D surfaces, which are created using the functions of the 3D Modeling module. As this module is not included in all the available packages, the two basic shapes are stored in the Railing and Facade wizard. You can select the two 3D surfaces in the wizard and copy them to the correct place in your drawing file via the Clipboard. You may need to move the surfaces to the correct place. The façade should be prepared in a separate drawing file in order to have as few disruptive elements as possible during design. Rename drawing file 242 as Glass facade glass structure, and assign the glass structure roofscape to the drawing file. You can use the default planes of the lower floor. The geometry should be copied from the plane.

6.5 Railing and façade  317

Preparation of the façade with 3D surfaces The points that you need for the 3D surfaces of the façade are not exactly at the points of the visible plane. The surface should be moved inwards left and right by 3 cm, and the bottom edge should extend down to Z coordinate 0.00. ZZ Rectangular 3D Surface ZZ Input options → Select BASED ON BASE LINE

Rectangular 3D ­surface

Points 1–2 and 4–5 each form the base line for the rectangle to be created. ZZ Create first surface: Track the left top corner point of the plane and enter 3 cm offset in X direction (1). Track the top right corner point and enter 3 cm offset in negative X direction (2). Click on the eaves (3) of the plane ZZ Create second surface: Click on left corner point of the first surface (4), click on right corner point of first surface (5). Track the right corner point of first surface (6) and enter an offset of 5.91 m downward (i. e. −5.91). The two surfaces for the front (south) part of the glass façade have been created. Create the surfaces for the rear (north) part in the same way. ZZ MERGE SOLIDS ZZ Click on the front vertical 3D surface, then the angled 3D surface. Both surfaces are merged to form one element. Also merge the rear two 3D surfaces. As an alternative to recreating the two surfaces, you can insert the elements from the wizard via the Clipboard. Align the 3D surfaces so that the middle of the ridge line is centered on the corresponding line of the planes.

Merge solids

318  6 Building model – finish

Creating the façade Facade

ZZ FACADE or copy component from the wizard ZZ 3 VIEWPORTS – FRONT LEFT ISOMETRIC VIEW

ZZ CONVERT 3D OBJECT TO FACADE ZZ Click on front 3D surface The roof AND wall area must be in red, otherwise the surfaces have not yet been merged correctly. ZZ Check the direction of the façade. The arrow points outwards. If the arrow is pointing downwards, you must use the REVERSE button. ZZ Click APPLY to conclude input of the first façade surface. Create the rear façade in the same way.

The two façade parts are already subdivided. You can use the various façade functions to subdivide them differently.

Insert front door in façade The front door as a double-leaf element should be inserted in the middle of the front façade. For this, you must first merge the two middle fields and insert a door. A front door, like glass fields, and panels, is a surface object. ZZ Open façade shortcut menu ASSIGN COMBINING OF FIELDS

ZZ Click on one of the two grab points on the central post ZZ Apply to conclude input

6.5 Railing and façade  319

The two fields are merged. ZZ Open façade shortcut menu again ASSIGN OBJECT ZZ OBJECT LAYOUT → Surface objects

ZZ Click on center of field

ZZ Select 011 DOUBLE-LEAF GLASS DOOR and confirm your selection ZZ Click on APPLY to conclude input

The door is created and inserted. Insert folding wings in the small fields of the front and rear façade. Try out the button on the right next to Address. You can use this button to automatically insert elements in strips of the façade. You can access fields directly via the Address input line. It is possible, for example, to insert a folding wing in every second field, and much more. To find out more, read the relevant information in the help file.

Add a canopy to the façade The canopy above the front door is a linear object. The procedure for inserting it is almost the same as that described above. ZZ Open façade shortcut menu again ASSIGN OBJECT ZZ OBJECT LAYOUT → Line objects

ZZ Click on the midpoint of the transom above the field left of the front doors

ZZ Select 000 MULLION/TRANSOM  and 002 CANOPY, select the ADD option and addressing for the entire strip. ZZ Confirm your entries. ZZ APPLY to conclude input This creates the canopy.

320  6 Building model – finish

NOTE: If both components are not selected at this point, one component

is replaced by the other, which can also produce good effects.

Remove the façade walls and glass roof from the drawing files of the lower floor and upper floor (including the drawing files with the slab). Then use COPY, MOVE ELEMENTS BETWEEN DOCUMENTS to copy the façade to the lower floor drawing file.

Copy, move elements between files Open on a project-specific basis

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS, drawing file 242 current, remaining drawing files open in neither edit nor reference mode! ZZ FILE → COPY, MOVE ELEMENTS BETWEEN DOCUMENTS

ZZ ACROSS DOCUMENTS → SELECT WITH BUILDING STRUCTURE ZZ Select the lower floor drawing file, number 240, as the target drawing file and confirm your selection. ZZ Respond with YES to the confirmation prompt (drawing file 240 is in use, and elements should be copied to it) ZZ Select both façade parts. The data is copied. In the lower floor, add the display of the glass façade with lines. The best way to copy the properties of the lines is from the Layers wizard. This contains displays that are ideal for cases such as this. In the façade properties, you can define the section height. Try out different section heights to get the best display.

6.6 Example – building model result – finish 321

■■6.6 Example – building model result – finish You can find further examples as PDF files in the project folder of the following project: ƒƒ Project Allplan 2012 Practical Manual or on the website ƒƒ http://www.zeichenatelier.com/Allplan2012

7

Views, sections, and lists

■■7.1 Terms and basic functions ƒƒ SOURCE DRAWING FILES are all drawing files that are to be used as the basis for the hidden-line image of a view or section or as the basis for analyzing the model with lists. You must select all drawing files that contain 3D geometries and that are to be displayed or analyzed. To avoid errors, use the same settings as far as possible for the source ­drawing files of a building. ƒƒ LAYER SETTING, PLOT SET is used to configure the layers used to calculate views, ­sections, and lists. NOTE: Plot sets can also be used in the layout and when editing drawing

files. Plot sets can also be accessed via the display favorites.

ƒƒ ACTIVATE SOURCE DRAWING FILES IN BUILDING STRUCTURE can be found in the shortcut menus of the drawing files to which you have assigned source drawing files, and of lists. You can use this function to quickly activate all drawing files that are to be used as the basis for calculation and thus check whether all the necessary drawing files have been defined as the source. If you store the current selection as a favorite before executing the ACTIVATE SOURCE DRAWING FILES IN BUILDING STRUCTURE function, you can retrieve the selection (project level shortcut menu, BUILDING STRUCTURE tab, BUILDING STRUCTURE area).

324  7 Views, sections, and lists

■■7.2 Derived objects – views and sections Allplan offers two different types of sections and views. This document only deals in detail with the derivation of 2D elements from the model.

Hidden-line image for 3D elements In a hidden-line image, a 2D image of the 3D elements is created that is not directly connected to the original. This means that you can add to and change the view at any time without having to worry about the model. For example an employee can complete the views and sections while you are still working in the model (e. g. creating elements such as the story). The elements created in a hidden-line image retain their layer assignment (if desired). You can therefore easily check which lines come from which components.

Associative views Associative views create an image, either in the drawing file of the 3D elements or in a separate drawing file. This image remains connected with the 3D elements. If a component is deleted or moved in an associative view, this directly affects the building. The components, not a floating 2D representation, are changed.

7.2.1 Views and sections – building structure Views and sections can be created very easily in the area of objects derived from the building structure. You only need to assign source drawing files to a drawing file in the area of objects derived from the building structure, make settings for the hidden-line image, and select the view or section. The calculation procedure and any updates are carried out semi-automatically. The user can therefore determine whether and when data is to be re-generated.

7.2.2 Individual steps for views and sections For a new view or section, you must carry out four steps to create the basic data and a fifth step to complete the procedure. As soon as the definitions have been configured and an updated calculation is required, you merely need to update the drawing file (or structural levels with subordinate level drawing files).

7.2 Derived objects – views and sections 325

Step 1 – define source drawing files hh Shortcut menu of a drawing file below a View/Section structural level hh SOURCE DRAWING FILES FOR VIEW SOURCE DRAWING FILES FOR SECTION hh If necessary, hide EMPTY DRAWING FILES to improve the overview

hh Activate all drawing files with 3D geometries; and also the section lines drawing file (important for sections) hh Confirm selection The selected drawing file is given the target icon to indicate that source drawing files were defined for this drawing file.

Step 2 – layer setting, plot set hh Shortcut menu of a view/section hh LAYER SETTING, PLOT SET

hh USE PLOT SET → e. g. 3D geometries (without canceling) Plot sets can be created in layer management and also imported from other projects.

326  7 Views, sections, and lists

NOTE: During drawing file editing, plot sets can be defined in the Set Layer

(direct) dialog box or accessed via the display favorites (indirect).

Step 3 – settings for the hidden-line image A number of initial settings can be made to control the conversion of 3D components to 2D geometries. For example, you can define the angle as of which adjacent edges are to be eliminated, and much more. You can find an overview of the various options in section 7.4, Views, sections, and lists – editing drawing files. hh Shortcut menu of a view/section hh VIEW SETTINGS SECTION SETTINGS

hh You can use the SETTINGS FOR HIDDEN LINE IMAGES dialog box to define how components and their properties are to be translated into a 2D display. For sections, you must also make SPECIAL SETTINGS for the architectural section.

Step 4 – start calculation for first time The first calculation of a view or section is started automatically after you select the view or section. In the case of views, you can choose between the standard views and a 3D view. In the case of sections, all defined section lines of all source drawing files are displayed. hh Shortcut menu of a view/section hh GENERATE VIEW/GENERATE SECTION hh Select the view/section for the calculation

hh After selection, the calculation is started immediately and the drawing file is displayed as in use.

7.2 Derived objects – views and sections 327

NOTE: If the drawing file does not yet have a name, a name is proposed

and entered showing you which view or section was calculated. Existing data in the drawing file is overwritten.

Step 5 – supplement views and section You should not create any further data in a drawing file to which source drawing files are assigned, because a recalculation will overwrite this data. Additions (texts, dimension lines, figures, trees etc.) should always be created in an empty drawing file, with the drawing file with the relevant view (section) open in the background (in reference mode). Alternatively, you can copy the view or section and remove the source drawing files from the copy. If changes are made, you can then perform a recalculation across all views and sections at any time. Changes must be manually transferred to the finished drawing.

Additional step to back up the results The ideal case is if the model for views was created so well that nothing needs to be changed on the calculation drawing file. In the case of sections, this situation can rarely be achieved. For this reason, you should copy the calculation or lock the new calculation. hh Shortcut menu of a view/section hh LOCK UPDATE

New in V2011

The drawing file is ignored in subsequent updates of entire structural levels or the whole project. In the shortcut menu of the drawing file, a checkmark is also set for LOCK UPDATE and the UPDATE CALCULATION RESULT is grayed out.

Source drawing files – save selection You can use the SAVE CURRENT SELECTION AS FAVORITE and LOAD FAVORITE function to save the drawing file selection for the calculation of views, sections, and lists. Depending on the setting, the data is saved in a personal or general subfolder of the project’s BIM directory and is therefore directly or indirectly available to all the project users.

Source drawing files for several views and/or sections You can simultaneously select all drawing files in which you want to calculate views and sections, and define the source files for all selected drawing files. As a result, all views and sections will be created from the same data.

Save current ­selection as favorite Load favorite

328  7 Views, sections, and lists

7.2.3 Architectural section Section

To create a section, Allplan needs a section line to be defined in one of the source drawing files. A section line specifies the section that is to be used in the hidden-line image. You can make the following settings in the PROPERTIES of the section: ƒƒ TYPE defines the section type. Vertical section is the usual clipping path, which can be moved in plan view, but cannot be folded. HORIZONTAL SECTION FROM ABOVE and HORIZONTAL SECTION FROM BELOW are used pri­ marily to display the slabs. ƒƒ DISPLAY OF CLIPPING PATH defines whether and how the section line is displayed in plan view and whether direction symbols should be placed. A section line with a constructionline format design is always placed; the DISPLAY SECTION OBJECT (AS CONSTRUCTION LINES) option can be used to surround the

complete area to be displayed with a rectangle in construction-line format. ƒƒ FORMAT PROPERTIES define the settings that should be used to create the section line in plan view. If the display is connected to layers (FROM LAYER active), the individual properties cannot be selected. ƒƒ LABEL specifies the name of the clipping path, which is to be displayed on both sides of the section line above the direction symbol. Text parameters can be used to set the font etc. If you fail to enter a name while creating a section line, the system asks you to enter one when you have finished entering the section line. ƒƒ HEIGHT OF SECTION OBJECT enables you to enter the height to be displayed in the section. The values for top and bottom level are based on ±0.00. You always enter a SECTION in the following steps: Section

hh SECTION hh PROPERTIES ƒƒ Select the section type

7.2 Derived objects – views and sections 329

ƒƒ Define the display properties of the section line ƒƒ Define the top level and bottom level of the section ƒƒ Confirm settings hh Enter the first point of the clipping line in plan view hh Enter another point in plan view (direction of the section is locked with the second point) hh Conclude input of the section line with or enter more points hh Enter the depth of the section The depth specifies how remote elements are to be displayed. NOTE: For each further point in the section line, the end point of the offset

must be specified. The direction is specified by the section line itself and cannot be changed.

7.2.4 Hidden-line image settings

You can define the settings individually for each view and each section. You can save ­settings for different application scenarios in the favorites. SURFACE ELEMENTS area

ƒƒ The NO SURFACE ELEMENTS option specifies that the result is to be created as a pure line drawing without surface elements.

330  7 Views, sections, and lists

ƒƒ The ONLY FILLS FROM COLORS option means that all view surfaces are displayed with a fill. The fill colors are derived from the element colors or surface colors of the corresponding 3D elements (if surfaces are assigned). Any textures are ignored. ƒƒ The CREATE BITMAPS FROM TEXTURES, FILLS FROM COLORS option mean that all view surfaces are either shown with fills or, if a texture is defined for the 3D element, as a bitmap. If a texture was not assigned to the component, the element color or surface color is used. Bitmaps are only resized (cropped) correctly in elevation and isometric views. You can also achieve realistic images in perspective views if you use specific surfaces such as sand, plaster etc. ƒƒ The CONSIDER TRANSPARENCY option defines that areas that were assigned a transparent surface are created transparently (fill with transparency), so that covered areas are visible. ƒƒ SURFACES . . . opens the dialog box for defining (colors of) surfaces, in which element colors can be assigned different colors, which are then used in hidden line images (instead of the element colors). ADJACENT EDGES area

ƒƒ The ADJACENT EDGES option enables you to specify an angle up to which surfaces are merged in order to make curves appear smoother. Setting a larger angle causes curves to appear as a silhouette. ADJACENT EDGES FOR ARCHIT. COMPONENTS area

The options can only be deactivated if REMOVE ADJACENT EDGES was activated. Otherwise, both options are enabled by default. ƒƒ The DISPLAY ADJACENT EDGES BETWEEN DIFFERENT SURFACE ELEMENTS option means that if you change the surface elements (e. g. hatching, pattern, fill), the adjacent edges are displayed, e. g. in the transition between wall and slab in the section. ƒƒ The DISPLAY ADJACENT EDGES FOR ROUND COMPONENTS (WALL, COLUMN, CHIMNEY) option means that the adjacent edges are displayed for round components. This option is usually disabled, so that round components are displayed in views without adjacent edge lines. FORMAT SETTINGS area

ƒƒ DISPLAY EDGES UNIFORMLY,  DISPLAY HIDDEN EDGES controls whether view edges and/or hidden edges are to be displayed, and if so, with which format settings. If nothing is selected, all visible edges are calculated with the settings of the original components. If the LAYER option is active, all edges of the relevant type are created on the defined layer. SPECIAL SETTINGS area

ƒƒ REFERENCE SCALE FOR CALCULATION defines the scale for the calculation. This is only relevant if smart symbols with different 3D foils were used for different scale ranges. The option is only available if you call the settings via the building structure. If a hidden-line image is started at drawing file level, the current scale is used.

7.2 Derived objects – views and sections 331

ƒƒ FOR ARCHITECTURAL SECTIONS provides further settings specially for architectural sections.

ƒƒ DISPLAY IN SECTIONS area ƒƒ You can assign surface elements such as hatching, pattern or fill to the individual layers of floors and ceilings with the FLOOR, CEILING and ROOM functions on the FINISH tab. You can configure the program to display floors and ceilings with ­multiple layers in sections. The SHOW CEILINGS/SHOW FLOORS option defines whether ceilings and/or floors are displayed. You can use MIN. TOTAL THICKNESS to define whether the ceiling covering, for example, is to be displayed with a small layer thickness. ƒƒ The SHOW EACH LAYER/SHOW ENTIRE STRUCTURE ONLY option defines whether each individual layer is to be displayed, or only the entire structure of the finishing surfaces. You can use MIN. THICKNESS PER LAYER to remove very thin finish layers from the display. In the display, the layers ignored here are added to the adjacent thicker layers. ƒƒ The APPLY SURFACE ELEMENTS TO FINISHING SURFACES option means that, in addition to the separating lines of the layers of the finish, the finishing surfaces are displayed in the section with the hatching, pattern, or fill. The setting defined in the room finish is used here. ƒƒ The APPLY THICK LINE AROUND INTERSECTED COMPONENTS option means that components given a surface element in your definition are given a thick-line border. Roof covering, rafters, other timber elements or smart symbols are not taken into consideration. Edges of solids hidden by the newly created line are removed.  If the option is not selected, the edges of the solid are created with the format ­properties of the original components.

332  7 Views, sections, and lists

ƒƒ FORMAT SETTINGS area ƒƒ THICK BORDER, FINISH LINES defines the format settings used to display thick borders and finish lines if these were activated above.

Favorites in the hidden-line image dialog boxes Save current ­selection as favorite Load favorite New in V2011

In the SETTINGS FOR HIDDEN LINE IMAGES and ARCHITECTURAL HIDDEN LINE IMAGE dialog boxes, you can save favorites, which you can use at any time, even in other projects. Take advantage of the opportunity to enhance your settings with every project, view, and section.

7.2.5 Postprocessing of sections and views The created views and sections are not quite finished. The extent to which they are ­finished depends primarily on how good the model is, whether there are errors, inadequacies etc. In the case of sections, you also need to define how detailed the display should be. The display achieved is certainly sufficient for scale 1/200, and usually also for 1/100, but certainly not sufficient for a working drawing or detailed plan. Here, you need to continue drawing with normal 2D elements and refine the section. You should under no circumstances continue drawing without making further settings on the drawing files to which source drawing files have been assigned. There are two different methods (which can be combined) for continuing your work.

Option 1 Texts, dimension lines, figures etc. are created in the next empty drawing file. A view then always consists of two or three drawing files. You can update all calculations at any time if you remember that if changes are made to the building, the additional drawing files have to be corrected. The procedure is as follows (based on the example of the south view): hh Drawing file 261 with south view open in reference mode hh Drawing file 262 – south view additions open in edit mode hh Create texts, dimension lines etc. in drawing file 262 hh Create background graphics such as sky, roof surface color and façade color in drawing file 260

Option 2 Create a copy of every drawing file with the complete calculation result. If the drawing files in the building structure are copied, you must make sure that the setting for the source drawing files is also copied. You must protect the copy against future changes by locking it. In this copy, you can now enter all additions and redraw elements of the calculations. If there are changes to the model, you can update all original drawing files.

7.2 Derived objects – views and sections 333

Changes can be easily identified by opening the drawing file with the calculated view in reference mode in the background of the drawing file with the “finished” view. With a few steps, you can modify the drawings with Modify points and similar functions. The procedure is as follows (based on the example of section A): hh OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS → SELECT DRAWING FILE 281 hh SHORTCUT MENU → COPY hh SELECT STRUCTURAL LEVEL SECTION A-A → SHORTCUT MENU hh PASTE UNDER hh Paste from drawing file number → 282 → confirm hh SELECT DRAWING FILE 281 → SHORTCUT MENU

Open on a project-specific basis

hh LOCK UPDATE

hh Rename drawing file hh CREATE TEXTS, DIMENSION LINES ETC. IN DRAWING FILE 282 The procedure for changes is very similar to that in option 1. hh UPDATE SECTIONS AND VIEWS hh NEWLY CALCULATED DRAWING FILE IN REFERENCE MODE, FINISHED SECTION CURRENT

Make changes with Modify Points and similar functions.

7.2.6 Example – create views The next step in the exercise is to create the views using the building structure. You do not need an active drawing file to create views using the building structure. If a model was created, the subsequent steps for creating the views are carried out in the OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS, dialog box, BUILDING STRUCTURE tab, DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE area.

Create views In addition to creating the view, you should save as many settings as possible as favorites. ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ BUILDING STRUCTURE → DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE ZZ SELECT DRAWING FILE 261

Open on a project-specific basis Building structure

334  7 Views, sections, and lists

ZZ SHORTCUT MENU → SOURCE DRAWING FILES FOR VIEW

Select the drawing files: 200, 201, 202, 210 and 211, 220 and 221, 230 and 231, 240 and 241, as well as 250 and 251 (i.e. all drawing files that contain geometries of the building and external facilities, as well as the drawing file in which the section line is created) Save current ­selection as a favorite

ZZ SAVE CURRENT SELECTION AS A FAVORITE

ZZ FILE NAME → Views ZZ SAVE (SAVE dialog box is closed) ZZ Confirm selection NOTE: Saving favorites makes it easier to define further views, sections,

and lists. (Set storage location for building structure favorites: See section 3.2.1, Building structure/fileset structure, layout structure) ZZ SHORTCUT MENU DRAWING FILE 261 ZZ LAYER SETTING, PLOT SET ZZ USE PLOT SET 

3D geometries (without demolition) ZZ SHORTCUT MENU DRAWING FILE

Save favorite

261 ZZ SETTINGS FOR VIEW ZZ HIDDEN LINE SETTINGS ZZ SAVE FAVORITE ZZ Select FAVORITES – PROJECT → FILE NAME → Views ZZ SAVE (Save dialog box is closed)

ZZ Confirm settings ZZ SHORTCUT MENU DRAWING FILE 261 ZZ GENERATE VIEW  → FRONT, SOUTH ELEVATION The view is calculated, and the drawing file is automatically given the name Elevation South (result of hidden line image). Load favorite

Create the other three views in drawing files 266, 271 and 276 in the same way as the south view. To set the source drawing files, use the LOAD FAVORITE function in the SOURCE DRAWING FILES FOR VIEW dialog box and the favorites of the hidden line image settings.

7.2 Derived objects – views and sections 335

7.2.7 Example – section line In preparation for creating the sections derived from the building structure, you must create section lines. The section lines should be created in a separate drawing file so that they can be stored in every plan during layout assembly. A few drawing files of the ­building should be activated so that the section line can be adjusted correctly. You need more or fewer drawing files depending on the complexity and on congruent components in the stories. To set up the section lines, you should hide most of the layers with 2D information such as furniture and dimension lines so that on your first attempt, you do not snap any points that would cause a sloping section line.

Create section lines ZZ Switch the external facilities and the drawing files with 3D geometries of the buildings to ­reference mode and make drawing file 201 current. Rename the drawing file Section lines. ZZ CLIPPING PATH (or call up the function via the section line display in the wizard) ZZ Enter the PROPERTIES as shown ZZ Format settings: Layer (AR_SECT) ZZ SECTION IDENTIFIER → A ZZ TOP LEVEL → 8.800, BOTTOM LEVEL → −4.000 ZZ CONFIRM SETTINGS

Clipping path

336  7 Views, sections, and lists

ZZ Set the first point (1) on the left next to the lower terrace door. ZZ Set the second point (2) on the right next to the office terrace door (horizontal to the first point). ZZ To finish defining the section line, press . ZZ Enter the Depth/Viewing direction (3) in the floor plan. Create another section line that passes through the stair in the glass structure with the viewing direction to the left. Make sure that the points are outside the area that you want to represent in the section.

Activate section view in the design viewport For checking purposes, you can enable a section display in the animation windows and/ or design viewports at any time. This display is temporary and always based on one window. The following steps serve as an example only, and are the same as those that need to be carried out in a design viewport to get a section display for checking purposes there. 2 +1 animation ­window Section display

Hidden-line Image on/off Refresh

ZZ Activate all drawing files of the building including external facilities and section line. ZZ 2 +1 ANIMATION WINDOW ZZ Activate SECTION DISPLAY of the animation window ZZ Enter section identifier A in the dialog line, or click on the s­ ection line in plan view. ZZ Now activate section A bottom left for the design viewport. ZZ HIDDEN-LINE IMAGE ON → activate hidden-line image for design viewport ZZ Refresh → refresh file The section is shown including hatching and finishing surfaces etc.

7.2 Derived objects – views and sections 337

You can snap the points of the section in the design viewport. As soon as you change something in your plan, the changes are displayed in the other two viewports.

7.2.8 Example – create sections The sections are created in a similar way to views. For sections, however, settings also need to be made in the ARCHITECTURAL HIDDEN LINE IMAGE dialog box. When ­selecting the source drawing files, the saved setting for the views is used.

Create sections ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ BUILDING STRUCTURE → DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE ZZ SELECT DRAWING FILE 280 ZZ SHORTCUT MENU → SOURCE DRAWING FILES FOR SECTION ZZ LOAD FAVORITE ZZ Select and open file Elevations.xml. Confirm the selection. ZZ LAYER SETTING, PLOT SET USE PLOT SET → 3D geometries (without canceling) ZZ SHORTCUT MENU → SECTION SETTINGS ZZ LOAD FAVORITE ZZ Select FAVORITES – PROJECT → FILE NAME → Views → open ZZ Supplement the settings in order to display the DISPLAY ADJACENT EDGES BETWEEN DIFFERENT SURFACE ELEMENTS option.

ZZ Save the new settings as a favorite for sections. ZZ SPECIAL SETTINGS → ARCH . . . ZZ Change the settings as shown.

Open on a project-specific basis Building structure Load favorite

Load favorite

338  7 Views, sections, and lists

Also save these settings as a favorite. ZZ Confirm both dialogs. ZZ SHORTCUT MENU DRAWING FILE 280

ZZ GENERATE SELECTION In the dialog box, select SELECT CLIPPING PATH OR ENTER SECTION IDENTIFIER → A. The SELECT CLIPPING PATH OR ENTER SECTION IDENTIFIER dialog box displays all section identifiers with the number of the drawing file (DFno) in which the section line was created. Make sure that you do not distribute the section lines across several drawing files, rename them (by use), or delete them. If you change a clipping path, the section has to be re-generated. It is not enough to perform an update in this case. Also create section B.

7.2.9 Example – postprocess views and sections Only the section option is described in individual steps in the sample project. Alternatively, you can choose not to make a copy, open the calculation in reference mode, and create only the additional elements or, if you do not expect any changes, lock the drawing file with the calculated section for recalculations. All lines and surface elements created by the calculation, except view edges and hidden edges, have retained their layer assignment and in the case of plan-based drawing types

7.2 Derived objects – views and sections 339

are displayed immediately as in story editing. As a result, the display of slabs and sills is not ideal. For this reason, there are additional drawing types for sections (and details) derived from the model. These drawing types set the correct line displays for sill components and slabs.

Prepare views and sections ZZ Select drawing file 280 → SHORTCUT MENU → COPY ZZ Select STRUCTURAL LEVEL section A-A ZZ SHORTCUT MENU → PASTE UNDER . . . ZZ Insert from drawing file number: 281 ZZ Select drawing file 281 → SHORTCUT MENU → LOCK UPDATE ZZ Rename DRAWING FILE  Section: A Details ZZ DRAWING FILE 281 CURRENT

Elevation dimension lines The most important contents needed for sections are elevations for the floor, slab, etc.

Elevation

ZZ ELEVATION (component 21–23) ZZ REFERENCE POINT SYMBOL VERTICALLY UPWARDS ZZ PROPERTIES DIMENSION TEXT TAB

Define the other properties as desired and confirm. ZZ In plan view, enter the point through which the dimension line is to pass. NOTE: For elevation dimension lines, the system does not create a visible

line here, only a reference for the freely definable elevation.

ZZ Enter the top level of the finished floor of the lower floor as the REFERENCE POINT – base value = 0.000 ZZ Place elevation For each elevation you place, you can define which symbol the elevation should have. If possible, create only one elevation line for each section or view with the REFERENCE POINT SYMBOL option. As a result, all elevations are related and the height elevations cannot be moved by accident.

Rule for dimension lines and elevations:

340  7 Views, sections, and lists

Special texts When naming views, sections and important texts, it may make sense for the text to always be in the same area of the drawing and get larger or smaller with it. Horizontal text Properties

ZZ HORIZONTAL TEXT, FORMAT SETTINGS ZZ Enter the DROP-IN POINT (e. g. in the section in the upper floor of the left building object) ZZ Enter text Top line text height: 5 Bottom line text height 2.5 ZZ Conclude text input and exit the tool ZZ Select the newly created text ZZ PROPERTIES palette ZZ CONSTANT SIZE → deactivate If the scale is changed, the changed text always occupies the same area. As a result, you can change the scale without the texts covering up drawing content.

Defaults for texts

7.3 Derived objects – lists 341

Coordination relationship, model and conversion If you measure the coordinates of a ridge point, for example, in the model, a Z coordinate of Z = 7.312 is displayed. If you measure the corresponding point in the section or elevation, you get value 0.00 for Z, and Y = 8.362 for the Y coordinate, which is the same as the previously measured Z coordinate. You can therefore measure a coordinate at any time in your views and sections and get the value that this point should have in the model. This is important e. g. if you need to extend the fireplace to a particular height.

Ridge model coordinates

Ridge section coordinates

■■7.3 Derived objects – lists 7.3.1 Lists and Reports – fundamentals Lists and reports enable you to evaluate all objects and components in Allplan and print them out or save them as a file for use in other programs (Allplan BCM, Excel). Many different lists and reports are available, which serve different purposes. You can use the Lists module to create your own lists and/or convert existing ones into reports. Depending on the list type or report, only certain component types and/or components with certain attributes or properties are evaluated. Additional parameters are also available for selection, e. g. for the area calculation, which you can use to control the evaluation.

Reports and lists With Allplan 2012, practically all the old lists have been converted into reports. In some cases, entire list areas have been merged to create a few new reports, in order to standardize the output. For many reports, new filter options have been created and a function implemented that allows you to select a component displayed in the report in the drawing file and zoom in on it. The descriptions here are based on both output options. We have largely avoided duplicate naming and the printout/layout options are only described for reports. TIP: Use reports where possible, because the lists will no longer be offered

in one of the future versions. At http://www.allplan-connect.com you will find brief instructions on how to generate your own reports and extend existing ones.

342  7 Views, sections, and lists

7.3.2 Lists – building structure The structural levels for lists are found under the building structure derivations on the BUILDING STRUCTURE tab. A general description of the structural levels in this area can be found in chapter 2.3.3.4, Building structure tab. For each analysis required during the planning process, you can create lists (list structural level) for a wide variety of analyses, split them into structural levels, and output them again after changes have been made to the model. The lists in the building structure are not temporarily stored, and instead are created anew and therefore always reflect the current status of the assigned source drawing files. Drawing files cannot be assigned in the list area. A single list contains all the information needed to evaluate the source drawing files.

Individual steps for lists The method for creating and outputting reports via the building structure lists is organized in the same way as the generation of views and sections. Here, too, there are four steps that have to be carried out in sequence.

Step 1 – create list hh Shortcut menu of a LISTS structural level hh INSERT STRUCTURAL LEVEL → LIST

Step 2 – define source drawing files hh Shortcut menu of a LIST hh SOURCE DRAWING FILES FOR LIST hh Activate all drawing files to be used as the basis for the list hh Confirm selection

Step 3 – layer setting, plot set hh Shortcut menu of a list hh LAYER SETTING, PLOT SET hh USE PLOT SET 
→ e. g. all 3D geometries

Step 4 – list settings hh Shortcut menu of a list hh SELECT LIST AND SETTINGS hh Select list and output mode

7.3 Derived objects – lists 343

Step 5 – create list – create single list hh Shortcut menu of a list hh CREATE LIST hh Depending on the settings, the list is opened or saved as a file with the specified name.

Step 6 – create list – create several lists (stack lists) hh Shortcut menu of a structural level that contains lists. hh CREATE STACK LISTS hh All lists are displayed on the screen or saved as a file depending on the settings and/or settings of the list.

7.3.3 Select list and settings (BS) You use SELECT LIST AND SETTINGS to define which list is to be used for evaluation and, for quantity lists, on which medium the report is to be output.

SELECT LIST area

ƒƒ The GENERAL QUANTITY LISTS option enables you to access all the lists that are available. You use this option to generate lists that are intended for further processing in Allplan BCM, for example. ƒƒ The FLOOR AREA SCHEDULES option also enables you to define the height division and further settings via the REPORT, LIST dialog box. If, in the REPORT, LIST dialog box, you go to LIST . . ., only the lists prepared for floor areas, DIN277 output, and building applications are available for selection.

344  7 Views, sections, and lists

OUTPUT area

ƒƒ SCREEN/PRINTER creates the list and displays it in a new window on the screen. In the palette on the left edge of the report, you can change various settings before printing out. ƒƒ FILE/TRANSFER TO ALLPLAN BCM creates a transfer file in the specified path with the selected name. ƒƒ FILE FOR SUBSEQUENT PROGRAM creates a file, which is opened by the selected program directly after creation. NOTE: The bottom two options are only available for the old lists. Reports

cannot be stored directly.

7.3.4 Selection dialog boxes and settings for reports and lists 7.3.4.1 Selection – reports

You can use the REPORT, LIST dialog box to search for the list you want and start calculation by choosing OPEN. ƒƒ Region 1: Here you select the path from which the report is to be selected. All reports available in the standard installation are stored in a folder structure under STANDARD. Custom reports available office-wide are stored under OFFICE. ƒƒ Region 2: The buttons in region 2 are only activated for lists that access these additional settings. For more information on the individual settings, see section 7.3.4.4, Settings for area and room analyses.

7.3 Derived objects – lists 345

ƒƒ Region 3: OPEN either expands the selected folder or, if a report is selected, triggers calculation and displays the report on the screen. CANCEL closes the dialog box. LIST . . . opens the list selection for old lists. ƒƒ All folders and lists of the selected path are displayed in the selection field. Navigation is the same as that in Windows Explorer.

7.3.4.2 Selection – lists The list selection for “old” lists is only displayed if LIST . . . is selected bottom right via Output schedules. A warning is displayed stating that these lists/schedules will not be available in a future version of Allplan, or that the reports can completely replace the old lists. ƒƒ FOLDER: The Default folder contains all lists that are available in the standard installation of Allplan, the Office folder contains user-defined lists. ƒƒ In FILE, select the type of list. Each file number contains a selection of defined lists, from which you can select one for output.

�

ƒƒ The PRINT FROM PAGE NO. option defines the page number at which the list is to start. The number entered here appears on the first page. This option is not relevant when creating lists using the building structure. ƒƒ FIT TO PAGE means that the list is output with a narrow margin; if it is deactivated, the function creates a list with a margin. ƒƒ PRECISION OF CALCULATION defines whether the calculation is carried out with simple precision or normal precision. If a list with normal precision contains a lot of values close to zero, you should check whether simple precision might give the list a “better look”.

346  7 Views, sections, and lists

7.3.4.3 Settings for quantity analyses Clear quantity c­ alculations

The CLEAR QUANTITY CALCULATIONS dialog is available both in the report selection dialog box and in the lists, and provides further settings for list/schedule output such as the number of decimal places for dimensions and interim results, the scale unit and above all, whether the results are to be calculated from rounded, displayed values or exact values.

7.3.4.4 Settings for area and room analyses

Further settings can be made for the analysis of areas in accordance with floor space regulations and the analysis of areas and volumes in accordance with DIN277, as well as special analyses for building applications, in order to cover as many application scenarios as possible. ƒƒ Button 1: HEIGHT DIVISION BASED ON REGULATIONS, NO HEIGHT DIVISION (OVERALL AREA), SIMPLE HEIGHT DIVISION opens the dialog box for detailed definition of the calculation procedure. The required detailed settings are displayed based on the calculation procedure. FLOOR SPACE REGULATIONS

Height division, inclusion of niches, protrusions and plumbing components

GROSS AREA, VOLUME

Calculation in accordance with DIN 277 2005-02

SIMPLE HEIGHT DIVISION

In accordance with DIN 277 1987-06 (old)

ƒƒ Button 2: Opens a dialog box for setting the calculation of the area. Three options are available: ƒƒ The UNFINISHED DIMENSIONS option calculates rooms and stories with their unfin­ ished dimensions. Defined finishing areas are not taken into account in either the plan dimensions or the height division. ƒƒ The FLAT-RATE AMOUNT TO SUBTRACT/ADD option calculates rooms in the same way as the UNFINISHED DIMENSIONS option, but also determines a flat-rate (configurable) reduction/markup for the area. The option is not permitted for DIN 277 or building application lists. ƒƒ The FINISHED DIM. option calculates the actual gross and net areas in accordance with the floor space regulations and DIN 277. All finishing surfaces are analyzed for the plan dimensions and height division.

7.3 Derived objects – lists 347

ƒƒ Button 3: Opens the dialog box for building application list details. The entered values for plot area, costs per m3 and percentage of costs of unfinished structure are used in the building application lists and are stored on a project-specific basis.

7.3.5 Layout Viewer and Layout Designer The Layout Viewer displays the report that was either created from drawing file editing or derived from the building structure. Some basic data, e. g., edited by, company name, company logo etc. can be directly changed in the Layout Viewer for the printout.

NOTE: All the settings you make in the Report Viewer are temporary and

only valid for the current report.

The Layout Designer is a function in the Layout Viewer that you can use to change the appearance of the report and can be adapted for office requirements. Changes made to reported using the Layout Designer can be saved and used the next time the REPORTS, LISTS function is used. NOTE: A report changed using the Layout Designer can be saved under

Office. Structures as similar as possible to those in the Allplan report directory should be used.

348  7 Views, sections, and lists

7.3.5.1 Functions in the Report Viewer

By categories Alphabetically Modify layout

Print Page layout

Export

ƒƒ The PARAMETERS palette is used to modify the currently displayed report to meet your requirements. ƒƒ Under ALLPLAN SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE, you can change the details in the header and footer of the report, which are ­taken by default from the Allplan attributes, such as edited by, date, project name, time, or the office details. ƒƒ Under USER INTERACTION you can hide the logo, modify the page number, or insert a text in Note in the header of the report. ƒƒ BY CATEGORIES and ALPHABETICALLY sort the parameters of the palette accordingly. The two functions apply to the entire contents of the palette. ƒƒ MODIFY LAYOUT opens or closes the Layout Designer (see information in chapter 7.3.5, Layout Viewer and Layout Designer). ƒƒ PRINT opens the Windows print dialog, via which the report can be printed out after you have selected a printer. ƒƒ PAGE LAYOUT changes the display mode. In the page layout – indicated by a gray frame around the report – page breaks are displayed correctly, while the ZOOM and SELECT functions are only possible in editor mode – entire area with white background. Regardless of the option used for display on the screen, the page layout display is selected for output on the printer, as a PDF and for writing to a drawing file. ƒƒ EXPORT outputs the current list in the following formats or transfers the lists directly to the following programs: ƒƒ Excel ƒƒ Allplan (not possible for reports from the building structure or building lists in the FILE menu) ƒƒ (Acrobat) PDF File Many reports contain special functions that filter content, hide/show graphics, and much more. A few examples are shown below, some of which are new in Allplan 2012. The following basic rules apply for most of the new reports, and many of the old ones: ƒƒ If a graphic or the component number can be displayed, zooming and selecting objects is possible. ƒƒ A matrix has been included where different views of the data are possible, or a clear, brief analysis seemed useful next to the detailed tables. ƒƒ Graphics relate to either quantity graphics, perspectives or images. In the case of images, the system differentiates between whether the report was opened from the building structure or the drawing file.

7.3 Derived objects – lists 349

7.3.5.2 User interaction in selected reports The functions below merely show a few examples of the options available. Some of the reports used contain several functions. Many other reports contain the same or similar options, which you will discover for yourself and see the value of. In all the examples below, the ground floor and the roof slab above the ground floor should be active/in edit mode.

Example of zooming and selecting. Two monitors are ideal for viewing the effects. If you only have one monitor, you must minimize or move the result window of the report so that the Design assistant is visible. ZZ Under VIEW, SELECT 4 VIEWPORTS (2). The plan now takes up quarter of the screen. ZZ On the edge of the plan view, click to make sure this window is active. ZZ REPORT, LIST Under Standard, select the Trades subfolder, and there, the Tiling work. rdlc file; open this file. ZZ Select either the entire content of the drawing file, or choose ALL in the input options. The report is generated and displayed in a separate window. ZZ Move the REPORT window and minimize this if necessary so that the plan is visible bottom right. ZZ Move the mouse pointer over a component ID. As soon as a hand is displayed, you can click the component number.

4 Viewports (2) Report, list

350  7 Views, sections, and lists

The window content of the active window is zoomed and moved so that the selected component takes up around a third of the window (diagonals). The component selected in the report is highlighted in red. The last component selected in the report before the result window was closed remains active after closing. TIP: You can zoom in on components in all reports in which a hand appears

in edit mode. The function is only available in reports in which each component is listed individually or can be listed (via user interaction). Try out the behavior in this and other reports.

Examples of filters Report, list

ZZ REPORT, LIST Under Standard, select the Trades subfolder, the Plaster and stucco work subfolder and there the Plaster and stucco work.rdlc file; open this file. ZZ Select either the entire content of the drawing file, or choose ALL in the input options. The report is generated and displayed in a separate window. ZZ Change the selection of the entries displayed under User interaction (in the dropdown menu). After you exit the dropdown menu, the report is recompiled and only the quantities whose material is selected are displayed. The filter in the reports enable you to restrict the selection of components to be analyzed to provide you with a compact display that meets your requirements. TIP: Filters are incorporated in many reports. In some cases, you can filter

using several criteria. The following filters are available, for example: Material, object, height, apartment, occupancy type and others.

Example of details Report, list

ZZ REPORT, LIST Under Standard, select the Rooms, surfaces, stories subfolder, the Living Space subfolder and there, the Room groups, area comparison.rdlc file; open this file. ZZ Select either the entire content of the drawing file, or choose ALL in the input options.

7.3 Derived objects – lists 351

The report is generated and displayed in a separate window. Different mechanisms and terms are used to display other details, depending on what can and should be displayed, and how. For quantity graphics, all components are usually shown individually, and all are always displayed indivi­ dually in the display of the component number (if available). In the example, the rooms of each room group can be displayed, which is why the term Display rooms was used there.

Example of graphic – quantity graphic/perspective The graphic user interaction is provided in two different forms. For almost all reports with a graphic, the graphic can be displayed by means of a checkbox. For two reports, it is currently possible to select the graphic display. ZZ REPORT, LIST Under Standard, select the Rooms, surfaces, stories subfolder, the DIN 277 subfolder, and there the Net floor area, dimensions.rdlc file; open this file. ZZ Select either the entire content of the drawing file, or choose ALL in the input options.

Report, list

352  7 Views, sections, and lists

The report is generated and displayed in a separate window. ZZ Under User interaction, select the Quantity as graphics or Perspective view entry. The graphics are exchanged. If you choose Hide graphics, the graphic is removed and the report becomes shorter.

Example of graphic – image Images are generated based on the currently set layers, the scale and the active drawing type. When a report is called from drawing file editing, the active data is used; when the report is called from the building structure, all the drawing files activated in the source drawing files and belonging to a structural level are used. Report, list

ZZ REPORT, LIST Under Standard, select the Rooms, surfaces, stories subfolder, the Rooms subfolder and there, the Room groups – exposé.rdlc file; open this file. ZZ Select either the entire content of the drawing file, or choose ALL in the input options.

7.3 Derived objects – lists 353

The report is generated and displayed in a separate window.

TIP: Use reports Rooms.rdlc and Room groups – exposé.rdlc from the

Rooms folder (under ROOMS, SURFACES, STORIES) in the building structure to go across entire building analyses without having to activate every story individually. This procedure is advisable if you only work with the drawing structure.

Example of matrix In some reports, there are additional dynamic areas at either the start or the end, which display the report information in compact form. ZZ REPORT, LIST Under Standard, select the Finish subfolder, the Finishing Surfaces subfolder and there the Finishing surfaces, material.rdlc file; open this file. ZZ Select either the entire content of the drawing file, or choose ALL in the input options. The report is generated and displayed in a separate window. User interaction contains the DISPLAY MATRIX entries, which is activated when the report is called. As soon as you remove the checkmark, the material overview in front of the main list is hidden.

General notes The ZOOM AND SELECT example can only be used if you call the report from drawing file editing (see chapter 7.4, Views, sections, and lists – editing drawing files). Most reports enable two or more of the user interactions described above. If you require further filter settings and/or user interactions for an analysis in existing reports, you should forward these requirements to the Nemetschek Support team.

Report, list

354  7 Views, sections, and lists

7.3.5.3 Layout Designer In the Layout Designer, you can use the INSERT menu option to insert images, text fields, lines, and rectangles. The options here are still limited. However, in the display you can change all elements contained in the list.

Procedure for customizing the layout Report, list Modify layout

hh REPORT, LISTS → Select the report and have the system calculate it hh MODIFY LAYOUT (opens the Layout Designer) hh Select field, line or other element you want to change

hh Make the relevant changes in the palette on the left hh MODIFY LAYOUT (closes the Layout Designer) hh Confirm the prompt about saving the changes with YES. hh Select storage location (choose office) and save the report

7.3.6 Create stack lists CREATE STACK LISTS is a function in the shortcut menu of the Lists structural level that

supports the output of several lists. In the settings for stack lists, you can choose between output as a file (transfer to Allplan 2012 BCM, Excel) with different settings or output as in the settings for the individual list. ƒƒ SETTINGS FOR STACK LISTS To use stack lists effectively, you must first define the type of output in the settings for stack lists. Depending on the option you select, files or lists are stored as a file in the relevant list node in accordance with the settings, or are first displayed on the screen.

7.3 Derived objects – lists 355

ƒƒ CREATE STACK LISTS starts the calculation of lists, like CREATE LIST in the list node itself. Depending on the settings, files are automatically saved or the lists of the selected structural level are displayed one after the other on the screen. The time required to create the lists varies depending on the size and number of source drawing files.

7.3.7 Example – create lists Over the course of the exercises, you have created numerous components with properties. These should now be analyzed. The first report to be created should analyze the floor space. The second should display all the walls of the building with a perspective view.

Add lists to building structure ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ BUILDING STRUCTURE → DERIVED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE

Select the LISTS structural level ZZ Shortcut menu → LIST ZZ Rename as Floor area – Room groups ZZ Add further lists

NOTE: For a good overview, it makes sense to create a structure for the list

area by inserting structural levels, e. g. design, draft, building document etc., each with the same lists.

Open on a ­project-specific basis Building structure

356  7 Views, sections, and lists

Analyzing the floor area ZZ Select the Floor area – room groups list ZZ SHORTCUT MENU → SOURCE DRAWING FILES FOR LIST: Select drawing files: 200, 201, 202, 210 and 211, 220 and 221, 230 and 231, 240 and 241, as well as 250 and 251 (all drawing files that contain the geometries of the building and external facilities – see also Views and Sections in chapter 7.2.6, Example – create views). ZZ SHORTCUT MENU → LAYER SETTING, PLOT SET PLOT SET all layers visible

ZZ SHORTCUT MENU → LIST SELECTION – SETTINGS Option SCREEN/PRINTER (OUTPUT) ZZ Option FLOOR AREA SCHEDULES → Open

list selection

ZZ Folder → Rooms, surfaces, stories Folder → Floor area File → Rooms.rdlc

ZZ At the bottom of the dialog box, set the options to HEIGHT DIVISION BASED ON ­REGULATIONS and FINISHED DIM., open the list and confirm the next dialog box.

7.3 Derived objects – lists 357

The list has been set up and can be created for output in the next step. ZZ Select the Floor area – room groups list ZZ SHORTCUT MENU → CREATE LIST In the palette on the left-hand side, you can change various attributes such as project name, edited by, and other information for the printout. ZZ You can use the EXPORT function to save the report data as a PDF or Excel file. ZZ You can use the PRINT function to output the report on a connected printer.

Further lists Create further lists that analyze the unfinished structure, window lists and so on. In particular, check the functions and reports described in chapter 7.3.5, Layout Viewer and Layout Designer, when calling the reports from the drawing files. This will give you an overview of analysis options relatively quickly, and you can create lists/schedules for output specifically in the building structure derivations. The new functions in the reports in Allplan 2012 are also particularly suitable for checking components and locating errors.

Export Print

358  7 Views, sections, and lists

■■7.4 Views, sections, and lists – editing drawing files As an alternative to the semi-automatic functions of the building structure, you can also create hidden-line images and lists when editing drawing files. When editing drawing files, you have the same options available to you as in the building structure. Only the way the function is called and the steps it involves differ.

7.4.1 Views, sections Hidden Line Image and Wireframe

ƒƒ HIDDEN LINE IMAGE, WIREFRAME is used to create views and sections in drawing file edit mode. The calculation is carried out with the view, perspective, or section defined in the active design viewport. The result can be saved in a drawing file. If you insert a result drawing file below a structural level for the sections or views, it behaves in the same way as a section or view created there. The source drawing files are noted in the destination drawing file and the drawing file in the drawing file structure and building structure are assigned the target icon.

Function sequence hh Define the perspective setting, section etc. in the active design viewport hh HIDDEN LINE IMAGE AND WIREFRAME hh Select the calculation mode (hidden line image for views/sections) hh Define settings as described in section, 7.2.4, Hidden-line image settings hh Take account of the message and confirm A result window is opened, which you must close in order to save. The fact that the title bar of Allplan displays a different text to usual indicates that you are not in a drawing file. hh Close the result window hh Confirm the prompt about the calculation result with Yes. hh SELECT DESTINATION DRAWING FILE The SELECT DESTINATION DRAWING FILE dialog box only displays empty drawing files. As a result, you cannot overwrite data by accident.

7.5 Changes to the model – updating the derived objects 359

7.4.2 Lists – special functions in the modules ƒƒ REPORT, LIST provides you with the direction option of creating reports or lists while you are editing data. As a result, you can at any time check whether the rooms of a drawing have the desired attributes, for example. Many modules also contain special functions for calling up the analysis with reports and/ or lists. The selection of lists is restricted to those lists created for the particular module, and in some cases additional setting options are provided. Most of the special functions for calling up lists use the old lists only. Area Calculation, DIN 277, Application opens the dialog box for report selection.

Procedure for output lists hh Output list (or module-specific list function) hh Select report or list and make the additional settings hh Select the element you want to analyze by using a selection rectangle or selecting ALL hh The report or list is created and displayed on the screen.

■■7.5 Changes to the model – updating the derived objects Changes are made to the building in each planning phase. Allplan has a few mechanisms that help you to update the data. There are different approaches depending on your method of working and the type of change. If, for example, you need to make extensive changes and have a building client who is inconsistent, it is often better to copy the entire building to the building structure and to make a second or third design from this. You only need to remember that the copy refers to the same plane model (consequently → create new plane model, assign new planes to drawing files and structural levels of the copy) and the derived objects (if ­copied) in the source drawing files still refer to the original (change the source drawing files). Two relatively simple changes are described in brief below. The inclination of the roof should be changed, and the resulting changes updated in the derived objects.

Report, list list

Output plant Urban Planning List

Area Calculation, DIN 277, Application

360  7 Views, sections, and lists

7.5.1 Example – change roof inclination – replace roofscape The basic procedure for changing the roof inclination is described. You can try out the required settings.

Replace roofscape The roof planes were created in drawing file 105 – preliminary design for roofscape – main roof. For the purposes of replacement and as a test drawing file, copy drawing file 105 to the building structure in drawing file 104. As a result, you can convert the changed roofscape back at any time. Open on a project-specific basis

Floor Manager Replace roofscape

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ Select drawing file 105 → SHORTCUT MENU → COPY ZZ Select structural level Surface No. 43/56 → SHORTCUT MENU → PASTE UNDER → drawing file 104 ZZ Change the name of drawing file 104. ZZ Open drawing file 104 and change the roof planes, e. g. roof inclination to 15°, height of eaves to 6.20. ZZ FLOOR MANAGER ZZ Select the roofscape you want to replace ZZ REPLACE ROOFSCAPE ZZ FROM D-FILE → drawing file 104 ZZ Change the name of the roofscape  → Main roof – steep ZZ Confirm your entries. ZZ The bottom level of the roofscape is equi­valent to the bottom of the story; select TOP LEVELS ARE RETAINED. ZZ Confirm your entries. ZZ Confirm the changes in the Floor Manager. Open all drawing files for the building and check the changes. All buildings to which the pitched roof roofscape was assigned now contain a gable roof.

7.5 Changes to the model – updating the derived objects 361

7.5.2 Example – update section/view and lists Reports and lists are regenerated every time they are called up. Consequently, the latest reports and lists can be printed at any time. In the case of views and section, you have to perform a few steps. Update either just one drawing file, a complete area, or all the drawing files derived from the building structure. When the calculations are updated, the drawing files are recreated (destination drawing files). If you made changes to these drawing files, lock the drawing file for updating (drawing file shortcut menu).

Update views – in full ZZ Select the terraced house views structural level ZZ SHORTCUT MENU → UPDATE VIEWS All views in the structural levels below the building views structural level are recalculated. The sections and, if available, other structural levels with views, are not recalculated.

Update sections – individually ZZ Select drawing file 280 ZZ SHORTCUT MENU → UPDATE CALCULATION RESULT

The selected drawing file is recalculated.

Further steps in the update process Once you have updated all the calculation results, you must check the drawing files with the changes to the views and sections and make the necessary adjustments there. The dimensions of any backgrounds, fills for roofs and façades and so on that may already have been created need to be changed. In the result, the views and sections are shown with the steep roof.

362  7 Views, sections, and lists

■■7.6 Example – sections and views result

7.6 Example – sections and views result  363

You can find further examples as PDF files in the project folder of the following project: ƒƒ Project Allplan 2012 Practical Manual or on the website ƒƒ http://www.zeichenatelier.com/Allplan2012

8

Data output

■■8.1 Layout editor – printing layouts 8.1.1 Assembling layouts – fundamentals In the window for assembling layouts, a dark gray area is displayed outside the sheet. The contents of the layout are to be placed in the white area. The visible purple double border (printable area border) shows the paper format set on the current printer. You can hide the printable area border in Show/Hide.

Layout mode – drawing file mode Allplan uses two different file types for data: drawing files with the building or drawing structure for editing the model or other drawings, and layouts for assembling data from various drawing files with different scales and representations for printing on paper. You can toggle between the modes using the Layout Editor button. Note that in the layout editor, drawing files cannot be activated, and when editing drawing files, layouts are not visible. The OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS dialog box only displays the permitted data. ƒƒ LAYOUT EDITOR changes the edit mode from drawing files to layouts. When you first start the layout editor, the OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS: LAYOUTS dialog box is displayed, and you must select a layout to open. If you have already worked in the layout editor, the last layout you worked on is loaded. A layout sheet always appears in the background during assembly of layouts. This layout sheet represents the currently set paper format for this layout. The inner border surrounds the area that can be output on the printer with this format. The outer border shows the size of the defined sheet.

Layout Editor

366  8 Data output

Layout structure The designer’s aim is to have the project layout on paper. For this work, Allplan offers you up to 3000 layouts and any number of structural levels and links to layouts, which can be used to structure the layout selection in a clear way. Layouts are edited in the PLOT LAYOUT module.

Layout attributes In addition to the layout name and file number, other data, known as layout attributes, can be attached to the layout. These are specified in the layout properties and can be used in title blocks. ƒƒ SETTINGS tab The DISPLAY MODE, LAYOUT TYPE attributes provide a selection of values. The HIERARCHIC CODE,  NAME AND  INDEX attributes are attribute fields for userdefined input. ƒƒ The CHANGE NOTICES tab is used to manage the creation date of the layout with the person who edited it and all change notices. You can enter up to 100 change notices. The title block contained in the template project can display up to 15 notices.

8.1.2 Functions for assembling layouts New in V2011

Color plot preview Draft view Grayscale plot ­preview Set up page Revised in V2011

Layout element

When assembling layouts, you can use the Design, Text, Dimension Line modules and the two modules Plot Layout and Crop Layout. Unavailable functions are grayed out.

Assembling layouts See also the explanations on the color plot preview, grayscale plot preview, and draft view at the edge of the viewport. You can use these display settings to control the layout display and perform a check before printing. See section 2.7.5, Display in layout window, for a description of the functions. ƒƒ SET UP PAGE defines the format, orientation (portrait/landscape), and page margins of the layout. The defined paper format is displayed in white in the viewport after you confirm the settings. The defined margins (you can transfer them from the defined printer) are displayed in light gray and the rest of the screen in dark gray. The settings are permanently saved in the layout. ƒƒ LAYOUT ELEMENT opens the Context tool bar, via which you can select the drawing files that can be placed in the layout. Before placing the drawing file, you can set the scale, layer visibility etc.

8.1 Layout editor – printing layouts 367

You can use LOAD FAVORITE to read in and use the settings (layout element scale, drawing type, font factor, and layer visibility) you stored using SAVE AS FAVORITE. As a result, you can quickly repeat the same or similar groups of settings. The file extension is *.prop as for all favorites that you can save using the Properties palette. You should therefore use clear naming conventions for favorites for layout elements so that you can find the settings easily. ƒƒ NDW LAYOUT ELEMENT is used to place custom NDW files in a layout. ƒƒ LAYOUT WINDOW is used to fix drawing files and NDW files and hides the areas of the drawing that go beyond the layout window. ƒƒ LAYOUT BORDER creates a border with fold marks etc. in accordance with various standards. The layout border is also necessary to label the layout with a title block, which can be displayed in the project attributes and layout attributes. As a rule, the layout border should be arranged so that the bottom left corner point of the layout border is on the left inner corner of the layout sheet. ƒƒ LABEL is used to label the layout border with a title block. Title blocks are created using the LABEL STYLE function and must be saved in file 7 or 8. ƒƒ LIST LAYOUT ELEMENTS displays a list of all elements (or only those in an area of the layout) that were stored in the layout. In the list, you can view and change all properties of the individual layout elements. The position (sequence) of the layout elements can also be defined. ƒƒ MOVE LAYOUT SHEET is used to move the layout sheet. After the function is called, the layout sheet is positioned with the bottom left inner corner on the crosshairs, and can therefore be placed easily.

Save as favorite Load favorite

NDW layout element Layout window Layout border

Label List layout elements

Move layout sheet

NOTE: The drop-in point of the sheet defined in Set Up Page and the layout

sheet (printable area border) are connected and are always bottom left.

ƒƒ UPDATE LAYOUT is necessary to adjust the maximum extent of a drawing file already used in a layout. Output is correct even if the extent is not modified, but the outlines are not displayed correctly, and as a result, problems could occur if you perform the Move function. ƒƒ TRANSFER LAYER VISIBILITY transfers the setting for the visible layers from one layout element to others. After the setting has been transferred from a layout element, the dialog box for setting the layout visibility in layout elements is displayed. ƒƒ MODIFY LAYOUT WINDOW provides other functions for editing existing layout windows. ƒƒ EDIT DRAWING FILES creates a drawing from the selected drawing files and switches the edit mode from layout to drawing file. The newly created drawing is opened. As a result, you can quickly make small changes and corrections without having to know exactly in which drawing or structural level the drawing file is located. NOTE: In the Edit Drawing File function, a drawing is always created and

activated, even if you primarily work with the building structure.

Modify extents of layout elements

Transfer layer ­visibility Modify layout window Edit drawing files

368  8 Data output

Data output – paper Plot layouts

ƒƒ PLOT LAYOUTS calls up the dialog box for Allplan layout output. You can either print out one layout or plot several layouts. You can also make further settings, for example you can exclude elements from plotting, change all font colors for output, enter a printing factor, and so on. ƒƒ Output tab – Allplan raster driver Raster drivers are directly available in Allplan that support (HP) printer language RTL (Raster Transfer Language). These printer drivers are especially useful should you want to print large-format drawings and layouts as raster drivers have the following advantages: they speed up the printing process, the quality of the output is high and, last but not least, they are very reliable. To be able to use a raster driver, a Windows printer driver of the same type must always be installed. If you have selected a raster driver, the Windows printer driver is no longer used to create the output data for the printer. But it is still used to query the properties of the printer. These include paper size, print resolution, print quality and hardware interfaces. ƒƒ Output tab – Allplan vector driver The Allplan vector driver is only displayed if output channels were defined in Ser­ vices. The vector driver cannot output all elements (see Allplan 2012 help), is not being developed further, and will not be included in one of the future versions of Allplan. The color display is also different in the Allplan vector driver and Windows drivers. NOTE: If possible, use a Windows driver or Allplan raster driver to output

layouts. The descriptions below are based on a Windows driver for a Canon iPF 755 (plotter).

Configuration

ƒƒ CONFIGURATION is used to manage layout borders and plot profiles. In workgroup installations, only the SYSADM can access this function.

Data output To output layouts as files, you can use various functions that cover a large number of file types. They cover practically everything from plot files, image files, and data for other CAD programs right through to archive-secure PDF files. For more information on data export and import, as well as various data formats, see section 4.5, Data exchange: importing/exporting. Export HPGL file, bitmap file

ƒƒ EXPORT HPGL, BITMAP FILE exports the contents of the layout to the defined format. In the case of HPGL formats, the PLOT LAYOUTS dialog box is displayed with special options, in the case of bitmap files, a dialog box is displayed in which you can define the resolution, size and so on.

8.1 Layout editor – printing layouts 369

ƒƒ EXPORT PDF DATA saves the current layout or selected layouts as PDF files in the specified path. Further information is provided in chapter 4.5, Data exchange: impor­ting/ exporting. ƒƒ IMPORT LAYOUTS/EXPORT LAYOUTS are used to exchange data. With IMPORT LAYOUTS, you can import complex layouts from other systems and distribute the files to drawing files. In an export, the layout can be transferred in exploded or complex form. For both functions, you have numerous options, which cover practically all application scenarios. For more information on DXF, DGN, and DWG files, see chapter 4.5.1.1, DWG, DXF, DGN and other data types. ƒƒ IMPORT NID FILE/EXPORT  NID FILE are used to read in and output NID files (Nemetschek Internet Document). The layout and all the drawing files it contains (resources can be selected) are written to a file that the design partner can import. There, a new project is created from the layout. For more information on functions and processes for data exchange with other Allplan users, see chapter 4.5, Data exchange: importing/exporting. ƒƒ ARCHIVING is used to archive layouts. A dialog box is displayed in which you can define the format and any function calls for processing the archive files. As an alternative to explicitly calling the function, you can have the layouts archived directly after plotting (PLOT LAYOUTS, ARCHIVING tab).

Export PDF file

Import layouts Export layouts

Import NID file Export NID File

Archiving

8.1.3 Example – assembling layouts A DIN A2 layout should now be created and labeled with the lower floor including grid, external facilities, and section lines. The example describes the ideal procedure for outputting layouts on large-format printers with rolls.

Layout editor – switching from drawing file to layout mode ZZ LAYOUT EDITOR ZZ Select layout 301 if the OPEN ON A PROJECTSPECIFIC BASIS is opened automatically Or OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS → Select layout 302 in the Design Drawing structural level

Layout editor Open on a project-specific basis

Hide printable area border For the assembly of layouts, it does not matter which paper can be output on the connected printer. For this reason, the printable area border is hidden for the next steps. ZZ SHOW/HIDE ZZ Remove selection of printable area border and confirm with OK The double border (purple) is hidden.

Show/hide

370  8 Data output

NOTE: The drop-in point of the sheet defined in Set Up Page and the layout

sheet (printable area border) are connected and are always bottom left.

Set up page Before data can be stored in the layout, the size of the layout should be prepared in SET UP PAGE. You can also perform this step at a later point, but it should be done if possible before the drawings are placed, as the definition of the size also affects the graphical display. Set up page

ZZ SET UP PAGE ZZ Set  the  FORMAT  (1)  to DIN  A2  plus one. ZZ Landscape format (2) ZZ MARGINS  →  without  page margin (roll, PDF) (3)

After you confirm the settings, the defined page format is displayed on the screen. The dark gray area is outside the sheet, and the white area is the area to be printed, in which you should place your data.

NOTE: If an individual sheet is selected, a light gray margin is also ­displayed,

symbolizing the defined margin.

8.1 Layout editor – printing layouts 371

Place layout elements ZZ LAYOUT ELEMENT ZZ Layout element LOAD FAVORITE (1) In the FAVORITES – PROJECT folder Pre-construction plan.prop

Layout Element Load favorite

Scale, font factor, drawing type, and plot set are set in accordance with the saved favorite. ZZ Drawing files via

BUILDING STRUCTURE (2)

ZZ Display building structure (3) ZZ Select drawing files 200, 202, and 230 (4) ZZ Confirm selection and place drawing file stack NOTE: For the views and

sections, you must set the second layout to Derived from building structure in order to select it. ZZ LAYOUT BORDER ZZ BORDER SIZE → DIN A2 ORIENTATION → Horizontal BORDER’S ANCHOR POINT → Bottom Left BORDER TYPE → Filing margin (DIN 824 A)  and BORDER PEN AND LINE TYPE LINE(1), COLOR (1) ZZ Place layout border at bottom left corner The selected layout border is smaller than the sheet selected in SET UP PAGE. NOTE: Under Set Up Page, you should always select a page format that is

clearly larger than the finished layout.

Layout border

372  8 Data output

Label

ZZ LABEL ZZ Click on the layout border (Layout Border ToolTip) ZZ Select LABEL STYLE Select label style FOLDER → Project FILE → 7 Title blocks LAYOUT STYLE

1 text block with index (0–15) ZZ Confirm selection ZZ Set title block The bottom right outer corner of the layout border is the correct reference point for the selected title block.

The layout is fully assembled for the moment.

Influence sequence of layout element List layout elements

ZZ LIST LAYOUT ELEMENTS ZZ Input options → ALL ZZ Sort the individual, listed layout elements as shown.

In the LAYOUT ELEMENTS dialog box, you can influence the sequence of the layout elements and (as in the properties of the individual layout element) the display using the SUPERORDINATE PEN, LINE and COLOR checkboxes and surface elements.

Create layout windows Layout window

ZZ LAYOUT WINDOW ZZ . . . OF LAYOUT ELEMENTS ALREADY PLACED

ZZ Select all drawing files ZZ Define area of layout window The layout window should completely fill the left half of the layout within the layout border.

8.1 Layout editor – printing layouts 373

Change visibility of layers in layout elements When the drawing files of the lower floor were placed, you used a LAYOUT ELEMENT FAVORITE, which was imported via LOAD FAVORITE. In addition to the predefined settings, you can edit the display of the drawing files as layout elements while placing or afterwards by using LIST LAYOUT ELEMENTS or via the properties (select layout element → Properties palette). You can choose between four different settings for the layers: SET ALL TO VISIBLE . . ., PLOT SET . . ., CURRENT, or FIXED . . . ZZ Call up the properties of drawing file Story 00 – model via the SHORTCUT MENU or LIST LAYOUT ELEMENTS. ZZ LAYER/PLOT SET At the moment, the visibility of the layers is based on the pre-construction plot set – 1:100. ZZ Select FIXED, SAVE LAYER SETTING IN LAYOUT ELEMENT (FIXED) and hide List LAYERS IN LAYOUT ELEMENT

NOTE: You can use the shortcut menu in the left-hand area to e. g. import

a plot set as the basis.

ZZ Confirm the data in both dialog boxes. The changed visibility is displayed. You can control the layout visibility in this way for each layout element. If you create plot sets, you can use them here and thus considerably increase your working speed.

374  8 Data output

Fill out layout attributes Open on a project-specific basis

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ Rename layout 301 as Lower floor plan ZZ Select layout 301 → shortcut menu SETTINGS tab HIERARCHIC CODE → D LAYOUT TYPE → Design drawing INDEX → 00 ZZ Properties Change notices tab EDITED BY → Name

ZZ Confirm entries and open layout 301 again

The data entered at the start of the project is contained in the title block. Edit text

With EDIT TEXT, you only need to change the scale. This is the only text in the title block that cannot be generated from project attributes or layout attri­ butes. Create a second layout, and place the plans (do not forget the fireplace, section lines, and external facilities), as well as views and sections, there. Note that in some cases you must place several drawing files as a stack, or centered.

8.1 Layout editor – printing layouts 375

8.1.4 Example – layout structure For layouts, Allplan offers a freely definable structure (similar to the building structure), which you can extend as required. The template project already contains a structure. In this example, you should extend, store, delete, and reload it. The structure is created so that the project phases, to which 10 layouts are assigned, are shown in the top area. If you need more layouts, you can insert these using ASSIGN LAYOUTS. It is a good idea to subdivide the folders further. At the bottom of the structure, you can find lists for trade professionals and others. Layouts can either be inserted directly beneath these, or links to layouts created. In the example, the created drafts should be included in a folder as links. If changes are made in the layouts or new indexes assigned, the layout shortcut menu can be used to expand the structure so that all links are displayed, to give you an overview of the people to whom the layout should be sent in its current status.

Extend layout structure ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS The existing layout structure is displayed.

Open on a project-specific basis

NOTE: You can use the pro-

ject shortcut menu to hide the All Layouts structural level.

ZZ Open the structure as shown and select the ../Building owner/Draft presentation folder ZZ Shortcut menu → INSERT STRUCTURAL LEVEL

ZZ Rename the structural level as e. g. Informal meeting 2010_12_04. ZZ ASSIGN LINKED LAYOUTS Enter layout number range 300 – 306. ZZ THE LAYOUTS ARE INSERTED AS

Assign linked layouts

LINKS AND ARE GIVEN THE NAME OF THE ORIGINAL LAYOUT WITH THE NAME SUPPLEMENT “LINK WITH” IN FRONT OF THE LAYOUT NAME.

The combination can also be selected during output. Exit the layout selection after making the changes, or save the changes with SAVE.

Save

376  8 Data output

Save layout structure as favorite Open on a project-specific basis Save layout ­structure as favorite

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ SELECT PROJECT LINE OPEN SHORTCUT MENU

ZZ SAVE LAYOUT STRUCTURE AS FAVORITE

ZZ ENTER A NAME AND IF NECESSARY A DIFFERENT STORAGE LOCATION FOR YOUR LAYOUT STRUCTURE. NOTE: The saved layout structure can be loaded in any project (as the

basis). If you have projects from older Allplan versions, you can use these or a separate structure as the basis.

Delete entire layout structure Open on a project-specific basis

Save

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ SELECT PROJECT LINE OPEN SHORTCUT MENU

ZZ DELETE ENTIRE LAYOUT STRUCTURE ZZ CONFIRM PROMPT ZZ SAVE The layout structure is completely removed. The special ALL LAYOUTS structural level appears automatically if there is no other userdefined structural level.

Load layout structure Open on a project-specific basis

ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS ZZ SELECT PROJECT LINE

Load layout ­structure favorite

ZZ LOAD LAYOUT STRUCTURE FAVORITE ZZ CONFIRM PROMPT

Save

OPEN SHORTCUT MENU

THE EXISTING STRUCTURE IS ALWAYS REMOVED COMPLETELY AND THE NEW ONE INSERTED. SELECT THE FILE Layout structure – Layoutstructure Allplan 2012 Practical Manual.xml OR THE FILE YOU JUST SAVED. ZZ OPEN THE FILE. ZZ THE LAYOUT STRUCTURE IS RECREATED ON THE BASIS OF THE FILE.

Before you make further changes, you should save the layout structure.

8.1 Layout editor – printing layouts 377

8.1.5 Example – output layout on paper To output the layout on paper, an output device must be available on which the required format can be output. If this criterion is met, you need to determine whether the output device has individual sheets or a continuous roll with a particular width. With the plotter types I have used up to now, an oversize format was always ideal for outputting layouts. With these formats, the margin (non-printable area of the paper) needed for printing is automatically added by the driver and DIN formats can be output. Alternatively, you can use paper formats (output only) that are always larger than the layout to be printed. Depending on the plotter driver, other formats can be defined. These should be set up either in Windows directly on the workstations or on the printer server. In the formatted plan for the lower floor, all paper settings have so far been ignored, and need to be made now.

Output on paper – step 1 – Selection tab ZZ OPEN ON A PROJECT-SPECIFIC BASIS → open layout 302 ZZ PLOT LAYOUTS

Open on a ­projectspecific basis Plot layouts

On the right-hand side, choose PLOT ELEMENTS (1), under SELECT LAYOUT STRUCTURE (2) or PLOT LAYOUTS (3) select the layout(s) to be output. At the moment, only layout 302 should be selected.

378  8 Data output

Output on paper – step 2 – Selection tab The OUTPUT tab is used to exactly define the output size in connection with the defined printer and available paper. When you first open the PLOT LAYOUTS dialog box, Allplan tries to set a sheet matching the paper format defined in SET UP PAGE on the driver of the current printer. In the case of new layouts, the system always proposes the printer set the last time.

In SET UP PAGE (4), you should first check the paper format, then set the output device (5) (here Windows driver). Select a plotter, if available, and set the paper size to format ISO A2+. Confirm with CLOSE. The PLOT LAYOUTS dialog box is closed, and the white layout sheet is moved up and to the right around the extent of the gray margin.

Output on paper – step 3 – move layout sheet When you have made all the settings as shown in the example, the layout sheet is correct. As a lot of different settings are possible here, the layout sheet usually needs to be moved. For an optimum overview, you should reactivate the display of the layout sheet in SHOW/ HIDE. Show/Hide

ZZ SHOW/HIDE ZZ Show the BORDER OF PRINTABLE AREA again

8.1 Layout editor – printing layouts 379

ZZ MOVE PAGE ZZ Place the layout sheet at the outer bottom left corner of the layout border

Move page

The bottom left corner is the fixed point of the layout. If the page sizes or output format changes, the point remains the same. The page format defined in the printer driver is displayed on the screen as a purple double border.

NOTE: The drop-in point of the sheet defined in Set Up Page and the layout

sheet (printable area border) are connected and are always bottom left.

Output on paper – step 4 – check the display The options set in PLOT LAYOUTS directly affect the output. To provide the best possible means of checking the printout, Allplan 2012 includes an option for checking the display with the color plot and grayscale plot preview functions. Test the three functions (usually at the bottom right). Draft view

Color plot preview

Draft view Color plot preview Grayscale plot ­preview

Grayscale plot preview

ƒƒ Draft view application The draft view is ideal for preparing layouts. Layout element borders, construction lines on drawing files, and all non-printable elements are displayed. ƒƒ Color plot preview and grayscale plot preview application Both previews display the layout data with the options defined in PLOT LAYOUTS. As a result, both views are ideal for correcting final mistakes and checking the appearance. If a plot profile was defined and/or if pens were changed under Pen and color assignments on the SETTINGS tab (Plot Layouts), these settings are displayed. The display options in Show/Hide are reduced. For example, you cannot deactivate THICK LINE.

380  8 Data output

Output on paper – step 5 – start printing Plot layouts

ZZ PLOT LAYOUTS ZZ Output tab → check the defined printer and paper format ZZ Plot Output starts. If the layout does not fit the selected output sheet, a message is displayed.

Output on paper – reduced layouts To output reduced layouts, you only need to enter a RESIZING FACTOR (e. g. 0.5) on the SETTINGS tab of the PLOT LAYOUTS dialog box and activate the RESIZE PEN THICKNESS option before you start printing.

Output on paper – several layouts selected If you selected more than one layout, another dialog box with settings is displayed before the data is sent to the printer. Here, you can define whether the layouts should be printed on the paper format defined in each case or with the same format for all (based on the current layout). You can also define whether the layouts are to be printed out on the printers defined for each indivi­ dual layout, or on the current printer. It is advisable to activate the FIRST CHECK ALL PAPER FORMATS, OUTPUT DEVICES AND DRIVERS option. This takes a moment, but

avoids unnecessary misprints.

■■8.2 Data output as file Data export is a very broad subject. Depending on the programs and working methods used by the project partners, you may need a wide variety of different formats and ­settings. The individual functions have already been described in section 4.5.1, Import and export, and will not be dealt with again here.

8.2 Data output as file 381

8.2.1 Archive layouts/data Depending on your archiving requirements, you have the following options for saving data for later use.

Archiving as Allplan files – complete project You can use Services to save the complete project. These contain all the settings, surfaces, attributes, administrative files and the layouts and drawing files. A project backup is always created in the current format and can be imported to subsequent versions of Allplan. Data conversion is possible in at least three versions without system messages. The procedure for backing up and restoring data is carried out in Services and is described in section 9.2, Services – data backup. The ideal time to archive the complete project is e. g. at the end of a project phase or when the building is completed. NOTE: In trials with much older data (up to V11), no problems occurred in

project backups and subsequent conversion apart from a few changes in the display.

Archiving as Allplan files – complete layouts and/or drawing files For seamless documentation, interim statuses of the project’s drawing are often required. You can create these easily using the EXPORT LOADED LAYOUT WITH RESOURCES and EXPORT LOADED DRAWING FILES WITH RESOURCES functions (see section 4.5.1, Import and export).

Archiving in other formats For the archiving of layouts, you can use the ARCHIVING function (normal PDF or TIF files), the EXPORT HPGL FILE, BITMAP FILE function (plot files and various bitmap formats), or export PDF files (normal PDF files or PDF/A-1a – ISO-code PDF) in Allplan 2012. You should choose the formats that meet your requirements. Layout copies that are to be archived for 30 years should be output as TIF or PDF/A-1a.

8.2.2 Example – output layout as PDF file (2D) Output layout as PDF There are two functions available for outputting layouts as PDFs: The ARCHIVING function, which you can use to output several layouts one after the other, and the EXPORT PDF FILE function, with which you can make more settings for output.

382  8 Data output

Export PDF file

ZZ EXPORT PDF FILE ZZ SELECT LAYOUTS → SELECT ALL THE LAYOUTS YOU WANT TO SAVE AS PDFS ZZ PDF FILE → select storage location

and/or specify file to which the layout is to be attached ZZ Enter OPTIONS to meet your requirements (see chapter 0, Basic settings). If you selected an existing file, the ADD TO FILE option can be selected. ZZ OPEN FILE WITH ASSOCIATED APPLICATION → activate ZZ Confirm entries with OK The PDF file is created and displayed directly with Adobe Reader. If you selected more than one layout, all layouts are stored in the selected path and opened automatically. NOTE: If you selected an existing file instead of a new file, the selected

layout can be added to this and given a bookmark.

8.2 Data output as file 383

8.2.3 Example – export model, PDF (3D) Activate all drawing files that contain data that is to be visible in the PDF (3D).

Export 3D PDF ZZ Start the animation window (F4) ZZ Set the initial perspective ZZ SHORTCUT MENU (in the animation window) → PDF-3D EXPORT Set options for export ZZ OPEN FILE WITH ASSOCIATED APPLICATION → activate ZZ Confirm your entries.

The saved file is automatically opened in Adobe Reader. A click on the displayed image starts navigation mode. In navigation mode, you can influence the light or surface elements of the model, for example.

8.2.4 Example – export model, C4D Activate all drawing files that contain data that you want to transfer to Cinema 4D for further processing. The file can only be opened directly if you have a version of Cinema 4D. A demo version, which you can download from the MAXON website (http://www.maxon.de), is sufficient.

Export PDF file

384  8 Data output

The demo version can be activated for 42 days (according to information from Maxon). After activation, the demo version of Cinema 4D can still be used. However, output is restricted to 640x640 pixels and data cannot be saved.

Output C4D file

Export to CINEMA 4D/VRML/3DS/U3D

ZZ Start the animation window (F4) ZZ Set the initial perspective ZZ SHORTCUT MENU → EXPORT TO CINEMA 4D / VRML/3DS/U3D

ZZ Enter the storage location, name, and format of the file. Select format C4D – Cinema 4D file (R12 format), if you have Cinema 4D R12 or higher. ZZ Change the export options as required. The structure of the object manager structure is similar to the drawing file structure. The layers are converted to C4D planes and highlighted in color depending on the layer settings. ZZ Confirm the prompt with YES and the file is opened in Cinema 4D. In Cinema, you must set the paths for the textures in such as way that the system searches the Design folder in the STD folder.

8.3 Layout output troubleshooting 385

■■8.3 Layout output troubleshooting Because of the wide variety of output devices and different settings in the drivers, the output of layouts on paper is a complex subject and is difficult to describe here. A few examples and solutions are provided below. A Canon imagePROGAF iPF 755 with a 36-inch roll is used as the printer in the examples.

8.3.1 Example 1 – layout size with width up to 841 mm The layout fits the width of the roll and should be printed in the most space-saving way possible. hh SET UP PAGE → select format up to DIN A1 (841.0/594.0) or other format with a width of max. 841.0 mm hh Select portrait format hh PLOT LAYOUTS hh Select the right paper in the printer driver hh PAGE SETUP tab → select ROTATEAROUND 90 DEGREES (CONSERVE PAPER)

hh LAYOUT tab → select NO SPACES AT TOP OR BOTTOM (CONSERVE PAPER)

NOTE: Most printer drivers can save space via automatic rotation for for-

mats that fit crossways on the inserted roll. If a sheet larger (printer driver) than this limit is inserted, rotation is usually not possible, and the layout is not output in a way that saves paper.

8.3.2 Example 2 – layout size larger than width 841 mm Prerequisite: Layout format exists in printer driver, e. g. DIN format. For larger formats, the rotation option is not possible. hh SET UP PAGE → select format DIN A0 (841.0/594.0) hh Select portrait format hh PLOT LAYOUTS hh Select the right paper in the printer driver hh Layout tab → select NO SPACES AT TOP OR BOTTOM (CONSERVE PAPER)

Screenshots from the printer driver interface

386  8 Data output

NOTE: In the case of formats that are longer than the plotter roll is wide,

the size of the sheet is irrelevant if the printer driver setting stipulates that empty areas are to be ignored.

8.3.3 Example 3 – layout size longer than DIN A0 For all layouts that are longer than DIN A0 (118.9 cm), you must first set up an appropriate paper format in the printer driver. It is advisable to set up and use three or four different long formats. hh SET UP PAGE → enter any format (e. g. width 1350 mm, height 594 mm) hh Create a layout border of the desired size using the BASED ON DIAGONAL LINES input option. hh PLOT LAYOUTS hh Open the printer properties and (for the Canon iPF755) create a new paper format of height 1400 mm and width 917 mm with its own name under SIZE OPTIONS in the PAGE SETUP tab. hh Select newly created paper format hh PAGE SETUP tab → deselect ROTATEAROUND 90 DEGREES (CONSERVE PAPER) hh LAYOUT tab → select NO SPACES AT TOP OR BOTTOM (CONSERVE PAPER) NOTE: The defined paper format should be created with the same name on

all computers in the network. Depending on the driver and manufacturer, you can create any formats with their own names, or one to five userdefined formats. In some cases, a new format must also be created on the printer server so that it is available to all.

8.3.4 Example 4 – output of several layouts – with plot profiles When layouts are output, you can define special plot profiles for each layout, which can be used to change the pen thicknesses and colors of the drawing. Every layout contains information about which plot profile is to be used. When you output several layouts, you must follow the steps below in order to output each layout with its own plot profile. hh Prepare all layouts with paper sizes, plot profiles, and drawing contents hh Select new, empty layout hh PLOT LAYOUTS → select layouts for printing → plot

8.3 Layout output troubleshooting 387

NOTE: If the current layout is not assigned its own plot profile, the plot

profile assigned to the respective layout is used in stack plot output. If the current layout has its own plot profile, this is used for ALL layouts currently selected for output.

8.3.5 Example 5 – output of several layouts – plot profile of active layout If you need to output a lot of layouts with a plot profile different to that defined in the layout, you can proceed as follows: hh Select the layout with the required plot profile (or set the required plot profile for the current layout) hh PLOT LAYOUTS → select layouts for printing → plot NOTE: As the current layout has its own plot profile, this is used for all

layouts that are to be printed.

8.3.6 Example 6 – output of reduced layouts To output reduced layouts (ideal as working copies), you must set the resizing factor. hh PLOT LAYOUTS hh Select one or more layouts (see the text above with regard to plot profiles) hh SETTINGS tab → set RESIZING FACTOR AND select RESIZE PEN THICKNESS NOTE: All selected layouts are printed with the same factor. By resizing the

pen thickness you can prevent the reduced layouts from having unattractively thick lines.

388  8 Data output

8.3.7 Test plot

Every output device, be it a monitor or printer, has its own color spectrum and therefore shows an image in its own way. Output on paper depends on the output device, driver, ink, driver type, and driver settings used. You can use the Test Plot drawing file in the New folder to obtain a reference image for the purposes of appraisal. ProjectPilot

hh Open PROJECTPILOT hh Set the external path to program directory of Allplan \Allplan\new\testplot hh Open the Layouts subfolder hh Select Testplot Windowstreiber / Testplot for Windowsdrivers → shortcut menu  → copy to Copy the layout to a new project and use it to test your printer.

8.4 Example – result of assembling layouts  389

■■8.4 Example – result of assembling layouts

You can find further examples as PDF files in the project folder of the following project: ƒƒ Project Allplan 2012 Practical Manual or on the website ƒƒ http://www.zeichenatelier.com/Allplan2012

9

Services application

■■9.1 Services application – fundamentals The Services application is a program you can/must use to define a few basic configurations such as the language or license. In the case of workgroup installations, additional users are created and managed via the WORKGROUP MANAGER menu item.

In the Services output window, you can also view the installation paths and other useful information. The user display in the program line is not available in an installation without Workgroup Manager.

9.1.1 Utilities UTILITIES contains the Allplan license

management functions. Different items are available depending on the license you have installed (hardlock, softlock). Different dialog boxes are available under LICENSE SETTINGS depending on your license and specific installation setup.

392  9 Services application

9.1.2 Data backup In the DATA BACKUP menu item, you are provided with semi-automatic functions, which you can use to back up projects, office standards etc. selectively. The procedure for backing up and restoring a project is described at the end of this section.

9.1.3 Configuration In CONFIGURATION, you make the basic settings for how Allplan and Services communicate with your hardware. ƒƒ BACKUP PATH defines the location where the Services backup routines create a backup, or to which it tries to import the backup. The backup path can be any non-write-protected folder. Backups created via the DATA BACKUP menu item are created in the backup path. When data is restored, the defined backup path is used. ƒƒ LANGUAGE offers all installed (and purchased) languages for Allplan and Services for selection. If the language you require is not available, it is either not contained in your license or not installed. ƒƒ PROJECT FOLDER NAME defines how new project folders (Windows folders) are to be named, or which options are to be available during creation of new projects. The system displays a selection box listing all the available options and the option currently set. ƒƒ INTERNAL PROJECT NUMBER IS PRESET SAME FOLDER NAME AS PROJECT NAME CAN BE SELECTED means that you can choose between the INTERNAL PROJECT NUMBER and SAME FOLDER NAME AS PROJECT NAME settings and the internal project folder name is offered as a ­default. ƒƒ INTERNAL PROJECT NUMBER IS A FIXED SETTING Normal users working with the Workgroup Manager can only create new projects whose project folders are given the names of the internal project numbers. NOTE: For administrators or users working with standalone versions, this

restriction does not apply; however, they see a message stating that the name does not correspond to the standard setting. ƒƒ SAME FOLDER NAME AS PROJECT NAME PREDEFINED

INTERNAL PROJECT NUMBER CAN BE SELECTED Here, you can choose between the SAME FOLDER NAME AS PROJECT NAME and INTERNAL PROJECT NUMBER settings. The former is the default.

9.1 Services application – fundamentals  393

ƒƒ SAME FOLDER NAME AS PROJECT NAME IS A FIXED SETTING Normal users working with the Workgroup Manager can only create new projects whose project folders are given the names of the corresponding projects. NOTE: For administrators or users working with standalone versions, this

restriction does not apply; however, they see a message stating that the name does not correspond to the standard setting.

9.1.4 Service The SERVICE menu item contains utilities that help the user to create a support request for Nemetschek. ƒƒ CREATE SUPPORT REQUEST (HOTINFO) The CREATE SUPPORT REQUEST (Hotinfo) wizard creates a standardized request to the ­ Nemetschek hotline, which, in addition to the actual query, contains system information that may be needed for an answer. Use the Hotinfo if you do not know your customer number or the installed Allplan version.

ƒƒ Hotline tools The hotline tools are a collection of utilities to assist you with solving any problems that may occur. The utilities were also designed to automate hotline-based program and system service. Some tools should only be used in consultation with the hotline or after advice from wellinformed colleagues. The most important solutions using hotline tools are listed here. ƒƒ CLEANSTD: RESETS CAD DEFAULTS CLEANSTD resets all user settings made in the options. With LASTSTD, you can restore the most recent settings if your problem was not solved.

394  9 Services application

ƒƒ CLEANREG: RESET CAD REGISTRY SETTINGS CLEANREG finds and resets all (or a selection of) CAD-specific entries in the system registry under HKEY_CURRENT_USER. The size and position of most dialog boxes, for example, is stored under HKEY_CURRENT_USER. ƒƒ CLEANUP: INITIALIZES THE DISPLAY CLEANUP initializes the display (sets values back to standard values) and therefore solves problems caused by corrupt graphics. You can use this tool without hesitation and you should apply it whenever there is a problem with your screen display. After you have executed this hotline tool and restarted the CAD program, the private project opens automatically. ƒƒ CLEANPRINT: RESETS PRINTER DEFAULTS CLEANPRINT resets the printer settings. This may be useful if you cannot achieve the desired printed image even if the settings are correct. ƒƒ TOOLBAR: SETS THE DEFAULT TOOLBAR ARRANGEMENT TOOLBAR restores the toolbars to their default content and settings. The toolbars are reset whether or not you have saved them as default toolbar arrangements. You can use this hotline tool to redisplay toolbars that have “disappeared”. ƒƒ REORG: REORGANIZES THE PROJECT ADMINISTRATION REORG can be started in three different versions. With the RESTORE PROJECT MANAGEMENT FILE option, you can restore the project management file if it is faulty or has been deleted. ƒƒ DOCSIZE: MAXIMUM SIZE OF DOCUMENTS DOCSIZE enables you to adjust the amount of memory reserved for all the loaded documents to the hardware of your computer. The following applies: the higher the value, the slower your computer. Consequently, the value set for DOCSIZE should be as low as possible. All entries are in MB. Recommendations for the document size: ƒƒ Document size with minimum hardware: 32 MB ƒƒ Document size for recommended hardware (default setting): 64 MB ƒƒ Document size for above-average hardware: 128 MB ƒƒ Maximum document size only with optimum hardware setup 256 MB NOTE: If you try to set a value greater than 256 MB, it is reduced to the

maximum 256 MB.

9.1.5 Information In the INFORMATION menu item, you can view the installed version and your customer number (including workstation number). Both pieces of information are important if you need to contact the hotline.

9.2 Services – data backup  395

■■9.2 Services – data backup Each time you change the drawing plan, layout, or project, or exit the program, Allplan automatically backs up your work. Backup files are also created automatically after many critical actions (copy across documents, copy drawing files in the building structure, copy layouts in the layout structure). However, it is advisable to back up the current projects at certain intervals using the Services application, in particular to deal with user errors. The project backups can be imported in order to check an old planning status, to restore data deleted by accident, or to provide all the data to a project partner or external freelance employee for further processing, for example. In addition to project backups, you can make backups of the private folder and/or office standard. The data on the data server should of course always be backed up automatically.

9.2.1 Create project backup Define backup path Before the backup is started, you must define the backup path. hh CONFIGURATION hh BACKUP PATH hh Select an existing folder or create a new folder hh Confirm settings

Create data backup

hh DATA BACKUP hh CREATE hh ENTIRE FOLDERS hh PROJECTS hh Select one or more projects that are to be backed up to the specified path. hh Confirm the prompt with OK. hh The data is compressed and backed up.

396  9 Services application

If you did not define a backup path, or the path is not valid or cannot be accessed, the system asks you to enter a valid backup path after you have selected the project to be backed up. NOTE: At the start of the backup operation, the system checks whether

the project (or projects) is in use. Projects that are open and in use cannot be backed up.

Two files are created for each project in the backup path; first, the zip archive containing the data, second, an information file that the Services application needs to read the backup. The file name always comprises the project name and a number made up of the date and the number of project backups made on this date.

9.2.2 Import project backup Define path containing the backup files Before data can be imported from a backup, the backup routines need to know where the backup is saved. hh CONFIGURATION hh BACKUP PATH hh Select the folder containing the project backup you want to import

Import data backup hh DATA BACKUP hh IMPORT hh PROJECTS hh Select backup to be imported hh Prompt → whether the entire backup is to be imported, or just individual backup files hh Prompt → create new project or import data to existing projects YES → you are asked to specify the project name in the next step. NO → project selection is displayed. hh After confirmation, data is decompressed and copied to the selected folder. If data from an older version is imported, data conversion is started automatically after import, and the data is converted to the current version.

10

SmartParts

Nemetschek is introducing the SmartParts module in Allplan 2012. The SmartParts module contains new, parametric freeform objects with functions for the creation and editing of new, custom parametric objects.

New in version 2012

A SmartPart is a finished object that has its own behavioral logic. It also relates to the programming language used for the SmartParts. There are two different user groups for SmartParts. First, there are the classic users (majority of users), who use SmartParts as finished objects and want to use the intelligence and configuration objects programmed into the SmartPart; second there are users (minority of users) who are experienced programmers and want to adapt and improve existing SmartParts. The latter, smaller group of users develop (program) new SmartParts for themselves and/or others.

■■10.1 SmartParts module – basic information The main functions in the SmartParts module are found under CREATE and CHANGE. There are also additional functions that can be applied to SmartParts but are located in other modules, and functions that have been intentionally “hidden” because they are only needed to create new SmartParts and change existing ones in the programming.

SmartParts

Functions – importing and generating objects ƒƒ INSERT SMARTPART opens the file selection, via which you can load an existing SmartPart (*.smt file).

Insert SmartPart

398  10 SmartParts

Functions – freeform objects The freeform SmartParts for solids and surfaces provide you with a practically unlimited number of shapes. The perfect areas of use are in the garden or for simple “art objects”. You can define the size and subdivision in the properties. The shape can be changed by dragging the subdivision points either with an open PROPERTIES dialog box or by using the MODIFY SMARTPART USING HANDLES function. A movement in the Z direction is achieved with the Shift key pressed, otherwise the movement is in the X/Y direction. SmartPart freeform solid SmartPart freeform area

ƒƒ SMARTPART FREEFORM SOLID creates a new freeform solid. When the function is called, there is always a box with an edge length of 1.0 m on the crosshairs. ƒƒ SMARTPART FREEFORM AREA creates a new freeform 3D area. When the function is called, there is always a horizontal, square box with an edge length of 1.0 m on the crosshairs.

Functions – geometric basic objects Chapter 6.5.3, 3D modeling – basic functions, also lists geometric basic objects. In contrast to the objects below, however, these cannot be analyzed directly in reports, and their size cannot be changed after they have been created. All settings (geometry, unlinking) of the objects below can be checked and changed at any time. SmartPart cylinder SmartPart box

SmartPart cone

SmartPart ellipsoid

SmartPart prism

ƒƒ SMARTPART CYLINDER creates a cylinder with a diameter of 1.0 m and a height of 1.0 m. The default subdivision is 20. All values can be changed after placement. ƒƒ SMARTPART BOX creates a box with rounded edges and corners. The following values can be influenced in the box properties (CUBE dialog box): Length, width and height, radius of the corners (radius 0 = sharp edge) and unlinking (subdivision). ƒƒ SMARTPART CONE creates a truncated cone with a slanted top and bottom side. The following values and settings can be made in the cone properties: Bottom and top radius, bottom and top angle, height of the (truncated) cone, unlinking (subdivision) and whether a cone or a truncated cone is to be created. ƒƒ SMARTPART ELLIPSOID creates a spherical solid. The following settings can be made in the properties: Radius, height, unlinking (subdivision). Shells can be created using the FULL SPHERE/HEMISPHERE option. If the HEIGHT FOR RADIUS OF OF ELLIPSE option is created, a sphere is created. The solid’s surface is always split up in sphere type “Globe”. ƒƒ SMARTPART PRISM creates a prism with a diameter of 1.0 m, a height of 1.0 m and 10 corners. All values can be changed after placement. NOTE: If you want to directly influence the settings of a SmartPart when

you place it, you must keep the CTRL key pressed when you click the drop-in point. The object is then placed, and the PROPERTIES dialog box for the object opens immediately afterwards.

Modify SmartPart using handles

ƒƒ MODIFY SMARTPART USING HANDLES enables you to access the SmartPart handles. Depending on the type of SmartPart and its restrictions, you can carry out different

10.1 SmartParts module – basic information 399

actions. The number of handles differs. The function is also located on the shortcut menu for a SmartPart. NOTE: If no handles are defined in the SmartPart script, the following mes-

sage is displayed: “This SmartPart does not generate handles. Modify the parameters in the dialog box.”  In this case, dynamic changing of the size using handles is not possible.

Functions in the SmartPart shortcut menu ƒƒ As with most of the other components, SmartParts information can also be placed as text using the LABEL function. The usual three variants are available – simple label, label style and object label. Smart symbol is displayed as the object name in the LABEL dialog box. ƒƒ You can use the MODIFY SMARTPART INSTANCE’S ATTRIBUTES function to influence the behavior of SmartParts and assign further attributes to the object that are of interest for analysis or labeling. For example, you can use the CONSIDER object to define that the object automatically takes account of the floor covering thickness, and automatically sets the correct height in the animation and hidden-line image/section calculation.

Label

Modify SmartPart placement attributes

Other functions that can be applied to SmartParts As SmartParts work in a similar way to the smart symbols that have been used in Allplan for some time, some of the functions from the Smart Symbol module can be applied to SmartParts, albeit with restrictions. ƒƒ You can use the REPLACE SMART SYMBOL function to replace identical SmartParts. Only identical SmartParts are recognized. Objects that were changed and/or only placed on the drawing file at a later point, but are the same as the existing ones, cannot be recognized yet. ƒƒ The UNLINK SMART SYMBOL function splits smart symbols into the components that are currently visible in the active window. Either a link can be unlinked, or the smart symbol can be completely broken up (TOTAL). The layer assignment of the resulting elements can also be influenced. In the case of SmartParts, you must note the window in which the action is carried out, because SmartParts can also be completely unlinked. All the object intelligence is lost, and all that is left is a pure geometry in 2D or 3D. TIP: You can use the freeform solids to create practically any shape. If

these SmartParts are broken down into the 3D geometry with UNLINK SMART SYMBOL, objects are created that can be edited with the functions of the 3D MODELING module and e. g. can also serve as the basis for custom planes or facades.

Symbol

Replace Smart

Unlink smart symbol

400  10 SmartParts

Other SmartPart functions In addition to the functions directly visible in the SmartParts module, there are other functions, that were “hidden” because they are only needed to create new SmartParts or to change the SmartParts programming. These functions can be added to any toolbars using CUSTOMIZE (Additional tools with icon). The process for customizing is described in chapter 10.3.1, Extending the toolbars, and should only be carried out if SmartParts need to be created or the programming changed. Create SmartPart

Change SmartPart with Properties dialog box Update SmartPart

Modify SmartPart using script

ƒƒ CREATE SMARTPART starts the SmartPart Editor with the settings from the last edited script. You can either continue working on this script, or start a new one. Parameters REF_X, REF_Y and REF_Z are system-relevant parameters and are contained in each script (they cannot be deleted). After the editor is confirmed with OK, the SmartPart is on the crosshairs and can be placed. ƒƒ MODIFY SMARTPART WITH PROPERTIES DIALOG is used to call up the properties of a SmartPart. Alternatively, you can access the properties with a double click or by choosing PROPERTIES in the shortcut menu. ƒƒ UPDATE SMARTPART may be required if SmartParts were changed using RESIZE and unwanted effects are caused by this. The function generates the form again from the saved parameters. ƒƒ MODIFY SMARTPART USING SCRIPT is used to call up the script of an existing SmartPart. The interface of the SmartPart Editor is described in chapter 10.3.3, SmartPart Editor interface. This also provides examples of editing objects in the SmartPart Editor.

More tools SmartParts, like the customary smart symbols, can be defined so that the height is determined by the planes, for example, or the finish of rooms is taken into consideration. In addition, more information can be assigned to each SmartPart in attributes. The main functions are listed below. ƒƒ In HEIGHT SETUP, you can set the bottom level of the SmartPart in relation to the planes used at the site. As a result, it is possible to always place SmartParts for roofs at a particular distance from the roof plane, for example. ƒƒ LINK offers four components (room, floor, ceiling and roof covering) in order to set the SmartPart in relation to the components. If ROOM is set here, for example, the SmartPart appears as an equipment element in room analyses (e. g. room schedule). If the room is moved, all SmartParts linked to the room are automatically moved as well as with the label style. ƒƒ CONSIDER is used for the automatic adjustment of the height of a SmartPart in the animation and/or hidden-line image. In the design view, the equipment objects are aligned to the top/bottom level and in the anima-

10.3 New SmartParts – basic information 401

tion they are automatically moved up/down by the finish thickness. As a result, the display is always consistent. NOTE: The settings discussed here are the same as those for the customary

smart symbols.

■■10.2 Using SmartParts The use of simple SmartParts was discussed in chapter 6.4, SmartParts for furniture. Here, they related to simple pieces of furniture for which only the surface colors could be changed for the plan view and animation. The section below describes the import of an object with a few possible steps for modification. Just a few commands of the SmartPart programming language are described, in order to illustrate how to use the SmartPart ­Editor and how it is set up.

■■10.3 New SmartParts – basic information If you would like to find out more on the subject, see the Allplan help (SmartParts section in English only), and the service portal at http://www.allplan-connect.com.

10.3.1 Extending the toolbars For the creation or modification of SmartParts, you should add a few functions to the toolbars. You are advised to include these functions in the CREATE and CHANGE toolbars of the SmartParts modules as they then automatically also appear in the palette. Alter­ natively, you can create a separate toolbar for these functions. ZZ Menu option View → Toolbars → CUSTOMIZE

402  10 SmartParts

ZZ On the TOOLBARS tab, select the CREATE and CHANGE categories. The CREATE and CHANGE toolbars are displayed on the screen. ZZ Switch to the TOOLBARS tab and under Categories, select the ADDITIONAL TOOLS WITH ICON entry.

ZZ Drag the tools surrounded by a red frame to the CREATE toolbar, and those with a green frame to the CHANGE toolbar.

The tools are also automatically visible in the TOOLS palette and can be used.

10.3 New SmartParts – basic information 403

10.3.2 System structure of a SmartPart – script structure The various parts of the scripts are created using the integrated SmartPart Editor. Each script for a SmartPart consists of five parts. These are displayed on the individual tabs (Parameters, Master Script, Parameter Script, Dialog Script, 2D Script and 3D Script) in the editor. The editor also contains an Overview tab, which maps all the scripts, and another tab on which all the resources contained in the SmartPart are managed. The purpose of splitting the script into individual parts is to make it clearer. At runtime, the scripts are processed in a predefined sequence. The structure and hierarchy are illustrated in the overview graphic below showing the individual parts.

First, the defined parameters are loaded and internally copied to variables. In the next step, the master script is copied in front of all the other scripts. The parameter script extended by the master script is run first. This is followed either by the extended dialog script followed by a renewed run of the parameter script to validate the input values from the dialog, or directly by 2D and 3D script. The latter two scripts can be run either separately (default) or together. The resources shown adjacently in the diagram can be regarded as external and contain data that can be used in the dialog script, 2D and 3D script. The script is processed each time the SmartPart is changed in the dialog or by using ­handles. Depending on the complexity of the object and the computer capacity, limits in processing may be reached.

404  10 SmartParts

10.3.3 SmartPart Editor interface

Functions and tabs in the SmartPart Editor The top and right border contain all functions that are visible and can be used regardless of the tab selected. Reset

Open SmartPart Save SmartPart

ƒƒ RESET completely resets all the entries and enables you to start again with a completely empty shell for a new SmartPart. However, only parameters ref_s, ref_y and ref_z are reset. ƒƒ OPEN SMARTPART opens the file selection for loading an *.smt file. ƒƒ SAVE SMARTPART is used to save the current status of the SmartPart as an *.smt file. TIP: Save the interim steps so that you can continue to work with these if

problems occur. Lock SmartPart SmartPart settings Run script

ƒƒ LOCK SMARTPART password-protects the script against changes. ƒƒ The NAME input field is used to define the name of the object. The name can be labeled. ƒƒ In the SMARTPART SETTINGS, you can change various basic settings. ƒƒ RUN SCRIPT runs the currently visible part of the script. This function is ideal for testing individual tabs.

10.3 New SmartParts – basic information 405

The right-hand side contains the object preview. The dashed-line box shows the size of the reference box. The source can be one of nine predefined locations. Always make sure that the entire object is within the reference box. Detailed adjustments can be made using the values displayed bottom right. NOTE: If a complex SmartPart or several SmartParts are moved, the

dimension of the reference box on the crosshairs is displayed instead of the dimension of the SmartPart itself. If the reference box is not confi­ gured correctly, the displays may be inconsistent. ƒƒ The OVERVIEW tab displays the first part of all scripts. If the RUN function is selected, all scripts are run. ƒƒ The PARAMETERS tab displays all defined parameters. New parameters can be created, and existing ones deleted. Parameters can be arranged in groups and can contain different content (including attributes from Allplan) as variants. Parameters created once can be renamed. If descriptions were assigned, these automatically appear in the resources for translation and in the dialog. ƒƒ The MASTER-SCRIPT tab contains the part of the script that is to be copied in front of every other script at runtime. Definitions can be made and variables set that are required in all scripts. ƒƒ On the PARAMETER-SCRIPT tab, you should only use commands that change the parameter values. The parameter script is run in the background during entry of values via the dialog and changes using handles.  The definition of value ranges and interval values as well as checks on values should be carried out here. ƒƒ The DIALOG-SCRIPT tab is used to generate the graphical interface of the SmartPart Properties dialog box. As long as there is no script in this tab, or the tab is not active (ACTIVE CHECKBOX not selected), a standard dialog box is used that displays all parameters. ƒƒ The 2D-SCRIPT tab should only contain commands for generating the 2D display of the SmartPart. 3D transformations are not run in the 2D script. ƒƒ The 3D-SCRIPT tab should only contain commands for generating the 3D display of the SmartPart. ƒƒ All the files contained in the SmartPart are managed on the RESOURCES tab. Images, 2D data and 3D data for use in the scripts can be imported and managed. In the bottom area, languages can be added to the SmartPart. As soon as a new language is added, all terms from the active language (language in which Allplan was started) are copied to the new column. These can be directly translated, loaded or output.

Index

Symbols 3D PDF file 383

A Allplan Update 6 Anchor point 78 Animation 77 Architectural components 207, 277 ––area components 239 ––changing 225 ––chimney 245 ––column 244 ––corner window 208 ––door 208 ––facade 311 ––finish 281 ––flush pier 245 ––labeling 269 ––label style 270 ––linear components 198 ––lintel/header 245 ––modifying 195 ––niche 208 ––openings 207, 242, 243 ––railing 309 ––recess 242 ––roller blinds 245 ––roof covering 240 ––room 277 ––skylights 243 ––slab 239 ––slab foundation 239 ––smart window and door symbols 292 ––smart window sill symbol 293 ––stair 254 ––story 277 ––window 208 Architectural section 328 Area analysis 346 Area calculation 277, 280

Area style 146 Associative views 324 Attributes ––SmartPart 399 Auto-save 116

B Beam 200 Bitmap area 145 Box 398 Brackets 85 Building application 277, 280 Building application lists 344 Building model 132 Building structure 132 ––assigning levels 222 ––derived objects 324 ––Lists 31, 342, 355 ––Reports 342 ––roofscape 229, 233 ––section 324, 337 ––source drawing files 323, 324 ––Stack list 354 ––views 324 ––Wizard 134

C CAD-TAI ––project assignment 129 Change drawing file status 108 CINEMA 4D 176 Circle 143 Cone 398 Configuration ––Services 391 Customize 401 Custom layout 38 Custom NDW 37 Cylinder 398

D Data backup 395 Data management 48 Deriving ––sections 324 ––views 324 Dialog line 74, 88 Dimension line ––modifying 158 ––walls 268 DIN 277 277, 280, 344 Display ––stairs 259, 266 Display favorite 109 Display scale 59 Document legend 274 Document number 117 Document size 394 Draft 142, 146 Drawing files ––Change drawing file status 108 ––drawing file size 394 ––drawing file status 21 ––Open 20 ––source drawing files 323 ––Visibility 107 Drawing type 103, 110 Drop-in point 78 DXF/DWG ––exporting 174

E Edit text 153 Element info 117 Elements ––anchor point 78 ––brackets 85 ––drop-in point 78 ––group number 77 ––selecting 84 ––selection rectangle 84

408   

 Index

––sequence 76 ––surface elements 79 Elevation 154 Ellipse 147 Ellipsoid 398 Entries ––keyboard/mouse 69 Explode paragraph 153 Export ––3DS data 176 ––Cinema 4D 176 ––Rhino data 177 ––SketchUp data 176 ––STL data 176 ––U3D data 176 ––VRML file 176 Exporting ––3D PDF file 383 ––IFC data 176 ––NID files 369 ––PDF file 381

F Favorites ––facade 312 ––hidden line image 332 ––layout element 367 ––options 114 ––plane model 100 ––railing 310 ––Show/hide 109 Fileset structure 132 Filter 350 ––step-by-step 87 Filters ––wizard 86 Finish 277, 279 Floor area schedules 344, 346 Folder name 126 Font 152 Freeform area 398 Freeform solid 398

G Gauß-Krüger coordinates 182 Global point 89 Group number 77

H handles 308, 398 Hatching 144 Height setting ––assigning levels 222 ––association with roofs 229 ––components 191 ––list default planes 223

––roof covering 240 ––roofscape 233 Hidden line image 324, 358 Hidden line image on/off 59 Hotinfo 393 Hotline tools 393

I Image 352 Import ––Cinema 4D 176 ––Rhino data 176 ––Sketchup file 176 ––STL file 176 Importing ––IFC data 176 Initial settings ––Services 391 Installation ––hardware 2 ––Network 4 ––operating systems 2 ––Standalone 3 ––system paths 4 ––Updates 5, 6 ––Upgrades 5 ––Workgroup 4 Interface ––Customize 401

K Keyboard 69

L Label 269, 273, 282 ––document legend 270 ––elevation point 270 ––layout 367 Label style 270, 282 Language ––Services 391 Layer ––plot set 323 ––properties 76 Layers ––copying 104 ––modifiable 104 ––Visibility 64, 108 ––visible and frozen 104 Layout ––bitmap 368 ––color plot preview 111, 366 ––creating 371 ––draft view 111, 366 ––export 369 ––favorite 367

––Grayscale plot preview 111 ––grayscale preview 366 ––HPGL 368 ––import 369 ––label 367, 372 ––layer 367 ––layout attributes 366, 374 ––layout border 371 ––layout editor 365 ––layout element 366 ––move layout sheet 367 ––output on paper 377 ––output PDF file 381 ––plot 368 ––reduction 380 Layouts ––assigning layouts 33 ––color plot preview 65 ––draft view 65 ––grayscale plot preview 65 ––Layout Editor 19 Layout structure ––deleting 376 ––favorite 376 Leader 153 License management Services 391 Linear components 198 ––beam 200 ––strip foundation 200 ––wall 200 Line color 76 Line style 103 List 342 ––building structure 31

M Matrix 353 modify 308, 398 Modifying ––architectural components 195 ––planes 233 Mouse 69 ––button assignments 69 ––navigation mode 73

N Navigation modes ––camera 73 ––sphere 73 New features in V2011 ––hidden-line image favorites 332 ––layout preview 366 ––lock BS update 327 ––options 114 New in V2011 ––BS Update Lock 30

Index 409

New in V2012 ––Change drawing file status 108 ––SmartParts 306 NID files 369

O Office 46 Offset coordinates 126, 129 Openings 207, 290 Open on a project-specific basis 19 ––building structure 24 ––Drawing files 20 ––fileset structure 22 ––layout 32 Operation (keyboard/mouse) 69 Options 113 ––auto-save 116 ––element info 117 ––loading 114 ––pen colors 76 ––point snap 91 ––resetting 114 ––saving 114 ––searching in 114 ––sequence 76 ––storage locations 46, 116 ––track tracing 92

P Panning 59 Paragraph text 152 Path ––Office 46 ––Private 46 ––Project 46 Path settings 126 Pattern 144 PDF file 369 Pen thickness 76 Perspective 351 Plane model 96 ––roofscape 233 Planes ––assigning planes 100, 221 ––changing height 100 ––custom plane 229 ––dormer 230 ––Floor Manager 233 ––height association 192 ––list default planes 97, 222 ––modifying 233 ––roof plane 230 ––roofscape 100, 233, 360 Plot set 323 Point entry options 90 Point snap 74, 91 ––delta point 88

––global point 89 ––input fields 88 ––polar coordinates 88 ––track line 89 Polygonal input 79 Polyline 147 Prism 398 Private 46 Project 13, 46 ––project attributes 122 Project location 126 ProjectPilot 48, 388 Projects 49, 129 ––CAD-TAI project assignment 129 ––copying 127 ––creating a new project 17 ––currency 129 ––drawing symbol regulations 129 ––new project 17, 48, 125 ––offset coordinates 129 ––opening 17 ––project attributes 128 ––search path 129 ––structure 131 Properties ––construction lines 76 ––group number 77 ––line color 76 ––of layers 76 ––pen thickness 76 ––sequence 76

Q Quantity calculations 346 Quantity graphic 351

R Railing 309 Rectangle 142 Reference scale 110 Replace smart symbols 399 Report 342 Reports ––Filter 350 ––Image 352 ––Matrix 353 ––Perspective 351 ––Quantity graphic 351 ––User interaction 349 ––Zoom 349 Revised in V2011 ––chimney 245 ––facade 311 ––inputting surface elements 79 ––layout preview 366 ––options 91, 113 ––polygonal input 79

––railing 309 ––section in plan 258 Roof plane ––dormer 230 ––Floor Manager 233 Roofscape 100 ––plane model 233 Room 277 Room/story group 281

S Screen display ––color represents pen 76 Search ––options 114 Section 324, 328 ––individual steps 324 Section display 336 Section line 328 Selection rectangle 84 Sequence 76 Services ––data backup 395 ––hotinfo 393 ––hotline tools 393 Services application 391 Shortcut keys 66 Shortcuts 66, 74 Show/hide 109 ––Favorite 109 SmartPart ––Box 398 ––Cone 398 ––Consider 400 ––Create 400 ––Cylinder 398 ––Dialog 400 ––Editor interface 404 ––Ellipsoid 398 ––Freeform area 398 ––Freeform Solid 398 ––Handles 398 ––Insert 397 ––Link to 400 ––Modify script 400 ––Placement attributes 399 ––Prism 398 ––Properties 400 ––Replace 399 ––Sphere 398 ––Unlink 399 ––Update 400 SmartParts 307 ––Modify 308, 398 Smart symbol 290 ––Consider 400 ––Link to 400 Smart symbols 307

410   

 Index

Smart window and door symbols 292 Smart window sill symbol 293 Sphere 398 Spline 147 Stack list 354 Stair 254 ––modifying stairs 259 ––section in plan 258 Standard views 59 Storage location ––Office 46 ––Private 46 ––Project 46 Storage locations 45 Story 277 Strip foundation 200 Surface elements 79, 144, 194 Symbols 299, 307 ––Allplan Connect 299 System path 45

T Text 150, 153, 163, 269 Tool activation ––keyboard 74

––mouse 74 ––shortcut 74 ––terminating 75 ––wizard 74 Tools ––repeat 75 Tool termination 75 Track line 89 Track tracing 92 Track tracing options 90

U Undo 75 Unlink smart symbol 399 Update 5 Upgrade 5

V View 59 Viewports ––camera mode 73 ––display scale 59 ––hidden line image on/off 59 ––navigation mode 73 ––panning 58

––sphere mode 73 ––standard views 59 ––view 59 Views 324 ––associative views 324 ––individual steps 324 Visualization 77

W Wall 200 Window ––Layout 65, 111 Wizards 68

Z Zoom 349